Chevrolet - Civic - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Factory Workshop Manual Make Honda Model Civic Engine and year L4-1.8L (2006) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7 Immobilizer System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Alarm Module: Diagrams 191. Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit 219. Security Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is opened (latch released). - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed (latch pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations Antenna Control Module: Locations 104. Right C-pillar Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 16 Antenna Control Module: Service and Repair Antenna Module Replacement 1. Remove the right side C-pillar trim. 2. 2-door model: Remove the terminal cover (A). 2-door model 3. Disconnect the connectors (B) from the antenna module (C). 4. Remove the bolt and antenna module. 5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations 99. Behind Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 20 Navigation Module: Diagrams 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 21 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 22 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component location, 4-door, 2-door. Also review the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before doing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. - Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. - Do network in a dusty or dirty place. - Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work. - Do not touch the circuit board(s) with your bare hands. - Do not work with dirty hands. - Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable. - Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.) - Before replacing the navigation unit, make sure to remove the customer's navigation DVD, and their Audio CD, or PC Card. Remanufactured navigation units do not come with a navigation DVD. Re-install the customer's navigation DVD, audio CD, and audio PC Card into the new Remanufactured unit. If the navigation display won't open, manually remove the navigation DVD, Audio CD, and PC Card. 1. Make sure you have the 4-digit anti-theft code for the navigation system, then write down the radio station presets and XM radio channel presets. 2. Remove the meter inner visor. 3. Remove the center pocket hole lid and bolts, then pull out the center panel (A). 4. Disconnect the connectors (B), then remove the center panel. 5. Remove the screws, brackets (A), and the navigation unit (B) from the center panel (C). 6. Install the navigation unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure all connectors and the antenna lead are secure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the navigation unit, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 30 142. Rear of Roof (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 31 203. Moonroof Control Unit (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the moonroof is required when any of the following have occurred: - The moonroof was moved manually while the battery was dead or disconnected. - The moonroof motor was replaced with a new one. - Any of components related to the moonroof were replaced. Wind deflector - Moonroof glass - Moonroof seal - Moonroof glass bracket - Moonroof cables, etc. To reset the moonroof control unit, do these steps: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Press and hold the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Release the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times. 5. Press and hold the moonroof open switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully opened. 6. Press and hold the moonroof close switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully closed (tilted). 7. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the moonroof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 34 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit Input Test Moonroof Control Unit Input Test NOTE: If the moonroof works OK manually, but will not work in AUTO, or reverses frequently (obstacle detection), do the moonroof calibration before proceeding with the input test. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 35 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Check the ECM/PCM DTCs. If there is no DTC, jump the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (44P), and the moonroof control unit/motor 10P connector. 7. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the moonroof control unit/motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 40 Antilock Brake System Components 1. Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit 235. ABS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit > Page 43 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Control Module Pinout Values, ABS ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 44 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 45 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal - 4-door model 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the bracket. Installation - 4-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the bracket. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Removal - 2-door model Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 46 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the brackets (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the brackets. 5. Separate the bracket if necessary. Installation - 2-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the brackets. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module Relay > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 54 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Five -Terminal Type B Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B > Page 57 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally - Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 62 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 66 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 67 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 68 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 72 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 73 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 83 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 84 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 85 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 86 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 92 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 93 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 94 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 95 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 96 Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 97 66. Left Side of Dash 67. Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 98 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagrams 209. Gauge Control Module (Speedo) 236. Gauge Control Module (Tach) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 165. Fog Light Relay (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 106 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 107 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Q, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 108 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 115 Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 118 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 119 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 120 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 121 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 122 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 123 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 124 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 125 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 126 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 127 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 128 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 129 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 130 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 131 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 132 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 133 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 134 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 135 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 136 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 137 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 138 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 139 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 140 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 141 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 142 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 143 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 144 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 145 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Lights Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 146 Diagram 115-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 147 Diagram 115-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 148 Diagram 115-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 149 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the entry lights control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, Q, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 150 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 154 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 155 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Ohm, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 156 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 162 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 163 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 164 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 165 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 166 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 167 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 168 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 169 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 170 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 171 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 172 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 173 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 174 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 175 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 176 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 177 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 178 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 179 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 180 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 181 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 182 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 183 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 184 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 185 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 188 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 189 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 195 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 204 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 209 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 210 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 211 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 212 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 218 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 219 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 220 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 221 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 222 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 223 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 224 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 225 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 226 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 227 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 228 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 229 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 230 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 235 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 240 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 241 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 242 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 243 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 249 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 250 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 251 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 252 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 253 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 254 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 255 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 256 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 257 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 258 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 259 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 260 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 261 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 262 Engine Control Module: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 263 46. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 266 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 267 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 268 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 269 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 272 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 273 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 274 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 275 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 276 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 278 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 279 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 280 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 281 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 282 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 283 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 284 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 285 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 286 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 287 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 288 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 289 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 290 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 291 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 292 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 293 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 294 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 295 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 296 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 297 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 298 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 299 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 300 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 301 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 302 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 303 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 304 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 305 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 306 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 307 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 308 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 309 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 310 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 311 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 312 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 313 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 314 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 315 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 316 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44p) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 319 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 320 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 321 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 322 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 323 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 324 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 325 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 326 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Connectors NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the ECM/PCM. 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the cover (A). 3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (A). 4. Remove the expansion tank (B). Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C), and probe the terminals from the terminal side of the connectors. 5. Check the terminal test port size, and select the suitable pin probe (male). 6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 327 7. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the terminal you need to check. 8. Gently slide the pin probe (male) into the terminal test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals. NOTE: For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male). - To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement. - Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Replace ECM/PCM. - Reset ECM/PCM. - Update ECM/PCM. - Replace or clean the throttle body. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. Procedure 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 degree F (90 degree C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. 6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 330 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC reset, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. Scan Tool Clear Command If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure; CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete. DTC Clear 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM Reset 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 331 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 332 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required - Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200 * - Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 * - HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401 * - Available through the Honda tool and Equipment Program Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM or update the ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Updating the ECM/PCM NOTE: - Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully changed. - Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave the ignition switch ON. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. - If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or was flashed during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5 and clean the throttle body after updating the ECM/PCM. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the ECM/PCM. 7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on the screen. If you run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D4 or immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the ECM/PCM. Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. - Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). - Shut down the HDS. - Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. - Reboot the HDS. - Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 333 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. Substituting the ECM/PCM NOTE: Use this procedure when substituting a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 5 to 10, and clean the throttle body after substituting the ECM/PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then Select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Remove the cover (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 334 9. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 11. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 13. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 14. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. 15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 16. Enter the immobilizer code using the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you to start the engine. 17. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 18. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 335 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Replacement ECM/PCM Replacement NOTE: - Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version. - If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure. - During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then continue. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 through 10,19 through 24, and 27 through 29, and do the following procedures after replacing the ECM/PCM; Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter. - Replace the ATF (A/T model). - Clean the throttle body. 5. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 8. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life data from the original ECM/PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new ECM/PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 9. A/T model: Select the A/T system with the HDS. 10. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Remove the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 336 13. Remove the cover (A). 14. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 15. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: The ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 16. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 19. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 8, go to step 22 (A/T model) or step 25 (M/T model). Otherwise, go to step 20. 20. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 21. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 22. A/T model: If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 10, go to step 25. Otherwise go to step 23. 23. A/T model: Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. 24. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 25. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS. 26. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 27. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 7 clean the throttle body, then go to step 28. 28. If the READ DATA failed in step 8 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 21, replace the engine oil and engine oil filter, then go to step 29 (A/T model) or step 30 (M/T model). 29. If the READ DATA failed in step 10 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 26, replace the ATF, then go to step 30. 30. Select PGM-FI system and reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 337 32. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 33. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 34. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and or the navigation system (if equipped), then set the clock (if equipped). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 341 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 342 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 343 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 344 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 345 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 346 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 357 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 358 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 359 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 360 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 361 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 362 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 367 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground, then terminal No. 4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the No. 1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 370 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there continuity? YES - The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 371 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally-Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 381 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 387 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 388 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 389 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 390 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 391 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 392 92. Under Middle of Dash 112. In Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat Back Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 393 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 246. ODS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 394 250. SRS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 395 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the ODS Unit Check the ODS operation after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except ODS unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 5. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit". 5. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 10. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 396 sensors (if they were not replaced). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 11. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move it from these positions. 12. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 13. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 14. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 15. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 through 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (TO) is still more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 15. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) on a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 16. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 17. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 18. From the HDS Inspection Menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 19. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 20. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS unit is replaced, initialize the ODS by following the procedure. NOTE: A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a faulty ODS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select ODS INIT. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the ODS. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the ODS system fails to initialize after several attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and retry. If the ODS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the ODS unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 399 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console. 4. Disconnect the connectors and remove the Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against it's bracket before torquing the Torx bolt. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and seat belt buckle tensioner connector. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 400 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair ODS Unit Replacement ODS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector (A) and sensor connectors (B) from the ODS unit (C). 5. Remove the two nuts (D) and the ODS unit. Installation 1. Place the new ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two nuts (B), and connect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the ODS unit. 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the ODS unit. 7. After installing the ODS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 218. Remote Starting Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 408 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 409 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 416 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 417 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 418 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 419 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 420 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 421 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 422 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 430 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 431 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 432 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 440 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 441 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 446 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 447 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 448 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 449 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Power Window Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Resetting the Power Window Control Unit With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN Function Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit - Window run channel replacement or repair - while the power window timer is ON. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat step 4 - 7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Does AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN work? YES - Go back to step 1 (the Auto function has not been cleared, try again). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window control unit is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions. If the window still does network in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Testing and Inspection/Master Switch Input Test 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 452 Power Window Control Module: Programming and Relearning Power Window Control Unit Reset Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Window run channel replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit while the power window timer is ON. - Power window master switch replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O). 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. If they do not, go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 456 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 457 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 464 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 465 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations 173. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 469 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the trunk key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the UNLOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 473 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 474 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 475 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection Radio Remote Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly. 2. Remove the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Measure the resistance between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the radio remote switch. 5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the diode test is bad, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 476 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Radio Remote Switch Replacement 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the radio remote switch. 3. Install the radio remote switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 481 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 485 Heated Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 487 Heated Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 488 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 494 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 495 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 499 130. Driver's Dr. (Frt. Pass. Sim) DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si 137. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 500 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 199. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Driver's (DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si) 200. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (DX-G, LX, GX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 501 201. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) 202. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 7 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Passenger's Door 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 504 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door lock knob switch in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. [ ] : Left rear door 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 505 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Driver's door (4-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 22P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Driver's door (2-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 16P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Front passenger's door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 506 1. 4-door: Remove the front passenger's window switch. 2-door: Remove the passenger's window switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. 2. Check for continuity between the front passenger's power window switch 8P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the front passenger's window switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 510 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 511 57. Left Side of Dash 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 512 212. Power Mirror Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si; Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 513 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 514 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 515 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 516 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 520 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 521 106. Under Driver's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 522 70. Seat Position Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Moonroof - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 526 138. Front of Roof Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 527 204. Moonroof Switch (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 528 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 529 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 533 167. Middle of Trunk Lid (Canada; USA: DX) 168. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: LX; GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 534 169. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 535 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams 88. Trunk Latch Switch (USA: DX, LX; Canada; GX) 128. Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid/Latch Switch (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 536 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the trunk lid latch assembly (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 [No. 3] and No. 2 terminals. [ ] : With trunk release - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 541 48. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 544 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 545 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 546 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 547 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 548 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 549 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 550 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 551 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 552 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 553 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 554 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 555 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 556 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 557 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 558 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 559 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 560 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 561 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 562 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 563 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 564 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 565 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 566 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 567 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 568 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 569 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 570 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 571 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 572 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 573 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with the float in the down position and in the up position. NOTE: ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 577 75. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 578 146. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 579 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout in the insulator. Lift up the insulator cutout and measure the pedal height (B) at the middle of the left side center of the pedal pad (C) to the floor. Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T model: 153 mm (6.0 inch) A/T model: 158 mm (6 1/4 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Brake Pedal position Switch Clearance Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 580 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.03 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 587 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 588 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 597 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 598 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 599 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 600 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 601 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 602 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 603 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 604 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 610 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 611 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 612 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 613 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 614 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 615 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 616 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 617 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Antilock Brake System Components Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 629 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment 195. Under Left Rear of Vehicle (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 630 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 631 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 632 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Replacement 1. Release the holding of clamps (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the clips, the bolt, the O-ring (C), and the wheel sensor (D). 3. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring on reassembly. ^ Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. ^ If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing, it is faulty. 4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 644 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 650 112. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 651 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 655 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 656 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 657 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 662 VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 663 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 664 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 665 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams 12. Oil Pressure Switch 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 666 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair EOP Sensor Removal/Installation EOP Sensor Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the EOP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the bracket (B), and the EOP sensor (C). 4. Install the EOP sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation > Page 669 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 673 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 177. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 681 63. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (EX, GX, Si; Canada: LX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 682 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the outside air temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 683 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the receiver/dryer desiccant bracket [from the A/C condenser] . [ ] : 2-door 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations 71. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 688 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 689 103. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 690 50. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 4. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the evaporator temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 189. Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 700 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 701 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 705 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 706 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 710 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 711 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. - If no problem is found, go to step 3. - If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear cushion. 5. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member (A). 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B). 8. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 9. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 712 - a short in the ORN (2-door: PUR) wire to ground. - an open in the ORN (2-door: PUR) or LT GRN (2-door: ORN) wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. 12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 13. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F" with the float at F. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate "F", replace the gauge assembly. - If the gauge is OK, the test is complete. NOTE: - The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. - Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 713 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 717 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 718 176. Ignition Key Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 719 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 724 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 41. Transmission Housing (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 39. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 738 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 739 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 740 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 741 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 742 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 743 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 744 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 745 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: Recalls Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 755 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 756 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 757 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 758 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 759 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 760 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 761 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 762 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 767 Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 768 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 769 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Exterior Lights - Component Location Index 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 773 208. Combination Light Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 774 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 775 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 779 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 780 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 166. Fog Light Switch (2-door) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 787 85. Middle of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 788 167. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 789 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 790 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 794 58. Steering Wheel (Lower Access Panel Removed) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 795 10. Horn Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 796 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. 10 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 20P connector to body ground. The horn should sound. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - MICU. - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal (B) from the cable reel (C). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the 1P connector to body ground. - If the horn sounds, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: Cable reel. - An open in the wire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Lights - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 800 Interior Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 801 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 810 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 811 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 814 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 815 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 819 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 820 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 821 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 822 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 829 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 830 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 831 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 834 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 835 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 836 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 840 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 843 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 847 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 848 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 849 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 850 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 851 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 855 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 859 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 860 Electric Load Sensor: Service and Repair ELD Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Remove the fuses (A). 4. Using two flat-tip screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the fuse/relay box base (B) from the fuse/relay box housing (C). NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or damaged. 5. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 861 6. Turn the housing over again, then remove the ELD (A). 7. Install the ELD in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 868 196. Under Middle Rear of Vehicle DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 869 118. FTP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 870 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 871 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the hose (B), and remove the FTP sensor(C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 875 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 876 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 877 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 878 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 882 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 885 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 889 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 890 121. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 891 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 892 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 896 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 905 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 906 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 907 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 913 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 914 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 915 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 918 25. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 919 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 139. A/F Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 149. HO2S, Secondary (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor > Page 922 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is located on the TWC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on S6176, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 925 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 929 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 930 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 931 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 932 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 933 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 934 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 938 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 942 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 943 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 944 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 945 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 946 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 955 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 960 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 961 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 964 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 965 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 969 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 970 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 971 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 972 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 979 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 984 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 985 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 986 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 989 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 990 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 991 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 995 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 996 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 997 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 998 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 999 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1008 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1009 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1010 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1016 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1018 SRS - Component Location Index 119. Left Side of Floor (Right Similar) (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1019 122. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (2-door) 123. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1020 147. Left C-pillar (4-door) 178. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1021 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 57. Impact Sensor, Left Front 58. Impact Sensor, Right Front 78. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Left Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1022 79. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Right 157. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Left 158. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the front seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill inner trim: - 2-door - 4-door 5. Remove the lower B-pillar lower trim panel. 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the side impact sensor (first). 7. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the side impact sensor (first) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (first) with the Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (first). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor (first) confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 1025 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the rear seat and seat side holster. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor second). 5. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor second) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor second) with the Torx bolt (A) then connect floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor second). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor second), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 1026 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Replacement Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors, and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Remove the front inner fender: - 2-door - 4-door 4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A). Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the front impact sensor (C). Discard the bolt. Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index 120. Middle of Floor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 1030 152. Rear Safing Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 1031 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Safing Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors. 3. Remove the rear seat. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the rear safing sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the rear safing sensor (B). Installation 1. Install the new rear safing sensor (A) with a Torx bolt (B) then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (C) to the rear safing sensor. 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. Reinstall all removed parts. 4. After installing the rear sating sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 108. Under Driver's Seat 110. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1035 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 125. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 126. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1044 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1045 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1046 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1047 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1048 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1049 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1050 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1055 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1056 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1057 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 1067 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1073 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1074 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1075 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1076 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1077 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1078 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1079 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 1084 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1089 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1090 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1091 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 1101 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1107 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1108 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1109 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1110 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1111 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1112 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 1113 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1118 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1119 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 1120 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Component Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1127 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1128 113. Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) 114. Right Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1129 111. Under Front Passenger's Seat (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams 94. Weight Sensor, Inner Side Front Passenger's (2-door) 133. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Inner Side) (4-door) 134. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Outer Side) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 135. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Inner Side) (4-door) 136. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Outer Side) (4-door) 137. Weight Sensor, Outer Side Front Passenger's (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Check the driver's seat position after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 5. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR." NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does network as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the ODS Unit Calibrating the ODS Unit When you replace the passenger's weight sensors or ODS unit, calibrate the ODS. While calibrating the ODS unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except, test driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move the seat from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 5. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select "SWS INIT," and follow the prompts until the initialization operation has been completed. 6. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 7. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the HDS connected and in the Misc Menu. 8. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 9. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 10. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale M) and the HDS (T) with the formula shown. Variance = (T)-(M)<±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured on the scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then go to step 11. 11. Remove the weight from the front passenger's seat. 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1135 - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. 14. Measure and note the prepared weight (M1) again with a scale. 15. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = (T1) - (M1 )< ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this procedure), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1136 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement 4-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly section. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx E18 socket, remove the Torx nuts (A) attaching the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the seat weight sensor, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors under the seat track. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1137 2. Apply multipurpose grease to the spring washer and bushing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1138 3. Insert a 3.5 mm center punch into the hole in the cushion frame to position the spring washers, when tightening the Torx nuts (A). Begin with the ■and tighten them in crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 4. Using the pin driver to position the spring washers, torque the Torx nuts in the sequence shown in two or more steps. 5. Make sure the gap between the spring washer (A) and the seat track (B) is more than 4 mm, as shown. 6. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 7. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 9. Calibrate the ODS unit. 10. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come for about 6 seconds and then go off, 2-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1139 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx T27 bit, remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts (A) that attach the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the ODS unit harness, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Make sure both of the hooks (A) on the seat track are properly secured to the front bracket (B). If the hooks are not properly secured, the seat weight sensors will not perform properly. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors with tamper-resistant Torx bolts (C) under the seat track. 2. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 3. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Calibrate the ODS unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come ON for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 1140 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of SRS section. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness so it does not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1146 45. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1147 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install the clutch interlock switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1148 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: Check the clutch pedal position switch. Check the clutch interlock switch. The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Lift up the carpet (A). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side of the pedal pad (B). 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H), and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 157 mm (6.18 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 77 mm (3.03 inch) 4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut. 5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch pedal. 6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 7. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut. 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 9. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 10. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully pressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 11. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1162 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1163 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1164 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 1173 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1177 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1181 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1182 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1183 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1184 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1185 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1190 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1191 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 1194 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1198 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1199 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1209 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1210 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1211 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1216 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222 126. Driver's Door (2-door) 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1223 134. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) (2-door Similar) 135. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1224 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 194. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's 195. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1225 196. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1226 249. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1229 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1230 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1231 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the master switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1232 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1233 5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. 2-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1234 2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1235 5. Reconnect the 16P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1236 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1237 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1240 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1241 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1242 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1243 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1248 93. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1249 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the washer reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals in each float position. - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1254 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1258 197. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1259 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1260 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Alignment: Customer Interest Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1270 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1271 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1272 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1273 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1274 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1275 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1280 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1281 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1282 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1283 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1284 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1285 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1286 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1287 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1288 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1294 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1295 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1296 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1297 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1298 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1299 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1304 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1305 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1306 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1307 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1308 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1309 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1310 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1311 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1312 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1313 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1314 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1315 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1316 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1317 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1318 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1319 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1320 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1321 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1322 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1323 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1324 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1325 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1326 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1327 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1328 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1329 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1330 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1331 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1332 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1333 During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1334 NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1335 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1336 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1337 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1338 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1339 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1340 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1341 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1342 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1343 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1344 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1345 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1346 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1347 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1348 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1349 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1350 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Tire size: Front/Rear: DX model: P195/65R 15 89H Except DX model: P205/55R 16 89H Tire Pressure: Front/Rear: DX model ...................................................................................................................................................... 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), cold Except DX model .......................................................................................................................................... 220 kpa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi), cold Caster angle ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 7° 00' ± 1° Camber angle: Front .................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 0° 00' ± 30' (Maximum difference between the front right and left side: 0° 35') Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... -1° 30' +1° 05'/-0° 45' The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 25' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50' by replacing both damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. Front toe-in .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................... 0 ± 2 mm (0 ± 0.08 inch) Rear toe-in ........................................................................................................................................... ..................... 2 +2/-1 mm (0.08 +0.08/-0.04 inch) Turning Angle Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1351 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments are related to each other. For example, when you adjust camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber or toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: Front/Rear: DX model: P195/65R 15 89H Except DX model: P205/55R 16 89H Tire Pressure: Front/Rear: DX model: 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), cold Except DX model: 220 kpa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi), cold 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: 7° 00' ± 1° ^ If the measurement is within specifications, measure the camber angle. ^ If the measurement is not within specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: Front: 0° 00' ± 30' (Maximum difference between the front right and left side: 0° 35') Rear: -1° 30' +1° 05'/-0° 45' ^ If the measurement for the front camber is outside the specification, go to front camber adjustment. ^ If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Camber Adjustment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1352 The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or both of the damper pinch bolts with a smaller diameter adjusting bolt. The difference between the adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows for a small range of adjustment. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Loosen the flange bolts (A), and adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. 4. Tighten the self-locking nuts to the specified torque. 5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. 6. Measure the camber angle. ^ If the measurement is within specification, measure the toe-in. ^ If the measurement is not within specification, go to step 7. 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 8. Remove the front wheels. 9. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. NOTE: The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 25' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50' by replacing both damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. 10. Tighten the new self-locking nuts to the specified torque value. 11. Install the front wheels. 12. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. 13. Measure the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within specification, repeat steps 7 through 12 to readjust the camber angle. if the camber measurement is correct, measure toe-in, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1353 Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a steering wheel holder tool. 2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe-in: 0 ± 2 mm (0 ± 0.08 inch) ^ If adjustment is required, go to step 3. ^ If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe is within specifications. 4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. Reposition the rack-end boot if it is twisted or displaced. 5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Check the toe. Rear toe-in: 2 +2/-1 mm (0.08 +0.08/-0.04 inch) ^ If adjustment is required, go to step 3. ^ If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. 3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the trailing arm (B), and remove the self-locking nut (C). 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has been loosened. Reassemble the adjust bolt and complete with the eccentric facing up. 5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct, 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut while holding the adjusting bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1354 Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure ................................................................................................................................................. 380 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1359 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1360 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B - Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Without load conditions: Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T............................................................................................................ ..........................................................................................................670 ± 50 rpm A/T........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .670 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada M/T.......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T...................................................... .................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: Idle speed should be: M/T.................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T................................ .......................................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1364 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1365 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Apply the parking brake (check the headlight OFF). 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T 670 ± 50 rpm A/T 670 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) Canada M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam). Idle speed should be: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. If the idle speed is still not within specification, go to symptom troubleshooting. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace the air cleaner element. NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. If the maintenance minder indicated that air cleaner element replacement was needed, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not indicate that air cleaner element replacement was needed, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1374 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1375 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Electrode Gap Standard (New)............................................................................................................ ...........................................................1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1387 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque.................................................................................................................................................. ......................................25 N.m (2.5 kgf.cm, 18 lbf.ft) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1388 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1389 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner. NOTE: Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this will damage the electrode. - Use a chemical cleaner such as Carb Spray to clean contamination on the electrode. - When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the electrode. 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug gap is out of specification. Use only the listed spark plugs. NOTE: Do not adjust the gap (B) of iridium tip plugs. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1390 4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to 25 N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). If you replaced the spark plug by the maintenance minder requirement, reset the maintenance minder. If the maintenance minder did not require you, but you replaced the spark plug, go to step 5. 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 8. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 9. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 10. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1394 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. 7. Remove the four ignition coils. 8. Remove the four spark plugs. 9. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. 10. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 880 kPa (9.0 kgf/cm2, 128 psi) 11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 12. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1398 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 3. Select the correct thickness. feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1399 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Tighten the locknut. Specified Torque: 7 x 0.75 mm 14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10 ft. lbs.) 8. Recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 10. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 12. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1400 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 14. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 15. Install the cylinder head cover. 16. If the maintenance minder required to adjust the valve clearance, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to adjust the valve clearance, go to step 17. 17. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 20. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 21. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 22. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM 06-059 July 20, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Buzzing From the Engine at Low RPM (Supersedes 06-059, dated November 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. SYMPTOM There is buzzing from the engine under light throttle (1,300 to 1,700 rpm) or at idle while in gear. PROBABLE CAUSE The drive belt layout allows drive belt tensioner noise to be heard in the passenger compartment. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a longer, re-routed drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Belt Kit: P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 118130 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 56992-RNA-A01 H/C 8051104 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 04501 Template ID: 06-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM > Page 1409 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the original drive belt: ^ Refer to page 4-40 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Removal/Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 2. Install the new drive belt, and route it as shown. NOTE: Use an appropriate tool for added leverage when setting the wrench on the auto-tensioner. The tensioner is hydraulic and should be moved slowly to relieve pressure on the belt. Applying excessive force to the tensioner can cause breakage. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM 06-059 July 20, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Buzzing From the Engine at Low RPM (Supersedes 06-059, dated November 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. SYMPTOM There is buzzing from the engine under light throttle (1,300 to 1,700 rpm) or at idle while in gear. PROBABLE CAUSE The drive belt layout allows drive belt tensioner noise to be heard in the passenger compartment. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a longer, re-routed drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Belt Kit: P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 118130 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 56992-RNA-A01 H/C 8051104 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 04501 Template ID: 06-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM > Page 1415 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the original drive belt: ^ Refer to page 4-40 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Removal/Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 2. Install the new drive belt, and route it as shown. NOTE: Use an appropriate tool for added leverage when setting the wrench on the auto-tensioner. The tensioner is hydraulic and should be moved slowly to relieve pressure on the belt. Applying excessive force to the tensioner can cause breakage. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1416 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Inspection 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it. 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the drive belt. After you inspected or replaced the drive belt, go to step 3. 3. If the maintenance minder required to inspect the drive belt, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to inspect the drive belt, go to step 4. 4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1417 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Removal/Installation 1. Set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly. 2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair Drive Belt: Electrical / Mechanical Repair Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair > Page 1420 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair > Page 1421 Drive Belt: Aftermarket Tools Honda Serpentine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 Honda serpentine belt wrench equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point secured sockets, for engagement every 30 degrees. Ideal for strong tensioners used on 2006 and newer civics. - Lightweight and Slim design - Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments - Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace the air cleaner element. NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. If the maintenance minder indicated that air cleaner element replacement was needed, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not indicate that air cleaner element replacement was needed, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1430 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement 1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on each side, then let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A) from the evaporator. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator. 5. If the maintenance minder required to replace the dust and pollen filter, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the dust and pollen filter, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Filter Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the ATF warmer hose (A) from the ATF filter (B). 3. Remove the ATF filter holder (C). 4. Remove the bolt (D) securing the ATF inlet line (E). 5. Remove the joint bolt (F) from the ATF inlet line. 6. Disconnect the ATF filter from the ATF warmer hose (G), and replace it with new one. 7. Slide the ATF warmer hose on the new ATF filter until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the hose with the clip (H) at 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 inch) (I) from the filter housing. 8. Install the ATF filter and ATF inlet line/hose with the joint bolt and new sealing washers (J). 9. Secure the ATF filter with the ATF filter holder and the bolt. 10. Slide the ATF warmer hose on the ATF filter until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the hose with the clip (K) at 6-8 mm (0.24-0.31 inch) (L) from the filter housing. 11. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1438 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1439 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine. 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the oil pan, then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 4. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1443 6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the oil pan, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if mark V is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark VVVV comes around to the bottom. 7. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks Technical Service Bulletin # 06-020 Date: 070406 Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks 06-020 April 6, 2007 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Engine Oil Leaks and Power Steering Fluid Leak (Supersedes 06-020, dated June 20, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bars) SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil, or the power steering inlet pipe leaks fluid. PROBABLE CAUSE Some engine block sealing bolts may have been mismanufactured, causing the engine oil to leak when the engine is running. The power steering inlet pipe may have been mismanufactured, causing a power steering leak. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected engine block sealing bolt(s) and washer(s), and/or replace the power steering pump inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1456 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 111 07-RNA-A00, H/C 8160657 (Repair Procedures A and B) P/N 11106-RNA-A00, H/C 8160640 (Repair Procedures C and D) P/N 56123-RNA-A01, H/C 8051088 (Repair Procedure E) Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 05101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS The oil leaks can be in up to these five places: ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the timing chain end of the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1457 ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the transmission end of the engine. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the alternator. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1458 ^ The inlet pipe on the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1459 Inspect the leaking area(s), then use the chart to determine the appropriate repair procedures. NOTE: The sealing bolts leak very little oil so you can miss the oil leak if you don't look carefully. Often the oil runs down the engine and accumulates in other places, leading to misdiagnosis and failure to repair the leak. Disclaimer Repair Procedure A REPAIR PROCEDURE A - REPLACE THE 24-MM SEALING BOLT ON THE TIMING CHAIN END OF THE ENGINE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the right front tire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1460 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. WITH A/C 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley: ^ Refer to page 6-10 of the 2006-07 Civic Service Manual, or Online, enter keyword PULLEY, then select Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1461 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner assembly, and store it vertically to prevent oil leakage that may change the dampening specification. 8. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 9. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 10. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 11. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 60 N.m (45 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the drive belt auto tensioner, the water pump pulley, and the drive belt in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: *^ Use a new bolt to install the drive belt auto tensioner. ^ The bolt is located in a difficult location. Use Snap-on 8 mm hex socket (T/N FAM8E) and 3/8 flex ratchet torque wrench (T/N QD2FR75), or equivalent, to properly torque the bolt.* Repair Procedure B REPAIR PROCEDURE B - REPLACE THE 24-MM BOLT ON THE TRANSMISSION END OF THE ENGINE NOTE: Because it is difficult to determine if the transmission end crankshaft oil seal or the sealing bolt is causing the leak, replace both parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1462 1. M/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 13-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Manual Transmission Removal from the list. A/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 14-236 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Automatic Transmission Removal from the list. 2. M/T models: Remove the pressure plate, the clutch disc, and the flywheel. ^ Refer to page 12-17 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PRESS PLATE and select Clutch Replacement from the list. A/T models: Remove the drive plate. ^ Refer to page 14-256 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE PLATE and select Drive Plate Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ If you can see the leak, mark the location with a paint marker before removing the seal. ^ Remove the seal: - Use a hammer to firmly tap a small, 4 x 20-mm Phillips-head sheet metal screw into the metal part of the seal. If you marked the leak location, make sure you tap the screw into the seal directly across from the paint mark. - Use a cordless screwdriver or another suitable tool to firmly drive the screw into the oil seal so it won't come out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1463 - Use a pair of diagonal cutters to grip the screw under its head. While carefully prying up with the cutters, grab the screw with your other hand and gently pull out the seal. - Slip the seal (with the screw attached) into a resealable plastic bag. Avoid touching any surfaces that may have contamination on them. - Tag the plastic bag, and set it on the warranty parts shelf. 4. Clean the oil off the engine. 5. Install a new transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ Refer to page 7-33 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter the keywords TRANS SEAL and select Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - in car from the list. 6. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a to3thbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). 10. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to page 13-13 (M/T models), or 14-246 (A/T models) of the service manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1464 ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS INSTALL, and select Manual Transmission Installation (M/T models) or Automatic Transmission Installation (A/T models) from the list. Repair Procedure C REPAIR PROCEDURE C - REPLACE THE 20-MM SEALING BOLT BEHIND THE ALTERNATOR 1. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the alternator. Do not disconnect its electrical connections, or damage the wires: ^ Refer to page 4-44 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT, and select Alternator Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the EGR pipe from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the EGR pipe and thermostat housing from the cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the water pipe, then lower it so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 7. Remove the original sealing bolt and its washer. 8. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 9. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 10. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 12. Refill the radiator, then bleed the cooling system. Repair Procedure D REPAIR PROCEDURE D - REPLACE THE 20-MM BOLT BEHIND THE POWER STEERING PUMP Verify if the oil leak is from the oil sealing bolt or the power steering system: ^ Oil leaks from the 20-mm sealing bolt tend to collect on the lower engine block and oil pan. ^ Oil leaks from the right rear cover of the power steering pump tend to collect on the pump, but not on the pump inlet pipe. ^ Oil leaks from the power steering pump inlet pipe tend to collect on the inlet pipe, but are not found on the right rear cover of the power steering pump. If the power steering system is leaking from the inlet pipe area, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK. For other power steering leaks, refer to the service manual. 1. Remove the cowl cover. ^ Refer to page 20-229 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword COWL, then select Cowl Cover Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the drive belt: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1465 ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 3. Disconnect the power steering pump inlet hose from its holder on the right inner strut tower. 4. Remove the pump outlet hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1466 5. Remove the two power steering pump mounting bolts, then lower the pump so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 6. Remove and discard the original sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-if). 10. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Repair Procedure E REPAIR PROCEDURE E - POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK NOTE: During an engine oil leak inspection, if you discover the power steering pump is leaking from the inlet pipe area, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. 1. Drain the fluid from the power steering reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1467 2. Squeeze the spring clamp, and slide it back on the pump inlet hose so it clears the reservoir spigot. 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 4. Place a drain pan under the power steering reservoir. 5. Remove the 10-mm bolt that attaches the inlet pipe to the power steering pump. 6. Lower the vehicle, then remove the pump inlet hose from the reservoir. Remove the pump inlet hose and inlet pipe from the vehicle. *7. On your workbench, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp with new parts. NOTE: The pump inlet hose is shown attached to the power steering pump to show the proper position of the clamp. Position the clamp directly in front of the ridge on the inlet pipe before installation. It is easier to set the clamp before installation.* 8. Attach the pump inlet hose to the reservoir. 9. Install the inlet pipe on the power steering pump. ^ Raise the vehicle. * ^ Install a new 0-ring on the inlet pipe. ^ Coat the 0-ring with clean power steering fluid.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1468 10. Install the 10-mm bolt. Torque the 10-mm bolt to 10 N.m (8 lb-ft). 11. Lower the vehicle, then fill the reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks Technical Service Bulletin # 06-020 Date: 070406 Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks 06-020 April 6, 2007 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Engine Oil Leaks and Power Steering Fluid Leak (Supersedes 06-020, dated June 20, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bars) SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil, or the power steering inlet pipe leaks fluid. PROBABLE CAUSE Some engine block sealing bolts may have been mismanufactured, causing the engine oil to leak when the engine is running. The power steering inlet pipe may have been mismanufactured, causing a power steering leak. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected engine block sealing bolt(s) and washer(s), and/or replace the power steering pump inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1474 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 111 07-RNA-A00, H/C 8160657 (Repair Procedures A and B) P/N 11106-RNA-A00, H/C 8160640 (Repair Procedures C and D) P/N 56123-RNA-A01, H/C 8051088 (Repair Procedure E) Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 05101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS The oil leaks can be in up to these five places: ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the timing chain end of the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1475 ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the transmission end of the engine. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the alternator. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1476 ^ The inlet pipe on the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1477 Inspect the leaking area(s), then use the chart to determine the appropriate repair procedures. NOTE: The sealing bolts leak very little oil so you can miss the oil leak if you don't look carefully. Often the oil runs down the engine and accumulates in other places, leading to misdiagnosis and failure to repair the leak. Disclaimer Repair Procedure A REPAIR PROCEDURE A - REPLACE THE 24-MM SEALING BOLT ON THE TIMING CHAIN END OF THE ENGINE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the right front tire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1478 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. WITH A/C 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley: ^ Refer to page 6-10 of the 2006-07 Civic Service Manual, or Online, enter keyword PULLEY, then select Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1479 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner assembly, and store it vertically to prevent oil leakage that may change the dampening specification. 8. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 9. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 10. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 11. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 60 N.m (45 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the drive belt auto tensioner, the water pump pulley, and the drive belt in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: *^ Use a new bolt to install the drive belt auto tensioner. ^ The bolt is located in a difficult location. Use Snap-on 8 mm hex socket (T/N FAM8E) and 3/8 flex ratchet torque wrench (T/N QD2FR75), or equivalent, to properly torque the bolt.* Repair Procedure B REPAIR PROCEDURE B - REPLACE THE 24-MM BOLT ON THE TRANSMISSION END OF THE ENGINE NOTE: Because it is difficult to determine if the transmission end crankshaft oil seal or the sealing bolt is causing the leak, replace both parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1480 1. M/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 13-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Manual Transmission Removal from the list. A/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 14-236 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Automatic Transmission Removal from the list. 2. M/T models: Remove the pressure plate, the clutch disc, and the flywheel. ^ Refer to page 12-17 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PRESS PLATE and select Clutch Replacement from the list. A/T models: Remove the drive plate. ^ Refer to page 14-256 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE PLATE and select Drive Plate Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ If you can see the leak, mark the location with a paint marker before removing the seal. ^ Remove the seal: - Use a hammer to firmly tap a small, 4 x 20-mm Phillips-head sheet metal screw into the metal part of the seal. If you marked the leak location, make sure you tap the screw into the seal directly across from the paint mark. - Use a cordless screwdriver or another suitable tool to firmly drive the screw into the oil seal so it won't come out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1481 - Use a pair of diagonal cutters to grip the screw under its head. While carefully prying up with the cutters, grab the screw with your other hand and gently pull out the seal. - Slip the seal (with the screw attached) into a resealable plastic bag. Avoid touching any surfaces that may have contamination on them. - Tag the plastic bag, and set it on the warranty parts shelf. 4. Clean the oil off the engine. 5. Install a new transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ Refer to page 7-33 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter the keywords TRANS SEAL and select Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - in car from the list. 6. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a to3thbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). 10. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to page 13-13 (M/T models), or 14-246 (A/T models) of the service manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1482 ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS INSTALL, and select Manual Transmission Installation (M/T models) or Automatic Transmission Installation (A/T models) from the list. Repair Procedure C REPAIR PROCEDURE C - REPLACE THE 20-MM SEALING BOLT BEHIND THE ALTERNATOR 1. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the alternator. Do not disconnect its electrical connections, or damage the wires: ^ Refer to page 4-44 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT, and select Alternator Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the EGR pipe from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the EGR pipe and thermostat housing from the cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the water pipe, then lower it so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 7. Remove the original sealing bolt and its washer. 8. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 9. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 10. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 12. Refill the radiator, then bleed the cooling system. Repair Procedure D REPAIR PROCEDURE D - REPLACE THE 20-MM BOLT BEHIND THE POWER STEERING PUMP Verify if the oil leak is from the oil sealing bolt or the power steering system: ^ Oil leaks from the 20-mm sealing bolt tend to collect on the lower engine block and oil pan. ^ Oil leaks from the right rear cover of the power steering pump tend to collect on the pump, but not on the pump inlet pipe. ^ Oil leaks from the power steering pump inlet pipe tend to collect on the inlet pipe, but are not found on the right rear cover of the power steering pump. If the power steering system is leaking from the inlet pipe area, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK. For other power steering leaks, refer to the service manual. 1. Remove the cowl cover. ^ Refer to page 20-229 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword COWL, then select Cowl Cover Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the drive belt: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1483 ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 3. Disconnect the power steering pump inlet hose from its holder on the right inner strut tower. 4. Remove the pump outlet hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1484 5. Remove the two power steering pump mounting bolts, then lower the pump so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 6. Remove and discard the original sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-if). 10. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Repair Procedure E REPAIR PROCEDURE E - POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK NOTE: During an engine oil leak inspection, if you discover the power steering pump is leaking from the inlet pipe area, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. 1. Drain the fluid from the power steering reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1485 2. Squeeze the spring clamp, and slide it back on the pump inlet hose so it clears the reservoir spigot. 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 4. Place a drain pan under the power steering reservoir. 5. Remove the 10-mm bolt that attaches the inlet pipe to the power steering pump. 6. Lower the vehicle, then remove the pump inlet hose from the reservoir. Remove the pump inlet hose and inlet pipe from the vehicle. *7. On your workbench, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp with new parts. NOTE: The pump inlet hose is shown attached to the power steering pump to show the proper position of the clamp. Position the clamp directly in front of the ridge on the inlet pipe before installation. It is easier to set the clamp before installation.* 8. Attach the pump inlet hose to the reservoir. 9. Install the inlet pipe on the power steering pump. ^ Raise the vehicle. * ^ Install a new 0-ring on the inlet pipe. ^ Coat the 0-ring with clean power steering fluid.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 1486 10. Install the 10-mm bolt. Torque the 10-mm bolt to 10 N.m (8 lb-ft). 11. Lower the vehicle, then fill the reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1487 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Lower Radiator Hose Removal and Installation Removal 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (A), radiator, and lower radiator hose. 3. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick connector, and remove it from the radiator. Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. 4. Remove the clamp (C) from both ends of the lower radiator hose, and remove them from the thermostat and quick connector. Installation 1. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring are cracked or damaged, replace the connector. 2. Make sure the set ring is in place inside the quick connector. If the set ring is off the connector, replace the quick connector. 3. Replace the O-ring (C) in the quick connector. 4. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock to the connector, slide it straight down along the groove. 5. Install a new lower radiator hose on the quick connector, and install the clamp. 6. Clean the connecting surface of the radiator (E), then apply clean engine coolant around the connecting surface. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1491 7. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick connector (B) onto the radiator until you hear it click. 8. Install the new lower radiator hose on the thermostat, and install the clamp. 9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE SYSTEM FLUID TYPE (INCLUDES ABS LINE) Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications CLUTCH LINE FLUID TYPE Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITIES US - DX, EX, LX AFTER COOLANT CHANGE *1 M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 5.2 liters (1.37 US gal) A/T .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ 5.5 liters (1.45 US gal) AFTER ENGINE OVERHAUL M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 6.5 liters (1.72 US gal) A/T .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ 7.1 liters (1.88 US gal) *1 = Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine. Reserve Tank capacity = 0.4 liters (0.11 US gal) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1503 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT TYPE Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Premixing is not required. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1504 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and MAX marks, then inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1505 Coolant: Service and Repair Coolant Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 4. Remove the drain bolt (A) located at the front of the engine block. 5. After the coolant has drained, apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Remove the reserve tank, then drain the coolant, and reinstall the reserve tank. 8. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1506 9. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: ^ Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. ^ Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water. 10. Loosely install the radiator cap. 11. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 12. If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine coolant, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine coolant, go to step 13. 13. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 16. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 17. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 18. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the HDS. 19. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed. 20. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again, and check for leaks. 21. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications A/T Fluid At changing .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 2.4L (2.5 Qt) Overhaul ............................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... 5.9L (6.2 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1511 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type .......................................................................................................................................................... Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)-Z1 Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds after turning the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It should be between upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, ATF filter, ATF warmer, hose, line, and line joints. If a problem is found, fix it before filling the transmission. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level. 7. If necessary, fill the transmission with the recommended fluid through the dipstick hole (A) to bring it to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1514 8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1515 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF) Using a nonHonda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.4 L (2.5 US qt, 2.1 Imp qt) at change 5.9 L (6.2 US qt, 5.2 Imp qt) at overhaul 6. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark and lower mark on the dipstick. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. 8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and reset the ATF life with the HDS. 10. 4-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the ATF, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the ATF, go to step 3. 2-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the ATF, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the ATF, notify the customer that the maintenance minder term is not reset for the item that was replaced and the maintenance minder will show to replace the ATF before the actual maintenance timing. 11. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 12. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 13. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 14. Select RESETTING THE ATF with the HDS. NOTE: If you changed the engine oil at the same time with the ATF, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1516 instead. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 1.4L (1.5 Qt) Total ................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. 1.6L (1.7 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1521 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Always use Honda MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1522 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid, and make sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 3. If the transmission fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (D), and drain the fluid. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level. Oil Capacity 1.4 L (1.5 US qt) at Fluid Change 1.6 L (1.7 US qt) at Overhaul Use only Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using engine oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug (A) with a new washer. 6. If the maintenance minder required to replace the fluid, reset the maintenance minder. If it didn't, select BODY ELECTRICAL, GAUGES, ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE MINDER, RESET, MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil At Oil Change ..................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. 3.5L (3.7 Qt) At Oil Change including Filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.7L (3.9 Qt) After Engine Overhaul ......................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.5L (4.8 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1527 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". SAE Viscosity .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 5W-20 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1528 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill the engine with the recommended oil. 5. 4-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine oil, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine oil, go to step 3. 2-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine oil, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine oil, notify the customer that the maintenance minder term is not reset for the item that was replaced and the maintenance minder will show to replace the engine oil before the actual maintenance timing. 6. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 9. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 10. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 11. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the HDS. NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time with the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead. 12. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM FLUID TYPE Honda Power Steering Fluid. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1532 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. NOTE: If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the reservoir if necessary. 1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the reservoir. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. 8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat the procedure as necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1537 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1538 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1539 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity............................................................................................................................. ......................................... 400-450 g (14.1-15.9 oz) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1542 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type .................................................................................................................................. .................................................. HFC-134a (R-134a) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY A/C Condenser .................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 50 mL (1 2/3 fl oz) Evaporator ........................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 40 mL (1 1/3 fl oz) Line or hose ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 10 mL (1/3 fl oz) Compressor ......................................................................................................................................... ................................. 75-85 mL (2 1/2 - 2 5/6 fl oz) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1547 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications COMPRESSOR LUBRICANT TYPE SP-10 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1548 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: SANDEN SP-10 - P/N38897-P13-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl-oz) - P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake system. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B). 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front brake system. NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in the sequence shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1552 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. 6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until no air bubbles are in the fluid. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1558 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1559 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse: Component Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1565 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1566 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1567 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1568 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1569 Fuse: Connector Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1570 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1573 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1574 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1575 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1576 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1577 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1578 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1583 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1584 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1585 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1586 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1587 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1588 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1589 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1590 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1591 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1592 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1593 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1594 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1595 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1596 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1597 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1598 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1599 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1600 Fuse: Connector Views 66. Remote Starting System In-line Fuse (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) 34. Ambient Light In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 36. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1601 40. Bass Unit In-line Fuse (DX, DX-G, LX; 4-door: EX; '07 Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1604 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1605 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1606 Fuse: Application and ID Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1607 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: Customer Interest Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1616 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1617 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1618 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1624 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1625 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 1626 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1629 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1630 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1631 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1632 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1633 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1634 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1635 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1636 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1637 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1638 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1639 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1640 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1641 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1642 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1643 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1644 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1645 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1661 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1662 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1663 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1664 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1672 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1673 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1674 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1675 Fuse Block: Connector Views 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1676 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1677 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1678 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1679 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1680 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1681 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1682 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1683 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1684 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and battery cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1687 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1692 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1693 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1694 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1695 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1696 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1697 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1698 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1699 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1700 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1701 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1702 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1703 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1704 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1705 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1706 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1707 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1708 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1709 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1710 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1711 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1712 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1713 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1714 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1715 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1718 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1719 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information The Maintenance Minder System: Another Look NOTE: This article applies to '06 Accords, '06 Civics, '05-06 Odysseys (all models except Touring), '06 Pilots, '06 Ridgelines, and '06 S2000s. In the September '05 issue of ServiceNews, we told you all about the maintenance minder system (see the article "Taking the Mystery Out of the Maintenance Minder System"). There are a couple of more things we need to mention about this system. Maintenance Minder Indicator - Unlike the MAINT REQ'D indicator found in models without the maintenance minder system, this indicator is an icon (it's an amber-colored wrench) instead of text. And, because it uses a different logic from the MAINT REQ'D indicator, you'll never see it blink. Here's how the logic works for the maintenance minder indicator: Negative Mileage Display - If the oil life drops to 0% and you just ignore it, the engine oil life display starts clicking off the number of miles past the point the oil life reached 0%. How negative mileage is displayed and when it's displayed depends on what model and trim level you're looking at, so check the appropriate O/M for details. Regardless of the model, though, when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the 0% and negative mileage shown starts blinking as a reminder to get that oil changed ASAP. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 1725 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Maintenance Minder System Information Taking the Mystery Out of the Maintenance Minder System To help vehicle owners know when scheduled maintenance is due, Honda has introduced the maintenance minder system in these models. ^ '06 Accord ^ '06 Civic ^ '05-06 Odyssey ^ '06 Pilot ^ '06 Ridgeline ^ '06 S2000 The maintenance minder system shows engine oil life in the information display to let you know when it's time to have the engine oil replaced and regular maintenance done. There's no longer a maintenance schedule in the O/M. The system shows engine oil life as a percentage, which drops over time as the vehicle racks up miles. It starts out at 1000/0 with fresh engine oil, and winds down to 0%, signaling the oil life is over. The system counts down oil life based on engine operating conditions (both normal and severe). If the engine runs at higher temperatures and rpm, or at low temperatures during short trips, the oil life will deplete faster than an engine running under more normal conditions. Depending on the oil life percentage, the system shows three different messages when you turn the the ignition switch to ON (II). Here's what you could see: When the oil life reaches 15%, you'll also see a two-part maintenance item code. '06 RIDGELINE SHOWN Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 1726 This code tells you what items need servicing when you have the engine oil replaced. The first part of the code is the main code. It's either A or B, never both. Here's what they mean: The second part of the code is the subcode. It's numbered I thru 5 in vehicles without 4WD, and I thru 6 in vehicles with 4WD. These subcodes can show up in any combination. Here's what they mean: The system automatically moves up maintenance items or delays them so they get done along with engine oil replacement. For example, if tire rotation is normally done at 7,500 miles, but the oil life ends around 6,000 miles, the system will move up tire rotation. Or, if the oil life appears to be ending around 9,000 miles, the system will delay tire rotation. In either case, you would see the maintenance item code Al in the information display. Some scheduled maintenance items are independent of the maintenance minder system. The brake fluid should be replaced every 3 years, the idle speed should be inspected every 160,000 miles, and the valves adjusted if they're noisy. And there are driving situations where a few maintenance items deviate from the maintenance minder system. These items are affected: ^ Air filters - the air cleaner element and dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 15,000 miles if you drive the vehicle often in areas that are regularly dusty or dirty (high concentration of soot from industry or diesel-powered vehicles). ^ ATF - the ATF should be replaced every 30,000 miles if you use the vehicle mostly for towing or you drive in mountainous areas. This doesn't apply if the vehicle has ATF life monitoring. The '06 Civic is the only vehicle that monitors ATF life at this time. ^ Timing belt (if equipped) - the timing belt should be replaced every 60,000 miles if you drive the vehicle often in areas that commonly have temperatures above 110°F or below -20°F. Keep in mind, only a small percentage of vehicle owners are actually involved in these driving situations. All other vehicle owners should follow the maintenance minder system. For owners who only drive their vehicles occasionally, and the oil life never reaches 15% at the end a 12-month period since the engine oil was last replaced, the engine oil should be replaced and the oil life indicator reset to 1000/0. When resetting the oil life indicator, the system will flash the maintenance item code that would have come up when the oil life reached 15%. Make sure all maintenance is done according to that maintenance item code. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 1727 The maintenance minder info is stored in the FCM/PCM and in the gauge control module. The FCM/PCM keeps track of the oil life, while the gauge control module handles the service items. If you replace the FCM/PCM, make sure you transfer the maintenance minder info from the old FCM/PCM to the new one. And if you replace the gauge control module, remember to transfer the odometer reading from the old gauge control module to the new one. When replacing the FCM/PCM, if you run into any problems transferring the maintenance minder info, replace the engine oil. The system will start the oil life at 100%. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1728 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Maintenance Minder References: - For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to Indicator Based Service. See: Service Intervals/Condition/Indicator Based Maintenance Services/Indicator Based Service - For information on how to reset the display, refer to the article under Resetting the Maintenance Minder. See: Service and Repair The vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the information display to show when to perform an engine oil replacement and other indicated maintenance service. Based on the engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage. Engine Oil Life Display To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the engine oil life indicator appears. The remaining engine oil life is displayed on the information display according to the following table: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1729 *1: DX and Canadian DX-G *2: LX, EX, EX-I and Si If the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the engine oil life indicator will display every time the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator will also come on, and the maintenance item code(s) for other scheduled maintenance items needing service will be displayed next to the engine oil life indicator. The 15 and 10 percent oil life indicator reminds you that the time is coming soon to perform the required maintenance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1730 When the remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a "SERVICE" message along with the same maintenance item code(s), every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance item code or codes indicate the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to "Maintenance Minder Code Definitions" You can switch the display to the odometer, the trip meter, and the outside temperature indicator (if equipped) by pushing the SEL/RESET button on the dashboard repeatedly. When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 percent, the maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then it goes out if you switch the information display. When you see this message, the indicated maintenance should be performed as soon as possible. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1731 When the remaining engine oil life is 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator will blink. The display comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) also comes on and remains on in the instrument panel. When you see this message, the indicated maintenance should be immediately performed. If you do not perform the indicated maintenance, negative mileage is displayed and begins to blink after the vehicle has been driven 10 miles (10 km) or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1732 more. Negative mileage means your vehicle has passed the maintenance required point. Have the indicated maintenance done immediately. You can change the information display from the engine oil life display to the odometer, the trip meter, or the outside temperature (if equipped) every time you press and release the SEL/RESET button. When the engine oil life is 0 percent or negative mileage, the maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) remains on even if you change the information display. Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display. Refer to "Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display". Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items All maintenance items displayed in the information display are in code. For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to Indicator Based Service. See: Service Intervals/Condition/Indicator Based Maintenance Services/Indicator Based Service Important Maintenance Precautions If you complete the required service but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because there will no longer be an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1733 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display Reference: - For information regarding interpreting the maintenance minder display refer to Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator / Description and Operation / "Reading the Maintenance Minder". Reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see "OIL LIFE 100%" on the information display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Reset the Maintenance Minder as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Press the SEL/RESET knob (or button if equipped) repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed. 3. Press the SEL/RESET button for about 10 seconds. The engine oil life and the maintenance item code(s) will blink. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1734 4. Press the SEL/RESET button for more than 5 seconds. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to "100." Important Maintenance Precautions If you complete the required service but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because there will no longer be an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1738 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function. Does the MIL indicator flash? Yes - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module (tachometer), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control module (tachometer). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? Yes - Go to step 5. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect the HDS. 7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A31 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A31) and the SRS unit, the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Maintenance Minder Codes Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Maintenance Minder Codes Maintenance Minder All the maintenance items displayed in the odometer/trip meter or the multi-information display are in code. For explanation of codes and maintenance to be performed see the image above. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Maintenance Minder Codes > Page 1743 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Reset Procedure Resetting the Engine Oil Life Indicator Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see "OIL LIFE 100 % - on the odometer/ trip meter display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer - reset the maintenance minder as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Press the Sel/Reset button repeatedly the engine oil life indicator is displayed. 3. Press the Sel/Reset button for about 10 seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item code(s) will blink. 4. Press the Sel/Reset button for more than 5 seconds. The maintenance items code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to 1OO. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), on safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in the P position for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1753 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1754 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1755 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1756 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1757 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1758 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1759 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1765 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1766 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1767 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1768 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1769 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1770 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 1771 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Tires: Customer Interest Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1780 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1781 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1782 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1783 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1784 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1785 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1791 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1792 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1793 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1794 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1795 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 1796 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 1801 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 1807 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn the back side of the wheel slowly by hand. 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial runout by turning the wheel. 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play, and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel are clean. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1815 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc inward and outward. 6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1818 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1819 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1820 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1821 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1822 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1823 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1824 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Disc Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1825 Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Drum Brake Type Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1826 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the two washers (A). 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake disc. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1827 8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 9. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks. 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake disc, Clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: ^ Turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose if necessary. ^ If the brake drum has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake drum to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake drum. ^ After installation, press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1828 4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 5. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1829 NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D). 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1830 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D), 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1831 ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to the wheel cylinder, and retighten it if necessary. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Suspension Spindle nut 22 x 1.5 mm .............................................................................................................................................. 181 Nm (18.5 kgf-m, 134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Flat Towing Information Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Information Flat-Towing Behind a Motorhome Need to flat-tow a 05 or 06 model year vehicle behind a motorhome? Here's some important info to keep in mind when you do. Not all Honda models are approved for flat towing. Models are approved only afier going through extensive testing by our R & D folks. Here are the models currently approved. Additional models might be added. '05 Models ^ Accord (except Accord Hybrid) ^ Civic (except Civic Hybrid) ^ CR-V ^ Element ^ Pilot '06 Models ^ CR-V For info on flat-towing '05 and earlier model year vehicles, refer to the appropriate O/M. If you can't find any instructions in the O/M, then call Honda Automobile Customer Service. They'll provide a letter with towing instructions only for '05 and earlier model year vehicles. For info on flat-towing '06 model year vehicles, refer to the appropriate O/M. Towing instructions for unapproved vehicles aren't available from Honda Automobile Customer Service. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1843 Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1844 To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with front towing hooks (A), front tie down hook slots (B), rear towing hook (C), and rear tie down hook slots (D). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the truck. Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the vehicle. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission to neutral. Automatic Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to the D position, then to the N position. - Turn off the engine. It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE: - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), on safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in the P position for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1855 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1856 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1857 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1858 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1859 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1860 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1861 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1862 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1863 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1864 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1865 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1866 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1867 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1868 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1869 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1870 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1871 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1872 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1873 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1874 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1875 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1876 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1877 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1878 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1879 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1880 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1881 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1882 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-0 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 7. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1886 68. Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1887 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VTEC System - This mechanism improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed, and engine load. - The VTEC mechanism changes the valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile. - The VTEC system changes the cam profile (angle) at cruising speeds. (Cam angle is changed to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss). Operation At engine start, and high load - The rocker arm oil control valve is OFF. - Oil pressure enters secondary rocker arm B from the oil passage in the intake rocker shaft. This forces the VTEC switching piston into secondary rocker arm A against the return spring and disengages the secondary arm A from the secondary arm B to stop valve actuation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1888 At cruise The rocker arm oil control valve switches oil pressure to the oil passage in the intake rocker arm shaft. Oil pressure then enters secondary rocker arm A, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into secondary rocker arm B, locking secondary rocker arms A and B together. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1889 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control valve connector (A) and the EOP sensor connector (B). 3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (C). 4. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse order of removal with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1893 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. 7. Remove the four ignition coils. 8. Remove the four spark plugs. 9. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. 10. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 880 kPa (9.0 kgf/cm2, 128 psi) 11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 12. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft Sprocket Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the cam chain. 2. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. 4. Remove the camshaft sprocket. Installation 1. Install the camshaft sprocket. 2. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft sprocket mounting bolt, and install it. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. 3. Install the rocker arm assembly. 4. Install the cam chain. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Removal Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Removal Camshaft Removal 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 3. Remove the camshaft sprocket. 4. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 5. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out the camshaft (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Removal > Page 1905 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Inspection Camshaft Inspection 1. Remove the camshaft sprocket. 2. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 3. Put the rocker shaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts, in sequence, to the specified torque. 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head. 5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth, and read the end play. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft. 6. Remove the camshaft. 7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn. 8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Removal > Page 1906 9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter. 10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round condition. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits, go to step 12. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit, and the camshaft has been replaced, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit, and the camshaft has not been replaced, go to step 11. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Removal > Page 1907 11. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks. ^ If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft, and recheck the oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head. 12. Measure cam lobe height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Removal > Page 1908 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Installation Camshaft Installation 1. Install the camshaft (A) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (B) with new O-ring (C). 2. Install the camshaft position (CMP) sensor with a new O-ring. 3. Install the camshaft sprocket. 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the cylinder head. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 1. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly. 3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. 6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and all out of service limit rocker arms. If any intake secondary rocker arm needs replacement, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly. VTEC Rocker Arms Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1913 7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (B). Push on them manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ Apply new engine oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ When reassembling the secondary rocker arm A, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 9. Install the rocker arm assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1914 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 1. Start the engine, and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn OFF the ignition switch. 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). 4. Move the intake secondary rocker arm A for the No. 1 cylinder. The secondary rocker arm A should move independently of the secondary rocker arm B. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm A moves freely, go to step 5. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm A does not move, remove the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the pistons in the secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 5. Repeat step 4 on the remaining intake secondary rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 6. 6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi). 7. Inspect the valve clearance. 8. Install a 10 x 1.0 mm adapter to the inspection hole, then connect the air pressure regulator. 9. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1915 10. With the specified air pressure applied, move the intake secondary rocker arm A for the No. 1 cylinder. The secondary rocker arm A and secondary rocker arm B should move together. If the intake secondary rocker arm A does not move, remove the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 11. Remove the air pressure regulator and the 10 x 1.0 mm adapter. 12. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A). 3. Remove the lost motion holder bolts. To prevent damaging the lost motion holder and rocker shaft, unscrew the bolts, in sequence, two turns at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1918 4. Remove the lost motion holder (A) and lost motion assemblies (B). 5. Remove the rocker arm assembly (C), then remove the oil control orifice (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1919 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Installation Rocker Arm Assembly Installation 1. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled, reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 2. Install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B), then install the rocker arm assembly (C). 3. Install the lost motion assembles (D) and the lost motion holder (E). 4. Tighten each bolts two turns at a time in sequence. 5. Adjust the valve clearance. 6. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1920 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. ^ Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms. ^ If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the same positions. ^ When removing, or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Remove the rocker shaft bolt before removing the rocker shaft from the No. 5 rocker shaft holder. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any contact points. ^ Bundle the intake secondary rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. ^ When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1933 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1937 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1938 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1939 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1940 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1941 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1942 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1943 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1944 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1945 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1946 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1947 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1948 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1949 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1950 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1951 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1952 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-0 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Rod Bearing Cap Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°. NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 9 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Pin-to-rod clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.005 0.015 mm (0.0002 - 0.0006 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ........................................................................................ 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1957 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil screen and baffle plate. 3. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. 4. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 5. Place Plastigage across the rod journal. 6. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.) + 90° using a commercially available torque angle gauge. NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 7. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the Plastigage. 8. If the Plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 9. If the Plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below the current one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearing, replace the crankshaft, and start over. Rod Bearing Selection 1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations 2. Each rod has a tolerance range from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) increments, depending on the size of its big end bore. It is then stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3 or 4/I, II, III, or IIII) indicating the range. You may find any combination of numbers and bars in any engine. (Half the number or bar is stamped on the bearing cap, the other half is on the rod.) If you can't read the code because of an Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1958 accumulation of oil and varnish, do not scrub it with a wire brush or scraper. Clean it only with solvent or detergent. Connecting Rod Journal Code Location 3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft. 4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes to select the appropriate replacement bearings from the table. NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing. When using bearing halves of different colors, it does not matter which color is used in the top or bottom. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Why Do Connecting Rods Break? Curious why connecting rods break? Afier all, these are heavy-duty parts specifically designed to endure punishing forces and temperatures. Yet, every once in a while they do bend or break and wind up as cool conversation pieces for a coffee table or desk. Connecting rods break only after they've gotten bent. And they won't get bent unless the engine hydro-locks or the rod bearings fail. When troubleshooting a bent or broken connecting rod, here are some things to consider: ^ The number one culprit for connecting rod breakage is hydro-lock. This happens when liquid (water or fuel) entering the combustion chamber exceeds the chamber's volume. Since liquids don't compress, that extra volume in the chamber causes the rod to bend. You won't really notice anything wrong, until that bent rod finally gives out and breaks. This could happen if you're driving through deep, standing water and someone coming the other way splashes water over your hood. On very rare occasions, a bad ECM/PCM or fuel injector can cause too much fuel to enter a cylinder, causing hydro-lock and resulting in a bent rod. Before this happens, though, there are usually some kind of drive ability problems that crop up and remain afier the engine is fixed. A bent rod might not show any symptoms until it actually breaks. But bent rods leave a wider-than-normal carbon witness line in the cylinder because they're shorter. Typically, a healthy engine has a carbon line that's 6 mm deep. An engine that's suffering from bent rods has a second carbon line that's 9 to 12 mm deep. ^ Connecting rod bearings fail for a number of reasons. To properly determine what actually caused a rod bearing to fail, you've got to take apart all rod bearings and main bearings and compare them side by side. If all or most of the bearings and journals show similar damage (scoring, exposed copper, or heat discoloration) the likely cause is oil starvation, poor maintenance, customer abuse, or running the engine with an aftermarket power booster (nitrous oxide setup, supercharger, turbocharger). If only the bearing or journal for the failed rod looks bad but all the other ones look good (no scoring, no exposed copper or heat discoloration) and the crankshaft journals are smooth with no heat discoloration, then that particular bearing/ clearance would be suspect. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1963 Connecting Rod: Specifications Rod Bearing Cap Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°. NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 9 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. Connecting Rod Pin-to-rod clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.005 0.015 mm (0.0002 - 0.0006 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ........................................................................................ 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Small-end bore diameter ............................................................................................................................... 19.969 - 19.975 mm (0.7862 - 0.7864 inch) Large-end bore diameter .......................................................................... .......................................................................................... 48.0 mm (1.89 inch) End play installed on crankshaft Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.15 0.35 mm (0.006 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil screen and baffle plate. 3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft. 4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit; replace the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. 6. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection > Page 1966 Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B. 2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B. Point A - Point B = Difference in Diameter Difference in Diameter: Specification: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 0.004 inch) 3. If the difference in diameter is out of specification, replace the connecting rod bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1967 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A), and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B). NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves. 3. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye protection. 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin. Inspection NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting rod when they are at room temperature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1968 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1969 4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance. Reassembly 1. Install one piston pin snap ring (A). 2. Coat the piston pin bore, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new engine oil. 3. Heat the piston to about 158°F (70°C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1970 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B) with the mark (C) and the embossed mark (D) on the same side. Install the piston pin (E). 5. Install the remaining snap ring (F). 6. Turn the snap rings until the end gaps are positioned at the bottom of the piston. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Coolant Drain Plug, Cylinder Block > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt Installation NOTE: When installing the drain bolt and/or sealing bolt, always use a new washer. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Bearing Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.017 0.035 mm (0.0007 - 0.0014 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 0.045 mm (0.0018 inch) Rod bearing clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.022 0.044 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 0.055 mm (0.0022 inch) Main Bearing Cap Tighten the bearing cap bolts, in sequence, to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft. lbs.). Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 57°. Tighten the 8 mm bolts, in sequence, to 24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17 ft. lbs.). Main Bearing Selection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1977 Crankshaft Bore Code Location 1. Numbers, letters or bars have been stamped on the either side of the block end as a code for the size of each of the five main journal bores. Write down the crank bore codes. If you can't read the codes because of accumulated dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Main Journal Code Location Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1978 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. To check the main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the lower block and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of Plastigage across each main journal. 4. Reinstall the bearings and lower block, then torque the bolts to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft. lbs.) + 57° in the proper sequence. NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the lower block and bearings again, and measure the widest part of the Plastigage. 6. If the Plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the Plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below the current one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft, and start over. Main Bearing Selection Crankshaft Bore Code Location 1. Numbers, letters or bars have been stamped on the either side of the block end as a code for the size of each of the five main journal bores. Write down the crank bore codes. If you can't read the codes because of accumulated dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Main Journal Code Location Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1979 2. The main journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft. 3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes to select the appropriate replacement bearings from the table. NOTE: ^ Color code is on the edge of the bearing. ^ When using bearing halves of different colors, it does not matter which color is used in the top or bottom. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main journal diameter ................................................................................................................................... 54.976 - 55.000 mm (2.1644 - 2.1654 inch) Rod journal diameter ..................................................................................................................................... 44.976 45.000 mm (1.7707 - 1.7716 inch) Rod/main journal taper Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) maximum Service Limit .......................................................................................... ............................................................................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) Rod/main journal out-of-round Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) maximum Service Limit .......................................................................................... ............................................................................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) End play Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.10 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Runout Standard or New ..................................................................................................................................................... 0.03 mm (0.0012 inch) maximum Service Limit .......................................................................................... ................................................................................. 0.04 mm (0.0016 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil screen and baffle plate. 3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft. 4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit; replace the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. 6. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection > Page 1985 Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Inspection Crankshaft Inspection Out-of-Round and Taper 1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block. 2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush. 3. Clean the keyway and the threads. 4. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. 5. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and main journal. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) Straightness 6. Place the engine block on the surface plate. 7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the engine block. 8. Lower the crankshaft into the block. 9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft and Piston Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate. 5. Remove the oil pan. 6. Remove the oil pump. 7. Remove the cylinder head. 8. Remove the oil screen (A) and baffle plate (B). 9. Remove the 8 mm bolts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1988 10. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 11. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the lower block from the engine block in the places shown. 12. Remove the lower block and bearings. Keep all the bearings in order. 13. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 14. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine. Be careful not to damage the journals and the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (B). 15. Remove the CKP pulse plate (B). 16. Remove the thrust washers (C). 17. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1989 18. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 19. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B). Take care not to damage the oil jets or cylinder with the connecting rod. 20. Reinstall the lower block and the bearings on the engine in the proper order. 21. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 22. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to make sure they are reused in the original order. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1990 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Installation Crankshaft Installation Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Attachment, 24 x 26 mm 07746-0010700 ^ Oil seal driver attachment 96 07ZAD-PNAA100 1. With a manual transmission, install the crankshaft end bushing when replacing the crankshaft. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft end bushing until the special tools bottom against the crankshaft. 2. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with Plastigage. 3. Check the main bearing clearance with Plastigage. 4. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and connecting rods. 5. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings and rod bearings. 6. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A) to the crankshaft (B). 7. Hold the crankshaft so that rod journal No. 2 and rod journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the crankshaft into the block. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1991 8. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal of the engine block. 9. Inspect the connecting rod bolts. 10. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and bolts finger-tight. 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting rod No. 3. Line up the mark on the connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and bolts finger-tight. 12. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). 13. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°. NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 9 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. 14. Remove any old liquid gasket from the lower block mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 15. Clean, and dry the lower block mating surfaces. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1992 16. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the lower block. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 17. Put the lower block on the engine block. 18. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the bearing cap bolts. 19. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, in sequence, to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft. lbs.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1993 20. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 57°. 21. Tighten the 8 mm bolts, in sequence, to 24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17 ft. lbs.). 22. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the block to the specified installed height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 1994 23. Measure the distance between the engine block (A) and oil seal (B). 24. Install the baffle plate (A), then install the oil screen (B) with new O-ring (C). 25. Install the oil pump. 26. Install the oil pan. 27. Install the cylinder head. 28. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate. 29. A/T model: Install the drive plate. 30. Install the transmission. 31. Install the engine assembly. NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idle speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue running it for about 15 minutes. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley with the handle (A) and holder attachment (B). Tighten the bolt to 69 Nm (7.0 kgf-m, 51 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not use an impact wrench. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1998 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Crankshaft pulley holder 070AB-RJA0100 ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially available 19 mm socket Removal 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and holder (B). 4. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), crankshaft (B), bait (C), and washer (D). Lubricate with new engine oil as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1999 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley with the handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 3. Tighten the bolt to 69 Nm (7.0 kgf-m, 51 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not use an impact wrench. 4. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90° 5. Install the drive belt. 6. Install the right front wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Skirt O.D. at 14 mm (0.55 inch) from bottom of skirt Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 80.980 80.990 mm (3.1881 - 3.1886 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................. .......................................................................................... 80.93 mm (3.186 inch) Clearance in cylinder Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.010 0.040 mm (0.0004 - 0.0016 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Ring groove width Top Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 1.23 1.24 mm (0.048 - 0.049 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 1.26 mm (0.050 inch) Second Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 1.22 1.23 mm (0.047 - 0.048 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) Oil Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 2.005 - 2.020 mm (0.0789 - 0.0795 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.05 mm (0.081 inch) Pin-to-piston clearance Standard or New ........................................................................................................................... -0.004 to +0.003 mm (-0.00016 to +0.00012 inch) Service Limit ........................................................ ............................................................................................................... 0.0006 mm (0.0002 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2003 Piston: Testing and Inspection Block and Piston Inspection 1. Remove the crankshaft and pistons. 2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 14 mm (0.55 inch) from the bottom of the skirt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2004 4. Measure the wear and taper Y at three levels inside each cylinder as shown. If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond the Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the block. If the block is being rebored, refer to step 7 after reboring. 5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2005 6. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure along the edges, and across the center as shown. 7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is near, or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and engine block for excessive wear. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal Piston: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft and Piston Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate. 5. Remove the oil pan. 6. Remove the oil pump. 7. Remove the cylinder head. 8. Remove the oil screen (A) and baffle plate (B). 9. Remove the 8 mm bolts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2008 10. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 11. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the lower block from the engine block in the places shown. 12. Remove the lower block and bearings. Keep all the bearings in order. 13. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 14. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine. Be careful not to damage the journals and the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (B). 15. Remove the CKP pulse plate (B). 16. Remove the thrust washers (C). 17. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2009 18. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 19. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B). Take care not to damage the oil jets or cylinder with the connecting rod. 20. Reinstall the lower block and the bearings on the engine in the proper order. 21. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 22. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to make sure they are reused in the original order. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2010 Piston: Service and Repair Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A), and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B). NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves. 3. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye protection. 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin. Inspection NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting rod when they are at room temperature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2011 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2012 4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance. Reassembly 1. Install one piston pin snap ring (A). 2. Coat the piston pin bore, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new engine oil. 3. Heat the piston to about 158°F (70°C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2013 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B) with the mark (C) and the embossed mark (D) on the same side. Install the piston pin (E). 5. Install the remaining snap ring (F). 6. Turn the snap rings until the end gaps are positioned at the bottom of the piston. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2014 Piston: Service and Repair Piston Installation Piston Installation If the Crankshaft is Already Installed 1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder as its piston is installed. 2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor. Check that the bearing is securely in place. 3. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly. 4. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine. 5. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. 7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with Plastigage. 8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts. 9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). 10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°. NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. If the Crankshaft is Not Installed Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2015 1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is securely in place. 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly. 3. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine. 4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring groove width Top Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 1.23 1.24 mm (0.048 - 0.049 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 1.26 mm (0.050 inch) Second Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 1.22 1.23 mm (0.047 - 0.048 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) Oil Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 2.005 - 2.020 mm (0.0789 - 0.0795 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.05 mm (0.081 inch) Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.045 - 0.070 mm (0.0018 - 0.0028 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.035 - 0.060 mm (0.0014 - 0.0024 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Rind end gap Top Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.20 0.35 mm (0.008 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.40 0.55 mm (0.016 - 0.022 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) Oil Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.20 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2019 Piston Ring: Service and Repair Piston Ring Replacement 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B). 3. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade to fit the piston grooves. The top and 2nd ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 inch) wide. The oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) wide. File down a blade if necessary. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning tools. NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. 4. Using a piston that has its rings removed, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15 - 20 mm (0.6 - 0.8 inch) from the bottom. 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge: ^ If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. ^ If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits. If the bore is beyond the service limit, the engine block must be rebored. Piston Ring End-Gap Top Ring: Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.008 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Ring: Standard (New): 0.40 - 0.55 mm (0.016 - 0.022 inch) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) Oil Ring: Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2020 6. Install the top ring and the second ring as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1T, 1A, or 1R mark, and the second ring (B) has a 2T, 2A, or 2R mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward. 7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. 8. Position the ring end gaps as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2021 9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearances. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2026 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 3. Select the correct thickness. feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2027 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Tighten the locknut. Specified Torque: 7 x 0.75 mm 14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10 ft. lbs.) 8. Recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 10. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 12. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2028 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 14. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 15. Install the cylinder head cover. 16. If the maintenance minder required to adjust the valve clearance, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to adjust the valve clearance, go to step 17. 17. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 20. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 21. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 22. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2032 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2033 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 1. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly. 3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. 6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and all out of service limit rocker arms. If any intake secondary rocker arm needs replacement, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly. VTEC Rocker Arms Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2038 7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (B). Push on them manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ Apply new engine oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ When reassembling the secondary rocker arm A, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 9. Install the rocker arm assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2039 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 1. Start the engine, and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn OFF the ignition switch. 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). 4. Move the intake secondary rocker arm A for the No. 1 cylinder. The secondary rocker arm A should move independently of the secondary rocker arm B. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm A moves freely, go to step 5. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm A does not move, remove the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the pistons in the secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 5. Repeat step 4 on the remaining intake secondary rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 6. 6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi). 7. Inspect the valve clearance. 8. Install a 10 x 1.0 mm adapter to the inspection hole, then connect the air pressure regulator. 9. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 42 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2040 10. With the specified air pressure applied, move the intake secondary rocker arm A for the No. 1 cylinder. The secondary rocker arm A and secondary rocker arm B should move together. If the intake secondary rocker arm A does not move, remove the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 11. Remove the air pressure regulator and the 10 x 1.0 mm adapter. 12. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A). 3. Remove the lost motion holder bolts. To prevent damaging the lost motion holder and rocker shaft, unscrew the bolts, in sequence, two turns at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2043 4. Remove the lost motion holder (A) and lost motion assemblies (B). 5. Remove the rocker arm assembly (C), then remove the oil control orifice (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2044 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Installation Rocker Arm Assembly Installation 1. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled, reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 2. Install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B), then install the rocker arm assembly (C). 3. Install the lost motion assembles (D) and the lost motion holder (E). 4. Tighten each bolts two turns at a time in sequence. 5. Adjust the valve clearance. 6. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2045 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. ^ Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms. ^ If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the same positions. ^ When removing, or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Remove the rocker shaft bolt before removing the rocker shaft from the No. 5 rocker shaft holder. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any contact points. ^ Bundle the intake secondary rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. ^ When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal Valve Cover: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Removal 1. Remove the harness cover. 2. Remove the injector cover. 3. Disconnect the four ignition coil connectors. Remove the four bolts (A) securing the harness holders, then remove the front harness holder (B) from the bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2050 4. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) from the alternator. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (C), and remove the harness clamp (D). 6. Remove the dipstick (A) and breather hose (B). 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2051 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Cover Installation Cylinder Head Cover Installation 1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the groove. 2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the cylinder head cover (B). 3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry. 4. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, on the oil pump mating areas. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 5. Install the cylinder head cover, and tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all the bolts, in sequence, to 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft. lbs.). NOTE: ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. ^ Do not run the engine forat least 3 hours after installing the head cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2052 6. Install the dipstick (A) and breather hose (B). 7. Connect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) to the alternator. 8. Connect the A/C compressor clutch connector (C), and install the harness clamp (D). 9. Install the front harness holder (A) to the bracket, then tighten the four bolts (B) securing the harness holders. 10. Connect the four ignition coil connectors. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2053 11. Install the injector cover. 12. Install the harness cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the valves. 2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm (0.39 inch), then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). ^ If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck it using a new valve. ^ If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve. ^ If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service limit, go to step 3. 3. Subtract the valve stem O.D. (measured with a micrometer) from the valve guide I.D. (measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge). Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.02 0.05 mm (0.0008 - 0.0020 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.05 - 0.08 mm (0.0020 - 0.0031 inch) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2057 Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Replacement ^Special Tools Required ^ Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 ^ Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide clearance. 2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer. 3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour. 4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats. 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 inch) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2058 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head. 7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 inch) bit, then try again. NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks. 8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them. 9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide driver to drive the guide to the specified installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with cutting oil. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2059 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise to the full length of the valve guide bore. 12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while drawing it from the bore. 13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue. 14. Check the clearance with a valve. Verify that a valve slides into the intake and exhaust valve guides without getting stuck. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Remove the valves. 2. Measure the valve in these areas. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Valve: Service and Repair Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Special Tools Required Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A), and plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve cotters. 3. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and valve spring compressor. Compress the spring, and remove the valve cotters. 4. Remove the valve spring compressor, valve spring compressor attachment, spring retainer, and spring. 5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2065 6. Remove the valve seal. 7. Remove the valve spring seat and valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2066 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Seat Reconditioning Valve Seat Reconditioning 1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide clearance. If the valve guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats. 2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter. 3. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. 4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 60° cutter. Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters. Valve Seat Width Intake: Standard (New): 0.85 - 1.15 mm (0.033 - 0.045 inch) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) Exhaust: Standard (New): 1.25 - 1.55 mm (0.049 - 0.061 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) 6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times. 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat. ^ If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 60° cutter to move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. ^ If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2067 to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter. 8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and measure the valve stem installed height (A). 9. If the valve stem installed height is beyond the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2068 Valve: Service and Repair Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Special Tools Required ^ Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 ^ Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A 1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides. 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal driver (B). NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring (D), and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring (F); they are not interchangeable. 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with the closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 6. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and valve spring compressor. Compress the spring, and install the valve cotters. 7. Remove the valve spring compressor and valve spring compressor attachment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2069 8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM 06-059 July 20, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Buzzing From the Engine at Low RPM (Supersedes 06-059, dated November 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. SYMPTOM There is buzzing from the engine under light throttle (1,300 to 1,700 rpm) or at idle while in gear. PROBABLE CAUSE The drive belt layout allows drive belt tensioner noise to be heard in the passenger compartment. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a longer, re-routed drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Belt Kit: P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 118130 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 56992-RNA-A01 H/C 8051104 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 04501 Template ID: 06-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM > Page 2079 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the original drive belt: ^ Refer to page 4-40 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Removal/Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 2. Install the new drive belt, and route it as shown. NOTE: Use an appropriate tool for added leverage when setting the wrench on the auto-tensioner. The tensioner is hydraulic and should be moved slowly to relieve pressure on the belt. Applying excessive force to the tensioner can cause breakage. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM 06-059 July 20, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Buzzing From the Engine at Low RPM (Supersedes 06-059, dated November 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. SYMPTOM There is buzzing from the engine under light throttle (1,300 to 1,700 rpm) or at idle while in gear. PROBABLE CAUSE The drive belt layout allows drive belt tensioner noise to be heard in the passenger compartment. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a longer, re-routed drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Belt Kit: P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 118130 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 56992-RNA-A01 H/C 8051104 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 04501 Template ID: 06-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 06-059 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Buzzing Noise at 1,300 to 1,700 RPM > Page 2085 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the original drive belt: ^ Refer to page 4-40 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Removal/Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 2. Install the new drive belt, and route it as shown. NOTE: Use an appropriate tool for added leverage when setting the wrench on the auto-tensioner. The tensioner is hydraulic and should be moved slowly to relieve pressure on the belt. Applying excessive force to the tensioner can cause breakage. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2086 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Inspection 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it. 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the drive belt. After you inspected or replaced the drive belt, go to step 3. 3. If the maintenance minder required to inspect the drive belt, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to inspect the drive belt, go to step 4. 4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2087 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Removal/Installation 1. Set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly. 2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair Drive Belt: Electrical / Mechanical Repair Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair > Page 2090 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Electrical / Mechanical Repair > Page 2091 Drive Belt: Aftermarket Tools Honda Serpentine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 Honda serpentine belt wrench equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point secured sockets, for engagement every 30 degrees. Ideal for strong tensioners used on 2006 and newer civics. - Lightweight and Slim design - Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments - Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-007 Date: 090130 Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement 09-007 January 30, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Pivot Bolt Replacement BACKGROUND The current routing of the engine drive belt creates extra force on the drive belt auto-tensioner. In rare cases, this extra force could break the auto-tensioner pivot bolt, causing an engine noise or a loss of power steering. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the auto-tensioner pivot bolt, and reroute the drive belt. On vehicles with A/C, install a new drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2100 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: This product update ends on January 30, 2012. After that, any applicable warranty would apply. Operation Number: 1181L1 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 04301-RNA-405 H/C 9175126 Defect Code: 5TT00 Symptom Code: R0100 Template ID: 09-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2101 On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused. 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 4. Remove the pivot bolt from the drive belt auto-tensioner. NOTE: In rare cases, the pivot bolt may be broken. If this has happened, remove the auto-tensioner, then remove the shank of the pivot bolt with Vise Grips or by drilling it out. Do not try to repair the engine block using a TIME-SERT. If you can't remove the shank of the pivot bolt, you would need DPSM approval to install an engine short block assembly. 5. Install a new pivot bolt on the auto-tensioner, and torque it to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on correctly installing the pivot bolt, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 6. Reinstall the water pump pulley and its three bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2102 NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 7. On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1. 8. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 9. Center-punch a completion mark below the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2103 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2104 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-007 Date: 090130 Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement 09-007 January 30, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Pivot Bolt Replacement BACKGROUND The current routing of the engine drive belt creates extra force on the drive belt auto-tensioner. In rare cases, this extra force could break the auto-tensioner pivot bolt, causing an engine noise or a loss of power steering. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the auto-tensioner pivot bolt, and reroute the drive belt. On vehicles with A/C, install a new drive belt. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2110 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: This product update ends on January 30, 2012. After that, any applicable warranty would apply. Operation Number: 1181L1 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 04301-RNA-405 H/C 9175126 Defect Code: 5TT00 Symptom Code: R0100 Template ID: 09-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2111 On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused. 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 4. Remove the pivot bolt from the drive belt auto-tensioner. NOTE: In rare cases, the pivot bolt may be broken. If this has happened, remove the auto-tensioner, then remove the shank of the pivot bolt with Vise Grips or by drilling it out. Do not try to repair the engine block using a TIME-SERT. If you can't remove the shank of the pivot bolt, you would need DPSM approval to install an engine short block assembly. 5. Install a new pivot bolt on the auto-tensioner, and torque it to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on correctly installing the pivot bolt, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 6. Reinstall the water pump pulley and its three bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2112 NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 7. On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1. 8. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 9. Center-punch a completion mark below the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2113 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt Tensioner: > 09-007 > Jan > 09 > Campaign - Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt Replacement > Page 2114 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2115 Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make sure to turn the A/C switch OFF. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's pointer (A). Start the engine then check the position again with the engine idling. If the position of the indicator moves of fluctuates very much, replace the auto-tensioner. 3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner pulley. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown. Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does not move smoothly or you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2116 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Removal/Installation 1. Loosen the water pump pulley mounting bolts. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the alternator. 4. Remove the water pump pulley. 5. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 6. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Engine Torque Strut > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Torque Rod Replacement Engine Torque Strut: Service and Repair Lower Torque Rod Replacement Lower Torque Rod Replacement 1. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (A). 2. Raise the hoist to full height. 3. Remove the lower torque rod. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Engine Torque Strut > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Torque Rod Replacement > Page 2122 4. Install the lower torque rod, then tighten the new lower torque rod mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 5. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 6. Tighten the upper torque rod mounting bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Engine Torque Strut > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Torque Rod Replacement > Page 2123 Engine Torque Strut: Service and Repair Upper Torque Rod Replacement Upper Torque Rod Replacement 1. Remove the bolt (A) securing the A/C line, then remove the upper torque rod (B). 2. Install the upper torque rod, then tighten the new bolts in the numbered sequence shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure Engine Oil Pressure ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 176°F (80°C) At Idle .................................................................. ......................................................................................................... 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm ................................................................................................................................ ............................... 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2128 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test NOTE: If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install an oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min. 4. If the oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these items: ^ Replace the oil filter. ^ Inspect the oil pressure relief valve. ^ Check the oil screen for clogging. ^ Inspect the oil pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil At Oil Change ..................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. 3.5L (3.7 Qt) At Oil Change including Filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.7L (3.9 Qt) After Engine Overhaul ......................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.5L (4.8 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2133 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". SAE Viscosity .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 5W-20 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2134 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill the engine with the recommended oil. 5. 4-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine oil, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine oil, go to step 3. 2-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine oil, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine oil, notify the customer that the maintenance minder term is not reset for the item that was replaced and the maintenance minder will show to replace the engine oil before the actual maintenance timing. 6. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 9. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 10. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 11. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the HDS. NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time with the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead. 12. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine. 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the oil pan, then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 4. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2138 6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the oil pan, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if mark V is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark VVVV comes around to the bottom. 7. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement 1. Remove the filter. 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe. 3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe. Hold one nut with a wrench, then use a second wrench to tighten the other nut. 4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36 ft. lbs.), then remove the nuts from the oil filter feed pipe. 5. Install the filter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13 ft. lbs.). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the each side of crankshaft pulley and flywheel/drive plate. NOTE: Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pan. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Removal Oil Pan Removal 1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to step 12. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud. 4. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector, then remove the harness clamp. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses. 5. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. 6. Remove the splash shield. 7. Drain the engine oil. 8. Remove exhaust pipe A. 9. Support the oil pan with a jack. 10. Remove the lower torque rod. 11. Remove the jack. 12. Remove the lower torque rod bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2147 13. Remove the A/C compressor bracket. 14. A/T model: Remove the shift cable cover. 15. Remove the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A), and remove the two bolts securing the transmission. 16. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2148 17. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the block in the places shown. 18. Remove the oil pan. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2149 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Installation Oil Pan Installation 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 2. Clean, and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. 3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-00004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the oil pan. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 4. Install the dowel pins (A), then install the oil pan (B) with a new O-rings (C). 5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13 ft. lbs.). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the each side of crankshaft pulley and flywheel/drive plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2150 NOTE: ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. ^ Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pan. 6. Install the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A), and install the two bolts securing the transmission. 7. Install the shift cable cover (A/T). 8. Install the A/C compressor bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2151 9. Remove the lower torque rod bracket. 10. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following steps. 11. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 12. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt. 13. Raise the hoist to full height. 14. Install the lower torque rod. 15. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 16. Tighten the upper torque rod mounting bolt. 17. Raise the hoist to full height. 18. Install exhaust pipe A. 19. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 20. Install the A/C compressor. Install the harness clamp, then connect the A/C compressor clutch connector. 21. Install the A/C condenser fan shroud. 22. Install the drive belt. 23. Refill the engine with engine oil. 24. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2155 VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2156 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2157 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2158 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams 12. Oil Pressure Switch 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2159 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair EOP Sensor Removal/Installation EOP Sensor Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the EOP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the bracket (B), and the EOP sensor (C). 4. Install the EOP sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation > Page 2162 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2166 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2174 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2175 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2176 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2177 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2178 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2179 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2180 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2181 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2182 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2183 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2184 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2185 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2186 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2187 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2188 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2189 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2190 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2191 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2192 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2193 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2194 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2195 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2196 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2197 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2198 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2199 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2200 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2201 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "ON" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and oil pressure switch connector. 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the Original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) > Page 2204 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector. 8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to step 10. 9. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Do the oil pressure test. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and the oil pressure switch connector. 12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure Engine Oil Pressure ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 176°F (80°C) At Idle .................................................................. ......................................................................................................... 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm ................................................................................................................................ ............................... 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2209 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test NOTE: If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install an oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min. 4. If the oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these items: ^ Replace the oil filter. ^ Inspect the oil pressure relief valve. ^ Check the oil screen for clogging. ^ Inspect the oil pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Spray Jet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Oil Spray Jet: Testing and Inspection Oil Jet Bolt Inspection 1. Remove the oil jet. 2. Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows. ^ Make sure that a 1.1 mm (0.04 inch) diameter drill will go through the oil intake (1.2 mm (0.05 inch) diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 mm (0.16 inch). ^ Check the oil jet operation with an air nozzle. It should take at least 310 kPa (3.2 kgf/cm2, 46 psi) to unseat the check ball. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Spray Jet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2213 Oil Spray Jet: Service and Repair Oil Jet Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block. 2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove and discard the oil jet (B). 3. Carefully install the new oil jet, and tighten the oil jet bolt. 4. Install the crankshaft. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Install the intake manifold (A) with new gaskets (B), and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps, beginning with the inner bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2217 Intake Manifold Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2218 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Intake Manifold Removal 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2219 3. Remove the air intake duct. 4. Remove the injector cover. 5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B), positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (C), and power steering (P/S) hose clamp (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2220 6. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then disconnect the fuel feed hose. 7. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold. ^ Throttle actuator connector ^ Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector ^ Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector ^ Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator connector 8. Remove the water bypass hoses, then plug the water bypass hoses. 9. Remove the throttle body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2221 10. Remove the heater hose clamp bracket. 11. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. 12. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 13. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 14. Remove the all intake manifold mounting bolts and nuts, then remove the intake manifold from the cylinder head. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2222 15. Remove the harness clamps, then remove the intake manifold from the vehicle. Installation 1. Install the harness clamps to the intake manifold. 2. Install the intake manifold (A) with new gaskets (B), and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps, beginning with the inner bolt. 3. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2223 4. Install the intake manifold bracket (A). 5. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 6. Install the heater hose clamp bracket. 7. Install the throttle body (A) with a new gasket (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2224 8. Install the water bypass hoses. 9. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the intake manifold. ^ Throttle actuator connector ^ Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector ^ Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector ^ Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator connector 10. Connect the fuel feed hose, then install the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 11. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B), positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (C), and power steering (P/S) hose clamp (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2225 12. Install the injector cover. 13. Install the air intake duct. 14. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. 15. Install the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 16. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are installed correctly. 18. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2231 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2232 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2233 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2234 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2235 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2236 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2237 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2238 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2258 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "ON" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and oil pressure switch connector. 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the Original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) > Page 2261 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector. 8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to step 10. 9. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Do the oil pressure test. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and the oil pressure switch connector. 12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Oil seal driver attachment 96 07ZAD-PNAA100 1. Remove the transmission. 2. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 3. A/T model: Remove the drive plate. 4. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal. 5. Clean, and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 6. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 7. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the block to the specified installed height. 8. Measure the distance between the engine block (A) and oil seal (B). 9. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate. 10. A/T model: Install the drive plate. 11. Install the transmission. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Special Tools Required Oil seal driver 07LAD-PT3010A 1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal. 3. Clean, and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 4. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 5. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 6. Install the crankshaft pulley. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car > Page 2270 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Attachment, 60 mm 07LAD-SM40100 1. Using the special tools, Gently tap in the new oil seal until the driver bottoms on the oil pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2275 VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2276 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2277 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2278 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams 12. Oil Pressure Switch 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2279 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair EOP Sensor Removal/Installation EOP Sensor Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the EOP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the bracket (B), and the EOP sensor (C). 4. Install the EOP sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation > Page 2282 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2286 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft Sprocket Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the cam chain. 2. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. 4. Remove the camshaft sprocket. Installation 1. Install the camshaft sprocket. 2. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft sprocket mounting bolt, and install it. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. 3. Install the rocker arm assembly. 4. Install the cam chain. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal Timing Chain: Service and Repair Cam Chain Removal Cam Chain Removal NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 4. Remove the cylinder head cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 6. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 7. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 8. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block under the oil pan. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2298 9. Remove the bolt (A) securing the A/C line, then remove the upper torque rod (B). 10. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side engine mount bracket (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2299 11. Remove the oil pump. 12. Measure the tensioner rod length between the tensioner body and bottom of the flat surface section on the tensioner rod. If the length is more than the service limit, replace the cam chain. 13. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley. 14. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress the auto-tensioner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2300 15. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin. 16. Remove the auto-tensioner. 17. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 18. Remove the cam chain guide (A) and cam chain tensioner arm (B). 19. Remove the cam chain. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2301 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Cam Chain Installation Cam Chain Installation NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with the pointer (B) on the engine block. 2. Set the camshaft to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 3. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket with the colored piece (A) aligned with the mark (B) on the crankshaft sprocket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2302 4. Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket with the colored link plate (A) aligned with the mark (B) on the camshaft sprocket. 5. Install the cam chain guide (A) and cam chain tensioner arm (B). 6. Install the auto-tensioner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2303 7. Remove the pin or lock pin from the auto-tensioner. 8. Check the oil pump oil seal for damage. If the oil seal is damaged, replace the oil seal. 9. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 10. Clean, and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. 11. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the oil pump. 12. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper surface contact areas (A) on the oil pump and lower block upper surface contact areas (B) on the oil pump. 13. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the oil pump. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2304 14. Install the new O-rings (A) on the oil pump. Set the edge of the oil pump (B) to the edge of the oil pan (C), then install the oil pump on the engine block (D). Loosely install the dowel bolts (E), then tighten the 8 mm bolts (F). Tighten the 6 mm bolts (G) and dowel bolts. Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil pan and oil pump mating area. NOTE: ^ When installing the oil pump, do not slide the bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface. ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. ^ Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pump. 15. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then loosely tighten the new bolt and nut (B), and loosely tighten the bolt (C). 16. Install the ground cable (D). 17. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2305 18. Loosen the transmission mounting bolt and nuts (A). 19. Raise the hoist to full height. 20. Loosen the lower torque rod mounting bolt (A). 21. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2306 22. Tighten the side engine mount mounting bolts and nut. 23. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts. 24. Raise the hoist to full height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2307 25. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt. 26. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 27. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. 28. Install the upper torque rod (A), then tighten the new upper torque rod mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 29. Install the bolt (B) securing the A/C line. 30. Install the crankshaft pulley. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cam Chain Removal > Page 2308 31. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 32. Install the cylinder head cover. 33. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner. 34. Install the splash shield. 35. Install the front wheels. 36. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2312 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the chain case cover. 2. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress the auto-tensioner. 3. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2313 4. Remove the auto-tensioner. Installation 1. Install the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner. 3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain case cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 4. Clean and dry the chain case cover mating surfaces. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2314 5. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pump mating surface of the chain case cover. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 6. Install the chain case cover. NOTE: ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. ^ Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the chain case. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Install the new O-rings (A) on the oil pump. Set the edge of the oil pump (B) to the edge of the oil pan (C), then install the oil pump on the engine block (D). Loosely install the dowel bolts (E), then tighten the 8 mm bolts (F). Tighten the 6 mm bolts (G) and dowel bolts. Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil pan and oil pump mating area. NOTE: When installing the oil pump, do not slide the bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface. Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2323 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2324 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2325 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2326 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2327 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2328 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2329 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2330 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2331 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2332 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2333 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2334 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2335 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2336 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2337 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2338 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2339 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2340 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2341 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2342 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2343 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2344 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2345 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2346 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2347 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2348 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2349 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2350 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-0 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 7. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2354 68. Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2355 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VTEC System - This mechanism improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed, and engine load. - The VTEC mechanism changes the valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile. - The VTEC system changes the cam profile (angle) at cruising speeds. (Cam angle is changed to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss). Operation At engine start, and high load - The rocker arm oil control valve is OFF. - Oil pressure enters secondary rocker arm B from the oil passage in the intake rocker shaft. This forces the VTEC switching piston into secondary rocker arm A against the return spring and disengages the secondary arm A from the secondary arm B to stop valve actuation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2356 At cruise The rocker arm oil control valve switches oil pressure to the oil passage in the intake rocker arm shaft. Oil pressure then enters secondary rocker arm A, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into secondary rocker arm B, locking secondary rocker arms A and B together. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2357 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control valve connector (A) and the EOP sensor connector (B). 3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (C). 4. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse order of removal with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure ................................................................................................................................................. 380 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2362 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2363 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B - Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Without load conditions: Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T............................................................................................................ ..........................................................................................................670 ± 50 rpm A/T........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .670 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada M/T.......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T...................................................... .................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: Idle speed should be: M/T.................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T................................ .......................................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2367 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2368 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Apply the parking brake (check the headlight OFF). 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T 670 ± 50 rpm A/T 670 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) Canada M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam). Idle speed should be: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. If the idle speed is still not within specification, go to symptom troubleshooting. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace the air cleaner element. NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. If the maintenance minder indicated that air cleaner element replacement was needed, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not indicate that air cleaner element replacement was needed, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2377 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2378 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Electrode Gap Standard (New)............................................................................................................ ...........................................................1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2390 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque.................................................................................................................................................. ......................................25 N.m (2.5 kgf.cm, 18 lbf.ft) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2391 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2392 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner. NOTE: Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this will damage the electrode. - Use a chemical cleaner such as Carb Spray to clean contamination on the electrode. - When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the electrode. 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug gap is out of specification. Use only the listed spark plugs. NOTE: Do not adjust the gap (B) of iridium tip plugs. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2393 4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to 25 N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). If you replaced the spark plug by the maintenance minder requirement, reset the maintenance minder. If the maintenance minder did not require you, but you replaced the spark plug, go to step 5. 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 8. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 9. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 10. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2397 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. 7. Remove the four ignition coils. 8. Remove the four spark plugs. 9. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. 10. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 880 kPa (9.0 kgf/cm2, 128 psi) 11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 12. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2401 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 3. Select the correct thickness. feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2402 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Tighten the locknut. Specified Torque: 7 x 0.75 mm 14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10 ft. lbs.) 8. Recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 10. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 12. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2403 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 14. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 15. Install the cylinder head cover. 16. If the maintenance minder required to adjust the valve clearance, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to adjust the valve clearance, go to step 17. 17. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 20. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 21. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 22. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039 Date: 081031 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose 08-039 October 31, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Bolts Lose Tension (Supersedes 08-039, dated August 15, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley bolts may lose tension and eventually come loose. Loose pulley bolts may produce a pulley noise and could cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump pulley kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2413 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2414 *NOTE: If you're working on a 2006 Civic with A/C, and its drive belt is not routed as shown in the "WITH A/C" illustration, use a new drive belt (P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310) when you complete the repair.* 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2415 4. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12'o clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 5. * On vehicles with A/C, route the drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1.* 6. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 7. Center-punch a completion mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2416 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks Technical Service Bulletin # 08-038 Date: 081025 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks 08-038 October 25, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks (Supersedes 08-038, dated August 1, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley flange may crack. A cracked pulley flange may create a pulley noise, cause the water pump to fail, and cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump kit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2421 REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Drain the engine coolant from the radiator into a clean container, and save it for reuse: ^ Refer to steps 1 thru 3 on page 10-7 of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 1 thru 3. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the engine block. Do not reuse the coolant that drains from the block: ^ Refer to steps 4 thru 6 on page 10-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 4 thru 6.* 3. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2422 *NOTE: On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused.* 4. Remove the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-45 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT REM, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2423 5. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 7. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (one pivot bolt and one hex bolt). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2424 8. Remove the water pump (five bolts). *NOTE: Do not reuse the coolant that drains out when the pump comes off.* 9. Clean the mating surface of the water pump O-ring on the engine block. 10. Install a new water pump and O-ring. Tighten the water pump bolts to 12 N.m (8.7 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the drive belt auto-tensioner with the original hex bolt and a new pivot bolt. Torque the hex bolt to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the pivot bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on installing the pivot bolt correctly, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 12. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2425 13. Reinstall the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-46 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT INST, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 14. * On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 3.* 15. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 16. * Refill the radiator with the coolant you removed in step 1, then add about 2 quarts of new coolant, and loosely install the radiator cap.* 17. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan cycles twice, then stop the engine. 18. Top off the coolant in the radiator, then install the radiator cap, and clean up any coolant spills. 19. Center-punch a completion mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2426 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039 Date: 081031 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose 08-039 October 31, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Bolts Lose Tension (Supersedes 08-039, dated August 15, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley bolts may lose tension and eventually come loose. Loose pulley bolts may produce a pulley noise and could cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump pulley kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2432 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2433 *NOTE: If you're working on a 2006 Civic with A/C, and its drive belt is not routed as shown in the "WITH A/C" illustration, use a new drive belt (P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310) when you complete the repair.* 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2434 4. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12'o clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 5. * On vehicles with A/C, route the drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1.* 6. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 7. Center-punch a completion mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2435 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks Technical Service Bulletin # 08-038 Date: 081025 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks 08-038 October 25, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks (Supersedes 08-038, dated August 1, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley flange may crack. A cracked pulley flange may create a pulley noise, cause the water pump to fail, and cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump kit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2440 REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Drain the engine coolant from the radiator into a clean container, and save it for reuse: ^ Refer to steps 1 thru 3 on page 10-7 of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 1 thru 3. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the engine block. Do not reuse the coolant that drains from the block: ^ Refer to steps 4 thru 6 on page 10-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 4 thru 6.* 3. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2441 *NOTE: On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused.* 4. Remove the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-45 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT REM, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2442 5. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 7. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (one pivot bolt and one hex bolt). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2443 8. Remove the water pump (five bolts). *NOTE: Do not reuse the coolant that drains out when the pump comes off.* 9. Clean the mating surface of the water pump O-ring on the engine block. 10. Install a new water pump and O-ring. Tighten the water pump bolts to 12 N.m (8.7 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the drive belt auto-tensioner with the original hex bolt and a new pivot bolt. Torque the hex bolt to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the pivot bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on installing the pivot bolt correctly, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 12. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2444 13. Reinstall the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-46 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT INST, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 14. * On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 3.* 15. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 16. * Refill the radiator with the coolant you removed in step 1, then add about 2 quarts of new coolant, and loosely install the radiator cap.* 17. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan cycles twice, then stop the engine. 18. Top off the coolant in the radiator, then install the radiator cap, and clean up any coolant spills. 19. Center-punch a completion mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2445 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITIES US - DX, EX, LX AFTER COOLANT CHANGE *1 M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 5.2 liters (1.37 US gal) A/T .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ 5.5 liters (1.45 US gal) AFTER ENGINE OVERHAUL M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 6.5 liters (1.72 US gal) A/T .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ 7.1 liters (1.88 US gal) *1 = Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine. Reserve Tank capacity = 0.4 liters (0.11 US gal) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2451 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT TYPE Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Premixing is not required. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2452 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and MAX marks, then inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2453 Coolant: Service and Repair Coolant Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 4. Remove the drain bolt (A) located at the front of the engine block. 5. After the coolant has drained, apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Remove the reserve tank, then drain the coolant, and reinstall the reserve tank. 8. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2454 9. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: ^ Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. ^ Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water. 10. Loosely install the radiator cap. 11. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 12. If the maintenance minder required to replace the engine coolant, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the engine coolant, go to step 13. 13. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 16. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 17. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 18. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the HDS. 19. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed. 20. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again, and check for leaks. 21. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Drain Plug, Cylinder Block > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt Installation NOTE: When installing the drain bolt and/or sealing bolt, always use a new washer. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Outlet Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Water Outlet Water Outlet Removal and Installation Removal 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector (C). 5. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), upper radiator hose (B), and water bypass hose (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Outlet > Page 2463 6. Remove the water outlet (A) and ECT sensor 1 (B). Installation 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the water outlet mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 2. Clean, and dry the water outlet mating surfaces. 3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the cylinder head mating surface of the water outlet. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Outlet > Page 2464 4. Install the water outlet (A), then install the ECT sensor 1 (B) with a new O-ring (C). NOTE: ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with coolant. ^ Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the water outlet. 5. Install the air cleaner housing bracket (A), upper radiator hose (B), and water bypass hose (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Outlet > Page 2465 6. Connect the engine temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector (A). 7. Install the harness holder (B) on the cylinder head, then install the air cleaner housing bracket (C). 8. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. 9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Outlet > Page 2466 Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Replacement Heater Outlet Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 3. Remove the heater hose (A) from the clamp. 4. Remove the heater hose (B) and water bypass hose (C). 5. Remove the heater outlet (A). 6. Install the heater outlet with a new gasket (B). 7. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module Relay > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations 12. Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2479 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2480 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2481 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2482 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2483 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2484 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2485 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2486 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2487 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2488 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2489 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2490 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2491 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2492 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2493 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2494 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2495 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2496 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2497 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2498 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2499 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2500 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2501 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2502 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2503 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2504 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2505 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2506 65. Radiator Fan Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2507 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Fan Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). 2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to the No. 2 terminal and ground to the No. 1 terminal. 3. If either motor fails to run, or does not run smoothly, replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2511 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Five -Terminal Type B Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B > Page 2514 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally - Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2519 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 2522 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Locations Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating Heater Core: Service and Repair Heating Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 5. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hoses. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 7. Remove the dashboard. 8. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2528 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 10. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2529 12. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 13. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 14. Install the heater core in the reverse order of removal. 15. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2530 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heating/Air Conditioning Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Disconnect the A/C line from the evaporator core. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hose. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2531 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clips (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2532 12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). 13. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 14. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 15. Install the heater core and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 2533 - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2537 Radiator: Testing and Inspection Radiator Test 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the top of the filler neck. 2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks, and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2538 Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator and Fan Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Remove the bulkhead cover. 6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A) and hood switch connector (B), then remove the harness clamps (C). 7. Remove the reservoir hose (A), radiator cap base mounting bolts (B), clips (C), and radiator upper brackets (D). 8. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower radiator hose (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2539 9. Remove the splash shield. 10. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2 connector (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 11. Remove the condenser bracket mounting bolts (A), then remove the bulkhead (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2540 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2541 12. Pull up the radiator, then remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator. 13. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely. 14. Install the bulkhead in the reverse order of removal. Apply body paint to the bulkhead mounting bolts. 15. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Locations > Page 2545 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap Test 1. Remove the radiator cap (A). Wet the seal with engine coolant, then install it on a commercially available pressure tester (B). 2. Apply a pressure of 93 - 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Lower Radiator Hose Removal and Installation Removal 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (A), radiator, and lower radiator hose. 3. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick connector, and remove it from the radiator. Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. 4. Remove the clamp (C) from both ends of the lower radiator hose, and remove them from the thermostat and quick connector. Installation 1. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring are cracked or damaged, replace the connector. 2. Make sure the set ring is in place inside the quick connector. If the set ring is off the connector, replace the quick connector. 3. Replace the O-ring (C) in the quick connector. 4. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock to the connector, slide it straight down along the groove. 5. Install a new lower radiator hose on the quick connector, and install the clamp. 6. Clean the connecting surface of the radiator (E), then apply clean engine coolant around the connecting surface. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2549 7. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick connector (B) onto the radiator until you hear it click. 8. Install the new lower radiator hose on the thermostat, and install the clamp. 9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module Relay > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2557 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Five -Terminal Type B Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five -Terminal Type B > Page 2560 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally - Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2569 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 2572 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Standard Thermostat Starts Opening ..................................................................................................................................... ................................... 176 - 183°F (80 - 84°C) Fully Open ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 203°F (95°C) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2576 Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2577 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Thermostat Test Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature. To test a closed thermostat: 1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Note the temperature where the thermostat first opens, and where it is fully open. 3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open. Standard Thermostat Lift Height: Above 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Starts Opening: 176 - 183°F (80 84°C) Fully Open: 203°F (95°C) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2578 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the harness clamp bracket and thermostat cover, then remove the thermostat. 3. Install the thermostat with a new rubber seal. 4. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. 5. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Locations > Page 2582 Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing Removal and Installation Removal 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 3. Remove the harness bracket (A), and cover the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector with a tape to protect the connectors from engine coolant, then remove the lower radiator hose (B), the water bypass (C), and the heater hose (D). 4. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe. 5. Disconnect the EGR connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Locations > Page 2583 6. Remove the thermostat housing. 7. Remove the EGR valve (A), thermostat cover (B), and thermostat (C). Installation Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Locations > Page 2584 1. Install the new rubber seal (A) onto the thermostat, then install the thermostat (B) with pin (C) up, and install the thermostat cover (D). 2. Install the EGR valve (E) with a new gasket (P). 3. Install the thermostat housing (A), using a new gasket (B) and new C-ring (C). 4. Connect the EGR connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Locations > Page 2585 5. Install the EGR pipe (A), using the new gaskets (B). 6. Install the lower radiator hose (A), heater hose (B), and water bypass hoses (C), then install the harness bracket (D). 7. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. 8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039 Date: 081031 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose 08-039 October 31, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Bolts Lose Tension (Supersedes 08-039, dated August 15, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley bolts may lose tension and eventually come loose. Loose pulley bolts may produce a pulley noise and could cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump pulley kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2595 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2596 *NOTE: If you're working on a 2006 Civic with A/C, and its drive belt is not routed as shown in the "WITH A/C" illustration, use a new drive belt (P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310) when you complete the repair.* 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2597 4. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12'o clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 5. * On vehicles with A/C, route the drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1.* 6. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 7. Center-punch a completion mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2598 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks Technical Service Bulletin # 08-038 Date: 081025 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks 08-038 October 25, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks (Supersedes 08-038, dated August 1, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley flange may crack. A cracked pulley flange may create a pulley noise, cause the water pump to fail, and cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump kit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2603 REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Drain the engine coolant from the radiator into a clean container, and save it for reuse: ^ Refer to steps 1 thru 3 on page 10-7 of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 1 thru 3. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the engine block. Do not reuse the coolant that drains from the block: ^ Refer to steps 4 thru 6 on page 10-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 4 thru 6.* 3. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2604 *NOTE: On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused.* 4. Remove the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-45 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT REM, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2605 5. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 7. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (one pivot bolt and one hex bolt). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2606 8. Remove the water pump (five bolts). *NOTE: Do not reuse the coolant that drains out when the pump comes off.* 9. Clean the mating surface of the water pump O-ring on the engine block. 10. Install a new water pump and O-ring. Tighten the water pump bolts to 12 N.m (8.7 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the drive belt auto-tensioner with the original hex bolt and a new pivot bolt. Torque the hex bolt to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the pivot bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on installing the pivot bolt correctly, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 12. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2607 13. Reinstall the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-46 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT INST, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 14. * On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 3.* 15. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 16. * Refill the radiator with the coolant you removed in step 1, then add about 2 quarts of new coolant, and loosely install the radiator cap.* 17. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan cycles twice, then stop the engine. 18. Top off the coolant in the radiator, then install the radiator cap, and clean up any coolant spills. 19. Center-punch a completion mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2608 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039 Date: 081031 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose 08-039 October 31, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Bolts Lose Tension (Supersedes 08-039, dated August 15, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley bolts may lose tension and eventually come loose. Loose pulley bolts may produce a pulley noise and could cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump pulley kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2614 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2615 *NOTE: If you're working on a 2006 Civic with A/C, and its drive belt is not routed as shown in the "WITH A/C" illustration, use a new drive belt (P/N 04301-RNA-307, H/C 8503310) when you complete the repair.* 2. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 3. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2616 4. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12'o clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts. 5. * On vehicles with A/C, route the drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 1.* 6. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 7. Center-punch a completion mark below the 11th character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-039 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Bolts Come Loose > Page 2617 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks Technical Service Bulletin # 08-038 Date: 081025 Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks 08-038 October 25, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks (Supersedes 08-038, dated August 1, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND Due to a manufacturing problem, the water pump pulley flange may crack. A cracked pulley flange may create a pulley noise, cause the water pump to fail, and cause the drive belt to break. VEHICLES AFFECTED Some of the vehicles affected by this product update may be in your used vehicle inventory. These vehicles should be updated before they are sold or leased. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles were sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a water pump kit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2622 REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Drain the engine coolant from the radiator into a clean container, and save it for reuse: ^ Refer to steps 1 thru 3 on page 10-7 of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 1 thru 3. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the engine block. Do not reuse the coolant that drains from the block: ^ Refer to steps 4 thru 6 on page 10-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords COOLANT REPLACE, select Coolant Replacement (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list, and do steps 4 thru 6.* 3. From above the engine, set a long-handled, boxed-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, then remove the drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2623 *NOTE: On vehicles without A/C, the drive belt will be reused.* 4. Remove the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-45 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT REM, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2624 5. Insert a pulley holder (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) into one of the holes in the water pump pulley at the 12 o'clock position. The tool holds the pulley so you can loosen or tighten the pulley bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley (three bolts). 7. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (one pivot bolt and one hex bolt). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2625 8. Remove the water pump (five bolts). *NOTE: Do not reuse the coolant that drains out when the pump comes off.* 9. Clean the mating surface of the water pump O-ring on the engine block. 10. Install a new water pump and O-ring. Tighten the water pump bolts to 12 N.m (8.7 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the drive belt auto-tensioner with the original hex bolt and a new pivot bolt. Torque the hex bolt to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the pivot bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). NOTE: For important tips on installing the pivot bolt correctly, refer to ServiceNews article A07030I, Replacing the Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Pivot Bolt? Read This First. 12. Install a new water pump pulley with three new bolts. Insert the pulley holder in the 12 o'clock position to keep the pulley from moving while you torque the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb-ft). NOTE: ^ The exact torque is critical for a successful repair. To guarantee the correct torque, you must use an accurately calibrated torque wrench. It's OK to use a crowfoot socket wrench with the torque wrench. ^ Do not install the drive belt before you torque the pulley bolts. If you do, you won't get accurate torque readings. ^ Remove the pulley holder after you torque the pulley bolts, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2626 13. Reinstall the alternator: ^ Refer to page 4-46 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT INST, and select Alternator Removal and Installation (R18A1 and R18A4 Engine) from the list. 14. * On vehicles with A/C, route a new drive belt around the engine pulleys as shown above. On vehicles without A/C, route the original drive belt as shown in step 3.* 15. From above the engine, set a long-handled boxed end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner. Slowly turn the wrench counterclockwise, and slip the belt over the auto-tensioner pulley. Release the auto-tensioner, and remove the wrench. 16. * Refill the radiator with the coolant you removed in step 1, then add about 2 quarts of new coolant, and loosely install the radiator cap.* 17. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan cycles twice, then stop the engine. 18. Top off the coolant in the radiator, then install the radiator cap, and clean up any coolant spills. 19. Center-punch a completion mark below the ninth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Pulley: > 08-038 > Oct > 08 > Campaign - Water Pump Pulley Flange Cracks > Page 2627 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2632 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Removal/Installation 1. Remove the A/F sensor (sensor 1). 2. Remove the secondary HO2S (sensor 2). 3. Remove the EGR pipe. 4. Remove the cover (A). 5. Remove the TWC(B). 6. Remove the converter cover (C). 7. Install the TWC in the reverse order of removal with new gaskets (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2642 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 2651 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2656 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2657 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2658 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2659 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2665 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2666 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2667 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2668 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2669 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2670 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2671 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2672 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2673 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2674 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2675 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2676 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2677 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 2682 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2687 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2688 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2689 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 2690 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2696 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2697 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2698 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2699 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2700 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2701 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2702 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2703 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2704 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2705 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2706 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2707 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2708 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2709 Engine Control Module: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2710 46. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2713 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2714 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2715 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2716 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2717 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2718 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2719 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2720 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2721 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2722 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2723 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2724 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2725 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2726 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2727 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2728 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2729 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2730 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2731 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2732 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2733 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2734 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2735 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2736 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2737 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2738 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2739 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2740 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2741 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2742 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2743 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2744 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2745 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2746 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2747 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2748 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2749 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2750 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2751 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2752 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2753 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2754 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2755 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2756 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2757 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2758 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2759 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2760 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2761 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2762 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2763 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44p) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2766 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2767 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2768 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2769 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2770 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2771 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2772 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2773 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Connectors NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the ECM/PCM. 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the cover (A). 3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (A). 4. Remove the expansion tank (B). Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C), and probe the terminals from the terminal side of the connectors. 5. Check the terminal test port size, and select the suitable pin probe (male). 6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2774 7. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the terminal you need to check. 8. Gently slide the pin probe (male) into the terminal test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals. NOTE: For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male). - To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement. - Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Replace ECM/PCM. - Reset ECM/PCM. - Update ECM/PCM. - Replace or clean the throttle body. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. Procedure 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 degree F (90 degree C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. 6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2777 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC reset, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. Scan Tool Clear Command If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure; CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete. DTC Clear 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM Reset 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2778 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2779 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required - Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200 * - Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 * - HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401 * - Available through the Honda tool and Equipment Program Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM or update the ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Updating the ECM/PCM NOTE: - Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully changed. - Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave the ignition switch ON. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. - If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or was flashed during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5 and clean the throttle body after updating the ECM/PCM. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the ECM/PCM. 7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on the screen. If you run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D4 or immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the ECM/PCM. Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. - Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). - Shut down the HDS. - Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. - Reboot the HDS. - Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2780 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. Substituting the ECM/PCM NOTE: Use this procedure when substituting a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 5 to 10, and clean the throttle body after substituting the ECM/PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then Select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Remove the cover (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2781 9. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 11. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 13. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 14. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. 15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 16. Enter the immobilizer code using the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you to start the engine. 17. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 18. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2782 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Replacement ECM/PCM Replacement NOTE: - Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version. - If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure. - During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then continue. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 through 10,19 through 24, and 27 through 29, and do the following procedures after replacing the ECM/PCM; Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter. - Replace the ATF (A/T model). - Clean the throttle body. 5. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 8. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life data from the original ECM/PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new ECM/PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 9. A/T model: Select the A/T system with the HDS. 10. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Remove the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2783 13. Remove the cover (A). 14. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 15. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: The ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 16. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 19. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 8, go to step 22 (A/T model) or step 25 (M/T model). Otherwise, go to step 20. 20. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 21. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 22. A/T model: If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 10, go to step 25. Otherwise go to step 23. 23. A/T model: Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. 24. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 25. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS. 26. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 27. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 7 clean the throttle body, then go to step 28. 28. If the READ DATA failed in step 8 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 21, replace the engine oil and engine oil filter, then go to step 29 (A/T model) or step 30 (M/T model). 29. If the READ DATA failed in step 10 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 26, replace the ATF, then go to step 30. 30. Select PGM-FI system and reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2784 32. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 33. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 34. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and or the navigation system (if equipped), then set the clock (if equipped). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2788 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2789 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2790 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2791 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2792 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2793 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2804 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2805 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2806 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2807 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2808 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2809 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2814 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground, then terminal No. 4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the No. 1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 2817 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there continuity? YES - The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 2818 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally-Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2824 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2825 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 2828 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2829 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2833 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2834 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2835 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2836 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2843 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2844 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2845 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 2848 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 2849 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 2850 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2854 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 2857 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2861 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2862 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2863 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2864 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2865 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2869 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2873 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2874 Electric Load Sensor: Service and Repair ELD Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Remove the fuses (A). 4. Using two flat-tip screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the fuse/relay box base (B) from the fuse/relay box housing (C). NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or damaged. 5. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2875 6. Turn the housing over again, then remove the ELD (A). 7. Install the ELD in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2882 196. Under Middle Rear of Vehicle DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2883 118. FTP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2884 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2885 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the hose (B), and remove the FTP sensor(C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2889 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2890 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2891 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2892 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2896 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2897 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2898 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2899 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2903 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2904 121. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2905 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2906 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2910 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2919 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2920 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2921 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2927 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2928 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 2929 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2932 25. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2933 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 139. A/F Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 149. HO2S, Secondary (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor > Page 2936 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is located on the TWC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on S6176, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 2939 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2947 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2952 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2956 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2957 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2959 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2960 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2969 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2974 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2975 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 2978 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2979 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2983 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2984 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2985 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2986 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2993 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2999 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3000 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3003 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3004 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3005 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3009 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3010 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3011 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3012 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3013 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3022 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3023 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3024 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3025 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure ................................................................................................................................................. 380 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3030 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3031 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B - Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Without load conditions: Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T............................................................................................................ ..........................................................................................................670 ± 50 rpm A/T........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .670 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada M/T.......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T...................................................... .................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: Idle speed should be: M/T.................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T................................ .......................................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3035 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3036 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Apply the parking brake (check the headlight OFF). 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T 670 ± 50 rpm A/T 670 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) Canada M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam). Idle speed should be: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. If the idle speed is still not within specification, go to symptom troubleshooting. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace the air cleaner element. NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. If the maintenance minder indicated that air cleaner element replacement was needed, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not indicate that air cleaner element replacement was needed, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3045 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3046 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Electrode Gap Standard (New)............................................................................................................ ...........................................................1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3058 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque.................................................................................................................................................. ......................................25 N.m (2.5 kgf.cm, 18 lbf.ft) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3059 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3060 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner. NOTE: Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this will damage the electrode. - Use a chemical cleaner such as Carb Spray to clean contamination on the electrode. - When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the electrode. 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug gap is out of specification. Use only the listed spark plugs. NOTE: Do not adjust the gap (B) of iridium tip plugs. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3061 4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to 25 N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). If you replaced the spark plug by the maintenance minder requirement, reset the maintenance minder. If the maintenance minder did not require you, but you replaced the spark plug, go to step 5. 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 8. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 9. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 10. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3065 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. 7. Remove the four ignition coils. 8. Remove the four spark plugs. 9. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. 10. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 880 kPa (9.0 kgf/cm2, 128 psi) 11. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 12. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 13. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3069 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head. 3. Select the correct thickness. feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3070 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Tighten the locknut. Specified Torque: 7 x 0.75 mm 14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10 ft. lbs.) 8. Recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 10. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 12. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3071 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2 piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with the top edge of the head. 14. Check, and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 15. Install the cylinder head cover. 16. If the maintenance minder required to adjust the valve clearance, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to adjust the valve clearance, go to step 17. 17. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 20. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 21. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 22. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection A/C Signal: Testing and Inspection A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn the blower switch on. 3. Turn the A/C switch on. 4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 5. NO - Do the A/C system test. 5. Check the A/C system. Does the A/C system operate? Yes - The air conditioning system circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? Yes - Do the A/C system test. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A14 to body ground with a jumper wire several times. Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/C clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. If the connections are OK, check the A/C clutch relay, repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A14) and the A/C clutch relay and the other A/C systems. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3080 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3083 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3084 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3088 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3089 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3090 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3091 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3095 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3096 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3097 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3098 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3105 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3106 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3107 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3110 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3111 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3112 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3116 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 3119 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3123 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3124 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3125 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3126 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3127 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3131 81. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3132 217. DLC Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3133 Data Link Connector: Testing and Inspection DLC Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: Make sure the HDS and the DLC cable of the HDS is normal. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS identify the vehicle? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 19. 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS. Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? Yes - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the SRS indicator. Does the SRS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to the SRS system's general troubleshooting information. NO - Go to step 7. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS indicator. Does the ABS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to the ABS system's general troubleshooting information. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the immobilizer indicator. Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or flash? Yes - Go to the immobilizer system's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function. 12. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS. Are any B-CAN DTCs indicated? Yes - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 13. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3134 15. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground. Is there 5 Ohm or less? Yes - Go to step 16. NO - Go to step 17. 16. Continue to check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts, one at a time: - SRS unit connector A (28P) - ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector - Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector - Audio unit 17P connector - Under-dash fuse/relay box Q 16P connector Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected? Yes - Replace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected. NO - Repair short in the wire between the DLC (K-line) and the ABS modulator-control unit, the SRS unit, the immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, or the under-dash fuse/relay box. 17. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a jumper wire. 18. Check for continuity between body ground and these connector terminals: Is there continuity between the DLC terminal and each of the terminals in the chart? Yes - Replace the unit that does not communicate with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3135 NO - Repair open in the wire between the DLC (K-line) and the appropriate connector. 19. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function. 20. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS. Is DTCB1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated? Yes - Go to step 33. NO - Go to step 21. 21. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 23. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to Step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 16 and the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. 24. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 and No.16. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to step 25. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 4 and G502. 25. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 26. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 27. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 28. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3136 29. Connect DLC terminal No. 6 to body ground with a jumper wire. 30. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A36 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 31. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A36) and DLC terminal No. 6. 31. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground with a jumper wire. 32. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A37 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3137 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A37) and DLC terminal No. 14. 33. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start and idle smoothly? Yes - Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 34. 34. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 35. Check the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Yes - Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 36. NO - Repair short in the wire between the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay box. Also replace the No. 2 B MAIN (50 A) fuse. 36. Inspect the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Yes - Go to step 43. NO - Go to step 37. 37. Remove the blown No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 38. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 C (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 39. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 individually. Is there continuity? Yes - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. Also replace the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 40. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3138 40. Disconnect each of the components or connectors below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector A (44P) - Each injector 2P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector - Ignition coil relay - Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control-relay Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected? Yes - Replace the component that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 41. 41. Disconnect the all connectors from these components: - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector A (44P) - Injectors - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor - Ignition coil relay - Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay(F) 42. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 C and each item. Also replace the No.19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse. NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 C. Also replace the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse. 43. Inspect the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Yes - Go to step 56. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3139 NO - Go to step 44. 44. Remove the blown No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 45. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 46. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P). 47. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C36 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 48. NO - Replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 48. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box 49. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C36 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C36), between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), or between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit. Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A)fuse. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3140 NO - Go to step 50. 50. Remove the rear seat. 51. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member and the access panel from the floor. 52. Disconnect the fuel pump 4P connector. 53. Check for continuity between fuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 54. 54. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A). 55. Check for continuity between fuel pump 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. 56. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 57. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (44P) and C (44P). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3141 58. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 59. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal C36 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to step 60. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C36). 60. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A6 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to step 65. NO - Go to step 61. 61. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 62. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 C (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3142 63. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to step 64. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 64. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 4 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A6. Is there continuity? Yes - Test PGM-FI main relay 1 C. If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A6) and PGM-FI main relay 1 C. 65. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 66. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 C (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3143 67. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Yes - Go to step 68. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 68. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 C 4P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A8. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 69. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A8) and PGM-FI main relay 1 C. 69. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 C. Is PGM-FI main relay 1 C OK? Yes - Go to step 70. NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 C. 70. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3144 71. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals B1, B36, C2, C40 and C44 individually. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 72. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B1, B36, C2, C40, C44) and G101, A/T model, M/T model. 72. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C13 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 73. NO - Go to step 74. 73. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C13 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts, one at a time: - MAP sensor 3P connector - EOP sensor 3P connector - Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected? Yes - Replace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C13) and the MAP sensor, the EOP sensor or the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3145 74. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B18 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 75. NO - Go to step 76. 75. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B18 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts, one at a time: - IMT actuator 5P connector - EGR valve 6P connector - Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected? Yes - Replace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B18) and the IMT actuator, the EGR valve or the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor. 76. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C12 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 77. NO - Go to step 78. 77. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C12 and body ground, while disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C12) and the throttle body. NO - Replace the throttle body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3146 78. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 79. NO - Go to step 80. 79. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground, while disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A25) and APP sensor A. NO - Replace the accelerator pedal module. 80. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A24 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 81. NO - Go to step 82. 81. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A24 and body ground, while disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A24) and APP sensor B. NO - Replace the accelerator pedal module. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3147 82. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A19 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 83. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 83. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A19 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts, one at a time: - A/C pressure sensor 3P connector - FTP sensor 3P connector Did either part cause an open when it was disconnected? Yes - Replace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A19) and the A/C pressure sensor or the FTP sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3151 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3155 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3156 Electric Load Sensor: Service and Repair ELD Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Remove the fuses (A). 4. Using two flat-tip screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the fuse/relay box base (B) from the fuse/relay box housing (C). NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or damaged. 5. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3157 6. Turn the housing over again, then remove the ELD (A). 7. Install the ELD in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3161 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3162 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3166 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 3175 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3180 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3181 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3182 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3183 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3189 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3190 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3191 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3192 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3193 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3194 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3195 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3196 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3197 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3198 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3199 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3200 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3201 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 3206 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3211 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3212 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3213 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3214 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3220 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3221 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3222 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3223 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3224 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3225 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3226 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3227 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3228 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3229 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3230 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3231 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3232 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3233 Engine Control Module: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3234 46. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3237 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3239 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3240 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3241 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3242 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3243 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3244 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3245 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3246 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3247 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3248 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3249 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3250 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3251 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3252 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3253 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3254 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3255 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3256 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3257 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3258 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3259 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3260 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3261 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3262 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3263 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3264 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44p) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3290 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3291 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3292 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3293 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3294 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3295 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3296 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3297 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Connectors NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the ECM/PCM. 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the cover (A). 3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (A). 4. Remove the expansion tank (B). Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C), and probe the terminals from the terminal side of the connectors. 5. Check the terminal test port size, and select the suitable pin probe (male). 6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3298 7. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the terminal you need to check. 8. Gently slide the pin probe (male) into the terminal test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals. NOTE: For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male). - To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement. - Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Replace ECM/PCM. - Reset ECM/PCM. - Update ECM/PCM. - Replace or clean the throttle body. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. Procedure 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 degree F (90 degree C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. 6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3301 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC reset, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. Scan Tool Clear Command If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure; CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete. DTC Clear 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM Reset 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3302 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3303 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required - Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200 * - Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 * - HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401 * - Available through the Honda tool and Equipment Program Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM or update the ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Updating the ECM/PCM NOTE: - Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully changed. - Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave the ignition switch ON. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. - If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or was flashed during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5 and clean the throttle body after updating the ECM/PCM. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the ECM/PCM. 7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on the screen. If you run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D4 or immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the ECM/PCM. Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. - Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). - Shut down the HDS. - Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. - Reboot the HDS. - Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3304 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. Substituting the ECM/PCM NOTE: Use this procedure when substituting a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 5 to 10, and clean the throttle body after substituting the ECM/PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then Select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Remove the cover (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3305 9. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 11. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 13. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 14. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. 15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 16. Enter the immobilizer code using the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you to start the engine. 17. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 18. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3306 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Replacement ECM/PCM Replacement NOTE: - Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version. - If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure. - During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then continue. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 through 10,19 through 24, and 27 through 29, and do the following procedures after replacing the ECM/PCM; Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter. - Replace the ATF (A/T model). - Clean the throttle body. 5. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 8. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life data from the original ECM/PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new ECM/PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 9. A/T model: Select the A/T system with the HDS. 10. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Remove the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3307 13. Remove the cover (A). 14. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 15. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: The ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 16. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 19. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 8, go to step 22 (A/T model) or step 25 (M/T model). Otherwise, go to step 20. 20. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 21. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 22. A/T model: If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 10, go to step 25. Otherwise go to step 23. 23. A/T model: Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. 24. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 25. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS. 26. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 27. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 7 clean the throttle body, then go to step 28. 28. If the READ DATA failed in step 8 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 21, replace the engine oil and engine oil filter, then go to step 29 (A/T model) or step 30 (M/T model). 29. If the READ DATA failed in step 10 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 26, replace the ATF, then go to step 30. 30. Select PGM-FI system and reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3308 32. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 33. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 34. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and or the navigation system (if equipped), then set the clock (if equipped). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3315 196. Under Middle Rear of Vehicle DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3316 118. FTP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3317 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3318 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the hose (B), and remove the FTP sensor(C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations Multiplex Integrated Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3324 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3325 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3326 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams Multiplex Integrated Control System - Circuit Diagram Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352 Multiplex Integrated Control System - Circuit Diagram Part 2 Wiring Diagrams Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353 Diagram 50-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354 Diagram 50-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355 Diagram 50-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3356 Information Bus: Description and Operation System Description MICU Control Functions Index The MICU (built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the B-CAN components. The MICU controls many systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other B-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS. Refer to each system circuit diagram for details. The MICU also controls the function of these circuits: - Entry lights control (map lights and ceiling light) - Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control) - Horn - Interlock system - Key-in reminder - Keyless entry - Lights-on reminder - Power door locks - Seat belt reminder - Security alarm - Turn signal/hazard flasher - Wiper/washer Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. - The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed. - Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3357 Gateway Function The gauge control module (tach) acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function. NOTE: For further information about Error indication, refer to the gauge control module self-diagnostic function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3358 Self-diagnostic Function By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is distinguished from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HDS. When performing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the MICU. The MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function its self. Wake-up and Sleep Function The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the ignition switch is OFF. - In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. - As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode immediately wakes up and begins to function. - When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. - The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if a key is in the ignition. - The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode. NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test. Fail-safe Function To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to operate normally. Hardware Fail-safe Control Fail-safe function When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value. Software Fail-safe Control Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3359 When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a pre-programmed value. Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not store DTCs. Entry Lights Control System The MICU controls the ceiling light ON/OFF and dimming based upon the input signals from each switch. Lighting System (Headlights, Parking Lights, Side Marker Lights, License Plate Lights, and Taillights The MICU contains the relay circuits of the headlight high/low beam and taillights, and controls the lighting system ON/OFF based upon the input signals from the combination light switch. Daytime Running Lights The MICU controls the exterior lights as a daytime running lights based upon the input signals from the each switch. Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher based upon the input signals from the turn signal and hazard warning switches. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3360 Power Door Locks (Vehicle Speed Sense) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN and input signals. Power Door Locks (Normally LOCK/UNLOCK Operation) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch. Door Lock Response Operation The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN signals. Power Window Key-off Operation The MICU controls the power windows key-off operation based upon the input signals. Keyless Entry System The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3361 Keyless PANIC The MICU controls the keyless PANIC based upon the B-CAN signals. Security Alarm System The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Key-in Reminder The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1, the driver's door switch, and the driver's door lock knob switch signals. Key Interlock (A/T) The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the IG1, the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch signals. Answer Back Response Operation The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the B-CAN signals. Wiper/Washer The MICU controls the wiper motor and the washer motor based upon the IG1 and the wiper/washer switch signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3362 Collision Detection Signal (CDS) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1 and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3363 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3364 HDS Inputs and Commands Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the most current software is loaded. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems NOTE: Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first. Using the HDS (Preferred method) 1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs. See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C or D. See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable) 1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test. 2. Check for DTCs. 3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in the order below. 1. Battery voltage DTCs 2. Internal error DTCs 3. Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first) 4. Signal error DTCs 4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure. Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating. 1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved. 2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit. System Description System Description Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3367 MICU Control Functions Index The MICU (built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the B-CAN components. The MICU controls many systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other B-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS. Refer to each system circuit diagram for details. The MICU also controls the function of these circuits: - Entry lights control (map lights and ceiling light) - Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control) - Horn - Interlock system - Key-in reminder - Keyless entry - Lights-on reminder - Power door locks - Seat belt reminder - Security alarm - Turn signal/hazard flasher - Wiper/washer Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. - The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed. - Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3368 Gateway Function The gauge control module (tach) acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function. NOTE: For further information about Error indication, refer to the gauge control module self-diagnostic function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3369 Self-diagnostic Function By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is distinguished from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HDS. When performing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the MICU. The MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function its self. Wake-up and Sleep Function The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the ignition switch is OFF. - In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. - As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode immediately wakes up and begins to function. - When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. - The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if a key is in the ignition. - The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode. NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test. Fail-safe Function To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to operate normally. Hardware Fail-safe Control Fail-safe function When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value. Software Fail-safe Control Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3370 When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a pre-programmed value. Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not store DTCs. Entry Lights Control System The MICU controls the ceiling light ON/OFF and dimming based upon the input signals from each switch. Lighting System (Headlights, Parking Lights, Side Marker Lights, License Plate Lights, and Taillights The MICU contains the relay circuits of the headlight high/low beam and taillights, and controls the lighting system ON/OFF based upon the input signals from the combination light switch. Daytime Running Lights The MICU controls the exterior lights as a daytime running lights based upon the input signals from the each switch. Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher based upon the input signals from the turn signal and hazard warning switches. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3371 Power Door Locks (Vehicle Speed Sense) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN and input signals. Power Door Locks (Normally LOCK/UNLOCK Operation) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch. Door Lock Response Operation The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN signals. Power Window Key-off Operation The MICU controls the power windows key-off operation based upon the input signals. Keyless Entry System The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3372 Keyless PANIC The MICU controls the keyless PANIC based upon the B-CAN signals. Security Alarm System The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Key-in Reminder The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1, the driver's door switch, and the driver's door lock knob switch signals. Key Interlock (A/T) The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the IG1, the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch signals. Answer Back Response Operation The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the B-CAN signals. Wiper/Washer The MICU controls the wiper motor and the washer motor based upon the IG1 and the wiper/washer switch signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3373 Collision Detection Signal (CDS) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1 and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3374 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3375 HDS Inputs and Commands Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the most current software is loaded. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3376 Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Reading Codes with a manufacturer's scan tool. With Generic Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Reading Codes with a generic scan tool. Without Scan Tool How to display DTCs on the gauge control module (tach) While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer display when the communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset button. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display. How to clear the DTC While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET button for more than 10 seconds. With Manufacturer's Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Clearing Trouble Codes with a manufacturer's scan tool. With Generic Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Clearing Trouble Codes with a generic scan tool. Without Scan Tool Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3377 How to display DTCs on the gauge control module (tach) While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer display when the communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset button. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display. How to clear the DTC While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET button for more than 10 seconds. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3378 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems NOTE: Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first. Using the HDS (Preferred method) 1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs. See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C or D. See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable) 1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test. 2. Check for DTCs. 3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in the order below. 1. Battery voltage DTCs 2. Internal error DTCs 3. Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first) 4. Signal error DTCs 4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure. Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating. 1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved. 2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit. System Description System Description Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3379 MICU Control Functions Index The MICU (built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the B-CAN components. The MICU controls many systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other B-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS. Refer to each system circuit diagram for details. The MICU also controls the function of these circuits: - Entry lights control (map lights and ceiling light) - Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control) - Horn - Interlock system - Key-in reminder - Keyless entry - Lights-on reminder - Power door locks - Seat belt reminder - Security alarm - Turn signal/hazard flasher - Wiper/washer Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. - The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed. - Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3380 Gateway Function The gauge control module (tach) acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function. NOTE: For further information about Error indication, refer to the gauge control module self-diagnostic function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3381 Self-diagnostic Function By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is distinguished from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HDS. When performing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the MICU. The MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function its self. Wake-up and Sleep Function The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the ignition switch is OFF. - In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. - As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode immediately wakes up and begins to function. - When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. - The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if a key is in the ignition. - The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode. NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test. Fail-safe Function To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to operate normally. Hardware Fail-safe Control Fail-safe function When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value. Software Fail-safe Control Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3382 When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a pre-programmed value. Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not store DTCs. Entry Lights Control System The MICU controls the ceiling light ON/OFF and dimming based upon the input signals from each switch. Lighting System (Headlights, Parking Lights, Side Marker Lights, License Plate Lights, and Taillights The MICU contains the relay circuits of the headlight high/low beam and taillights, and controls the lighting system ON/OFF based upon the input signals from the combination light switch. Daytime Running Lights The MICU controls the exterior lights as a daytime running lights based upon the input signals from the each switch. Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher based upon the input signals from the turn signal and hazard warning switches. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3383 Power Door Locks (Vehicle Speed Sense) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN and input signals. Power Door Locks (Normally LOCK/UNLOCK Operation) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch. Door Lock Response Operation The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN signals. Power Window Key-off Operation The MICU controls the power windows key-off operation based upon the input signals. Keyless Entry System The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3384 Keyless PANIC The MICU controls the keyless PANIC based upon the B-CAN signals. Security Alarm System The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals. Key-in Reminder The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1, the driver's door switch, and the driver's door lock knob switch signals. Key Interlock (A/T) The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the IG1, the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch signals. Answer Back Response Operation The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the B-CAN signals. Wiper/Washer The MICU controls the wiper motor and the washer motor based upon the IG1 and the wiper/washer switch signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3385 Collision Detection Signal (CDS) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1 and the B-CAN signals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3386 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3387 HDS Inputs and Commands Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the most current software is loaded. With Manufacturer's Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Reading Codes with a manufacturer's scan tool. With Generic Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Reading Codes with a generic scan tool. Without Scan Tool Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3388 How to display DTCs on the gauge control module (tach) While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer display when the communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset button. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display. How to clear the DTC While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET button for more than 10 seconds. With Manufacturer's Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Clearing Trouble Codes with a manufacturer's scan tool. With Generic Scan Tool NOTE: Manufacturer does not supply information for Clearing Trouble Codes with a generic scan tool. Without Scan Tool How to display DTCs on the gauge control module (tach) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3389 While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer display when the communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset button. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display. How to clear the DTC While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET button for more than 10 seconds. Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures For information regarding diagnosis of all B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Codes - See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions MICU Input Test MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the multiplex integrated control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3390 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first, then perform this diagnosis if the symptom is related to the B-CAN system. NOTE: Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures in this section. 1. Compare the symptom with this list of B-CAN related systems: - Gauge control module - Exterior lights - Turn signals Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3391 - Entry light control - Interior lights - Door-open and trunk-open indicators - Horns (security and panic) - Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, and parking brake) - Power window/moonroof timer - Wiper/washer - Security - Keyless entry - Power door locks - Key interlock - Dash light brightness Is the symptom related to the B-CAN system? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Go to the system troubleshooting for the system with the symptom. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A), then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, select UNIT INFORMATION, and then select CONNECTED UNIT listed to see if the following control units are communicating with the HDS. MICU - Gauge control module - Immobilizer-keyless control unit NOTE: - If a unit is communicating with the HDS, DETECT will be displayed. - If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not equipped, "Not Available" will be displayed. Are all control units communicating with the HDS? YES - Go to step 4. NO - If any of the control units are not communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B. If all units are not communicating or only the MICU is communicating, go to DTC B1000 troubleshooting. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/B Code Charts/B1000 4. Select the system that has the problem from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then select DTCs. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 5. NO - If the problem is related to one of the following items, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C if the system does not stop or turn off. Go to Test Mode D if the system does not run or turn on. - Exterior lights - Turn signals - Entry light control - Interior lights Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3392 - Horn (security and panic) - Wiper/washer If the problem is related to one of the foil owing items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual system. Gauge control module - Door-open and trunk-open indicators - Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, and parking brake) - Security - Keyless entry - Key interlock - Dash light brightness - Audio system - Navigation (if equipped) 5. Record all DTCs, and sort then by DTC type. 6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order: - Battery voltage DTCs. - Internal error DTCs. - Loss of communication DTCs. Begin troubleshooting with the lowest number first (Example: if DTC B1008 and B1011 are retrieved, begin by troubleshooting B1008). - Signal error DTCs. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B Perform this diagnosis if any of the control units are not communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS) as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu. 2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of communication DTCs. Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the MICU. 3. Perform the input test for the unit not communicating with the HDS. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the B-CAN system does not stop or turn off. NOTE: - If the component does not turn on, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D. - See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls the output devices. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures in this section. 1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu from the HDS. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and check the input of the switch that controls the component. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3393 Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 6. 4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the malfunctioning component. Is the output signal OFF? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the control unit that controls the device that will not turn OFF. 5. Check the relay, if applicable, then check for a short in the wire between the relay and the component, the relay and control unit, or the component and control unit. Are the relay and the wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that controls the component that will not turn OFF. NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire harness. 6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors the switch. Is the switch and wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch. NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the B-CAN system does not run or come on. NOTE: - If the component does not turn off or stop, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C. - See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls the output devices. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures in this section. 1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse and recheck. 2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu from the HDS. Are any DTCs indicated ? YES - Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. NO - Go to step 3. 3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 4. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and check output signal for the malfunctioning component. Is there an output signal? YES - Go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3394 NO - Go to step 9. 5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning component. Are the relay and circuit OK? YES - Go to step 6. NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit. 6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning component. Does the output device pass the function test? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the component. 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected, connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning output device and body ground on the wire that the control unit uses to control the output device circuit. 8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE menu, and do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning component. Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or 0 V to 12 V)? YES - Replace the component. NO - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component. 9. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and make sure the switch signal input for the malfunctioning system indicates a change when operated. Does the switch input indicated ON when the switch is ON? YES - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then check for an open or a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors it. Is the switch and the wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch. NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (Without the HDS) Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the HDS) Special Tools Required MPCS (MCIC) service connector 07WAZ-001010A Test Mode 1 Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first, then perform this diagnosis if the HDS is not available. 1. Check the No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3395 2. Remove the left kick panel. - 4 door - 2 door 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the ceiling light switch to the middle (door) position. 4. Connect the MFCS service connector (A) to the MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling light. When the ceiling light flashes quickly once, and then goes off the system is in Test Mode 1. 6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control module (tach) odometer/trip meter display while still in Test Mode 1. Push the odometer select/reset button to display the next code. After you get to the last code, the display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the display will read NO. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 10. 7. Record all DTCs and sort them. 8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order: - Battery voltage DTCs - Internal error DTCs - Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first) - Signal error DTCs 9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the select/reset button for about 13 seconds. You will hear a beep to confirm the code have been cleared. Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for codes. Test Mode 2 10. Remove the MFCS service connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5-10 seconds, then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system enters Mode 2, the ceiling light will flash two times quickly and then go off. NOTE: If the MFCS connector is disconnected for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test Mode 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3396 11. The above tables list the circuits that can be checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is faulty, there will be no indication. Does the ceiling light work properly in all switch positions? YES - Go to function and input test for the system related to the failure. NO - Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty switch. Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test 1. Shift to the sleep mode: Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the key. If the MICU receives no signals from the inputs listed above, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds. 2. Confirm the sleep mode: Check for voltage on the B-CAN communication line (PNK wires); there should be battery voltage in the sleep mode. Check the parasitic draw at Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3397 the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should change from about 200 mA to less than 35 mA. 3. Shift to the wake up mode: When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit-receiver, and ECM/PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each other through the communication lines. When any switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it wakes up its related control unit which, in turn, wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the above table for the switch most related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up. NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same time. In the table as shown above, the control unit is followed by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up. Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3398 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3399 HDS Inputs and Commands Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the most current software is loaded. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3403 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3404 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3405 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3406 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3410 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3411 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3412 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3413 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3414 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3415 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3419 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function. Does the MIL indicator flash? Yes - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module (tachometer), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control module (tachometer). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? Yes - Go to step 5. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect the HDS. 7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A31 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A31) and the SRS unit, the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3423 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3424 121. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3425 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3426 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3430 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3439 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3440 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3441 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3447 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3448 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3449 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3452 25. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3453 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 139. A/F Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 149. HO2S, Secondary (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor > Page 3456 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is located on the TWC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on S6176, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3459 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3466 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3467 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3468 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3469 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3470 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3471 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3476 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 3485 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3490 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3491 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3492 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3493 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3499 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3500 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3501 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3502 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3503 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3504 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3505 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3506 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3507 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3508 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3509 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3510 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3511 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 3516 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3521 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3522 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3523 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 3524 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3530 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3531 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3532 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3533 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3534 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3535 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3536 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3537 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3538 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3539 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3540 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3541 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 03-020 > Apr > 10 > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3542 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3543 Engine Control Module: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3544 46. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3553 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3554 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3555 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3556 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3557 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3558 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3559 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3560 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3561 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3565 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3566 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3567 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3568 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3569 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3570 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3571 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3572 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3573 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3574 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3575 242. ECM/PCM (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3576 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3577 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3578 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3579 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3580 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3581 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3582 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3583 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3584 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3585 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3586 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3587 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3588 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3589 ECM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3590 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3591 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3592 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3593 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3594 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3595 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) - Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3596 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) - Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3597 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44p) - Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3600 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3601 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3602 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3603 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3604 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (44P) Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3605 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3606 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (44P) Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3607 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Connectors NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the ECM/PCM. 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the cover (A). 3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (A). 4. Remove the expansion tank (B). Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C), and probe the terminals from the terminal side of the connectors. 5. Check the terminal test port size, and select the suitable pin probe (male). 6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3608 7. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the terminal you need to check. 8. Gently slide the pin probe (male) into the terminal test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals. NOTE: For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male). - To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement. - Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Replace ECM/PCM. - Reset ECM/PCM. - Update ECM/PCM. - Replace or clean the throttle body. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. Procedure 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 degree F (90 degree C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. 6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3611 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC reset, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. Scan Tool Clear Command If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure; CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete. DTC Clear 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM Reset 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3612 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3613 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required - Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200 * - Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 * - HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401 * - Available through the Honda tool and Equipment Program Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM or update the ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Updating the ECM/PCM NOTE: - Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software version. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully changed. - Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. If there is a problem with the update, leave the ignition switch ON. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. - If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or was flashed during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5 and clean the throttle body after updating the ECM/PCM. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the ECM/PCM. 7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on the screen. If you run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D4 or immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the ECM/PCM. Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. - Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). - Shut down the HDS. - Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. - Reboot the HDS. - Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3614 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. Substituting the ECM/PCM NOTE: Use this procedure when substituting a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 5 to 10, and clean the throttle body after substituting the ECM/PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then Select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Remove the cover (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3615 9. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 11. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 13. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 14. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. 15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 16. Enter the immobilizer code using the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you to start the engine. 17. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 18. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3616 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Replacement ECM/PCM Replacement NOTE: - Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version. - If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure. - During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then continue. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 through 10,19 through 24, and 27 through 29, and do the following procedures after replacing the ECM/PCM; Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter. - Replace the ATF (A/T model). - Clean the throttle body. 5. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 8. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life data from the original ECM/PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new ECM/PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 9. A/T model: Select the A/T system with the HDS. 10. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. - If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Remove the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3617 13. Remove the cover (A). 14. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 15. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: The ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[], B=/\, C=O) embossed on them for identification. 16. Install the ECM/PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 19. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 8, go to step 22 (A/T model) or step 25 (M/T model). Otherwise, go to step 20. 20. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 21. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 22. A/T model: If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 10, go to step 25. Otherwise go to step 23. 23. A/T model: Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. 24. A/T model: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 25. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS. 26. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 27. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 7 clean the throttle body, then go to step 28. 28. If the READ DATA failed in step 8 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 21, replace the engine oil and engine oil filter, then go to step 29 (A/T model) or step 30 (M/T model). 29. If the READ DATA failed in step 10 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 26, replace the ATF, then go to step 30. 30. Select PGM-FI system and reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3618 32. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 33. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. 34. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and or the navigation system (if equipped), then set the clock (if equipped). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3622 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3623 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3624 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3625 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3626 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3627 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3635 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3636 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3639 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3640 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3645 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3646 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3647 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3654 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3655 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3656 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3659 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3660 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 3661 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3665 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECT Sensor 1 Replacement > Page 3668 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B). 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant. 6. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3672 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3673 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3674 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3675 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3676 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3680 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3684 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3685 Electric Load Sensor: Service and Repair ELD Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Remove the fuses (A). 4. Using two flat-tip screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the fuse/relay box base (B) from the fuse/relay box housing (C). NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or damaged. 5. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3686 6. Turn the housing over again, then remove the ELD (A). 7. Install the ELD in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3693 196. Under Middle Rear of Vehicle DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3694 118. FTP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3695 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3696 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the hose (B), and remove the FTP sensor(C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3700 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3701 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3702 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3703 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3707 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3708 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3709 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3710 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3714 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3715 121. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3716 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3717 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3721 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3730 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3731 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3732 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3738 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3739 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 3740 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3743 25. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3744 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 139. A/F Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 149. HO2S, Secondary (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor > Page 3747 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is located on the TWC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on S6176, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3750 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3754 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3755 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3756 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3757 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3758 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3759 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3763 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3767 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3768 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3769 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3770 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3771 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3779 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3786 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3787 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3792 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3793 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3794 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3795 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3796 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3797 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3798 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3799 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3800 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3801 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3802 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3803 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3804 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3805 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3806 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3807 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3808 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3809 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3810 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3811 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3812 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3813 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3814 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3815 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3816 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3817 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3818 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3819 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-0 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 7. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3823 68. Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3824 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VTEC System - This mechanism improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed, and engine load. - The VTEC mechanism changes the valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile. - The VTEC system changes the cam profile (angle) at cruising speeds. (Cam angle is changed to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss). Operation At engine start, and high load - The rocker arm oil control valve is OFF. - Oil pressure enters secondary rocker arm B from the oil passage in the intake rocker shaft. This forces the VTEC switching piston into secondary rocker arm A against the return spring and disengages the secondary arm A from the secondary arm B to stop valve actuation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3825 At cruise The rocker arm oil control valve switches oil pressure to the oil passage in the intake rocker arm shaft. Oil pressure then enters secondary rocker arm A, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into secondary rocker arm B, locking secondary rocker arms A and B together. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3826 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control valve connector (A) and the EOP sensor connector (B). 3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (C). 4. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse order of removal with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Voltage Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Voltage Signal: Testing and Inspection Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is turned on. Does the percentage vary? Yes - The alternator signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF. 5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 6. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P). 8. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B43. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B43) and the alternator. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3838 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Removal/Installation 1. Remove the A/F sensor (sensor 1). 2. Remove the secondary HO2S (sensor 2). 3. Remove the EGR pipe. 4. Remove the cover (A). 5. Remove the TWC(B). 6. Remove the converter cover (C). 7. Install the TWC in the reverse order of removal with new gaskets (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 48. EVAP Canister Purge Valve (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3844 Vacuum Hose Routing Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3845 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Purge Valve When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 degree F (60 degree C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve cutting vacuum to the EVAP canister. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3846 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the hose (A) and the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector (B). 3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (C). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 49. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3851 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting of the EVAP canister. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3852 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the cap (A). 3. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (C) and a new cap. NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings with oil. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 49. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair EGR Tube: Service and Repair EGR Pipe Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B). 2. Remove the EGR pipe (C). Installation 1. Install the EGR pipe on the water passage side, and tighten the nuts (A) by hand with a new gasket (B). 2. Install the EGR pipe on the TWC side, and tighten the bolts (C) with a new gasket (D). 3. Tighten the nuts on the water passage side. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3863 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve Replacement 1. Remove the injector manifold cover. 2. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the EGR valve (B). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (C). 5. Install the injector manifold cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3867 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Separator: Service and Repair Oil/Air Separator Installation 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil/air separator mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 2. Clean, and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces. 3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the oil/air separator. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more then 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 4. Install the oil/air separator. NOTE: ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. ^ Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil/air separator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Inspection 1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and connections for leaks or restrictions. 2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your fingers or pliers. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3875 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair PCV Valve Replacement 1. Remove the harness holder (A). 2. Disconnect the PCV hose (B). 3. Remove the PCV valve (C). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new washer (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 26. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3880 175. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure ................................................................................................................................................. 380 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3885 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3886 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B - Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3890 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3891 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Without load conditions: Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T............................................................................................................ ..........................................................................................................670 ± 50 rpm A/T........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .670 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada M/T.......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T...................................................... .................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: Idle speed should be: M/T.................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm A/T................................ .......................................................................................................................................................750 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3895 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3896 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Apply the parking brake (check the headlight OFF). 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: All models except Canada: M/T 670 ± 50 rpm A/T 670 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) Canada M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam). Idle speed should be: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in park or neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. If the idle speed is still not within specification, go to symptom troubleshooting. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection Accelerator Pedal: Recalls Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection 05-061 November 19, 2005 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: 2006 Civic Accelerator Pedal Inspection (Supersedes 05-061, dated November 8, 2005, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) BACKGROUND On some 2006 Civics, the accelerator pedal was not properly installed and may come loose at the floor mounting. This condition may result in a stuck throttle which could cause a crash. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3905 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an IN VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the accelerator pedal has already been inspected and repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the accelerator pedal to ensure that it is properly secured. If it is not secured, secure it, clear out the foreign material blocking it, or replace the accelerator pedal and/or pedal stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3906 PARTS INFORMATION Do not pre-order any parts as only a very small number of vehicles will require these replacement parts. Pedal, Accelerator: P/N 17800-SNA-A01, H/C 8162554 Stopper (Stop): P/N 17818-SNA-A01, H/C 8187312 VEHICLES AFFECTED TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool, T/N AP201-10A or AP201-W (These tools are in the KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2O14. To order additional sets, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 17800-SNA-A01 H/C 8162554 Defect Code: 5PL00 Symptom Code: P9800 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the accelerator pedal for looseness: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3907 ^ Using the KTC Trim Tool, insert it under the left side of the accelerator pedal until it stops. ^ Pry up on the trim tool to see if the accelerator pedal comes loose from the stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3908 ^ Repeat for the right side. ^ If the accelerator pedal separates from the base of the stop, go to step 2. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not separate from the base of the stop, go to step 3. 2. If the accelerator pedal separates from the base of the stop, snap the pedal back into place and repeat step 1. ^ If the pedal stays secured, go to step 3. ^ If the pedal separates a second time, proceed to the REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Use a mirror to check the position of the locking tab on the base of the accelerator stop. * ^ If the locking tab is OK, go to step 5 of REPAIR PROCEDURE.* ^ If the locking tab is NOT OK, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3909 1. Inspect the base of the pedal stop. ^ Check that the carpet backing is not trapped between the accelerator pedal and the base of the stop. ^ Pull back the carpet. If there is backing material trapped between the pedal and the base, use an X-acto knife to carefully trim away the excess backing. ^ Remove the two nuts on the pedal stop, then remove the stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3910 ^ Inspect the area under the pedal stop for seam sealer or any other foreign material that may interfere with the correct setting of the accelerator pedal in the pedal stop. ^ Carefully cut away the seam sealer, the carpet, or any foreign material with an X-acto knife. *2. Remove the accelerator pedal: ^ Disconnect the connector from the accelerator pedal sensor. ^ Remove the accelerator pedal module by removing the two nuts.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3911 *3. Lay the accelerator pedal on a flat surface and snap the accelerator pedal into the pedal stop. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the accelerator pedal linkage. ^ If the accelerator pedal snaps into the pedal stop, the assembly is okay. Reinstall in the vehicle and go to step 5. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not snap into the pedal stop, go to step 4.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3912 4. If any tabs or tab receivers are bent or damaged, replace the damaged component, refer to: ^ Online, enter keyword ACCEL, and select Accelerator Pedal Module Removall Installation (R18A1 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3913 * ^ Reassemble the accelerator pedal assembly and carpet. ^ Secure the accelerator pedal to the vehicle using the two nuts. ^ Connect the accelerator pedal module connector.* ^ Do the INSPECTION PROCEDURE to ensure that the repair is complete. 5. Center-punch a completion mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Accelerator Pedal: > NHTSA05V509000 > Nov > 05 > Recall 05V509000: Accelerator Pedal Defect Accelerator Pedal: Recalls Recall 05V509000: Accelerator Pedal Defect Make/Models: Model/Build Years: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V509000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 02, 2005 COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Accelerator Pedal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 25298 SUMMARY: Certain passenger vehicles, the pedal were not properly installed and may come loose at the floor mounting. CONSEQUENCE: If the accelerator pedal is not inserted properly, the pedal can come loose from the pedal stopper causing the throttle to become stuck increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will reset the pedal or replace the whole assembly. The recall is expected to begin on November 16, 2005. Owners should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. P98. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection Accelerator Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection 05-061 November 19, 2005 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: 2006 Civic Accelerator Pedal Inspection (Supersedes 05-061, dated November 8, 2005, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) BACKGROUND On some 2006 Civics, the accelerator pedal was not properly installed and may come loose at the floor mounting. This condition may result in a stuck throttle which could cause a crash. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3923 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an IN VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the accelerator pedal has already been inspected and repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the accelerator pedal to ensure that it is properly secured. If it is not secured, secure it, clear out the foreign material blocking it, or replace the accelerator pedal and/or pedal stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3924 PARTS INFORMATION Do not pre-order any parts as only a very small number of vehicles will require these replacement parts. Pedal, Accelerator: P/N 17800-SNA-A01, H/C 8162554 Stopper (Stop): P/N 17818-SNA-A01, H/C 8187312 VEHICLES AFFECTED TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool, T/N AP201-10A or AP201-W (These tools are in the KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2O14. To order additional sets, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 17800-SNA-A01 H/C 8162554 Defect Code: 5PL00 Symptom Code: P9800 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the accelerator pedal for looseness: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3925 ^ Using the KTC Trim Tool, insert it under the left side of the accelerator pedal until it stops. ^ Pry up on the trim tool to see if the accelerator pedal comes loose from the stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3926 ^ Repeat for the right side. ^ If the accelerator pedal separates from the base of the stop, go to step 2. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not separate from the base of the stop, go to step 3. 2. If the accelerator pedal separates from the base of the stop, snap the pedal back into place and repeat step 1. ^ If the pedal stays secured, go to step 3. ^ If the pedal separates a second time, proceed to the REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Use a mirror to check the position of the locking tab on the base of the accelerator stop. * ^ If the locking tab is OK, go to step 5 of REPAIR PROCEDURE.* ^ If the locking tab is NOT OK, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3927 1. Inspect the base of the pedal stop. ^ Check that the carpet backing is not trapped between the accelerator pedal and the base of the stop. ^ Pull back the carpet. If there is backing material trapped between the pedal and the base, use an X-acto knife to carefully trim away the excess backing. ^ Remove the two nuts on the pedal stop, then remove the stop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3928 ^ Inspect the area under the pedal stop for seam sealer or any other foreign material that may interfere with the correct setting of the accelerator pedal in the pedal stop. ^ Carefully cut away the seam sealer, the carpet, or any foreign material with an X-acto knife. *2. Remove the accelerator pedal: ^ Disconnect the connector from the accelerator pedal sensor. ^ Remove the accelerator pedal module by removing the two nuts.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3929 *3. Lay the accelerator pedal on a flat surface and snap the accelerator pedal into the pedal stop. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the accelerator pedal linkage. ^ If the accelerator pedal snaps into the pedal stop, the assembly is okay. Reinstall in the vehicle and go to step 5. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not snap into the pedal stop, go to step 4.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3930 4. If any tabs or tab receivers are bent or damaged, replace the damaged component, refer to: ^ Online, enter keyword ACCEL, and select Accelerator Pedal Module Removall Installation (R18A1 Engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > 05-061 > Nov > 05 > Recall - Accelerator Pedal Inspection > Page 3931 * ^ Reassemble the accelerator pedal assembly and carpet. ^ Secure the accelerator pedal to the vehicle using the two nuts. ^ Connect the accelerator pedal module connector.* ^ Do the INSPECTION PROCEDURE to ensure that the repair is complete. 5. Center-punch a completion mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal: > NHTSA05V509000 > Nov > 05 > Recall 05V509000: Accelerator Pedal Defect Accelerator Pedal: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V509000: Accelerator Pedal Defect Make/Models: Model/Build Years: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V509000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 02, 2005 COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Accelerator Pedal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 25298 SUMMARY: Certain passenger vehicles, the pedal were not properly installed and may come loose at the floor mounting. CONSEQUENCE: If the accelerator pedal is not inserted properly, the pedal can come loose from the pedal stopper causing the throttle to become stuck increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will reset the pedal or replace the whole assembly. The recall is expected to begin on November 16, 2005. Owners should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. P98. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3936 Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3937 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation 1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal module connector (A). 2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B). NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module. 3. Install the accelerator pedal module in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3941 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3942 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3945 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3946 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace the air cleaner element. NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. If the maintenance minder indicated that air cleaner element replacement was needed, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not indicate that air cleaner element replacement was needed, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3954 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3955 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3956 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3957 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Specifications Fuel: Specifications FUEL REQUIRED UNLEADED gasoline with 87 pump octane number or higher Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information Fuel Filler Cap: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information CHECK FUEL CAP, TIGHTEN FUEL CAP Messages NOTE: This article applies to '05-06 Accords, 06 Civics, 05-06 CR-Vs, 05-06 Elements, '05-06 Odysseys, '05-06 Pilots, '06 Ridgelines, and '06 S2000s. If a vehicle's fuel fill cap is loose or missing, and the ECM/PCM detects an EVAP system leak when it runs the EVAP monitor, the CHECK FUEL CAP message appears on the information display when the engine is started. (On '06 Odyssey Touring models and future Honda models, it's the TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message.) A temporary DTC is also stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If this happens, there's really no need for the owner to bring the vehicle in for service. All he or she has to do is shut off the engine and make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and it's properly tightened (it's one or three clicks, depending on what's written on the cap). Although the owner can cycle the message from the display with the reset button (the actual button name varies by model), the temporary DTC that's setting the message is still there. This means the message never really goes away. It can be cycled back with the reset button, and it comes on again if the ignition switch is cycled or the engine is restarted. This message keeps coming back until the EVAP monitor runs again and it finds no EVAP system leak. This could take several days, even weeks, depending on how often the vehicle is driven. If when the next EVAP monitor runs, the cap wasn't tightened or there's another EVAP system leak detected, the MIL comes on and the message goes off. A permanent DTC is now stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If the owner now tightens the cap, the MIL should go off afier the next EVAP monitor run, yet, this could still take days or weeks. If the MIL is still on after that monitor run, then it's time to bring the vehicle in for service. If the vehicle comes into your shop with the fuel cap message or the MIL on, make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and properly tightened. Record the DTC, then clear it with the HDS, and run the EVAP system function test. If there's still a problem, press on with normal troubleshooting Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information CHECK FUEL CAP, TIGHTEN FUEL CAP Messages NOTE: This article applies to '05-06 Accords, 06 Civics, 05-06 CR-Vs, 05-06 Elements, '05-06 Odysseys, '05-06 Pilots, '06 Ridgelines, and '06 S2000s. If a vehicle's fuel fill cap is loose or missing, and the ECM/PCM detects an EVAP system leak when it runs the EVAP monitor, the CHECK FUEL CAP message appears on the information display when the engine is started. (On '06 Odyssey Touring models and future Honda models, it's the TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message.) A temporary DTC is also stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If this happens, there's really no need for the owner to bring the vehicle in for service. All he or she has to do is shut off the engine and make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and it's properly tightened (it's one or three clicks, depending on what's written on the cap). Although the owner can cycle the message from the display with the reset button (the actual button name varies by model), the temporary DTC that's setting the message is still there. This means the message never really goes away. It can be cycled back with the reset button, and it comes on again if the ignition switch is cycled or the engine is restarted. This message keeps coming back until the EVAP monitor runs again and it finds no EVAP system leak. This could take several days, even weeks, depending on how often the vehicle is driven. If when the next EVAP monitor runs, the cap wasn't tightened or there's another EVAP system leak detected, the MIL comes on and the message goes off. A permanent DTC is now stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If the owner now tightens the cap, the MIL should go off afier the next EVAP monitor run, yet, this could still take days or weeks. If the MIL is still on after that monitor run, then it's time to bring the vehicle in for service. If the vehicle comes into your shop with the fuel cap message or the MIL on, make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and properly tightened. Record the DTC, then clear it with the HDS, and run the EVAP system function test. If there's still a problem, press on with normal troubleshooting Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3973 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reinstall the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3974 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily, - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then do this: - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams 59. Injectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3978 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Injector Replacement 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 3. Remove the fuel line cover (A). 4. Disconnect the connectors (B) from the injectors and rocker arm oil control valve. 5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C). 6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (D) from the fuel rail (E). 7. Remove the injector clip (F) from the injector. 8. Remove the injector from the fuel rail. 9. Coat the new O-rings (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C). 10. Install the injector clip (D). 11. Coat the injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil. 12. Install the fuel rail and the injector into the cylinder head (F). 13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts. 14. Connect the connectors on the injectors. 15. Connect the quick-connect fittings. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3979 rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage. 17. Install the fuel line cover. 18. Install the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Line Coupler: Service Precautions Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), and (D) connect the fuel rail (E) to the fuel feed hose (F), the fuel feed hose to the fuel line (G), the fuel line (H) to the fuel tank unit (I), the fuel vapor line (J) to the EVAP canister (K), and the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (L) to the fuel filler (M). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, the fuel tank unit, or the fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to the following: - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel that was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they come in contact with electrolyte or something similar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3983 - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged. A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when: - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - replacing the EVAP purge line. - replacing the EVAP canister. - replacing the fuel tank. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3984 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions". 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt, and clean them if needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3985 3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage. - If it is dirty, wash the connector with the steam, and dry it with the compressed air. - If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter, or fuel feed line. 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line ends with plastic bags (A). NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when: replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - replacing the EVAP purge pipe. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3986 - replacing the EVAP canister. - replacing the fuel tank. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions". 1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage, and clean it if needed. 2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after: - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - replacing the EVAP purge pipe. - replacing the EVAP canister. - replacing the fuel tank. - removing the retainer from the line. - Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same size retainer when the replacing the retainer. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3987 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from the mating line. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3988 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the connector grooves (C). Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs lock with a clicking sound. NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3989 5. When you reconnect the connector with the old retainer, make sure the connection is secure and the tabs are firmly locked into place; check visually and also by pulling the connector. When you replace the fuel line with a new one, make sure you remove the ring pull upwards after you confirm the connection is secure. NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try to remove it. 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this two or three times, and cheek that there is no leakage in the fuel supply system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the bracket (A). 3. Remove the ground ring (B). 4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C). 5. Install the regulator in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (D) and bracket. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil. Do not pinch the O-rings during installation. Never apply brake fluid, vegetable oil, or alcohol-based oil to the O-rings. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure ................................................................................................................................................. 380 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3997 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3998 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B - Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4005 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4009 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 49. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. 2-door: Remove the lid. 2. Remove the cap (A) by turning it counterclockwise, and remove the screw. 3. Remove the bolts, and lower the fuel filler pipe (A), then remove it from the fuel cap adapter (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4017 4. Turn the fuel cap adapter (A), then remove it. 5. Install the adapter in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4021 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4022 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. - If no problem is found, go to step 3. - If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear cushion. 5. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member (A). 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B). 8. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 9. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4023 - a short in the ORN (2-door: PUR) wire to ground. - an open in the ORN (2-door: PUR) or LT GRN (2-door: ORN) wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. 12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 13. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F" with the float at F. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate "F", replace the gauge assembly. - If the gauge is OK, the test is complete. NOTE: - The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. - Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4024 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Unit: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4028 159. Middle Front of Trunk (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Tank Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4031 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4032 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4033 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4034 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4035 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4036 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4037 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4038 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4039 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4040 Fuel Tank Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4041 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4042 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4043 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4044 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4045 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4046 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4047 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4048 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4049 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4050 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4051 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4052 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4053 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4054 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4055 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4056 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4057 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4058 148. Fuel Tank Unit (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation Special Tools Required Fuel pump module locknut07AAA-SNAA100 Removal 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the rear cushion. 4. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member (A). 5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B). 7. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) from the fuel tank unit. 8. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation > Page 4061 9. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit (B). Installation 1. Install a new base gasket (A), and locknut plate (B) to the fuel tank (C). 2. Insert the fuel tank unit (D) into the fuel tank. Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit. 3. Align the marks (E) on the fuel tank and the fuel tank unit, then tighten a new locknut (F) by hand. NOTE: After tightening, make sure the marks is aligned. Check circumference of the base gasket visually or by hand and be sure that the gasket is not pinched. - Do not coat the base gasket and the locknut plate with the engine oil. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation > Page 4062 4. Using the tool, tighten the fuel tank unit locknut (A). NOTE: After installation, check the base gasket visually or by hand to be sure the gasket is not pinched. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation > Page 4063 Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4067 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4068 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4069 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4070 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4071 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4072 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4083 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4084 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4085 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4086 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4087 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4088 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Removal/Installation 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the bolts (A), and the intake air ducts (B). 3. Remove the resonator (C). 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4096 80. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4097 174. APP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 4100 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4101 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection APP Sensor Signal Inspection NOTE: - This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor stores DTCs which are covered in other troubleshooting procedures. - Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure. - Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator pedal module 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 4. 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. - If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK. - If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module, then go to step 1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4105 50. Left Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4106 169. MAF//IAT Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4107 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow (MAP) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4108 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Oil Pressure Switch (For Fuel Pump) > Component Information > Locations 15. Left Side of Engine (DX, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4115 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the throttle plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4119 Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection Throttle Body Test Carbon Accumulation Check NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, check for diagnostic trouble code (DTCs). 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. The reading should be below 3 degree If it is not, clean the throttle body. Throttle Position Learning Check NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, check for diagnostic trouble code (DTCs). 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If needed, clean the throttle body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation Throttle Body: Service and Repair Removal/Installation Throttle Body Removal/Installation CAUTION: Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated. NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body, start at step 4. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped. 2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS. 3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 4. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 5. Remove the air cleaner. 6. Disconnect the throttle body connector (A) and the EVAP purge control solenoid valve connector (B). 7. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (C). 8. Remove the throttle body (D). 9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (E). NOTE: Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure after replacing throttle body. - Refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation > Page 4122 Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation > Page 4123 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Cleaning Throttle Body Cleaning CAUTION: Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated. 1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air cleaner is damaged, replace it. 2. Remove the throttle body. 3. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked in throttle plate and induction cleaner. NOTE: Remove the throttle body to clean it. - Be careful not to pinch your fingers. - To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A). - Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner directly on the throttle body. - Use Honda genuine throttle plate and induction cleaner. 4. Install the throttle body. 5. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4127 182. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4132 Variable Induction Control Actuator: Service and Repair IMT Actuator Removal/Installation 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the bolts (A) and the IMT actuator (B). 3. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 168. IMT Valve (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4136 Variable Induction Control Valve: Service and Repair IMT Valve Replacement 1. Remove the IMT actuator. 2. Remove the IMT cover (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the IMT valve (C). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4148 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4149 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4150 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4153 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4154 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4155 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4159 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4160 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4161 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4162 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4163 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams 119. Ignition Coils Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4167 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Removal/Installation 1. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then remove the ignition coils (B). 2. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4171 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground, then terminal No. 4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the No. 1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 4174 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there continuity? YES - The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 4175 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally-Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4179 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4180 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4181 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4182 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4187 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground, then terminal No. 4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the No. 1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 4190 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there continuity? YES - The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay and the ECM/PCM (A20). NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM (A20). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 4191 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Normally-Open Type Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4196 32. Left Side of Engine Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4197 113. CMP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4198 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A), then remove the harness holder (B) from the cylinder head. 3. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 4. Remove the camshaft thrust cover. 5. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4201 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate. Installation 1. Install the CMP pulse plate. 2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4202 3. Install the camshaft thrust cover (A), use a new O-ring (B). 4. Install the rocker arm assembly. 5. Install the harness holder (A) on the cylinder head, then Install the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 6. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation > Page 4203 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4207 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4208 111. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4209 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4210 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the CKP sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). 5. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure below. Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. 6. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Learn Procedure (without the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4211 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is complete. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4220 191. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 193. Rear of engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4221 11. Knock Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4222 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4223 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Electrode Gap Standard (New)............................................................................................................ ...........................................................1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 4228 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque.................................................................................................................................................. ......................................25 N.m (2.5 kgf.cm, 18 lbf.ft) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4229 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4230 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner. NOTE: Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this will damage the electrode. - Use a chemical cleaner such as Carb Spray to clean contamination on the electrode. - When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the electrode. 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug gap is out of specification. Use only the listed spark plugs. NOTE: Do not adjust the gap (B) of iridium tip plugs. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4231 4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to 25 N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). If you replaced the spark plug by the maintenance minder requirement, reset the maintenance minder. If the maintenance minder did not require you, but you replaced the spark plug, go to step 5. 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 8. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 9. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 10. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 4 RESET with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations 40. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4238 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 27. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4241 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover. 15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 16. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4242 18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4243 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4244 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side upon the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4245 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolls, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4246 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4247 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4248 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 3. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the passage. 7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4251 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (D). 3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C and transmission housing. 7. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 8. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4256 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4257 73. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4258 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. 3. Release the shift lock solenoid lock (A), then remove the shift lock solenoid (B). 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), solenoid plunger (B), and plunger spring (C) assembly. 5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock stop (E), and install the new shift lock solenoid assembly by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop. 6. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide, and install the connector (F) on the bracket base. 7. Install the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 15. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 16. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 17. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4262 18. Shift Control Solenoid Valve D (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4263 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and test the solenoid valves. 4. Lift the vehicle upon a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body ground: ^ No. 1: shift solenoid valve C ^ No. 2: shift solenoid valve B ^ No. 5: shift solenoid valve A ^ No. 8: shift solenoid valve D Standard: 12 - 25 ohms ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminals individually. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test the shift solenoid harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4264 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift solenoid valve D. 13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. 14. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to each solenoid terminal individually. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 15 and replace the solenoid harness. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4265 15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to step 21. 16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it. 18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 21. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 22. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 24. Refill the transmission with ATF. 25. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4266 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors. ^ If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 7. ^ If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing, then go to step 12. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4267 7. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 8. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new 0rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the 0rings provided on it. 9. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 10. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 11. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4280 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4281 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4282 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4291 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4294 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4298 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4302 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4303 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4304 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4305 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4306 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4311 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4312 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4315 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4319 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4320 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4330 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4331 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4332 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-073 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped 10-073 November 24, 2010 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic with R18A1 Engine - ALL Intermittent Engine Vibration At Idle When At A Stop SYMPTOM The driver feels an intermittent engine vibration when the vehicle is stopped and idling with various electrical systems on. PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software is slow to respond to engine load because of varying electrical loads. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.020.018 or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 29-NOV-2009 or later. NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and P/Ns are shown below. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-073 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped > Page 4341 Does the customer complain of an intermittent engine vibration when coming to or at a stop? NOTE: The vibration is not constant and occurs after an electrical load is applied (operating headlights, power windows, rear defroster, moonroof, etc.). Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: The software update improves, but does not completely eliminate, the intermittent engine vibration. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 4346 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4351 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4352 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4353 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-062 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration 07-062 January 30, 2009 Applies To shown above Poor A/C Performance During Acceleration (Supersedes 07-062, dated September 19, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The A/C cools poorly during hard acceleration under 20 mph. This symptom is usually noticed in stop-and-go traffic. PROBABLE CAUSE When accelerating at speeds below 20 mph with the accelerator pedal more than halfway down, the ECM/ PCM turns off the A/C compressor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. NOTE: The software update minimizes the symptom, but it does not completely eliminate it. The customer can improve A/C performance by accelerating from speeds below 20 mph with the accelerator pedal less than halfway down. SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-062 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration > Page 4358 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A64 HC 8587529 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 07-062A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-003 > Feb > 08 > A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T 08-003 February 14, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Update the PCM When Replacing the Transmission BACKGROUND Repeatedly shifting between R and D at high wheel speed when stuck in snow can cause transmission damage. To help prevent this damage, update the PCM anytime you replace an NT. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM and the NT systems of the PCM with the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System). VEHICLES AFFECTED WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A65 H/C 8703761 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 08-003A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS sofiware version: 2.012.013 (December 2007) or later Control Module (CM) Update: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-003 > Feb > 08 > A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T > Page 4363 Application Version V.6.10.06 or later Database Update 27-NOV-2007 or later NOTE: If you do not use the correct HDS sofiware version, the HDS may incorrectly indicate that the vehicle does not need an update. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure version 2.012.013 or later sofiware iN network CD is loaded into the iN master terminal. 2. Update both the PGM and AT systems of the PCM with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updathg Control Units/Modules. 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). Use the HDS to clear any body electrical codes that may have been set during the PCM update. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if any body electrical codes have returned. ^ If the codes have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, then go to step 5. ^ If the codes do not return, go to step 5. 5. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold 07-077 November 16, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic With Automatic Transmission - ALL Brake Pedal Feels Hard in the Mornings or in Cold Weather SYMPTOM The brake pedal can feel hard during the first couple of brake applications, usually in the morning when the ambient temperature is cold. PROBABLE CAUSE At cold start, in high altitude, combined with the fast idle retard operation, the intake manifold vacuum supply is at its lowest, resulting in low booster assist. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster and the master cylinder rod seal, and update the PGM-FI software using the HDS. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Booster: P/N 01469-SNB-G00, H/C 8745390 Rod Seal: P/N 46185-SE0-003, H/C 2120970 SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version 2.011.010 (or later) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 01469-SNA-A00 H/C 8044729 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03223 Template ID: 07-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper blades in an upright position to keep from interfering with the cowl cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4368 2. Remove the center cowl cover: ^ Remove the three clips. ^ Release the three front hooks from the edge of the under-cowl panel. ^ Detach the clips by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the side hooks. 3. Remove the under-cowl panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4369 4. Remove the top half of the air cleaner housing and the air cleaner element to gain access to the clamp. 5. Loosen all of the clamps attached to the air cleaner housing, and remove the bottom half of the housing. 6. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector. 7. Remove the master cylinder reservoir mounting bolt. 8. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4370 9. Remove the two engine wire harness clips from their brackets. 10. Remove the smaller engine harness bracket located underneath the master cylinder reservoir bracket (one 6 mm bolt). 11. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. NOTE: To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with shop towels. 12. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 13. Remove the master cylinder and reservoir together from the brake booster. NOTE: Be careful to not bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4371 14. Remove the brake booster: ^ Refer to page 19-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BOOSTER, and select Brake Booster Replacement (RI 8A1 and RI 8A4 Engine) from the list. 15. Install the new brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install a new rod seal on the master cylinder. 17. Install the master cylinder and reservoir on the brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 18. Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to page 19-6 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PEDAL ADJUSTMENT, and select Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment (A/T) from the list. 19. Fill the reservoir with brake fluid, and bleed the brake system. 20. Install all removed parts. 21. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/ Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-086 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored 06-086 May 23, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With DTC P0455 (Supersedes 06-086, dated January 5, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0455 (evaporative emissions system large leak detected). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets FTP (fuel tank pressure) sensor input during high load and heavy throttle application, setting DTC P0455. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. *VEHICLES AFFECTED* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour *Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A58 H/C 8236069* Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 06-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-086 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored > Page 4376 Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *HDS Software Version: 2.009.007 or later. NOTE: If you do not use the correct HDS software version, the HDS may incorrectly indicate that the vehicle does not need an update. The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and PINs are shown below. If these or later program IDs are the Current Program IDs displayed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed.* DIAGNOSIS 1. Use the HDS to retrieve the DIG P0455 freeze data and/or the on-board snapshot. 2. Compare the MAP sensor voltage to the BARO sensor voltage: ^ If the two readings are within 0.05 volt of each other, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the two readings are not within 0.05 volt of each other, this service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE *Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and software version 2.009.007 or later. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Unit /Modules.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-086 > Dec > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 06-086 December 8, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door- From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H531151 2006 Civic 4-Door - From VIN JHMFA1...68000001 thru JHMFA1...65005042 - From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L040939 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H513566 MIL Comes On With DTC P0455 (Supersedes 06-086, dated December 6, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bar) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0455 (evaporative emissions system large leak detected). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets FIP (fuel tank pressure) sensor input during high load and heavy throttle application, setting DTC P0455. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and software version 2.005.004 or later. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A07 H/C 8236044 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 06-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and P/Ns are listed below. Use this information during the update to verify the correct software. DIAGNOSIS 1. Use the HDS to retrieve the DIG P0455 freeze data and/or the on-board snapshot. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-086 > Dec > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 > Page 4381 2. Compare the MAP sensor voltage to the BARO sensor voltage: ^ If the two readings are within 0.05 volts of each other, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the two readings are not within 0.05 volts of each other, this service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and sofiware version 2.005.004 or later. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set 06-048 July 29, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With DTC P0116 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0116 (ECT sensor 1 range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets the engine coolant temperature inputs. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the ECM/PCM PGM-FI software using HDS software version 2.005.004 (or later). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set > Page 4386 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour (All except Accord Hybrid) 0.6 hour (Accord Hybrid only) Failed Part: H/C 8293508 P/N 37820-RNA-A59 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set > Page 4387 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0116 (ECT sensor range/performance problem): ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual or, ^ Online, enter P0116, then select DTC Troubleshooting: P0116 from the list. - If you find a problem, make the necessary repair. This bulletin does not apply. - If you do not find any problems, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the HDS with software version 2.005.004 or later to update the ECM/PCM PGM-FI software. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating the Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-073 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped 10-073 November 24, 2010 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic with R18A1 Engine - ALL Intermittent Engine Vibration At Idle When At A Stop SYMPTOM The driver feels an intermittent engine vibration when the vehicle is stopped and idling with various electrical systems on. PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software is slow to respond to engine load because of varying electrical loads. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.020.018 or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 29-NOV-2009 or later. NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and P/Ns are shown below. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-073 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Idle Vibration When Stopped > Page 4393 Does the customer complain of an intermittent engine vibration when coming to or at a stop? NOTE: The vibration is not constant and occurs after an electrical load is applied (operating headlights, power windows, rear defroster, moonroof, etc.). Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: The software update improves, but does not completely eliminate, the intermittent engine vibration. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Updating Control Units And Modules 01-023 April 10, 2010 Applies To: Honda Vehicles With Programmable Control Units/Modules Updating Control Units/Modules (Supersedes 01-023, dated May 15, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *^Under REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT, the MVCI was added. ^ Under UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS MVCI information was added. ^ UPDATING WITH THE MVCI was added.* The procedures in this service bulletin are used and referenced in other service bulletins. Most 2002 and later Hondas have reprogrammable control units/modules. To update (reprogram) any of these control units/modules, you need the vehicle you're working on and one of these systems: *^MVCI unit with latest control module (CM) update software installed* ^ GNA600 gateway device and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Tablet with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Pocket Tester with the latest HDS software installed ^ HIM and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ A compatible J2534 device and a PC with Honda's J2534 software installed This service bulletin describes these subjects: ^ Who to contact for questions or problems when using Honda-supplied updating equipment or the iN. ^ Required Tools and Equipment - MVCI - GNA600 - HDS Tablet - HDS Pocket Tester - HIM ^ Updating Tips and Precautions ^ Updating with the MVCI ^ Updating with the GNA600 - GNA6OO Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - GNA6OO Updating in Storage Mode ^ Updating with the HDS Tablet and the HDS Pocket Tester Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4398 ^ Updating with the HIM - HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - HIM Updating in Storage Mode - Diagnosing HIM Error Codes - HIM Self-Test NOTE: Whenever you install a new, reprogrammable control unit/module, check that it has the latest software, and update it if needed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Skill Level: Repair Technician Refer to the specific service bulletin for the symptom you are repairing. QUESTIONS ABOUT THE UPDATING EQUIPMENT OR THE INTERACTIVE NETWORK For questions about the Honda-supplied updating equipment, call American Honda's Special Tools hotline. For questions about the iN, call the iN Support Center. REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: Updating for most control units/modules can be done with any of the following tools. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4399 *MVCI: (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program)* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4400 GNA600: (No longer available for purchase) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4401 HDS Tablet: HDS Pocket Tester: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4402 HIM: UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS ^ If you're updating a control module/unit on a new vehicle, make sure all its fuses were installed at PDI. ^ To prevent control unit/module damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. ^ Make sure the HDS Tablet, the HDS Pocket Tester, or the iN workstation has the latest version of HDS software. The HDS version number is on the HDS start-up screen. To find the latest HDS software information on ISIS, select Search by Vehicle, select Technical Library, expand the ServiceNews branch, select Keyword (All Models), enter keywords HDS VERSION, then select the latest article. NOTE: The screen is from an iN workstation. The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^Make sure the Database Update listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.) is the same or earlier than the ones listed on the Reprogramming screen of the MVCI (on the MVCI, select CM Update Mode, then select Reprogramming), or on the Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4403 Updating Honda Control Modules screen on the HDS tablet, the HDS pocket tester, or the iN workstation. MVCI:* iN Workstation: NOTE: The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^If the Database Update listed in the service bulletin is later than that shown by the software, please see the the procedures for software installation in the following documents in Tool Information on ISIS (go to General Publications, then Tool Information): - MVCI User Guide (see HDS MVCI Firmware Update section) - Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) Tablet Setup Instructions - Installation Instructions for HDS ( see PC Software for the GNA600, HIM or Pocket Tester ID)* ^ Do not connect an additional power supply to the updating equipment when it is connected to the vehicle; power is supplied through the DLC. ^ To ensure that the control module/unit is not permanently damaged during updating, vedfy that the vehicle's 12-volt battery is fully charged before starthg an update. NOTE: If the vehicle's 12-volt battery drops below 10 volts during the update, the programming status bar may go past 100 percent, or the updating tool may display an error message. ^ If you have a problem during an update (D4/ immobilizer indicator flashes, update tool freezes, etc.), you can minimize the chances of damaging the control unit/module by doing one or more of these actions: - CRITICAL: Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). - Connect a jumper battery (DO NOT connect a battery charger). - Disconnect the updating tool from the vehicle's DLC. - Reboot the updating tool. - Reconnect the updating tool to the vehicle's DLC, and retry the updating procedure. *UPDATING WITH THE MVCI Make sure you have the latest control module (CM) Update software loaded from your HDS PC to your MVC I. For loading instructions and other Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4404 details, refer to the MVCI User Guide on ISIS. The Database Update version appears when you select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. 1. Connect the DLC cable to the MVCI and to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The MVCI automatically boots up. 3. Press the ENTER button on the MVCI to see the User Config menu. Select CM Update Mode. 4. Select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. NOTE: Use these MVCI default settings: Setting 1Destination: USA Language: American English Setting 2 - Auto Detect: Yes Continuous Mode: No For more information on these settings, refer to the MVCI User Guide. 5. The CM Update software information appears. Press ENTER to continue. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4405 NOTE: If the Database Update is an earlier version than the one listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.), press ESC, then update your MVCI before continuing. 6. Wait for the MVCI to check the vehicle for reprogrammable systems. This may take up to 90 seconds. 7. If there are multiple reprogrammable systems that need to be updated, select the applicable system. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. 8. The current program ID, the recommended update, and other details appear. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4406 9. Wait for the MVCI to copy the data for updating the vehicle. 10. After the MVCI has copied the files, a confirmation screen appears. Press ENTER to update the control unit/module, or press ESC to exit. 11. Wait for the MVCI to update the control unit/module. 12. After the MVCI finishes updating the control uniti module, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) when directed by the MVCI. 13. Turn the ignition switch back to ON (II) within 60 seconds to complete the updating procedure. NOTE: The MVCI has a countdown timer. If you do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II) within 60 seconds, the MVCI sets an error code. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4407 14. After finishing the updating procedure, the MVCI gives you the option of updating the same system on another vehicle. For more information on updating several vehicles, see the MVCI User Guide. 15. If an error occurs during the updating procedure, an error message appears. Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). Press ENTER to display the error code. Refer to the CM Update Error Code Table in the MVCI User Guide for more information about the code and its solutions.* UPDATING WITH THE GNA600 NOTE: For more information on the GNA6OO, refer to the GNA600 User's Guide. This guide is on ISIS, under the Tool Information heading. Two modes of updating can be used with the GNA600: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Use Pass-Thru mode when the GNA6OO can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Use Storage mode when the GNA6OO cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. GNA600 Updating in Pass-Thru Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4408 NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-th ru-Mode. 5. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4409 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control uniti module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control uniti mod ule has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. GNA600 Updating in Storage Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the ISIS publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4410 NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then click on Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the GNA600 to the vehicle. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. 7. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the GNA600. The GNA600 does a self-check and, after about 30 seconds, its yellow No.1 and green No.2 LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4411 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 10. Disconnect the GNA600 from the USB PC interface cable, then connect the trigger switch adapter block (yellow) and the trigger switch to the GNA600 as shown below. (The DLC cable should still be connected to the GNA600.) 11. Reconnect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA600 stays on. Press and release the trigger switch button. 13. The yellow No.1 LED blinks, and the green No.2 LED stays on. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4412 NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the No.1 LED stays on and the No.2 LED goes off, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the No.1 and No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. UPDATING WITH THE HDS TABLET AND THE HDS POCKET TESTER NOTE: This procedure explains how to update with the HDS tablet. Updating with the HDS pocket tester is similar, but the user interface is modified to fit its smaller screen. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC sofiware onto your HDS tablet or HDS pocket tester. Refer to the instructions included with the HDS Installation Disc. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. On the HDS Switchboard screen, click on the CM update icon. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4413 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and connect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the Systems one at a time. 4. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4414 5. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HDS tablet. 6. In the HDS Tablet Programming screen, click on the check mark after programming is completed. 7. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. NOTE: To avoid permanent control module damage, do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) during the update. 8. When updating is complete, follow the screen prompts to turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). To update another system, return to the Updating Honda Control Modules screen by clicking on the exit button on the right side of the screen. UPDATING WITH THE HIM Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4415 Two updating modes can be used with the HIM: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Pass-Thru mode is used when the HIM can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Storage mode is used when the HIM cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 LED on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-thru-Mode. 5. Connect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4416 NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HIM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4417 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control unit/module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control unit/module has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. HIM Updating in Storage Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC So ftware on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then select Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the HIM to the vehicle, and connect it to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4418 the HIM from the vehicle. 7. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the HIM. After several seconds, the green and yellow LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the HIM. 10. Disconnect the HIM from the PC interface cable. 11. Reconnect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Press and release the ENTER button on the HIM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4419 13. The green No.1 LED stays on, and the yellow No. 2 LED blinks. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the yellow No.2 LED stays on, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the green No.1 and the yellow No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HIM from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. Diagnosing HIM Error Codes If the red No.3 LED on the HIM came on or was flashing during the update, do this: 1. Leave the ignition switch in ON (II) while you disconnect the HIM from the vehicle's DLC. 2. If not already done, load the latest HDS sofiware onto the iN workstation. 3. Connect the HIM to the iN workstation. Connect the small end of the PC interface cable to the PC port on the HIM. 4. If not already done, connect the PC end of the blue PC interface cable to the 9P serial port on the iN workstation. 5. Connect the 110 VACIl 2 VDC power supply to the HIM and to a wall outlet. 6. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 7. On the right side of the screen, click on the view error button. 8. Click on View Error at the bottom of the screen to display the problem encountered while the HIM was connected to the vehicle. ^ If you get a Code 40 error message (usually caused by a communication error between the HIM and the workstation), do this: - Do the HIM self-test procedure (see HIM Self-Test). - Move the blue PC interface cable to another communication port on the back of the computer. - If one of the communication ports on the back of the computer has another cable connected to it, disconnect that cable, leave it disconnected during the HIM procedure, and connect the blue PC interface cable to that port. - Connect the HIM to another computer. (Some iN workstations require an internal communication port setup procedure. For help, call the iN Support Center) ^ If you get a Code 50 error message (usually caused by a communications error between the HIM and the vehicle's DLC), do this: - Diagnose and clear any DTCs. (The control unit/module must be free of DTCs before you can update it.) - Make sure there's a good connection between the HIM and the DLC. - Retry the update using the procedures in this service bulletin or on the back of the HIM. - If needed, call Tech Line for further help. HIM Self-Test If you suspect there's a problem with the HIM, review the instructions in this service bulletin to make sure you are using it correctly. If you still think there's a problem, do this self-test: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4420 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS software onto the iN workstation. 2. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 3. On the right side of the screen, click on the tools button. 4. Click on HIM Self-Test Procedure. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to run the HIM self-test. 6. If the self-test indicates a problem with the HIM, call the Special Tools hotline for repair instructions. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set 09-092 February 17, 2010 *Applies To: 2006-09 Civic - ALL Except GX, Hybrid, and Si 2006-09 Civic: MIL Comes On With DTC P0128* (Supersedes 09-092, dated November 25, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY In Applies To and under SOFTWARE INFORMATION, 2009 Civic information was added. In the program table, the 2006 Civic M/T was added.* SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0128 (cooling system malfunction). PROBABLE CAUSE The PGM-FI software misinterprets sensor inputs as a cooling system malfunction, causing DTC P0128 to be set. This DTC can also be caused by loose or corroded terminals in ECT sensor 2 or its 2P connector. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. If needed, replace ECT sensor 2 and its wire harness. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *2006-08 Civic* HDS Software Version: 2.020.015 (November 2009) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 22-OCT-2009 or later. *2009 Civic HDS Software Version: 2.020.022 (January 2010) or later. Control Module (CM) Update: Database Update 25-DEC-2009 or later.* NOTE: To avoid an incorrect repair that would not be covered under warranty, use the software version listed above or a later version. The updated PGM-FI software program ID and P/N is shown. If the HDS is loaded with the latest software, and it displays No Update Needed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-092 > Feb > 10 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0128 Is Set > Page 4425 The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-325 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from ECT sensor 2. (The sensor is installed in the bottom of the radiator, on the driver's side of the vehicle.) 2. Check for corrosion or looseness of the electrical terminals on ECT sensor 2 and its 2P connector: ^ If all of the terminals are clean and tight, go to step 3. ^ If terminals on the sensor are corroded or loose, but the terminals in the 2P connector are clean and tight, replace EGI sensor 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the terminals in the 2P connector are loose or corroded, replace EGI sensor 2 and its wire harness, then go to step 3. 3. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4430 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4431 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 4432 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-062 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration 07-062 January 30, 2009 Applies To shown above Poor A/C Performance During Acceleration (Supersedes 07-062, dated September 19, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The A/C cools poorly during hard acceleration under 20 mph. This symptom is usually noticed in stop-and-go traffic. PROBABLE CAUSE When accelerating at speeds below 20 mph with the accelerator pedal more than halfway down, the ECM/ PCM turns off the A/C compressor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. NOTE: The software update minimizes the symptom, but it does not completely eliminate it. The customer can improve A/C performance by accelerating from speeds below 20 mph with the accelerator pedal less than halfway down. SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-062 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Poor A/C Performance On Acceleration > Page 4437 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A64 HC 8587529 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 07-062A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-003 > Feb > 08 > A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T 08-003 February 14, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Update the PCM When Replacing the Transmission BACKGROUND Repeatedly shifting between R and D at high wheel speed when stuck in snow can cause transmission damage. To help prevent this damage, update the PCM anytime you replace an NT. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM and the NT systems of the PCM with the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System). VEHICLES AFFECTED WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A65 H/C 8703761 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 08-003A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS sofiware version: 2.012.013 (December 2007) or later Control Module (CM) Update: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-003 > Feb > 08 > A/T - Update PCM When Replacing A/T > Page 4442 Application Version V.6.10.06 or later Database Update 27-NOV-2007 or later NOTE: If you do not use the correct HDS sofiware version, the HDS may incorrectly indicate that the vehicle does not need an update. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure version 2.012.013 or later sofiware iN network CD is loaded into the iN master terminal. 2. Update both the PGM and AT systems of the PCM with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updathg Control Units/Modules. 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). Use the HDS to clear any body electrical codes that may have been set during the PCM update. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if any body electrical codes have returned. ^ If the codes have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, then go to step 5. ^ If the codes do not return, go to step 5. 5. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold 07-077 November 16, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic With Automatic Transmission - ALL Brake Pedal Feels Hard in the Mornings or in Cold Weather SYMPTOM The brake pedal can feel hard during the first couple of brake applications, usually in the morning when the ambient temperature is cold. PROBABLE CAUSE At cold start, in high altitude, combined with the fast idle retard operation, the intake manifold vacuum supply is at its lowest, resulting in low booster assist. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster and the master cylinder rod seal, and update the PGM-FI software using the HDS. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Booster: P/N 01469-SNB-G00, H/C 8745390 Rod Seal: P/N 46185-SE0-003, H/C 2120970 SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version 2.011.010 (or later) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 01469-SNA-A00 H/C 8044729 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03223 Template ID: 07-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper blades in an upright position to keep from interfering with the cowl cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4447 2. Remove the center cowl cover: ^ Remove the three clips. ^ Release the three front hooks from the edge of the under-cowl panel. ^ Detach the clips by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the side hooks. 3. Remove the under-cowl panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4448 4. Remove the top half of the air cleaner housing and the air cleaner element to gain access to the clamp. 5. Loosen all of the clamps attached to the air cleaner housing, and remove the bottom half of the housing. 6. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector. 7. Remove the master cylinder reservoir mounting bolt. 8. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4449 9. Remove the two engine wire harness clips from their brackets. 10. Remove the smaller engine harness bracket located underneath the master cylinder reservoir bracket (one 6 mm bolt). 11. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. NOTE: To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with shop towels. 12. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 13. Remove the master cylinder and reservoir together from the brake booster. NOTE: Be careful to not bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 4450 14. Remove the brake booster: ^ Refer to page 19-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BOOSTER, and select Brake Booster Replacement (RI 8A1 and RI 8A4 Engine) from the list. 15. Install the new brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install a new rod seal on the master cylinder. 17. Install the master cylinder and reservoir on the brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 18. Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to page 19-6 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PEDAL ADJUSTMENT, and select Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment (A/T) from the list. 19. Fill the reservoir with brake fluid, and bleed the brake system. 20. Install all removed parts. 21. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/ Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-086 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored 06-086 May 23, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With DTC P0455 (Supersedes 06-086, dated January 5, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0455 (evaporative emissions system large leak detected). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets FTP (fuel tank pressure) sensor input during high load and heavy throttle application, setting DTC P0455. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. *VEHICLES AFFECTED* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour *Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A58 H/C 8236069* Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 06-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-086 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0455 Stored > Page 4455 Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION *HDS Software Version: 2.009.007 or later. NOTE: If you do not use the correct HDS software version, the HDS may incorrectly indicate that the vehicle does not need an update. The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and PINs are shown below. If these or later program IDs are the Current Program IDs displayed during the update, the software for this service bulletin is already installed.* DIAGNOSIS 1. Use the HDS to retrieve the DIG P0455 freeze data and/or the on-board snapshot. 2. Compare the MAP sensor voltage to the BARO sensor voltage: ^ If the two readings are within 0.05 volt of each other, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the two readings are not within 0.05 volt of each other, this service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE *Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and software version 2.009.007 or later. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Unit /Modules.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-086 > Dec > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 06-086 December 8, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door- From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H531151 2006 Civic 4-Door - From VIN JHMFA1...68000001 thru JHMFA1...65005042 - From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L040939 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H513566 MIL Comes On With DTC P0455 (Supersedes 06-086, dated December 6, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bar) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0455 (evaporative emissions system large leak detected). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets FIP (fuel tank pressure) sensor input during high load and heavy throttle application, setting DTC P0455. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and software version 2.005.004 or later. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-RNA-A07 H/C 8236044 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 06-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. SOFTWARE INFORMATION The updated PGM-FI software program IDs and P/Ns are listed below. Use this information during the update to verify the correct software. DIAGNOSIS 1. Use the HDS to retrieve the DIG P0455 freeze data and/or the on-board snapshot. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-086 > Dec > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL Comes On with DTC P0455 > Page 4460 2. Compare the MAP sensor voltage to the BARO sensor voltage: ^ If the two readings are within 0.05 volts of each other, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the two readings are not within 0.05 volts of each other, this service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS and sofiware version 2.005.004 or later. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set 06-048 July 29, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With DTC P0116 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P0116 (ECT sensor 1 range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM misinterprets the engine coolant temperature inputs. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the ECM/PCM PGM-FI software using HDS software version 2.005.004 (or later). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set > Page 4465 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour (All except Accord Hybrid) 0.6 hour (Accord Hybrid only) Failed Part: H/C 8293508 P/N 37820-RNA-A59 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-048 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0116 Set > Page 4466 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0116 (ECT sensor range/performance problem): ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual or, ^ Online, enter P0116, then select DTC Troubleshooting: P0116 from the list. - If you find a problem, make the necessary repair. This bulletin does not apply. - If you do not find any problems, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the HDS with software version 2.005.004 or later to update the ECM/PCM PGM-FI software. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating the Control Units/Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Updating Control Units And Modules 01-023 April 10, 2010 Applies To: Honda Vehicles With Programmable Control Units/Modules Updating Control Units/Modules (Supersedes 01-023, dated May 15, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *^Under REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT, the MVCI was added. ^ Under UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS MVCI information was added. ^ UPDATING WITH THE MVCI was added.* The procedures in this service bulletin are used and referenced in other service bulletins. Most 2002 and later Hondas have reprogrammable control units/modules. To update (reprogram) any of these control units/modules, you need the vehicle you're working on and one of these systems: *^MVCI unit with latest control module (CM) update software installed* ^ GNA600 gateway device and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Tablet with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Pocket Tester with the latest HDS software installed ^ HIM and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ A compatible J2534 device and a PC with Honda's J2534 software installed This service bulletin describes these subjects: ^ Who to contact for questions or problems when using Honda-supplied updating equipment or the iN. ^ Required Tools and Equipment - MVCI - GNA600 - HDS Tablet - HDS Pocket Tester - HIM ^ Updating Tips and Precautions ^ Updating with the MVCI ^ Updating with the GNA600 - GNA6OO Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - GNA6OO Updating in Storage Mode ^ Updating with the HDS Tablet and the HDS Pocket Tester Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4472 ^ Updating with the HIM - HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - HIM Updating in Storage Mode - Diagnosing HIM Error Codes - HIM Self-Test NOTE: Whenever you install a new, reprogrammable control unit/module, check that it has the latest software, and update it if needed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Skill Level: Repair Technician Refer to the specific service bulletin for the symptom you are repairing. QUESTIONS ABOUT THE UPDATING EQUIPMENT OR THE INTERACTIVE NETWORK For questions about the Honda-supplied updating equipment, call American Honda's Special Tools hotline. For questions about the iN, call the iN Support Center. REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: Updating for most control units/modules can be done with any of the following tools. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4473 *MVCI: (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program)* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4474 GNA600: (No longer available for purchase) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4475 HDS Tablet: HDS Pocket Tester: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4476 HIM: UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS ^ If you're updating a control module/unit on a new vehicle, make sure all its fuses were installed at PDI. ^ To prevent control unit/module damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. ^ Make sure the HDS Tablet, the HDS Pocket Tester, or the iN workstation has the latest version of HDS software. The HDS version number is on the HDS start-up screen. To find the latest HDS software information on ISIS, select Search by Vehicle, select Technical Library, expand the ServiceNews branch, select Keyword (All Models), enter keywords HDS VERSION, then select the latest article. NOTE: The screen is from an iN workstation. The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^Make sure the Database Update listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.) is the same or earlier than the ones listed on the Reprogramming screen of the MVCI (on the MVCI, select CM Update Mode, then select Reprogramming), or on the Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4477 Updating Honda Control Modules screen on the HDS tablet, the HDS pocket tester, or the iN workstation. MVCI:* iN Workstation: NOTE: The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^If the Database Update listed in the service bulletin is later than that shown by the software, please see the the procedures for software installation in the following documents in Tool Information on ISIS (go to General Publications, then Tool Information): - MVCI User Guide (see HDS MVCI Firmware Update section) - Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) Tablet Setup Instructions - Installation Instructions for HDS ( see PC Software for the GNA600, HIM or Pocket Tester ID)* ^ Do not connect an additional power supply to the updating equipment when it is connected to the vehicle; power is supplied through the DLC. ^ To ensure that the control module/unit is not permanently damaged during updating, vedfy that the vehicle's 12-volt battery is fully charged before starthg an update. NOTE: If the vehicle's 12-volt battery drops below 10 volts during the update, the programming status bar may go past 100 percent, or the updating tool may display an error message. ^ If you have a problem during an update (D4/ immobilizer indicator flashes, update tool freezes, etc.), you can minimize the chances of damaging the control unit/module by doing one or more of these actions: - CRITICAL: Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). - Connect a jumper battery (DO NOT connect a battery charger). - Disconnect the updating tool from the vehicle's DLC. - Reboot the updating tool. - Reconnect the updating tool to the vehicle's DLC, and retry the updating procedure. *UPDATING WITH THE MVCI Make sure you have the latest control module (CM) Update software loaded from your HDS PC to your MVC I. For loading instructions and other Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4478 details, refer to the MVCI User Guide on ISIS. The Database Update version appears when you select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. 1. Connect the DLC cable to the MVCI and to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The MVCI automatically boots up. 3. Press the ENTER button on the MVCI to see the User Config menu. Select CM Update Mode. 4. Select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. NOTE: Use these MVCI default settings: Setting 1Destination: USA Language: American English Setting 2 - Auto Detect: Yes Continuous Mode: No For more information on these settings, refer to the MVCI User Guide. 5. The CM Update software information appears. Press ENTER to continue. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4479 NOTE: If the Database Update is an earlier version than the one listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.), press ESC, then update your MVCI before continuing. 6. Wait for the MVCI to check the vehicle for reprogrammable systems. This may take up to 90 seconds. 7. If there are multiple reprogrammable systems that need to be updated, select the applicable system. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. 8. The current program ID, the recommended update, and other details appear. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4480 9. Wait for the MVCI to copy the data for updating the vehicle. 10. After the MVCI has copied the files, a confirmation screen appears. Press ENTER to update the control unit/module, or press ESC to exit. 11. Wait for the MVCI to update the control unit/module. 12. After the MVCI finishes updating the control uniti module, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) when directed by the MVCI. 13. Turn the ignition switch back to ON (II) within 60 seconds to complete the updating procedure. NOTE: The MVCI has a countdown timer. If you do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II) within 60 seconds, the MVCI sets an error code. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4481 14. After finishing the updating procedure, the MVCI gives you the option of updating the same system on another vehicle. For more information on updating several vehicles, see the MVCI User Guide. 15. If an error occurs during the updating procedure, an error message appears. Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). Press ENTER to display the error code. Refer to the CM Update Error Code Table in the MVCI User Guide for more information about the code and its solutions.* UPDATING WITH THE GNA600 NOTE: For more information on the GNA6OO, refer to the GNA600 User's Guide. This guide is on ISIS, under the Tool Information heading. Two modes of updating can be used with the GNA600: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Use Pass-Thru mode when the GNA6OO can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Use Storage mode when the GNA6OO cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. GNA600 Updating in Pass-Thru Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4482 NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-th ru-Mode. 5. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4483 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control uniti module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control uniti mod ule has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. GNA600 Updating in Storage Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the ISIS publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4484 NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then click on Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the GNA600 to the vehicle. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. 7. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the GNA600. The GNA600 does a self-check and, after about 30 seconds, its yellow No.1 and green No.2 LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4485 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 10. Disconnect the GNA600 from the USB PC interface cable, then connect the trigger switch adapter block (yellow) and the trigger switch to the GNA600 as shown below. (The DLC cable should still be connected to the GNA600.) 11. Reconnect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA600 stays on. Press and release the trigger switch button. 13. The yellow No.1 LED blinks, and the green No.2 LED stays on. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4486 NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the No.1 LED stays on and the No.2 LED goes off, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the No.1 and No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. UPDATING WITH THE HDS TABLET AND THE HDS POCKET TESTER NOTE: This procedure explains how to update with the HDS tablet. Updating with the HDS pocket tester is similar, but the user interface is modified to fit its smaller screen. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC sofiware onto your HDS tablet or HDS pocket tester. Refer to the instructions included with the HDS Installation Disc. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. On the HDS Switchboard screen, click on the CM update icon. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4487 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and connect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the Systems one at a time. 4. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4488 5. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HDS tablet. 6. In the HDS Tablet Programming screen, click on the check mark after programming is completed. 7. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. NOTE: To avoid permanent control module damage, do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) during the update. 8. When updating is complete, follow the screen prompts to turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). To update another system, return to the Updating Honda Control Modules screen by clicking on the exit button on the right side of the screen. UPDATING WITH THE HIM Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4489 Two updating modes can be used with the HIM: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Pass-Thru mode is used when the HIM can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Storage mode is used when the HIM cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 LED on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-thru-Mode. 5. Connect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4490 NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HIM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4491 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control unit/module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control unit/module has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. HIM Updating in Storage Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC So ftware on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then select Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the HIM to the vehicle, and connect it to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4492 the HIM from the vehicle. 7. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the HIM. After several seconds, the green and yellow LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the HIM. 10. Disconnect the HIM from the PC interface cable. 11. Reconnect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Press and release the ENTER button on the HIM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4493 13. The green No.1 LED stays on, and the yellow No. 2 LED blinks. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the yellow No.2 LED stays on, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the green No.1 and the yellow No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HIM from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. Diagnosing HIM Error Codes If the red No.3 LED on the HIM came on or was flashing during the update, do this: 1. Leave the ignition switch in ON (II) while you disconnect the HIM from the vehicle's DLC. 2. If not already done, load the latest HDS sofiware onto the iN workstation. 3. Connect the HIM to the iN workstation. Connect the small end of the PC interface cable to the PC port on the HIM. 4. If not already done, connect the PC end of the blue PC interface cable to the 9P serial port on the iN workstation. 5. Connect the 110 VACIl 2 VDC power supply to the HIM and to a wall outlet. 6. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 7. On the right side of the screen, click on the view error button. 8. Click on View Error at the bottom of the screen to display the problem encountered while the HIM was connected to the vehicle. ^ If you get a Code 40 error message (usually caused by a communication error between the HIM and the workstation), do this: - Do the HIM self-test procedure (see HIM Self-Test). - Move the blue PC interface cable to another communication port on the back of the computer. - If one of the communication ports on the back of the computer has another cable connected to it, disconnect that cable, leave it disconnected during the HIM procedure, and connect the blue PC interface cable to that port. - Connect the HIM to another computer. (Some iN workstations require an internal communication port setup procedure. For help, call the iN Support Center) ^ If you get a Code 50 error message (usually caused by a communications error between the HIM and the vehicle's DLC), do this: - Diagnose and clear any DTCs. (The control unit/module must be free of DTCs before you can update it.) - Make sure there's a good connection between the HIM and the DLC. - Retry the update using the procedures in this service bulletin or on the back of the HIM. - If needed, call Tech Line for further help. HIM Self-Test If you suspect there's a problem with the HIM, review the instructions in this service bulletin to make sure you are using it correctly. If you still think there's a problem, do this self-test: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4494 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS software onto the iN workstation. 2. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 3. On the right side of the screen, click on the tools button. 4. Click on HIM Self-Test Procedure. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to run the HIM self-test. 6. If the self-test indicates a problem with the HIM, call the Special Tools hotline for repair instructions. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations 40. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4501 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 27. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4504 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover. 15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 16. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4505 18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4506 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4507 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side upon the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4508 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolls, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4509 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4510 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4511 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 3. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the passage. 7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4514 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (D). 3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C and transmission housing. 7. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 8. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4519 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4520 73. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4521 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. 3. Release the shift lock solenoid lock (A), then remove the shift lock solenoid (B). 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), solenoid plunger (B), and plunger spring (C) assembly. 5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock stop (E), and install the new shift lock solenoid assembly by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop. 6. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide, and install the connector (F) on the bracket base. 7. Install the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 15. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 16. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 17. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4525 18. Shift Control Solenoid Valve D (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4526 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and test the solenoid valves. 4. Lift the vehicle upon a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body ground: ^ No. 1: shift solenoid valve C ^ No. 2: shift solenoid valve B ^ No. 5: shift solenoid valve A ^ No. 8: shift solenoid valve D Standard: 12 - 25 ohms ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminals individually. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test the shift solenoid harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4527 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift solenoid valve D. 13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. 14. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to each solenoid terminal individually. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 15 and replace the solenoid harness. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4528 15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to step 21. 16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it. 18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 21. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 22. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 24. Refill the transmission with ATF. 25. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4529 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors. ^ If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 7. ^ If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing, then go to step 12. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4530 7. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 8. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new 0rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the 0rings provided on it. 9. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 10. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 11. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations 40. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4536 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 27. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4539 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover. 15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 16. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4540 18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4541 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4542 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side upon the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4543 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolls, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4544 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4545 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4546 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 3. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the passage. 7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4549 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (D). 3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C and transmission housing. 7. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 8. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4554 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4555 73. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4556 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. 3. Release the shift lock solenoid lock (A), then remove the shift lock solenoid (B). 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), solenoid plunger (B), and plunger spring (C) assembly. 5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock stop (E), and install the new shift lock solenoid assembly by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop. 6. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide, and install the connector (F) on the bracket base. 7. Install the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 15. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 16. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 17. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4560 18. Shift Control Solenoid Valve D (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4561 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and test the solenoid valves. 4. Lift the vehicle upon a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body ground: ^ No. 1: shift solenoid valve C ^ No. 2: shift solenoid valve B ^ No. 5: shift solenoid valve A ^ No. 8: shift solenoid valve D Standard: 12 - 25 ohms ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminals individually. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test the shift solenoid harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4562 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift solenoid valve D. 13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. 14. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to each solenoid terminal individually. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 15 and replace the solenoid harness. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4563 15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to step 21. 16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it. 18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 21. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 22. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 24. Refill the transmission with ATF. 25. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4564 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors. ^ If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 7. ^ If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing, then go to step 12. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4565 7. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 8. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new 0rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the 0rings provided on it. 9. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 10. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 11. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4571 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4572 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4573 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications A/T Fluid At changing .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 2.4L (2.5 Qt) Overhaul ............................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... 5.9L (6.2 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4578 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type .......................................................................................................................................................... Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)-Z1 Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds after turning the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It should be between upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, ATF filter, ATF warmer, hose, line, and line joints. If a problem is found, fix it before filling the transmission. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level. 7. If necessary, fill the transmission with the recommended fluid through the dipstick hole (A) to bring it to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use genuine Honda ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4581 8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4582 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF) Using a nonHonda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.4 L (2.5 US qt, 2.1 Imp qt) at change 5.9 L (6.2 US qt, 5.2 Imp qt) at overhaul 6. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark and lower mark on the dipstick. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. 8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and reset the ATF life with the HDS. 10. 4-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the ATF, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the ATF, go to step 3. 2-door model: If the maintenance minder required to replace the ATF, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the ATF, notify the customer that the maintenance minder term is not reset for the item that was replaced and the maintenance minder will show to replace the ATF before the actual maintenance timing. 11. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 12. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 13. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 14. Select RESETTING THE ATF with the HDS. NOTE: If you changed the engine oil at the same time with the ATF, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4583 instead. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Filter Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the ATF warmer hose (A) from the ATF filter (B). 3. Remove the ATF filter holder (C). 4. Remove the bolt (D) securing the ATF inlet line (E). 5. Remove the joint bolt (F) from the ATF inlet line. 6. Disconnect the ATF filter from the ATF warmer hose (G), and replace it with new one. 7. Slide the ATF warmer hose on the new ATF filter until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the hose with the clip (H) at 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 inch) (I) from the filter housing. 8. Install the ATF filter and ATF inlet line/hose with the joint bolt and new sealing washers (J). 9. Secure the ATF filter with the ATF filter holder and the bolt. 10. Slide the ATF warmer hose on the ATF filter until the hose end contacts the filter housing, and secure the hose with the clip (K) at 6-8 mm (0.24-0.31 inch) (L) from the filter housing. 11. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair ATF Warmer Hose Replacement 1. Slide the ATF warmer hoses (A) on the ATF filter (B) until the hose ends contact the filter housing, and secure the hoses with the clips (C) at 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 inch) (D) from the filter housing. 2. Slide the ATF warmer hoses (E) over the ATF lines (F) until the hoses stop, and secure the hoses with the clip (G) at 6-8 mm (0.24-0.31 inch) (H) from the hose end. 3. Slide the ATF warmer hoses (I) over the ATF warmer lines (J) until the hose ends contact the bulge (K), and secure the hoses with the clip (L) at 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 inch) (M) from the hose end. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4593 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4596 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations 40. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4604 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 27. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4607 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover. 15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 16. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4608 18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4609 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4610 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side upon the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4611 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolls, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4612 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4613 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4614 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 3. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the passage. 7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4617 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (D). 3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C and transmission housing. 7. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 8. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4624 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4625 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4626 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4634 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4637 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4641 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4645 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4646 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4647 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4648 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4649 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4654 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4655 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4658 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4662 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4663 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4672 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4673 73. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4674 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. 3. Release the shift lock solenoid lock (A), then remove the shift lock solenoid (B). 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), solenoid plunger (B), and plunger spring (C) assembly. 5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock stop (E), and install the new shift lock solenoid assembly by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop. 6. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide, and install the connector (F) on the bracket base. 7. Install the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4678 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 15. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 16. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 17. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4682 18. Shift Control Solenoid Valve D (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4683 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and test the solenoid valves. 4. Lift the vehicle upon a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body ground: ^ No. 1: shift solenoid valve C ^ No. 2: shift solenoid valve B ^ No. 5: shift solenoid valve A ^ No. 8: shift solenoid valve D Standard: 12 - 25 ohms ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminals individually. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test the shift solenoid harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4684 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift solenoid valve D. 13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. 14. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to each solenoid terminal individually. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 15 and replace the solenoid harness. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4685 15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to step 21. 16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it. 18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 21. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 22. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 24. Refill the transmission with ATF. 25. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4686 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors. ^ If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 7. ^ If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing, then go to step 12. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4687 7. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 8. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new 0rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the 0rings provided on it. 9. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 10. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 11. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Removal Shift Lever Removal 1. Remove the center console. 2. Shift the shift lever into the R position. 3. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up with a screwdriver. 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder bracket (B), then slide the socket holder to remove the shift cable (C) from the bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4692 6. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (B). 7. Remove the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4693 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Installation Shift Lever Installation 1. Install the shift lever assembly. 2. Connect shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (B). 3. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust the cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4694 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4695 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch Harness Replacement A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch Harness Replacement NOTE: The A/T gear position indicator light and the park pin switch are not available separately. Replace the A/T gear position indicator light and the park pin switch as a set. 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Loosen the A/T gear position indicator panel. 3. Remove the park pin switch (A) while pressing the park pin switch lock (B). 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light and socket (A) from the indicator panel (B), and remove the light bulb (C) from the socket. 5. Remove the harness clamp (D), and remove the park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light connector (E) from the shift lever assembly/bracket base (F). 6. Install the new park pin switch (G) on the shift lever. 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb in the new socket, and install it in the indicator panel. 8. Clamp the harnesses together with the harness clamp, then install the harness clamp on the shift lever bracket base. 9. Route the harnesses along the harness guides, and install the new connector in the bracket base. 10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel. 11. Install the shift lever assembly. 12. Install the center console. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Cable Adjustment 1. Remove the center console. 2. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up with a screwdriver. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 4. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder bracket (B), then slide the socket holder to remove the shift cable (C) from the bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4700 5. While holding the socket holder (A), rotate the socket holder retainer (B) fully counterclockwise, and press in the socket holder lock (C) between the holder and retainer. 6. Align the socket holder (A) with the slot (B) in the socket holder bracket (C), then slide the holder into the bracket. 7. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) clockwise, and push the socket holder lock (B). Rotate the holder retainer counterclockwise until the retainer stops at the stop (C) of the holder lock to secure the shift cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4701 8. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift cable. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the R position indicator comes on. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Place the shift lever in the R position, then insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket, through the positioning hole on the shift lever, and into the positioning hole on the bracket. Use only a 6.0 mm pin that is free any burns. 12. Verify that the shift lever is secured in the R position. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4702 13. Install the shift cable end (A) over the mounting stud (B) by aligning its square hole (C) with the square fitting (D) at the bottom of the stud. Do not install the shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (E). 14. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). 15. If improperly installed, align the square fitting with the square hole by rotating the mounting stud. 16. Install and tighten the nut. 17. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 19. Shift to the P position, and check that the shift lock works properly. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 20. Install the center console. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4703 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Cable Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up with a screwdriver. 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder bracket (B), then slide the socket holder to remove the shift cable (C) from the bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4704 6. Remove the shift cable cover (A), and remove the three bolts securing the shift cable holder (B). 7. Pry up the lock tab of the lock washer (C), and remove the lock bolt (D) and lock washer, then separate the shift cable (E) from the control shaft (F). 8. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket (A) and grommet (B). 9. Remove the shift cable grommet, and pull out the shift cable (C). 10. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole (D), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 11. Secure the shift cable bracket and grommet with the nuts. 12. Make sure that the transmission is in the R position at the transmission control lever. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4705 13. Install the control lever (A) over the control shaft (B). 14. Install the shift cable holder (C) on the holder bracket (D) with tightening bolts loosely. Tighten the bolts (E) in the lateral position to the specified torque, then tighten the bolt (F) in the vertical position. 15. Secure the control lever with the new lock washer (G) and the lock bolt (H), then bend the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head. 16. Install the shift cable cover (I). 17. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust the cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information 89-022 May 16, 2008 Applies To: Vehicles With an In-Radiator ATF Cooler - ALL ATF Cooler Cleaner (Supersedes 89-022, dated June 18, 2004, to update the information marked by asterisks) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured A/T, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat A/T failure. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (PIN GTHTTCF6H) is a portable, electrically operated special tool that cleans the ATF cooler with high- pressure, heated ATF. This cleaning action melts down waxy varnish residue left by burnt ATF and purges metal particles, clutch material, and other contaminants. The ATF Cooler Cleaner has these features: ^ Quick-connect fittings and color-coded hoses for easy hookup. ^ Uses about 9.5 gallons of Honda ATF-Z1, which gets filtered and recirculated. ^ Heats ATF to a temperature of 1400 to 150°F and then pumps it through the ATF cooler at high pressure (100 psi) using a pulsating action and air purging. Switching the hoses cleans the ATF cooler in the reverse direction. ^ Two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters to trap purged contaminants. ^ Built-in tool tray. This service bulletin gives you information for ordering and servicing this special tool, and guides you through the entire ATF cooler cleaning process. *REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001 Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter: T/N GTHNBP12 (12-pack) T/N GTHNBP2 (6-pack) T/N GTHGNBP22 (2-pack) ORDERING INFORMATION Additional ATF cooler cleaners or magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order on the iN, click on SERVICE, then Service Bay, then Tool and Equipment Program. From the Tool and Equipment Program menu, click on the Online Catalog tab, and then search for the desired filter pack by part number.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information > Page 4710 TOOL DESCRIPTION CLEANING PROCEDURE The cleaning procedure involves hot fluid under high pressure. Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow all instructions in this bulletin. 1. Plug the ATF cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light cord; you would damage the unit. 2. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information > Page 4711 3. Connect the appropriate fittings to the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line going to the external filter). Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 4. Connect a shop air hose to the air purge valve. NOTICE The quick connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 5. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 6. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 7. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler, then connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 8. Connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 9. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. 10. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 11. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 12. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 13. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 14. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. TOOL MAINTENANCE Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: *^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters every 20 hours, based on hour meter reading. For more information on filter replacement, see the January 2008 Honda ServiceNews article, Hour Meter Tells You When to Replace ATF Cooler Cleaner Filters.* ^ Fill the tank so the ATF is 4.5 inches from the top of the filler hole; do not overfill. NOTE: If the fluid level is low, the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on and the tank heater will not work. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information > Page 4712 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Fluid Warmer - A/T > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Fluid Warmer - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4716 Transmission Fluid Warmer - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Warmer Replacement 1. Remove the splash shield. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 4. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and remove the battery and battery tray. 6. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 7. Remove the battery base and resonator. 8. Disconnect the water by-pass hoses (A) and ATF warmer hoses (B) from the ATF warmer (C), and turn the hose ends up to prevent fluid from flowing out. 9. Remove the ATF warmer, and replace it with new one. 10. Install the new ATF warmer on its bracket (D). 11. Slide the water by-pass hoses to the ATF warmer, and secure the hoses with the clips. 12. Slide the ATF warmer hoses over the ATF warmer lines (E) until the hose ends contact the bulge (F), and secure the hoses with the clip (G) at 68 mm (0.24 - 0.31 inch) (H) from the hose end. 13. Install the battery base and resonator. 14. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. 15. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Connect the battery terminals, and apply grease around the battery terminals. 17. Install the splash shield. 18. Check the ATF level, and add the ATF to proper level if necessary. 19. Fill the engine cooling system with the recommended coolant. 20. Start the engine in the P or IN position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Turn off the engine, and recheck the ATF level. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 22. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement 1. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 3. Remove the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) cover, then remove the three bolts securing the ECM/PCM. 4. Remove the ECM/PCM bracket. 5. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the bracket. 6. Support the transmission with a jack and a wood block under the transmission. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4720 7. Remove the transmission mount stiffener (A), then remove the transmission mount (B). 8. Install the transmission mount with the new mounting bolts (C), then install the transmission mount stiffener. 9. Loosely tighten the new bolt and nuts (D). 10. Raise the hoist to full height. 11. Loosen the lower torque rod mounting bolt (A). 12. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4721 13. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts. 14. Raise the hoist to full height. 15. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt. 16. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4722 17. Tighten the upper torque rod mounting bolt. 18. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box to the bracket. 19. Install the ECM/PCM bracket. 20. Install the ECM/PCM, then install the ECM/PCM cover. 21. Install the air cleaner housing assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4726 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4727 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4728 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4729 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4730 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4735 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4736 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4739 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4743 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4744 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4749 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4750 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4751 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4752 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4753 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4754 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4755 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4756 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4757 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4758 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4759 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4760 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4761 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications CLUTCH LINE FLUID TYPE Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated 11-005 March 31, 2011 Applies To: 2008-09 Accord - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Civic - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Element - ALL with M/T Clutch Pedal Pops, Squeaks, or Clicks SYMPTOM The clutch pedal pops, squeaks, or clicks when you press or release it. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder has insufficient clearance between the piston and the push rod. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the clutch master cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly (Includes clutch master cylinder, 0-ring, seal, and snap pin) Accord and Civic: P/N 46920-SNA-A03 Element P/N 46920-57A-A04 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008 (Each repair requires one bottle.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: Accord: 0.9 hour Civic: 1.2hours Element: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 46920-SNA-A02 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the clutch master cylinder: ^ Refer to the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MASTER CYLINDER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (for the appropriate engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated > Page 4774 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated 11-005 March 31, 2011 Applies To: 2008-09 Accord - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Civic - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Element - ALL with M/T Clutch Pedal Pops, Squeaks, or Clicks SYMPTOM The clutch pedal pops, squeaks, or clicks when you press or release it. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder has insufficient clearance between the piston and the push rod. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the clutch master cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly (Includes clutch master cylinder, 0-ring, seal, and snap pin) Accord and Civic: P/N 46920-SNA-A03 Element P/N 46920-57A-A04 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008 (Each repair requires one bottle.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: Accord: 0.9 hour Civic: 1.2hours Element: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 46920-SNA-A02 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the clutch master cylinder: ^ Refer to the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MASTER CYLINDER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (for the appropriate engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated > Page 4780 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4781 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water, 1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the battery base. 6. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B) out of the yoke. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C). 7. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 8. Remove the clutch line bracket (A). 9. Remove the clutch line from the clamp (B). 10. Remove the clutch master cylinder (A) with the clutch line (B) and the reservoir hose (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4782 11. Disconnect the reservoir hose (A), then remove the retaining clip (B), and remove the clutch line (C) from the clutch master cylinder (D). Plug the end of the reservoir hose and the clutch line to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 12. Remove the O-ring (E) and clutch master cylinder seal (F) from the clutch master cylinder. 13. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Apply brake assembly lube to the clutch line, and install a new O-ring. ^ Tighten the master cylinder mounting nuts to 13 Nm (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft. lbs.). ^ Install the battery base. ^ Install the air cleaner housing. ^ Install the battery, Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable. ^ Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. ^ Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 14. Make sure the hose clamps (A) are positioned on the master cylinder (B) and reservoir (C) as shown. 15. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry apart the tip of the retaining clip (B) with a screwdriver. 16. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. NOTE: Reservoir filling is covered in the bleeding procedure. 17. Reinstall the under-cowl panel and cowl cover. 18. Reinstall the driver's dashboard under cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Slave Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch line bracket (A), the mounting bolt (B) and the slave cylinder (C). 2. Remove the roll pins (A). Disconnect the clutch line (B), and remove the O-ring (C). Plug the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 3. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Install the new O-ring (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4786 4. Pull the boot (A) back, end apply grease to the boot and slave cylinder rod (B). Reinstall the boot. 5. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the tip of the slave cylinder pushrod and the release fork. Tighten the slave cylinder mounting bolts to 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ft. lbs.). 6. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. ^ Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid. ^ Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. ^ It may be necessary to limit the movement of the release fork (B) with a block of wood to remove all the air from the system. ^ Tighten the bleeder screw to 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.); do not overtighten it. ^ Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. ^ Use only Honda DOT3 or 4 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. ^ Confirm clutch operation and check for leaking fluid. 7. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair Clutch Hose Replacement NOTE: ^ Replace the clutch hose if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks. ^ Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately water. 1. Disconnect the clutch hose (A) from the clutch line (B). 2. Remove and discard the clutch hose clips (A) from the clutch hose (B). 3. Remove the clutch hose from the body (C) and clutch hose bracket (D). 4. Install the clutch hose (A) on the body (B) and clutch hose bracket (C) with the new clutch hose clips (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4790 5. Connect the clutch line (A) to the clutch hose (B). 6. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. 7. Do the following checks: ^ Check the clutch hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. ^ Check the clutch hose for interference and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Pedal Assembly: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated Clutch Pedal Assembly: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated 11-005 March 31, 2011 Applies To: 2008-09 Accord - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Civic - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Element - ALL with M/T Clutch Pedal Pops, Squeaks, or Clicks SYMPTOM The clutch pedal pops, squeaks, or clicks when you press or release it. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder has insufficient clearance between the piston and the push rod. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the clutch master cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly (Includes clutch master cylinder, 0-ring, seal, and snap pin) Accord and Civic: P/N 46920-SNA-A03 Element P/N 46920-57A-A04 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008 (Each repair requires one bottle.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: Accord: 0.9 hour Civic: 1.2hours Element: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 46920-SNA-A02 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the clutch master cylinder: ^ Refer to the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MASTER CYLINDER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (for the appropriate engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Pedal Assembly: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated > Page 4799 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Pedal Assembly: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated Clutch Pedal Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated 11-005 March 31, 2011 Applies To: 2008-09 Accord - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Civic - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Element - ALL with M/T Clutch Pedal Pops, Squeaks, or Clicks SYMPTOM The clutch pedal pops, squeaks, or clicks when you press or release it. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder has insufficient clearance between the piston and the push rod. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the clutch master cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly (Includes clutch master cylinder, 0-ring, seal, and snap pin) Accord and Civic: P/N 46920-SNA-A03 Element P/N 46920-57A-A04 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008 (Each repair requires one bottle.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: Accord: 0.9 hour Civic: 1.2hours Element: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 46920-SNA-A02 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the clutch master cylinder: ^ Refer to the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MASTER CYLINDER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (for the appropriate engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Pedal Assembly: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated > Page 4805 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4806 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: Check the clutch pedal position switch. Check the clutch interlock switch. The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Lift up the carpet (A). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side of the pedal pad (B). 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H), and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 157 mm (6.18 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 77 mm (3.03 inch) 4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut. 5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch pedal. 6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 7. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut. 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 9. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 10. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully pressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 11. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4807 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Replacement 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch connector (A) and clutch interlock switch connector (B). 2. Pry out the lock pin (C), and pull the pedal pin (D) out of the yoke. 3. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (E) and clutch pedal mounting bolt (F). 4. Remove the clutch pedal (G). 5. Install the clutch pedal (A). 6. Install the clutch pedal mounting bolt (B) and master cylinder mounting nuts (C). 7. Apply grease to the pedal pin (D), and slide it into the yoke, then install a new lock pin (E). 8. Connect the clutch pedal position switch connector (F) and clutch interlock switch connector (G). 9. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch, and clutch interlock switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4811 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4812 45. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4813 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install the clutch interlock switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4814 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: Check the clutch pedal position switch. Check the clutch interlock switch. The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Lift up the carpet (A). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side of the pedal pad (B). 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H), and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 157 mm (6.18 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 77 mm (3.03 inch) 4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut. 5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch pedal. 6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 7. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut. 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 9. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 10. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully pressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 11. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4818 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4819 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4820 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4821 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4822 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4823 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Pressure Plate Tighten the bolts in several steps. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4827 Pressure Plate: Testing and Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4828 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4829 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4830 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4831 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4832 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4833 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4834 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4835 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4836 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4837 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4838 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4839 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4840 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Locations Driveline/Axle Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Locations > Page 4855 Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection Driveshaft Inspection 1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot (B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is found, replace the boot and boot bands. 2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose. 3. Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted or cracked; if it is, replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Driveshaft Removal Driveshaft Removal 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels. 4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B), then remove the nut. 5. If the driveshaft is removed, drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer. 6. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub using a plastic hammer. 7. Remove the nuts and bolt, then separate the lower arm with using a prybar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4858 8. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub. 9. Left and Right driveshaft (except M/T model right driveshaft): Pry the inboard joint (A) from the differential case with a prybar. Right driveshaft (M/T only): Drive the inboard joint (A) off of the intermediate shaft with a drift and hammer. Remove the driveshaft as an assembly. Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), because the inboard joint may come apart. Draw the driveshaft straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4859 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Driveshaft Disassembly Driveshaft Disassembly Special Tools Required ^ Threaded adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001010A ^ Boot band pincers, commercially available Inboard Joint Side 1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4860 2. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper. ^ If the boot band is welded type (A), cut the boot band (B). ^ If the boot band is a double loop type (C), lift up the band bend (D), and push it into the clip (E). ^ If the boot band is a low profile type (F), pinch the boot band using the commercially available boot band pincers (G). 3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint (C) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the rollers when separating them from the inboard joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4861 4. Use a paint pen to make a mark (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider, then remove the rollers. NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe marks on the rolling surfaces. 5. Remove the circlip (D). 6. Mark (E) the spider (C) and driveshaft (F) to identify the position of the spider on the shaft. 7. Remove the spider (C). 8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot and dynamic damper. 9. Remove the inboard boot and dynamic damper. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper. 10. Remove the vinyl tape. Outboard Joint Side: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4862 1. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper, If the boot band is an ear clamp type (A), lift up the three tabs (B) with a screwdriver. 2. Slide the outboard boot (A) to the inboard joint side. Take care not to damage the boot. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the outboard joint inner race. 4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same position of the outboard joint end (C). 5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the special tool and a commercially available 5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (B). 7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4863 8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft. 9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot. 10. Remove the outboard boot. Take care not to damage the boot. 11. Remove the vinyl tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4864 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Driveshaft Reassembly Driveshaft Reassembly Driveshaft Special Tools Required ^ Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially available ^ Boot band pincers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent commercially available NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. Inboard Joint Side: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4865 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the inboard boot and dynamic damper. 2. Install the dynamic damper and inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. Take care not to damage the inboard boot and dynamic damper. 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the driveshaft. 4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is fully seated. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4866 5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high shoulders facing outward, and note these items: ^ Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the spider by aligning the marks (C). ^ Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers from falling off. 6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set. 7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note these items: ^ Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (A) on the inboard joint and the rollers. ^ Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is pointing up to prevent it from failing off. 8. Install the boot bands. ^ For the double loop type, go to step 12. (Boot band replacement only) ^ For the low profile type, go to step 9. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4867 9. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B), then hook the tab (C) of the band. 10. Close the hook portion of the band with a commercially available boot band pincers (A), then hook the tabs (B) of the band. 11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and repeat steps 9 through 10, then go to step 21. 12. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard joint, then install the new double loop band (A) onto the boot (B). 13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4868 14. Mark a position (A) on the band 10 - 14 mm (0.4 - 0.6 inch) from the clip (B). 15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the commercially available boot band tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the winding mandrel (B). 16. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot band tool, and tighten the band until the marked spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip. 17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4869 18. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess free end of the band to leave a 5 - 10 mm (0.2 - 0.4 inch) tail protruding from the clip. 19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a hammer. NOTE: ^ Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with anything on the vehicle and the band does not move. ^ Remove any grease remaining on the surrounding surfaces. 20. Repeat steps 12 through 19 for the band on the other end of the boot. 21. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4870 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the outboard boot. 2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the outboard boot. 3. Install the new stop ring into the driveshaft groove (A). 4. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint. 5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about 10 cm (4 inch) onto a hard surface. Do not use a hammer as excessive force may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4871 6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the outboard joint end (B). 7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the joint grease included in the new joint boot set. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4872 8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between full compression and full extension. Make sure the ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the driveshaft and joint. 9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and outboard joint (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4873 10. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a commercially available boot band pincers Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B). 11. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of the band. If the clearance is not within the standard, close the ear portion of the band farther. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the band on the other end of the boot. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4874 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Driveshaft Installation Driveshaft Installation 1. Seat anew set ring into the set ring groove of the driveshaft (left driveshaft). 2. Apply 0.5 - 1.0 g (0.02 - 0.04 oz) of specified grease to the whole splined surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After applying grease, remove the grease from the splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed from the intermediate shaft. 3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent, and dry with compressed air. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) until the set ring (D) locks in the groove (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4875 4. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). 5. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Then tighten the nuts and bolt (C) to the lower torque specification. 6. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder (B) against the driveshaft. 7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the front wheel, then install the front wheel with the wheel nuts. 8. Refill the transmission with recommended transmission fluid. 9. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4876 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Driveshaft Removal Driveshaft Removal 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels. 4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B), then remove the nut. 5. If the driveshaft is removed, drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer. 6. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub using a plastic hammer. 7. Remove the nuts and bolt, then separate the lower arm with using a prybar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4877 8. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub. 9. Left and Right driveshaft (except M/T model right driveshaft): Pry the inboard joint (A) from the differential case with a prybar. Right driveshaft (M/T only): Drive the inboard joint (A) off of the intermediate shaft with a drift and hammer. Remove the driveshaft as an assembly. Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), because the inboard joint may come apart. Draw the driveshaft straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal. Driveshaft Disassembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4878 Driveshaft Disassembly Special Tools Required ^ Threaded adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001010A ^ Boot band pincers, commercially available Inboard Joint Side 1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4879 2. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper. ^ If the boot band is welded type (A), cut the boot band (B). ^ If the boot band is a double loop type (C), lift up the band bend (D), and push it into the clip (E). ^ If the boot band is a low profile type (F), pinch the boot band using the commercially available boot band pincers (G). 3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint (C) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the rollers when separating them from the inboard joint. 4. Use a paint pen to make a mark (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider, then remove the rollers. NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe marks on the rolling surfaces. 5. Remove the circlip (D). 6. Mark (E) the spider (C) and driveshaft (F) to identify the position of the spider on the shaft. 7. Remove the spider (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4880 8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot and dynamic damper. 9. Remove the inboard boot and dynamic damper. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper. 10. Remove the vinyl tape. Outboard Joint Side: 1. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic damper, If the boot band is an ear clamp type (A), lift up the three tabs (B) with a screwdriver. 2. Slide the outboard boot (A) to the inboard joint side. Take care not to damage the boot. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the outboard joint inner race. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4881 4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same position of the outboard joint end (C). 5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the special tool and a commercially available 5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (B). 7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. 8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft. 9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot. 10. Remove the outboard boot. Take care not to damage the boot. 11. Remove the vinyl tape. Driveshaft Reassembly Driveshaft Reassembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4882 Driveshaft Special Tools Required ^ Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially available ^ Boot band pincers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent commercially available NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. Inboard Joint Side: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4883 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the inboard boot and dynamic damper. 2. Install the dynamic damper and inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. Take care not to damage the inboard boot and dynamic damper. 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the driveshaft. 4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is fully seated. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4884 5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high shoulders facing outward, and note these items: ^ Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the spider by aligning the marks (C). ^ Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers from falling off. 6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set. 7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note these items: ^ Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (A) on the inboard joint and the rollers. ^ Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is pointing up to prevent it from failing off. 8. Install the boot bands. ^ For the double loop type, go to step 12. (Boot band replacement only) ^ For the low profile type, go to step 9. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4885 9. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B), then hook the tab (C) of the band. 10. Close the hook portion of the band with a commercially available boot band pincers (A), then hook the tabs (B) of the band. 11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and repeat steps 9 through 10, then go to step 21. 12. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard joint, then install the new double loop band (A) onto the boot (B). 13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4886 14. Mark a position (A) on the band 10 - 14 mm (0.4 - 0.6 inch) from the clip (B). 15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the commercially available boot band tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the winding mandrel (B). 16. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot band tool, and tighten the band until the marked spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip. 17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4887 18. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess free end of the band to leave a 5 - 10 mm (0.2 - 0.4 inch) tail protruding from the clip. 19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a hammer. NOTE: ^ Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with anything on the vehicle and the band does not move. ^ Remove any grease remaining on the surrounding surfaces. 20. Repeat steps 12 through 19 for the band on the other end of the boot. 21. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4888 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the outboard boot. 2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the outboard boot. 3. Install the new stop ring into the driveshaft groove (A). 4. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint. 5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about 10 cm (4 inch) onto a hard surface. Do not use a hammer as excessive force may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4889 6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the outboard joint end (B). 7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the joint grease included in the new joint boot set. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4890 8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between full compression and full extension. Make sure the ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the driveshaft and joint. 9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and outboard joint (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4891 10. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a commercially available boot band pincers Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B). 11. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of the band. If the clearance is not within the standard, close the ear portion of the band farther. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the band on the other end of the boot. Driveshaft Installation Driveshaft Installation 1. Seat anew set ring into the set ring groove of the driveshaft (left driveshaft). 2. Apply 0.5 - 1.0 g (0.02 - 0.04 oz) of specified grease to the whole splined surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After applying grease, remove the grease from the splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed from the intermediate shaft. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4892 3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent, and dry with compressed air. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) until the set ring (D) locks in the groove (E). 4. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). 5. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Then tighten the nuts and bolt (C) to the lower torque specification. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4893 6. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder (B) against the driveshaft. 7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the front wheel, then install the front wheel with the wheel nuts. 8. Refill the transmission with recommended transmission fluid. 9. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Dynamic Damper Replacement Dynamic Damper Replacement 1. Remove the inboard joint. 2. Remove the dynamic damper bands. Be careful not to damage the dynamic damper. ^ If the boot band is a welded type, cut the boot band. ^ If the boot band is a double loop type, lift up the band bend, and push it into the clip. ^ If the boot band is a low profile type, pinch the boot band using a commercially available boot band pincers. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4894 3. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the dynamic damper. 4. Remove the dynamic damper. Be careful not to damage the dynamic damper. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4895 5. Adjust the position of the new dynamic damper to the figure follow. 6. Install the dynamic damper band. 7. Install the inboard joint. Intermediate Shaft Removal Intermediate Shaft Removal NOTE: M/T models only. 1. Remove the right driveshaft. 2. Remove the lower torque rod bracket (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4896 3. Remove the flange bolts. 4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage to the differential oil seal (B). Intermediate Shaft Disassembly Intermediate Shaft Disassembly Special Tools Required ^ Oil seal driver 07947-SBOO100 ^ Half shaft base 07NAF-SR30101 NOTE: M/T models only. 1. Remove the set ring (A), outer seal (B), and external snap ring (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4897 2. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the intermediate shaft bearing (B) using a press. Be careful not to damage the metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly. 3. Remove the internal snap ring. 4. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the bearing support (B) using the special tools and a press. Intermediate Shaft Reassembly Intermediate Shaft Reassembly Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4898 Intermediate Shaft Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 ^ Attachment, 35 mm I.D. 07746-0030400 ^ Oil seal driver 07GAD-PH70201 NOTE: ^ Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. ^ M/T models only. 1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4899 2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the bearing support (B) using the special tools and a press. 3. Seat the internal snap ring into the groove of the bearing support. 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft bearing (B) using the special tool and a press. 5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of the intermediate shaft (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4900 6. Install the outer seal (A) into the bearing support (B) using the special tool and a press. 7. Install the set ring. Intermediate Shaft Installation Intermediate Shaft Installation NOTE: M/T models only. 1. Use solvent or brake cleaner to thoroughly clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A) contacts the transmission (differential), and dry with compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft assembly into the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to the differential oil seal (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Removal > Page 4901 2. Install the flange bolts (A). 3. Install the lower torque rod bracket (A), and tighten the flange bolts in the sequence shown. 4. Install the right side driveshaft. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4902 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4907 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc inward and outward. 6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4910 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4911 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4912 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4913 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4914 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4915 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4916 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Disc Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4917 Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Drum Brake Type Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4918 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the two washers (A). 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake disc. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4919 8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 9. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks. 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake disc, Clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: ^ Turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose if necessary. ^ If the brake drum has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake drum to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake drum. ^ After installation, press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4920 4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 5. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4921 NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D). 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4922 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D), 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4923 ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to the wheel cylinder, and retighten it if necessary. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Suspension Spindle nut 22 x 1.5 mm .............................................................................................................................................. 181 Nm (18.5 kgf-m, 134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or more steps. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4931 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Drive Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the transmission assembly. 2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft. 3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 4. Install the transmission assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel Torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4935 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4936 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4937 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4938 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4939 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4940 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4941 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4942 Flywheel: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers using the special tools and a feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). 4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4943 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slippage or oil. If the clutch looks burnt or is oil soaked, replace it. Find and repair the source of the oil leak if the clutch disc is soaked. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4944 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection 1. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot bushing is not smooth, replace it. Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement 1. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the commercially available tools (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4945 2. Install the new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the crankshaft using the special tools. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing surface. Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Flywheel Replacement 1. Install the special tool. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4946 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install the mounting bolts, finger-tight. 4. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A). 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 5. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B), finger-tight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4947 6. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4948 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 1.4L (1.5 Qt) Total ................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. 1.6L (1.7 Qt) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4959 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Always use Honda MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4960 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid, and make sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 3. If the transmission fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (D), and drain the fluid. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level. Oil Capacity 1.4 L (1.5 US qt) at Fluid Change 1.6 L (1.7 US qt) at Overhaul Use only Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using engine oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug (A) with a new washer. 6. If the maintenance minder required to replace the fluid, reset the maintenance minder. If it didn't, select BODY ELECTRICAL, GAUGES, ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE MINDER, RESET, MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4965 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4966 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4967 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4974 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4975 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4976 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4984 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4985 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 4986 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4995 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4998 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5002 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5006 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5007 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5008 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5009 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5010 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5015 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5016 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5019 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5023 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5024 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5034 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5035 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5036 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations 40. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5043 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 27. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5046 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover. 15. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 16. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5047 18. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5048 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5049 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side upon the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5050 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolls, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5051 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. ^ If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, follow the instructions on the HDS. ^ If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does not determine the cause, go to step 4. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 5. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5052 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Measure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the connector terminals. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed parts. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9. 9. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 11. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for contamination. 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 14. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of the solenoid valve body. 15. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 16. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 17. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 18. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5053 19. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 20. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (B). 3. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (B), ATF joint pipes (C), O-rings (D), and gasket (E). 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the passage. 7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes. 8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 5056 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the mounting bolts securing the harness cover (A), and remove the harness clamp (D). 3. Disconnect the connectors from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 4. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 5. Remove the ATF pipe (A), ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (F). 6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C and transmission housing. 7. Install the new gasket with blue side down; white side up on the transmission housing. 8. Install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes, and install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes. 9. Install the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C. 10. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. 11. Secure the harness cover with the mounting bolts, and install the harness clamp. 12. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5061 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5062 73. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5063 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector. 3. Release the shift lock solenoid lock (A), then remove the shift lock solenoid (B). 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), solenoid plunger (B), and plunger spring (C) assembly. 5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock stop (E), and install the new shift lock solenoid assembly by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop. 6. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide, and install the connector (F) on the bracket base. 7. Install the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 15. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (A/T) 16. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (A/T) 17. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5067 18. Shift Control Solenoid Valve D (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5068 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and D Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and D operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and test the solenoid valves. 4. Lift the vehicle upon a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 7. Measure shift solenoid valve resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below and body ground: ^ No. 1: shift solenoid valve C ^ No. 2: shift solenoid valve B ^ No. 5: shift solenoid valve A ^ No. 8: shift solenoid valve D Standard: 12 - 25 ohms ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 8 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 9. 8. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to each shift solenoid harness connector terminals individually. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. The test is complete, connect the connector. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 9 and test the shift solenoid harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5069 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 12. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid valve A, shift solenoid valve B, shift solenoid valve C, and shift solenoid valve D. 13. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve between the connector terminal and body ground. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms ^ If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. ^ If the resistance is within the standard, go to step 14 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound. 14. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to each solenoid terminal individually. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 15 and replace the solenoid harness. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 16 and replace shift solenoid valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5070 15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing, then go to step 21. 16. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 17. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it. 18. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 19. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 20. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 21. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 22. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 24. Refill the transmission with ATF. 25. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5071 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). 6. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors. ^ If replacing shift solenoid valve(s), go to step 7. ^ If replacing the shift solenoid harness, remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A), and replace it. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install it in the transmission housing, then go to step 12. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5072 7. Remove the mounting bolts, then hold the solenoid valve body and remove the solenoid valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the solenoid valve. 8. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (E) on the reused solenoid valve. NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new 0rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the 0rings provided on it. 9. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) and shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 10. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the servo body. 11. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift solenoid valve B. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before installing shift solenoid valve B. If shift solenoid valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid valve B, it may damage to hydraulic control system. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, ORN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve B, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, and harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing Control Module: Service and Repair PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 5085 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM NOTE: ^ Make sure you have the latest software on the HDS. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), or door locks) during the update. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. ^ High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the engine compartment. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. if it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after step 9. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If there is no result from TP POSITION CHECK, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 6. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the DLC, and connect the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label or in the PCM update system. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown on the screen. 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 9. Do the crank pattern clear/crank pattern learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 5086 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. If you did the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 thru 9, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 6. Select the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST with the HDS. NOTE: If the result of TP POSITION CHECK was failed, clean the throttle body after this procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Remove the battery. 9. Remove the PCM cover (A). 10. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the PCM (B). 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A (C), B (D), and C (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > PCM Updating and Substitution For Testing > Page 5087 NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = "square", B = "triangle" C = "circle") embossed on them for identification. 12. Install the PCM and the battery in the reverse order of removal. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or Mismatch" will be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. Ignore it, and continue this procedure. 14. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 16. Select the IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM with the HDS. 17. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 20. Do the crank pattern learn procedure. 21. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system (if equipped) and set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 187. Under Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5096 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 1. 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connectors. 5. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 8. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2ND Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 5099 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3RD Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector. 5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the metal part of the switch. 6. Connect the connector securely. 7. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations 115. Under Center Console A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5103 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5107 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5108 205. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5109 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Remove the transmission range switch. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5110 6. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 8. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary, then connect the connector securely. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 11. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 12. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 13. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5111 14. Install the transmission range switch cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5116 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 38. Transmission Housing (A/T) 39. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5117 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 120. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) 123. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Remove the harness clamp (A) from its bracket, and remove the air cleaner housing bracket (B). 3. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Install the air cleaner housing bracket, and install the harness clamp on its bracket. 7. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5120 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner housing and air intake duct. 2. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 5. Install the air intake duct and air cleaner housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 35. ATF Temperature Sensor (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5124 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist, or apply the parking brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 4. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7. Standard: 50 Ohms - 25 k Ohms 5. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to step 6. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the measurement is within the standard, connect the connector securely, and install the splash shield. 6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 7. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 8. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), gasket (C), and harness clamp bracket (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5125 9. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (E), and replace it. 10. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the transmission housing. 11. Connect WHT harnesses and ORN harness connector to shift solenoid valve B. ATF temperature sensor is assembled in the connector with WHT harnesses. 12. Connect BLU harness terminal to shift solenoid valve A, GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid valve C, and YEL harness terminal to shift solenoid valve D. 13. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, a new gasket, harness clamp bracket. 14. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 15. Refill the transmission with ATF. 16. Install the splash shield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5135 188. Under Trans. Housing (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5136 124. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5137 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5143 75. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5144 146. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5145 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout in the insulator. Lift up the insulator cutout and measure the pedal height (B) at the middle of the left side center of the pedal pad (C) to the floor. Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T model: 153 mm (6.0 inch) A/T model: 158 mm (6 1/4 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Brake Pedal position Switch Clearance Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5146 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.03 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5150 Antilock Brake System Components 1. Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit 235. ABS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit > Page 5153 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Control Module Pinout Values, ABS ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5154 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5155 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal - 4-door model 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the bracket. Installation - 4-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the bracket. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Removal - 2-door model Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5156 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the brackets (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the brackets. 5. Separate the bracket if necessary. Installation - 2-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the brackets. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5160 1. Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5161 235. ABS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5162 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Modulator Unit The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor and the damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5171 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5172 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5173 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5174 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5175 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5176 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5177 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5178 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5184 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5185 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5186 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5187 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5188 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5189 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5190 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5191 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Antilock Brake System Components Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5203 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment 195. Under Left Rear of Vehicle (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5204 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5205 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5206 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Replacement 1. Release the holding of clamps (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the clips, the bolt, the O-ring (C), and the wheel sensor (D). 3. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring on reassembly. ^ Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. ^ If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing, it is faulty. 4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake system. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B). 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front brake system. NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in the sequence shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5210 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. 6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until no air bubbles are in the fluid. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Locations Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Locations > Page 5214 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout in the insulator. Lift up the insulator cutout and measure the pedal height (B) at the middle of the left side center of the pedal pad (C) to the floor. Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T model: 153 mm (6.0 inch) A/T model: 158 mm (6 1/4 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Brake Pedal position Switch Clearance Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Locations > Page 5215 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.03 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Locations > Page 5216 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Replacement 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector (A). 2. Remove the lock pin (B) and joint pin (C). NOTE: Use a new lock pin whenever installing. 3. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D) and nuts (E). 4. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F). 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Locations Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5222 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5223 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5224 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5225 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5226 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5227 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5228 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5241 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5242 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5243 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5244 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5245 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5246 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5247 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5248 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5249 Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement Special Tools Required Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5255 3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5256 10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and brake pads. 11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 12. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on the caliper body (B). 13. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. NOTE: Be careful when in pressing the piston the brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor. 15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5257 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies, Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If the these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause uneven tire wear, vibration, and or uneven or rapid pad wear. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5258 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boats for damage and deterioration. NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking brake cable to prevent damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5259 5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. 11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pads. 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5260 13. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the caliper, brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding respective caliper pin with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E). 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5261 Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Pad Pad thickness Front Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 9.5 10.5 mm (0.37 - 0.41 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .............................................................................. 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) Rear Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................... 8.5 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ............................................................................ 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement Special Tools Required Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5267 3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5268 10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and brake pads. 11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 12. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on the caliper body (B). 13. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. NOTE: Be careful when in pressing the piston the brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor. 15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5269 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5270 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boats for damage and deterioration. NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking brake cable to prevent damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5271 5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. 11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pads. 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5272 13. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the caliper, brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding respective caliper pin with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E). 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement Special Tools Required Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5275 3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5276 10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and brake pads. 11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 12. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on the caliper body (B). 13. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. NOTE: Be careful when in pressing the piston the brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor. 15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5277 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5278 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boats for damage and deterioration. NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking brake cable to prevent damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5279 5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. 11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pads. 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5280 13. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the caliper, brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding respective caliper pin with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E). 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5285 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5286 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5287 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5288 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5289 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc Thickness Front Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................ 20.9 21.1 mm (0.82 - 0.83 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. ............................................................................ 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) Rear Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................... 8.9 9.1 mm (0.35 - 0.36 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ............................................................................ 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Runout ................................................................................................................................................. ............................................ 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Parallelism ........................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front Front Brake Disc Inspection Runout 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 inch) from the outer edge of the brake disc. Brake disc runout: Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Max. refinishing limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) NOTE: ^ If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. ^ A new brake disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). Thickness and Parallelism 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc thickness at eight points, about 45° apart and 10 mm (3/8 inch) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake disc thickness: Standard: 20.9 - 21.1 mm (0.82 - 0.83 inch) Max. refinishing limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5292 Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5293 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear Rear Brake Disc Inspection Runout 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 inch) from the outer edge of the brake disc. Brake disc runout: Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) NOTE: ^ If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. ^ A new brake disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). Thickness and Parallelism 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc thickness at eight points, about 45° apart and 10 mm (3/8 inch) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake disc thickness: Standard: 8.9 - 9.1 mm (0.35 - 0.36 inch) Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5294 NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Drum Inside Diameter Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 199.9 - 200 mm (7.870 - 7.874 in.) Service Limit ....................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 201 mm (7.91 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake lining thickness: Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 4.0 mm (0.16 inch) Service limit ......................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5302 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Rear Brake Shoe Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Disassembly 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum. 4. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing respective retainer spring (B) and turning the pin. 5. Remove the lower return spring (A), and remove the brake shoe assembly over the hub. 6. Remove the forward brake shoe (B) by removing the upper return spring (C), and disassemble the brake shoe assembly. 7. Remove the rearward brake shoe (D) by disconnecting the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever (E). 8. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and pivot pin (C), and separate the parking brake lever (D) from the brake shoe (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5303 Reassembly 1. Apply rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pivot pin (A) for the rearward brake shoe (B). 2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and the wave washer (D) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip (E). NOTE: Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking brake lever from coming out of the brake shoe. 3. Connect the parking brake cable to the parking brake lever. 4. Apply a thin coat of rubber grease to the connecting rod ends (A), and the sliding surfaces (B) as shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep grease off the brake linings. 5. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44 MA grease to the shoe ends (A) and the edge of the shoe surfaces (B) that contact the backing plate as shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep grease off the brake linings. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5304 6. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster bolt (C). NOTE: ^ Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then coat them with rubber grease. ^ Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the adjuster bolt. 7. Assemble the brake shoes, the upper return spring (D), and with the connecting rods the adjuster bolt on the backing plate, then install the self-adjuster lever (E) and the self-adjuster spring (F) on the forward brake shoe (G). 8. Install the tension pins (A) and the retainer springs (B) by pushing in respective spring and turning each pin. 9. Install the lower return spring. NOTE: Make sure the brake shoe positioning on the brake shoe bosses of the backing plate, and fitting the top of the brake shoes onto the wheel cylinder pistons. 10. Install the brake drum. NOTE: Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the brake drum. 11. Install the rear wheels. 12. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work and to set the self-adjusting brake. NOTE: Engagement of the brakes may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake shoes have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 13. Do the parking brake adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). 3. Remove the bolts (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. NOTE: Use the special bolts on reassembly. 4. Apply Cemedienne 366E sealant or equivalent between the wheel cylinder and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder, then connect the brake line. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Do the parking brake inspection and adjustment. 8. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag. 9. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake system. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B). 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front brake system. NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in the sequence shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5312 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. 6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until no air bubbles are in the fluid. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement Special Tools Required Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5317 3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5318 10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and brake pads. 11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 12. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on the caliper body (B). 13. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. NOTE: Be careful when in pressing the piston the brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor. 15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5319 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies, Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If the these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause uneven tire wear, vibration, and or uneven or rapid pad wear. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5320 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boats for damage and deterioration. NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking brake cable to prevent damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5321 5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B). 6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the caliper bracket. 10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste off the discs and pads. 11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pads. 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5322 13. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the caliper, brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir. 14. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding respective caliper pin with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E). 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5323 Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE SYSTEM FLUID TYPE (INCLUDES ABS LINE) Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5330 48. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5333 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5334 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5335 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5336 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5337 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5338 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5339 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5340 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5341 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5342 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5343 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5344 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5345 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5346 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5347 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5348 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5349 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5350 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5351 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5352 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5353 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5354 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5355 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5356 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5357 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5358 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5359 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5360 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5361 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5362 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with the float in the down position and in the up position. NOTE: ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5366 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake Hose and Line Inspection 1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting. 2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines. 3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. 4. Check the master cylinder and the ABS modulator-control unit for damage and leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5367 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement NOTE: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. ^ The illustrations show the front of the vehicle, the procedure is the same for the rear. Removal 1. Disconnect the brake hose (A) from the brake line (B) using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C). 2. With clip type: Remove and discard the brake hose clip (A) from the brake hose (B). 3. Disc brake type: Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt(s) (D), then remove the brake hose. NOTE: Without clip type: Remove the brake hose with the bracket. Installation Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5368 1. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B). 2. Disc brake type: Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D). 3. Position the brake hose ends (A). ^ With clip type: Install the brake hose on the brake hose bracket (B) with a new brake hose clip (C). ^ Without clip type: Install the brake hose bracket (D) to the frame. 4. Connect the brake line (E) to the brake hose. 5. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system. 6. Do the following check: ^ Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. ^ Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5372 1. Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5373 235. ABS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 5374 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Modulator Unit The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor and the damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 5378 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Master Cylinder Inspection 1. Inspect and note these items: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with a new part if necessary. ^ Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the brake fluid. 2. If the reservoir tank hose was disconnected, install the reservoir tank (A) and the reservoir tank hose (B) to the reservoir union (C). NOTE: ^ Align the "[triangle]" marks (D) on the reservoir tank and reservoir union with the paint marks (E) on the hose. ^ Position the direction of the clamp (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 5379 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Replacement NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A). 4. Remove the reservoir tank mounting bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the master cylinder (B). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 6. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C) and washers (D). 7. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster (E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. 8. Remove the rod seal (F) from the master cylinder. NOTE: During installation, set the new rod seal onto the master cylinder with its grooved side (G) toward the master cylinder. 9. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new rod seat on reassembly. ^ Coat the inner bore lip and outer circumference of the new rod seal with the Shin-Etsu silicone grease (P/N 08798-9013). ^ Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust if necessary. 10. Bleed the brake system. 11. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). 3. Remove the bolts (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. NOTE: Use the special bolts on reassembly. 4. Apply Cemedienne 366E sealant or equivalent between the wheel cylinder and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder, then connect the brake line. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Do the parking brake inspection and adjustment. 8. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag. 9. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment Inspection 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs.) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified number of clicks. 2. If the number of lever clicks is excessive, adjust the parking brake. Adjustment - Rear Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the front console panel. 2. Release the parking brake lever fully. 3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A). 4. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 5. Remove the rear wheels. 6. Make sure the parking brake lever (A) on the rear brake caliper contacts the stop pin (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5387 NOTE: The parking brake lever will only contact the stop pin when the parking brake adjusting nut is loosened. 7. Install the rear wheels. 8. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click. 9. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned. 10. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary. 11. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied when the parking brake lever is pulled all the way (8 to 10 clicks). 12. Install the front console panel. Adjustment - Rear Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the front console panel. 2. Release the parking brake lever fully. 3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A). 4. Press the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake. 5. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click. 6. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned. 7. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary. 8. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied when the parking brake lever is pulled all the way (8 to 10 clicks). 9. Install the front console panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5388 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable Replacement Parking Brake Cable NOTE: ^ The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature failure. ^ Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. Rear Disc Brake Type 1. Release the parking brake lever fully. 2. Remove the parking brake cable clip (A) from the brake cable (B). 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever (C). 4. Remove the parking brake cable mounting hardware, then remove the cable. 5. Install the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to bend or distort the cable. ^ Make sure the parking brake cable clip is fully seated on the cable housing. ^ Do the parking brake adjustment. Rear Drum Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5389 1. Remove the brake drum and shoes, and disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever. 2. Remove the flange bolt (A) and parking brake cable (B) from the backing plate (C). 3. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to bend or distort the cable. ^ Connect the parking brake cable to the brake lever, and install the brake shoes and drum. ^ Do the parking brake adjustment. Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then adjust it again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever Grip and Cover Replacement Removal Lever Grip 1. Remove the center console. 2. Pull up the parking brake fully (8 to 10 clicks). 3. Start at the front edge (A), peel lever grip away from lever cap (B). Continue to peel the grip from the lever to gain access to the hooks (C). 4. Push in both sides of the hook (A) on the lever cap (B), and remove the lever cap and the pushrod (C) with the knob (D). 5. Remove the lever grip (A) by sliding it up. Lever Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5393 6. Remove the clip (A) on driver's side of parking brake lever cover (B). 7. Separate the parking brake lever covers, and remove them. Installation Lever Cover 1. Install the clip (A) on driver's side of the parking brake lever cover (B) to the lever (C). 2. Install the passenger's side of the parking brake lever cover (D), and squeeze both sides of the cover together. Lever Grip 3. Install a new lever grip (A) by sliding it over the cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5394 4. Install a new lever cap (A) on to the lever by aligning the notch (B) in the cap with the tab (C) on the lever. 5. With the lever cap and grip in position, push down on the cap to lock the hooks (D) into place. 6. Carefully peel back the front edge (A) of the lever grip, and apply a small amount of gel type super glue (B). Carefully push the grip back into place and wait a minute for the glue to adhere. 7. Install a new pushrod (A) with the knob (B), and push them into the parking brake lever (C). NOTE: Do not use the removed push rod and knob. 8. Release and pull the parking brake about 10 times. 9. Check the push knob play of about 0.08 inch (2 mm) and smoothly movement of the parking brake, then do the parking brake inspection. 10. Install the center console. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5401 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5402 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes Hard Pedal Feel When Cold Vacuum Brake Booster: Customer Interest Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold 07-077 November 16, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic With Automatic Transmission - ALL Brake Pedal Feels Hard in the Mornings or in Cold Weather SYMPTOM The brake pedal can feel hard during the first couple of brake applications, usually in the morning when the ambient temperature is cold. PROBABLE CAUSE At cold start, in high altitude, combined with the fast idle retard operation, the intake manifold vacuum supply is at its lowest, resulting in low booster assist. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster and the master cylinder rod seal, and update the PGM-FI software using the HDS. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Booster: P/N 01469-SNB-G00, H/C 8745390 Rod Seal: P/N 46185-SE0-003, H/C 2120970 SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version 2.011.010 (or later) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 01469-SNA-A00 H/C 8044729 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03223 Template ID: 07-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper blades in an upright position to keep from interfering with the cowl cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5412 2. Remove the center cowl cover: ^ Remove the three clips. ^ Release the three front hooks from the edge of the under-cowl panel. ^ Detach the clips by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the side hooks. 3. Remove the under-cowl panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5413 4. Remove the top half of the air cleaner housing and the air cleaner element to gain access to the clamp. 5. Loosen all of the clamps attached to the air cleaner housing, and remove the bottom half of the housing. 6. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector. 7. Remove the master cylinder reservoir mounting bolt. 8. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5414 9. Remove the two engine wire harness clips from their brackets. 10. Remove the smaller engine harness bracket located underneath the master cylinder reservoir bracket (one 6 mm bolt). 11. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. NOTE: To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with shop towels. 12. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 13. Remove the master cylinder and reservoir together from the brake booster. NOTE: Be careful to not bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5415 14. Remove the brake booster: ^ Refer to page 19-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BOOSTER, and select Brake Booster Replacement (RI 8A1 and RI 8A4 Engine) from the list. 15. Install the new brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install a new rod seal on the master cylinder. 17. Install the master cylinder and reservoir on the brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 18. Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to page 19-6 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PEDAL ADJUSTMENT, and select Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment (A/T) from the list. 19. Fill the reservoir with brake fluid, and bleed the brake system. 20. Install all removed parts. 21. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/ Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold Vacuum Brake Booster: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold 07-077 November 16, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic With Automatic Transmission - ALL Brake Pedal Feels Hard in the Mornings or in Cold Weather SYMPTOM The brake pedal can feel hard during the first couple of brake applications, usually in the morning when the ambient temperature is cold. PROBABLE CAUSE At cold start, in high altitude, combined with the fast idle retard operation, the intake manifold vacuum supply is at its lowest, resulting in low booster assist. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster and the master cylinder rod seal, and update the PGM-FI software using the HDS. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Booster: P/N 01469-SNB-G00, H/C 8745390 Rod Seal: P/N 46185-SE0-003, H/C 2120970 SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version 2.011.010 (or later) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 01469-SNA-A00 H/C 8044729 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03223 Template ID: 07-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper blades in an upright position to keep from interfering with the cowl cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5421 2. Remove the center cowl cover: ^ Remove the three clips. ^ Release the three front hooks from the edge of the under-cowl panel. ^ Detach the clips by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the side hooks. 3. Remove the under-cowl panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5422 4. Remove the top half of the air cleaner housing and the air cleaner element to gain access to the clamp. 5. Loosen all of the clamps attached to the air cleaner housing, and remove the bottom half of the housing. 6. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector. 7. Remove the master cylinder reservoir mounting bolt. 8. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5423 9. Remove the two engine wire harness clips from their brackets. 10. Remove the smaller engine harness bracket located underneath the master cylinder reservoir bracket (one 6 mm bolt). 11. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. NOTE: To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with shop towels. 12. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 13. Remove the master cylinder and reservoir together from the brake booster. NOTE: Be careful to not bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 07-077 > Nov > 07 > Brakes - Hard Pedal Feel When Cold > Page 5424 14. Remove the brake booster: ^ Refer to page 19-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BOOSTER, and select Brake Booster Replacement (RI 8A1 and RI 8A4 Engine) from the list. 15. Install the new brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install a new rod seal on the master cylinder. 17. Install the master cylinder and reservoir on the brake booster in the reverse order of removal. 18. Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to page 19-6 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PEDAL ADJUSTMENT, and select Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment (A/T) from the list. 19. Fill the reservoir with brake fluid, and bleed the brake system. 20. Install all removed parts. 21. Update the PGM-FI software with the HDS. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/ Modules. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5425 Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5426 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Test Functional Test 1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system is leaking. Inspect the brake hoses and lines. 2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not vary, do the leak test. 3. Do the brake system test. Leak Test 1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the brake pedal height does not vary while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal height rises go to step 6. If it does not rise go to step 2. 2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on each consecutive application? If it rises the booster is OK. If it does not go to step 3. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at the booster. The check valve is built into the hose. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and retest. If vacuum is found, go to step 5. 5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to the brake booster. 6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster vacuum hose between the check valve and the booster. 7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. ^ If the pedal position does not vary inspect the seal between the master cylinder and booster. If the seal is OK, replace the brake booster. ^ If the pedal position varies, replace the brake booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5427 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Replacement 1. Remove the master cylinder. 2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) from the brake booster (B). 3. Remove the engine wire harness clamps (A). 4. Remove the heater hoses (A) from the clamp (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5428 5. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B). 6. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C). 7. Pull the brake booster (A) forward. NOTICE: ^ Be careful not to damage the booster surfaces and the threads on the booster stud bolts. ^ Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines. 8. Remove the brake booster (A) by pulling it out and turning it, and remove it from the engine compartment. 9. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Always use a new lock pin. ^ Install the master cylinder after installing the brake booster. ^ Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5429 ^ Bleed the brake system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5434 Antilock Brake System Components 1. Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit 235. ABS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > ABS Modulator-Control Unit > Page 5437 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Control Module Pinout Values, ABS ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5438 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5439 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal - 4-door model 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the bracket. Installation - 4-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the bracket. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Removal - 2-door model Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5440 1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) pulling up the lock (B), then the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit. NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and the brake system of right-front (D), left-rear (E), right-rear (F) and left-front (G). 3. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) with the brackets (I) from the body. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit from the brackets. 5. Separate the bracket if necessary. Installation - 2-door model 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit on the brackets. 2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit. 5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5445 48. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5448 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5449 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5450 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5451 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5452 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5453 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5454 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5455 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5456 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5457 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5458 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5459 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5460 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5461 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5462 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5463 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5464 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5465 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5466 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5467 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5468 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 42. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5477 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with the float in the down position and in the up position. NOTE: ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5481 75. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5482 146. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5483 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout in the insulator. Lift up the insulator cutout and measure the pedal height (B) at the middle of the left side center of the pedal pad (C) to the floor. Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T model: 153 mm (6.0 inch) A/T model: 158 mm (6 1/4 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Brake Pedal position Switch Clearance Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5484 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.03 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5491 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5492 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5501 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5502 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5503 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5504 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5505 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5506 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5507 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5508 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 07-055 Date: 080319 Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement 07-055 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor and 0-Ring Inspection (Supersedes 07-055, dated September 20, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During assembly, some wheel speed sensors may have been improperly installed and do not seal the huL assembly. Water may enter the hub assembly and damage the wheel bearing. In areas where road salt is used, the wheel bearings may corrode, which may cause the wheel to separate and fall off, increasing thE risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5514 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ABS wheel speed sensor and 0-ring have been inspected and, if necessary, replaced. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new vehicle inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect both rear ABS wheel speed sensors and their 0-rings. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor 0-ring is damaged, replace only the 0-ring and the hub bearing unit on that side. ^ If an ABS wheel sensor is damaged, replace the sensor and the hub bearing unit on that side. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Hub Bearing Unit: Disc brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-A51, H/C 8048787 Drum brakes - P/N 42200-SNA-952, H/C 8058869 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 0-ring: P/N 57477-SNE-A01, H/C 8813537 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Driver's side - P/N 57475-SNE-A01 H/C 8051187 Passenger's side - P/N 57470-SNE-A01, H/C 8051179 NOTE: Damage to the ABS wheel sensors is rare. Order them only when needed. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Guide Pin Tool - T/N 07AAG-SVBA100 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 42200-SNA-A51 H/C 8048787 Defect Code: 5FX00 Symptom Code: Q5600 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5515 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove both rear ABS wheel speed sensors. 4. Inspect the rear ABS wheel speed sensors for damage. GOOD, UNDAMAGED SENSOR: EXAMPLE OF DAMAGED SENSOR: If the tip of a sensor has any damage, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Remove the damaged sensor, and connect the new sensor to the wire harness. ^ Go to step 6 to install the new ABS wheel speed sensor. If the tips of the sensors are OK, go to step 5. 5. Inspect the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-rings: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5516 DAMAGED O-RINGS: If a sensor 0-ring is pinched or damaged, do this: ^ Replace the corresponding rear hub bearing unit(s): - Refer to page 18-34 (with disc brakes) or 18-35 (with drum brakes) of the 2006-2008 Civic Service Manual, or - Online, enter keyword HUB, then select Rear Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement from the list. ^ Replace the damaged 0-ring on the original sensor. ^ Go to step 6 to reinstall the original ABS wheel speed sensor. If the 0-rings are OK, go to step 6. 6. Lubricate the ABS wheel speed sensor 0-ring and the sensor hole in the knuckle with multi-purpose grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5517 7. Insert the guide pin tool into the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool contacts the ABS wheel speed sensor bracket. NOTE: To prevent 0-ring damage, the ABS wheel speed sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool. 8. Insert the ABS wheel speed sensor and the guide pin into the knuckle assembly. NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing the ABS wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing, do not hold the sensor bracket during installation; hold the sensor wire. 9. Gently push and pull the ABS wheel speed sensor in and out to make sure the 0-ring is sliding properly in its housing. While you're doing this, make sure the sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If the sliding effort is too high, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor, inspect the 0-ring for damage, and do the installation process again. 10. Remove the guide pin tool. 11. Reinstall the bolt, and torque it to 9.8 N.m (7.2 ft-lb). 12. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 to install the other rear ABS wheel speed sensor. 13. Install the rear wheels, and lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5518 14. Center-punch a completion mark below the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5519 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5520 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-055 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Inspection/Replacement > Page 5521 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > NHTSA07V399000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Antilock Brake System Components Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5533 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 185. Left Side of Engine Compartment 195. Under Left Rear of Vehicle (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5534 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5535 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5536 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Replacement 1. Release the holding of clamps (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the clips, the bolt, the O-ring (C), and the wheel sensor (D). 3. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring on reassembly. ^ Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. ^ If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing, it is faulty. 4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5542 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5543 45. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5544 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install the clutch interlock switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5545 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: Check the clutch pedal position switch. Check the clutch interlock switch. The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Lift up the carpet (A). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side of the pedal pad (B). 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H), and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 157 mm (6.18 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 77 mm (3.03 inch) 4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut. 5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch pedal. 6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 7. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut. 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 9. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 10. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully pressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 11. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 218. Remote Starting Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5558 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5559 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Battery Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Replacing a Battery? Don't Disconnect the Cables With the Engine Running When replacing a battery, many service techs disconnect the battery cables with the engine running to keep the data alive in volatile memory. This practice worked fine back in the day when vehicles were pretty much a box on wheels, but with so many of today's vehicles sporting a impressive array of cool, high tech hardware, it's not recommended. Here's why: ^ The battery works as a capacitor to prevent sudden swings in voltage. With the battery cables disconnected, the alternator voltage regulator tries to stabilize the system voltage, but it can only do so by turning the alternator on and off. ^ When solenoids or relays are turned on and of{ they produce a very high voltage spike that travels through the 12-volt system. This voltage spike can fry sensitive solid state components or corrupt the data that's stored in volatile memory for such components as the gauge control module, the radio, and the various control units. The best way to keep data alive in volatile memory when replacing a battery is to hook up a Honda Computer Memory Saver to the 16P data link connector (DLC). This portable tool works as a secondary 12-volt source. It saves you the hassle of writing down your customer's audio presets, resetting the clock, or even doing the idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions > Page 5565 The Honda Computer Memory Saver is indeed a real time saver, but here's a word of caution: Don't let the positive battery cable touch any body ground. It will cause a short that will either blow the fuse in the tool or cause a drop in system voltage resulting in the loss of any data that 5 in volatile memory. The Honda Computer Memory Saver is available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order one, just call and ask for FZRMS4000H. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Charging System - Revised Alternator Testing Alternator: Technical Service Bulletins Charging System - Revised Alternator Testing 10-054 September 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Models - ALL Service Manual Update: Alternator Testing BACKGROUND American Honda is currently developing new equipment and procedures for testing alternators and starters. Until this equipment is released, please use the following information. Do not use the ED-18 for testing alternators because it will misjudge the charging system performance on some models, leading to the unnecessary replacement of good parts. To properly test alternators, use one of the following tools: ^ OTC Tester - Includes the following testers: 0TC3130, OTC3130AGM, 0TC3131, and 0TC3131 AGM ^ ARBST ^ VAT40 If you do not have one of these tools, the OTC tester is available through the special tool loan program. For more information about the loan program, refer to S/B 98-051, Special Tool Loan Program. Honda vehicles use an electronic load detection (ELD) circuit in the charging system to reduce fuel consumption. The alternator has two modes; low output and high output. When the vehicle is cruising and there is a light electrical load, the alternator switches to the low output mode that produces about 12.5 V and low amperage. When the vehicle load increases (the customer turns on the headlights, the seat heaters, the rear defroster, etc.), the alternator switches to the high output mode that raises the voltage and amperage. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. ALTERNATOR TEST For more information on the OTC tester, refer to its user guide. Besides the one that came with the tool, you can also find the guide online under General Publications, Tool Information. 1. Question the customer about the events that led up to the problem. Many charging system complaints are caused by leaving the headlights or interior lights on, headlight flicker, or installing aftermarket accessories with a high parasitic draw that drains the battery. 2. Visually inspect the battery cables and grounding straps to confirm the connections are clean and tight. If there are any damaged parts or loose connections, repair them as needed. 3. Test the vehicle battery with the GR-8. Refer to S/B 88-023, Battery Testing and Replacement. 4. Connect the OTC tester to the vehicle: ^ Connect the negative (-) heavy load lead to the negative battery terminal. ^ Connect the positive (+) heavy load lead to the positive battery terminal. 5. Calibrate the OTC tester by holding the amp probe away from any conductors, and pressing the ZERO AMPS button. 6. Connect the amp probe to the vehicle's negative battery cable. Make sure the arrow on the probe points toward the vehicle's battery. NOTE: If the vehicle has a second battery negative cable, make sure the probe is around that as well. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Charging System - Revised Alternator Testing > Page 5571 7. Enter the number of cylinders on the OTC tester. 8. Start the engine, set the parking brake to turn off the DRL (daytime running lights), and turn off all other electrical accessories. 9. Press the CHARGING SYSTEM TEST button. 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm until RUN AT IDLE appears on the display. NOTE: Stand back from the battery, and do not place any objects on top of the OTC tester; it gets hot during testing. 11. Let the engine idle until TEST COMPLETE appears on the display. 12. Press CONTINUE to see the results, and write them down. The first screen lists the REGULATOR VOLTS. Press CONTINUE again to list the PEAK AMPS. 13. Refer to the AMPERAGE LOAD SPECIFICATIONS table, and compare the vehicle results against the listed amperage value. Is the vehicle amperage (PEAK AMPS) equal to or greater than the value listed in the AMPERAGE table? Yes - Go to step 14. No - Replace the alternator, and retest. 14. Check the regulator voltage you wrote down in step 12. ^ If it's between 13.5 and 15.1 V, the alternator is OK. Continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If it's not between 13.5 and 15.1 V, replace the alternator, and retest. AMPERAGE LOAD SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: The amperage values listed below are used for testing purposes and represent 75% of the alternator's maximum output. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5572 Alternator: Specifications Alternator Output at 13.5 V and normal engine temperature ......................................................................................................................................... 90 A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5575 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5576 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5577 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5578 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5579 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5580 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5581 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5582 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5583 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5584 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5585 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5586 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5587 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5588 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5589 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5590 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5591 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5592 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5593 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5594 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5595 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5596 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5597 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5598 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5599 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5600 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5601 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5602 144. Alternator Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Updated Alternator Testing Alternator: Testing and Inspection Updated Alternator Testing Alternator Testing, Update by SMU #10-054 September 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Models - ALL Service Manual Update: Alternator Testing BACKGROUND American Honda is currently developing new equipment and procedures for testing alternators and starters. Until this equipment is released, please use the following information. Do not use the ED-18 for testing alternators because it will misjudge the charging system performance on some models, leading to the unnecessary replacement of good parts. To properly test alternators, use one of the following tools: ^ OTC Tester - Includes the following testers: 0TC3130, OTC3130AGM, 0TC3131, and 0TC3131 AGM ^ ARBST ^ VAT40 If you do not have one of these tools, the OTC tester is available through the special tool loan program. For more information about the loan program, refer to S/B 98-051, Special Tool Loan Program. Honda vehicles use an electronic load detection (ELD) circuit in the charging system to reduce fuel consumption. The alternator has two modes; low output and high output. When the vehicle is cruising and there is a light electrical load, the alternator switches to the low output mode that produces about 12.5 V and low amperage. When the vehicle load increases (the customer turns on the headlights, the seat heaters, the rear defroster, etc.), the alternator switches to the high output mode that raises the voltage and amperage. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. ALTERNATOR TEST For more information on the OTC tester, refer to its user guide. Besides the one that came with the tool, you can also find the guide online under General Publications, Tool Information. 1. Question the customer about the events that led up to the problem. Many charging system complaints are caused by leaving the headlights or interior lights on, headlight flicker, or installing aftermarket accessories with a high parasitic draw that drains the battery. 2. Visually inspect the battery cables and grounding straps to confirm the connections are clean and tight. If there are any damaged parts or loose connections, repair them as needed. 3. Test the vehicle battery with the GR-8. Refer to S/B 88-023, Battery Testing and Replacement. 4. Connect the OTC tester to the vehicle: ^ Connect the negative (-) heavy load lead to the negative battery terminal. ^ Connect the positive (+) heavy load lead to the positive battery terminal. 5. Calibrate the OTC tester by holding the amp probe away from any conductors, and pressing the ZERO AMPS button. 6. Connect the amp probe to the vehicle's negative battery cable. Make sure the arrow on the probe points toward the vehicle's battery. NOTE: If the vehicle has a second battery negative cable, make sure the probe is around that as well. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Updated Alternator Testing > Page 5605 7. Enter the number of cylinders on the OTC tester. 8. Start the engine, set the parking brake to turn off the DRL (daytime running lights), and turn off all other electrical accessories. 9. Press the CHARGING SYSTEM TEST button. 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm until RUN AT IDLE appears on the display. NOTE: Stand back from the battery, and do not place any objects on top of the OTC tester; it gets hot during testing. 11. Let the engine idle until TEST COMPLETE appears on the display. 12. Press CONTINUE to see the results, and write them down. The first screen lists the REGULATOR VOLTS. Press CONTINUE again to list the PEAK AMPS. 13. Refer to the AMPERAGE LOAD SPECIFICATIONS table, and compare the vehicle results against the listed amperage value. Is the vehicle amperage (PEAK AMPS) equal to or greater than the value listed in the AMPERAGE table? Yes - Go to step 14. No - Replace the alternator, and retest. 14. Check the regulator voltage you wrote down in step 12. ^ If it's between 13.5 and 15.1 V, the alternator is OK. Continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If it's not between 13.5 and 15.1 V, replace the alternator, and retest. AMPERAGE LOAD SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: The amperage values listed below are used for testing purposes and represent 75% of the alternator's maximum output. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Alternator Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) from the alternator. 5. Remove the harness connector (C) and harness clamps (D) from the alternator. 6. Remove the alternator. Installation Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5608 1. Install the alternator. 2. Connect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) to the alternator. 3. Install the harness connector (C) and harness clamp (D) to the alternator. 4. Install the drive belt. 5. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable. 6. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 7. Set the clock. 8. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5609 Alternator: Service and Repair Alternator Overhaul Alternator Overhaul Special Tools Required - Driver 07749-0010000 - Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. Alternator Disassembly 1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them. 2. Remove the alternator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5610 3. Remove the heat shield (A) and harness brackets (B). 4. Remove the terminal insulator. 5. Remove the four through bolts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5611 6. Heat the rear bearing seat with a heat gun for about 5 minutes (129-140 degrees F, 50-60 degrees C). 7. Separate the rear housing from the drive end housing by inserting a flat-tip screwdriver into the openings and prying them apart. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the stator with the tip of the screwdriver. 8. Separate the rear housing (A) and drive end housing (B) with the stator (C) attached to the rear housing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5612 9. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or rear bearing, go to step 17. Clamp the rotor in a soft-jawed vise, then remove the pulley locknut. 10. Remove the rotor using a puller as shown. 11. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for seizure marks. - If either the rotor or drive end housing is damaged, replace the alternator. - If both the rotor and the drive end housing are OK, go to step 12. 12. Remove the rear bearing using the puller as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5613 13. Use a hand press to install the new rear bearing. Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid damaging the bearing. 14. Remove the front bearing retainer plate. 15. Support the drive end housing in a vise, and drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and hammer. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5614 16. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new front bearing in the drive end housing. Alternator Brush Inspection 17. Measure the length of both brushes with a vernier caliper. - If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the rear housing assembly. - If the brush length is OK, go to step 18. Rotor Slip Ring Test 18. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A). - If there is continuity, go to step 19. - If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly. 19. Check for no continuity between each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C). - If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing assembly, and go to step 20. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5615 - If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly. Alternator Reassembly 20. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive end housing, then tighten its locknut to 111 N-m (11.3kgf.m, 81.7 lbf.ft). 21. Remove any grease or oil from the slip rings. 22. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B) (about 1.8 mm (0.77 in.) diameter) to hold them there. 23. Heat the rear bearing seat with a heat gun for about 5 minutes (129-140 degrees F, 50-60 degrees C). 24. Put the rear housing assembly (A) and drive end housing/rotor assembly (B) together, tighten the four through bolts (C), and pull out the pin (D). 25. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and without noise. 26. Install the alternator and drive belt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5620 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5621 45. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5622 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install the clutch interlock switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5623 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: Check the clutch pedal position switch. Check the clutch interlock switch. The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Lift up the carpet (A). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side of the pedal pad (B). 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H), and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 157 mm (6.18 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 77 mm (3.03 inch) 4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut. 5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch pedal. 6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 7. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut. 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 9. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 10. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully pressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 11. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 218. Remote Starting Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Starter Performance Test M/T 1. Disconnect the wires from the M terminal. 2. Make the connections as shown using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle). NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. 3. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly. 4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid is working properly. 5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. 6. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise. 7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5644 8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and check that the motor turns and keeps rotating. 9. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly. Specifications Electric Current: 90 A or less Motor Speed: 3,000 rpm or more A/T 1. Connect the battery to the starter as shown using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle). NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. 2. Connect the battery as shown. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly. 3. Disconnect the battery from the body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. 4. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5645 5. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and check that the motor turns and keeps rotating. 6. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly. Specifications Electric Current: 80 A or less Motor Speed: 2,600 rpm or more Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal And Installation Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove exhaust pipe A. 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5648 5. Remove the harness clamps (A) and harness connector (B) from each clamp. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5649 6. Remove the two bolts securing the starter, then remove the starter from the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5650 7. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal. Disconnect the connector (B) from the S terminal, then remove the starter. Installation Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5651 1. Install the starter cable (A) and connector (B). Make sure the starter cable crimped side of the ring terminal is facing out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5652 2. Install the starter, then loosely install the upper mounting bolt (A) and lower mounting bolt (B). 3. Tighten the upper mounting bolt, then tighten the lower mounting bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5653 4. Install the harness clamps (A) and harness connector (B) to each clamp. 5. Install the intake manifold bracket. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5654 6. Install exhaust pipe A. Use new gaskets (B) and new self-locking nuts (C). 7. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable. 8. Start the engine to make sure the starter works properly. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 10. Set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5655 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Overhaul Starter Overhaul M/T Disassembly/Reassembly Armature Inspection and Test 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5656 3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the armature. 4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5657 6. Measure the commutator (A) runout. - If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. - If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. 7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). 8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any of the segments, replace the armature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5658 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature. 10. Check with an ohmmeter for continuity between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature. Starter Brush Inspection 11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. Starter Field Winding Test Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5659 12. Check for continuity between the brushes (A). If there is no continuity, replace the armature housing (B). 13. Check for continuity between each brush (A) and the armature housing (B). If there is continuity, replace the armature housing. Starter Brush Holder Test 14. Check for continuity between the (+) brush holder (A) and (-) brush holder (B). If there is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly. Brush Spring Inspection 15. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact with the commutator, then attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush. Overrunning Clutch Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5660 16. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft. Replace it, if it does not slide smoothly. 17. Hold the drive gear (B), and turn the overrunning clutch in the direction shown to make sure it turns freely. Also make sure the overrunning clutch locks in the opposite direction. 18. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separately. Check the condition of the flywheel or torque converter ring gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged. Starter Reassembly 19. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there. NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or # 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the commutator. 20. Install the armature in the housing, and install the brush holder. Next, pry back each brush spring again, and push the brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush. 21. Install the starter end cover to retain the brush holder. A/T Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5661 Disassembly/Reassembly Armature Inspection and Test 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5662 3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the armature. 4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. 6. Measure the commutator (A) runout. - If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. - If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5663 7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). 8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any of the segments, replace the armature. 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5664 10. Check with an ohmmeter for continuity between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature. Starter Brush Inspection 11. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. Starter Brush Holder Test 12. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and (-) brush (B). If there is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly. Planetary Gear Inspection 13. Check the planetary gears (A) and ring gear (B). Replace them if they are worn or damaged. Overrunning Clutch Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal And Installation > Page 5665 14. While holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear shaft (B) counterclockwise. Check that the drive gear comes out to the other end. If the drive gear does not move smoothly, replace the gear cover assembly. 15. While holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft clockwise. The gear shaft should turn freely. If the gear shaft does not turn freely, replace the gear cover assembly. 16. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separately. Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear to see if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged. Starter Reassembly 17. Install the brush into the brush holder, and set the armature (A) in the brush holder (B). NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or # 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the commutator. 18. While squeezing a spring (C), insert it in the hole on the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms. Repeat this for the other three springs (D, E, and F). 19. Install the armature and brush holder assembly into the housing. NOTE: Make sure the armature stays in the holder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5669 171. Shift Lock Solenoid Cut Relay And Start Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5670 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Starter Solenoid: Locations 190. Under Rear of Engine (A/T) 192. Under Rear of Engine (M/T) (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5674 19. Starter Solenoid Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5675 Starter Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Starter Solenoid Test M/T 1. Remove the starter. 2. Remove the motor cable (A). 3. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground) (B). There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. 4. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the M terminal. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. 5. Install the motor cable. 6. Install the starter. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations 78. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5682 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5683 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5684 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5709 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views 29. Accessory Power Socket, Front 30. Accessory Power Socket, Rear (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5710 138. Accessory Power Socket Relay, Front And Accessory Power Socket Relay, Rear (EX, Si) Or Injector Control Module Relay (GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5711 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5712 Diagram 155-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams 62. Noise Reduction Condenser (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse: Component Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5720 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5721 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5722 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5723 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5724 Fuse: Connector Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5725 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5728 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5729 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5730 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5731 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5732 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5733 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5734 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5735 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5736 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5737 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5738 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5739 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5740 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5741 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5742 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5743 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5744 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5745 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5746 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5747 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5748 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5749 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5750 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5751 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5752 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5753 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5754 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5755 Fuse: Connector Views 66. Remote Starting System In-line Fuse (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) 34. Ambient Light In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 36. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5756 40. Bass Unit In-line Fuse (DX, DX-G, LX; 4-door: EX; '07 Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5759 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5760 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5761 Fuse: Application and ID Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5762 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: Customer Interest Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5771 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5772 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5773 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5779 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5780 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 5781 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5784 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5785 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5786 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5787 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5788 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5789 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5790 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5791 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5792 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5793 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5794 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5795 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5796 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5797 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5798 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5799 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5800 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5803 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5804 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5805 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5806 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5807 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5808 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5809 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5810 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5811 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5812 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5813 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5814 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5815 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5816 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5817 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5818 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5819 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5820 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5821 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5822 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5823 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5824 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5825 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5826 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5827 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5828 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5829 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5830 Fuse Block: Connector Views 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5831 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5832 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5833 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5834 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5835 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5836 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5837 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5838 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5839 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and battery cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5842 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Ground To Components Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams 1183. C206 (Junction Connector) 210. C503 (Junction Connector) ('06 USA 2-door: LX; 4-door: EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5849 211. C753 (Junction Connector) (Canada: 4-door: LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5850 228. C101 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5851 233. C105 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5852 233. C105 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5855 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5856 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5857 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5858 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5859 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5860 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5861 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5862 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5863 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5864 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5865 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5866 to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5867 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5868 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 5869 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5875 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5876 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5877 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5878 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5879 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5880 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5881 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5882 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5883 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5884 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5885 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5886 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5887 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5888 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5889 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5890 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5891 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5892 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5893 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5894 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5895 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5896 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5897 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5898 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5901 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 5902 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5907 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5908 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5909 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5910 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5911 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5912 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5913 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5914 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5915 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5916 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5917 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5918 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5919 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5920 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5921 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5922 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5923 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5924 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5925 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5926 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5927 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5928 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5929 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 5930 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5933 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 5934 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations 78. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views 29. Accessory Power Socket, Front 30. Accessory Power Socket, Rear (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969 138. Accessory Power Socket Relay, Front And Accessory Power Socket Relay, Rear (EX, Si) Or Injector Control Module Relay (GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971 Diagram 155-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams 62. Noise Reduction Condenser (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse: Component Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5979 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5980 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5981 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5982 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5983 Fuse: Connector Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5984 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5987 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5988 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5989 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5990 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5991 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5992 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5993 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 Fuse: Connector Views 66. Remote Starting System In-line Fuse (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) 34. Ambient Light In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 36. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 40. Bass Unit In-line Fuse (DX, DX-G, LX; 4-door: EX; '07 Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6018 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6019 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6020 Fuse: Application and ID Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6021 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: Customer Interest Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6030 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6031 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6032 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking 06-036 August 2, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer Indicator Is Blinking, Engine Won't Start SYMPTOM The engine does not start, and the immobilizer indicator is blinking (especially if the battery recently went dead and the engine was jump-started). PROBABLE CAUSE The immobilizer IMOES code has been erased. NOTE: This problem occurs only if all these conditions are met: ^ The security system is set. ^ The battery goes dead. ^ Battery power is connected to the vehicle, then disconnected in a very short period of time (milliseconds). If the vehicle meets these conditions, or if the condition is unknown, go to DIAGNOSIS. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6038 CORRECTIVE ACTION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6039 DIAGNOSIS NOTE: When the immobilizer system is not allowing the engine to start, the results vary depending on the model and how quickly the ignition key is turned. 2006 Civic 2-Door, 4-Door, Si, and GX ^ If you quickly turn the ignition switch from LOCK (0) to START (III), the engine starts and runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. ^ If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter cranks, but the engine does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 2006 Civic Hybrid ^ During moderate weather conditions, if you turn the ignition switch to START (III), the gauges and gauge indicators come on, but the engine does not crank. ^ During extremely cold conditions (about 0°F or lower) or a low IMA battery: - If you turn the ignition switch quickly from LOCK (0) to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine and it runs for about 1 second, then shuts off. - If you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then pause before turning to START (III), the starter motor, not the IMA motor, cranks the engine but it does not start. ^ When the ignition switch is returned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times. 1. Try to start the engine. Does the car have the symptoms above? Yes - Go to step 2. No - The problem is not immobilizer-related, refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. 2. Try to start the engine several more times. Is this an intermittent problem? Yes - The problem addressed by this service bulletin is not intermittent. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a Status Log check and refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. No - Go to step 3. 3. Using the HDS in the IMMOBI section, do a System Check. Is C-1 indicated, with the highest number of occurences? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Refer to the service manual for troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: To replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU), you need these items: ^ Replacement under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU) ^ One programmed ignition key for the vehicle ^ HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 06-036 > Aug > 06 > Antitheft - Engine No-Start/Immobilizer Lamp Blinking > Page 6040 ^ PCM Code (The 4-digit code is available on the iN. Go to SERVICE, and select Vehicle Information from the left column, then select Immobilizer Code Inquiry.) 1. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU). NOTE: When you replace the under-dash fuse/ relay box (MICU), you must use the HDS to register the IMOES unit with the immobilizer-keyless control unit. If this procedure is not done after the MICU replacement, the engine will not start. ^ Refer to section 22 of the appropriate 2006 Civic service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUSE BOX, and select Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector 3. Insert the programmed ignition key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 4. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the date and time are correct in the HDS. 5. From the System Selection Menu screen, select IMMOBI. 6. From the Immobilizer Test Mode Menu screen, select Replace MPCS/MICU/IMOES, and follow the screen prompts to register the IMOES unit. 7. From the PCM-Code screen, enter the PCM Code, and then follow the screen prompts. When the process is complete, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6043 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6044 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6045 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6046 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6047 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6048 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6049 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6050 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6051 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6052 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6053 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6054 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6055 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6056 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6057 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6058 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6059 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 Fuse Block: Connector Views 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 253. Under-dash Junction Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and battery cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6101 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Ground To Components Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams 1183. C206 (Junction Connector) 210. C503 (Junction Connector) ('06 USA 2-door: LX; 4-door: EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6108 211. C753 (Junction Connector) (Canada: 4-door: LX, EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6109 228. C101 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6110 233. C105 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6111 233. C105 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6114 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6115 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6116 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6117 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6118 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6119 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6120 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6121 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6122 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6123 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6124 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6125 to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6126 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6127 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6128 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6134 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6135 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6136 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6137 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6138 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6139 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6140 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6141 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6142 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6143 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6144 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6145 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6146 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6147 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6148 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6149 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6150 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6151 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6152 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6153 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6154 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6155 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6156 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6157 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6160 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6161 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Starting System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6166 Ignition System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6167 Charging System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6168 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6169 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6170 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6171 Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6172 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6173 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6174 Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6175 Accessory Power Sockets - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6176 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6177 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6178 44. Left Side of Engine Compartment 69. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6179 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6180 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6181 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6182 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6183 Relay Box: Diagrams 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6184 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6185 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6186 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6187 252. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6188 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6189 254. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6192 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6193 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations 4-door, 2-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or servicing. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base of the relay. NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start. Installation 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then connect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or the vehicle will not start. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets, and set the clock. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Alignment: Customer Interest Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6203 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6204 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6205 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6206 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6207 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6208 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6213 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6214 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6215 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6216 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6217 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6218 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6219 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6220 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6221 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6227 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6228 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6229 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6230 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6231 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6232 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6237 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6238 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6239 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6240 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6241 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6242 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6243 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6244 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6245 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6246 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6247 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6248 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6249 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6250 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6251 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6252 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6253 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6254 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6255 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6256 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6257 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6258 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-001 Date: 090722 Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6259 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6260 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6261 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6262 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6263 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6264 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6265 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6266 During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6267 NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6268 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6269 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6270 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6271 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6272 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6273 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6274 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6275 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6276 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6277 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6278 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6279 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6280 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6281 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6282 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6283 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Tire size: Front/Rear: DX model: P195/65R 15 89H Except DX model: P205/55R 16 89H Tire Pressure: Front/Rear: DX model ...................................................................................................................................................... 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), cold Except DX model .......................................................................................................................................... 220 kpa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi), cold Caster angle ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 7° 00' ± 1° Camber angle: Front .................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 0° 00' ± 30' (Maximum difference between the front right and left side: 0° 35') Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... -1° 30' +1° 05'/-0° 45' The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 25' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50' by replacing both damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. Front toe-in .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................... 0 ± 2 mm (0 ± 0.08 inch) Rear toe-in ........................................................................................................................................... ..................... 2 +2/-1 mm (0.08 +0.08/-0.04 inch) Turning Angle Inspection Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6284 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments are related to each other. For example, when you adjust camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber or toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: Front/Rear: DX model: P195/65R 15 89H Except DX model: P205/55R 16 89H Tire Pressure: Front/Rear: DX model: 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), cold Except DX model: 220 kpa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi), cold 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: 7° 00' ± 1° ^ If the measurement is within specifications, measure the camber angle. ^ If the measurement is not within specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: Front: 0° 00' ± 30' (Maximum difference between the front right and left side: 0° 35') Rear: -1° 30' +1° 05'/-0° 45' ^ If the measurement for the front camber is outside the specification, go to front camber adjustment. ^ If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Camber Adjustment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6285 The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or both of the damper pinch bolts with a smaller diameter adjusting bolt. The difference between the adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows for a small range of adjustment. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Loosen the flange bolts (A), and adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. 4. Tighten the self-locking nuts to the specified torque. 5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. 6. Measure the camber angle. ^ If the measurement is within specification, measure the toe-in. ^ If the measurement is not within specification, go to step 7. 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 8. Remove the front wheels. 9. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. NOTE: The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 25' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50' by replacing both damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. 10. Tighten the new self-locking nuts to the specified torque value. 11. Install the front wheels. 12. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. 13. Measure the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within specification, repeat steps 7 through 12 to readjust the camber angle. if the camber measurement is correct, measure toe-in, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6286 Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a steering wheel holder tool. 2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe-in: 0 ± 2 mm (0 ± 0.08 inch) ^ If adjustment is required, go to step 3. ^ If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe is within specifications. 4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. Reposition the rack-end boot if it is twisted or displaced. 5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Check the toe. Rear toe-in: 2 +2/-1 mm (0.08 +0.08/-0.04 inch) ^ If adjustment is required, go to step 3. ^ If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. 3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the trailing arm (B), and remove the self-locking nut (C). 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has been loosened. Reassemble the adjust bolt and complete with the eccentric facing up. 5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct, 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut while holding the adjusting bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6287 Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6294 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6295 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6296 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6297 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6298 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6299 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6300 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6306 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6307 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6308 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6309 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6310 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6311 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6316 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6317 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6318 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6319 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6320 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6321 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM FLUID TYPE Honda Power Steering Fluid. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6326 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. NOTE: If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the reservoir if necessary. 1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the reservoir. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. 8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat the procedure as necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks Technical Service Bulletin # 06-020 Date: 070406 Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks 06-020 April 6, 2007 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Engine Oil Leaks and Power Steering Fluid Leak (Supersedes 06-020, dated June 20, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bars) SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil, or the power steering inlet pipe leaks fluid. PROBABLE CAUSE Some engine block sealing bolts may have been mismanufactured, causing the engine oil to leak when the engine is running. The power steering inlet pipe may have been mismanufactured, causing a power steering leak. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected engine block sealing bolt(s) and washer(s), and/or replace the power steering pump inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6335 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 111 07-RNA-A00, H/C 8160657 (Repair Procedures A and B) P/N 11106-RNA-A00, H/C 8160640 (Repair Procedures C and D) P/N 56123-RNA-A01, H/C 8051088 (Repair Procedure E) Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 05101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS The oil leaks can be in up to these five places: ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the timing chain end of the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6336 ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the transmission end of the engine. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the alternator. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6337 ^ The inlet pipe on the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6338 Inspect the leaking area(s), then use the chart to determine the appropriate repair procedures. NOTE: The sealing bolts leak very little oil so you can miss the oil leak if you don't look carefully. Often the oil runs down the engine and accumulates in other places, leading to misdiagnosis and failure to repair the leak. Disclaimer Repair Procedure A REPAIR PROCEDURE A - REPLACE THE 24-MM SEALING BOLT ON THE TIMING CHAIN END OF THE ENGINE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the right front tire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6339 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. WITH A/C 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley: ^ Refer to page 6-10 of the 2006-07 Civic Service Manual, or Online, enter keyword PULLEY, then select Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6340 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner assembly, and store it vertically to prevent oil leakage that may change the dampening specification. 8. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 9. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 10. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 11. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 60 N.m (45 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the drive belt auto tensioner, the water pump pulley, and the drive belt in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: *^ Use a new bolt to install the drive belt auto tensioner. ^ The bolt is located in a difficult location. Use Snap-on 8 mm hex socket (T/N FAM8E) and 3/8 flex ratchet torque wrench (T/N QD2FR75), or equivalent, to properly torque the bolt.* Repair Procedure B REPAIR PROCEDURE B - REPLACE THE 24-MM BOLT ON THE TRANSMISSION END OF THE ENGINE NOTE: Because it is difficult to determine if the transmission end crankshaft oil seal or the sealing bolt is causing the leak, replace both parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6341 1. M/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 13-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Manual Transmission Removal from the list. A/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 14-236 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Automatic Transmission Removal from the list. 2. M/T models: Remove the pressure plate, the clutch disc, and the flywheel. ^ Refer to page 12-17 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PRESS PLATE and select Clutch Replacement from the list. A/T models: Remove the drive plate. ^ Refer to page 14-256 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE PLATE and select Drive Plate Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ If you can see the leak, mark the location with a paint marker before removing the seal. ^ Remove the seal: - Use a hammer to firmly tap a small, 4 x 20-mm Phillips-head sheet metal screw into the metal part of the seal. If you marked the leak location, make sure you tap the screw into the seal directly across from the paint mark. - Use a cordless screwdriver or another suitable tool to firmly drive the screw into the oil seal so it won't come out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6342 - Use a pair of diagonal cutters to grip the screw under its head. While carefully prying up with the cutters, grab the screw with your other hand and gently pull out the seal. - Slip the seal (with the screw attached) into a resealable plastic bag. Avoid touching any surfaces that may have contamination on them. - Tag the plastic bag, and set it on the warranty parts shelf. 4. Clean the oil off the engine. 5. Install a new transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ Refer to page 7-33 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter the keywords TRANS SEAL and select Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - in car from the list. 6. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a to3thbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). 10. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to page 13-13 (M/T models), or 14-246 (A/T models) of the service manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6343 ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS INSTALL, and select Manual Transmission Installation (M/T models) or Automatic Transmission Installation (A/T models) from the list. Repair Procedure C REPAIR PROCEDURE C - REPLACE THE 20-MM SEALING BOLT BEHIND THE ALTERNATOR 1. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the alternator. Do not disconnect its electrical connections, or damage the wires: ^ Refer to page 4-44 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT, and select Alternator Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the EGR pipe from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the EGR pipe and thermostat housing from the cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the water pipe, then lower it so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 7. Remove the original sealing bolt and its washer. 8. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 9. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 10. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 12. Refill the radiator, then bleed the cooling system. Repair Procedure D REPAIR PROCEDURE D - REPLACE THE 20-MM BOLT BEHIND THE POWER STEERING PUMP Verify if the oil leak is from the oil sealing bolt or the power steering system: ^ Oil leaks from the 20-mm sealing bolt tend to collect on the lower engine block and oil pan. ^ Oil leaks from the right rear cover of the power steering pump tend to collect on the pump, but not on the pump inlet pipe. ^ Oil leaks from the power steering pump inlet pipe tend to collect on the inlet pipe, but are not found on the right rear cover of the power steering pump. If the power steering system is leaking from the inlet pipe area, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK. For other power steering leaks, refer to the service manual. 1. Remove the cowl cover. ^ Refer to page 20-229 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword COWL, then select Cowl Cover Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the drive belt: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6344 ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 3. Disconnect the power steering pump inlet hose from its holder on the right inner strut tower. 4. Remove the pump outlet hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6345 5. Remove the two power steering pump mounting bolts, then lower the pump so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 6. Remove and discard the original sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-if). 10. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Repair Procedure E REPAIR PROCEDURE E - POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK NOTE: During an engine oil leak inspection, if you discover the power steering pump is leaking from the inlet pipe area, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. 1. Drain the fluid from the power steering reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6346 2. Squeeze the spring clamp, and slide it back on the pump inlet hose so it clears the reservoir spigot. 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 4. Place a drain pan under the power steering reservoir. 5. Remove the 10-mm bolt that attaches the inlet pipe to the power steering pump. 6. Lower the vehicle, then remove the pump inlet hose from the reservoir. Remove the pump inlet hose and inlet pipe from the vehicle. *7. On your workbench, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp with new parts. NOTE: The pump inlet hose is shown attached to the power steering pump to show the proper position of the clamp. Position the clamp directly in front of the ridge on the inlet pipe before installation. It is easier to set the clamp before installation.* 8. Attach the pump inlet hose to the reservoir. 9. Install the inlet pipe on the power steering pump. ^ Raise the vehicle. * ^ Install a new 0-ring on the inlet pipe. ^ Coat the 0-ring with clean power steering fluid.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6347 10. Install the 10-mm bolt. Torque the 10-mm bolt to 10 N.m (8 lb-ft). 11. Lower the vehicle, then fill the reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated 11-005 March 31, 2011 Applies To: 2008-09 Accord - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Civic - ALL with M/T 2006-10 Element - ALL with M/T Clutch Pedal Pops, Squeaks, or Clicks SYMPTOM The clutch pedal pops, squeaks, or clicks when you press or release it. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder has insufficient clearance between the piston and the push rod. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the clutch master cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly (Includes clutch master cylinder, 0-ring, seal, and snap pin) Accord and Civic: P/N 46920-SNA-A03 Element P/N 46920-57A-A04 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008 (Each repair requires one bottle.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: Accord: 0.9 hour Civic: 1.2hours Element: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 46920-SNA-A02 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the clutch master cylinder: ^ Refer to the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MASTER CYLINDER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (for the appropriate engine) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Pops/Squeaks/Clicks When Actuated > Page 6353 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks Technical Service Bulletin # 06-020 Date: 070406 Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks 06-020 April 6, 2007 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Engine Oil Leaks and Power Steering Fluid Leak (Supersedes 06-020, dated June 20, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bars) SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil, or the power steering inlet pipe leaks fluid. PROBABLE CAUSE Some engine block sealing bolts may have been mismanufactured, causing the engine oil to leak when the engine is running. The power steering inlet pipe may have been mismanufactured, causing a power steering leak. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected engine block sealing bolt(s) and washer(s), and/or replace the power steering pump inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6363 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 111 07-RNA-A00, H/C 8160657 (Repair Procedures A and B) P/N 11106-RNA-A00, H/C 8160640 (Repair Procedures C and D) P/N 56123-RNA-A01, H/C 8051088 (Repair Procedure E) Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 05101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS The oil leaks can be in up to these five places: ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the timing chain end of the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6364 ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the transmission end of the engine. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the alternator. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6365 ^ The inlet pipe on the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6366 Inspect the leaking area(s), then use the chart to determine the appropriate repair procedures. NOTE: The sealing bolts leak very little oil so you can miss the oil leak if you don't look carefully. Often the oil runs down the engine and accumulates in other places, leading to misdiagnosis and failure to repair the leak. Disclaimer Repair Procedure A REPAIR PROCEDURE A - REPLACE THE 24-MM SEALING BOLT ON THE TIMING CHAIN END OF THE ENGINE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the right front tire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6367 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. WITH A/C 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley: ^ Refer to page 6-10 of the 2006-07 Civic Service Manual, or Online, enter keyword PULLEY, then select Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6368 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner assembly, and store it vertically to prevent oil leakage that may change the dampening specification. 8. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 9. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 10. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 11. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 60 N.m (45 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the drive belt auto tensioner, the water pump pulley, and the drive belt in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: *^ Use a new bolt to install the drive belt auto tensioner. ^ The bolt is located in a difficult location. Use Snap-on 8 mm hex socket (T/N FAM8E) and 3/8 flex ratchet torque wrench (T/N QD2FR75), or equivalent, to properly torque the bolt.* Repair Procedure B REPAIR PROCEDURE B - REPLACE THE 24-MM BOLT ON THE TRANSMISSION END OF THE ENGINE NOTE: Because it is difficult to determine if the transmission end crankshaft oil seal or the sealing bolt is causing the leak, replace both parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6369 1. M/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 13-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Manual Transmission Removal from the list. A/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 14-236 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Automatic Transmission Removal from the list. 2. M/T models: Remove the pressure plate, the clutch disc, and the flywheel. ^ Refer to page 12-17 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PRESS PLATE and select Clutch Replacement from the list. A/T models: Remove the drive plate. ^ Refer to page 14-256 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE PLATE and select Drive Plate Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ If you can see the leak, mark the location with a paint marker before removing the seal. ^ Remove the seal: - Use a hammer to firmly tap a small, 4 x 20-mm Phillips-head sheet metal screw into the metal part of the seal. If you marked the leak location, make sure you tap the screw into the seal directly across from the paint mark. - Use a cordless screwdriver or another suitable tool to firmly drive the screw into the oil seal so it won't come out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6370 - Use a pair of diagonal cutters to grip the screw under its head. While carefully prying up with the cutters, grab the screw with your other hand and gently pull out the seal. - Slip the seal (with the screw attached) into a resealable plastic bag. Avoid touching any surfaces that may have contamination on them. - Tag the plastic bag, and set it on the warranty parts shelf. 4. Clean the oil off the engine. 5. Install a new transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ Refer to page 7-33 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter the keywords TRANS SEAL and select Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - in car from the list. 6. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a to3thbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). 10. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to page 13-13 (M/T models), or 14-246 (A/T models) of the service manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6371 ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS INSTALL, and select Manual Transmission Installation (M/T models) or Automatic Transmission Installation (A/T models) from the list. Repair Procedure C REPAIR PROCEDURE C - REPLACE THE 20-MM SEALING BOLT BEHIND THE ALTERNATOR 1. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the alternator. Do not disconnect its electrical connections, or damage the wires: ^ Refer to page 4-44 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT, and select Alternator Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the EGR pipe from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the EGR pipe and thermostat housing from the cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the water pipe, then lower it so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 7. Remove the original sealing bolt and its washer. 8. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 9. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 10. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 12. Refill the radiator, then bleed the cooling system. Repair Procedure D REPAIR PROCEDURE D - REPLACE THE 20-MM BOLT BEHIND THE POWER STEERING PUMP Verify if the oil leak is from the oil sealing bolt or the power steering system: ^ Oil leaks from the 20-mm sealing bolt tend to collect on the lower engine block and oil pan. ^ Oil leaks from the right rear cover of the power steering pump tend to collect on the pump, but not on the pump inlet pipe. ^ Oil leaks from the power steering pump inlet pipe tend to collect on the inlet pipe, but are not found on the right rear cover of the power steering pump. If the power steering system is leaking from the inlet pipe area, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK. For other power steering leaks, refer to the service manual. 1. Remove the cowl cover. ^ Refer to page 20-229 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword COWL, then select Cowl Cover Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the drive belt: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6372 ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 3. Disconnect the power steering pump inlet hose from its holder on the right inner strut tower. 4. Remove the pump outlet hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6373 5. Remove the two power steering pump mounting bolts, then lower the pump so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 6. Remove and discard the original sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-if). 10. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Repair Procedure E REPAIR PROCEDURE E - POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK NOTE: During an engine oil leak inspection, if you discover the power steering pump is leaking from the inlet pipe area, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. 1. Drain the fluid from the power steering reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6374 2. Squeeze the spring clamp, and slide it back on the pump inlet hose so it clears the reservoir spigot. 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 4. Place a drain pan under the power steering reservoir. 5. Remove the 10-mm bolt that attaches the inlet pipe to the power steering pump. 6. Lower the vehicle, then remove the pump inlet hose from the reservoir. Remove the pump inlet hose and inlet pipe from the vehicle. *7. On your workbench, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp with new parts. NOTE: The pump inlet hose is shown attached to the power steering pump to show the proper position of the clamp. Position the clamp directly in front of the ridge on the inlet pipe before installation. It is easier to set the clamp before installation.* 8. Attach the pump inlet hose to the reservoir. 9. Install the inlet pipe on the power steering pump. ^ Raise the vehicle. * ^ Install a new 0-ring on the inlet pipe. ^ Coat the 0-ring with clean power steering fluid.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 11-005 > Mar > 11 > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6375 10. Install the 10-mm bolt. Torque the 10-mm bolt to 10 N.m (8 lb-ft). 11. Lower the vehicle, then fill the reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks Technical Service Bulletin # 06-020 Date: 070406 Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks 06-020 April 6, 2007 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Engine Oil Leaks and Power Steering Fluid Leak (Supersedes 06-020, dated June 20, 2006, to update the information marked by the black bars) SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil, or the power steering inlet pipe leaks fluid. PROBABLE CAUSE Some engine block sealing bolts may have been mismanufactured, causing the engine oil to leak when the engine is running. The power steering inlet pipe may have been mismanufactured, causing a power steering leak. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected engine block sealing bolt(s) and washer(s), and/or replace the power steering pump inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6381 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 111 07-RNA-A00, H/C 8160657 (Repair Procedures A and B) P/N 11106-RNA-A00, H/C 8160640 (Repair Procedures C and D) P/N 56123-RNA-A01, H/C 8051088 (Repair Procedure E) Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 05101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS The oil leaks can be in up to these five places: ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the timing chain end of the engine. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6382 ^ The 24-mm sealing bolt on the transmission end of the engine. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the alternator. ^ The 20-mm sealing bolt behind the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6383 ^ The inlet pipe on the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6384 Inspect the leaking area(s), then use the chart to determine the appropriate repair procedures. NOTE: The sealing bolts leak very little oil so you can miss the oil leak if you don't look carefully. Often the oil runs down the engine and accumulates in other places, leading to misdiagnosis and failure to repair the leak. Disclaimer Repair Procedure A REPAIR PROCEDURE A - REPLACE THE 24-MM SEALING BOLT ON THE TIMING CHAIN END OF THE ENGINE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the right front tire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6385 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. WITH A/C 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley: ^ Refer to page 6-10 of the 2006-07 Civic Service Manual, or Online, enter keyword PULLEY, then select Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6386 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner assembly, and store it vertically to prevent oil leakage that may change the dampening specification. 8. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 9. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 10. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 11. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 60 N.m (45 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the drive belt auto tensioner, the water pump pulley, and the drive belt in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: *^ Use a new bolt to install the drive belt auto tensioner. ^ The bolt is located in a difficult location. Use Snap-on 8 mm hex socket (T/N FAM8E) and 3/8 flex ratchet torque wrench (T/N QD2FR75), or equivalent, to properly torque the bolt.* Repair Procedure B REPAIR PROCEDURE B - REPLACE THE 24-MM BOLT ON THE TRANSMISSION END OF THE ENGINE NOTE: Because it is difficult to determine if the transmission end crankshaft oil seal or the sealing bolt is causing the leak, replace both parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6387 1. M/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 13-7 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Manual Transmission Removal from the list. A/T models: Remove the transmission. ^ Refer to page 14-236 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS REMOV and select Automatic Transmission Removal from the list. 2. M/T models: Remove the pressure plate, the clutch disc, and the flywheel. ^ Refer to page 12-17 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PRESS PLATE and select Clutch Replacement from the list. A/T models: Remove the drive plate. ^ Refer to page 14-256 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE PLATE and select Drive Plate Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ If you can see the leak, mark the location with a paint marker before removing the seal. ^ Remove the seal: - Use a hammer to firmly tap a small, 4 x 20-mm Phillips-head sheet metal screw into the metal part of the seal. If you marked the leak location, make sure you tap the screw into the seal directly across from the paint mark. - Use a cordless screwdriver or another suitable tool to firmly drive the screw into the oil seal so it won't come out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6388 - Use a pair of diagonal cutters to grip the screw under its head. While carefully prying up with the cutters, grab the screw with your other hand and gently pull out the seal. - Slip the seal (with the screw attached) into a resealable plastic bag. Avoid touching any surfaces that may have contamination on them. - Tag the plastic bag, and set it on the warranty parts shelf. 4. Clean the oil off the engine. 5. Install a new transmission end crankshaft oil seal: ^ Refer to page 7-33 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter the keywords TRANS SEAL and select Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - in car from the list. 6. Remove the 24-mm sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a to3thbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb-ft). 10. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to page 13-13 (M/T models), or 14-246 (A/T models) of the service manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6389 ^ Online, enter keywords TRANS INSTALL, and select Manual Transmission Installation (M/T models) or Automatic Transmission Installation (A/T models) from the list. Repair Procedure C REPAIR PROCEDURE C - REPLACE THE 20-MM SEALING BOLT BEHIND THE ALTERNATOR 1. Remove the drive belt: ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the alternator. Do not disconnect its electrical connections, or damage the wires: ^ Refer to page 4-44 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword ALT, and select Alternator Removal and Installation from the list. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the EGR pipe from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the EGR pipe and thermostat housing from the cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the water pipe, then lower it so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 7. Remove the original sealing bolt and its washer. 8. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 9. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 10. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 12. Refill the radiator, then bleed the cooling system. Repair Procedure D REPAIR PROCEDURE D - REPLACE THE 20-MM BOLT BEHIND THE POWER STEERING PUMP Verify if the oil leak is from the oil sealing bolt or the power steering system: ^ Oil leaks from the 20-mm sealing bolt tend to collect on the lower engine block and oil pan. ^ Oil leaks from the right rear cover of the power steering pump tend to collect on the pump, but not on the pump inlet pipe. ^ Oil leaks from the power steering pump inlet pipe tend to collect on the inlet pipe, but are not found on the right rear cover of the power steering pump. If the power steering system is leaking from the inlet pipe area, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK. For other power steering leaks, refer to the service manual. 1. Remove the cowl cover. ^ Refer to page 20-229 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword COWL, then select Cowl Cover Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the drive belt: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6390 ^ Set a long-handled, box-end wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner from above the engine. ^ Slowly turn the wrench in the direction shown, then remove the drive belt. NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner; you must turn the wrench slowly to avoid damaging the auto-tensioner. 3. Disconnect the power steering pump inlet hose from its holder on the right inner strut tower. 4. Remove the pump outlet hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6391 5. Remove the two power steering pump mounting bolts, then lower the pump so you can access the 20-mm sealing bolt. 6. Remove and discard the original sealing bolt and its washer. 7. Clean the sealer out of the block threads by running a pick tool or a toothbrush along the threads. NOTE: Pull any material from the threads out of the engine block. Do not push it in. 8. Coat the sealing surface on the engine block with clean engine oil. 9. Install a new sealing bolt and washer. Torque the sealing bolt to 34 N.m (25 lb-if). 10. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Repair Procedure E REPAIR PROCEDURE E - POWER STEERING PUMP LEAK NOTE: During an engine oil leak inspection, if you discover the power steering pump is leaking from the inlet pipe area, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp. 1. Drain the fluid from the power steering reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6392 2. Squeeze the spring clamp, and slide it back on the pump inlet hose so it clears the reservoir spigot. 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 4. Place a drain pan under the power steering reservoir. 5. Remove the 10-mm bolt that attaches the inlet pipe to the power steering pump. 6. Lower the vehicle, then remove the pump inlet hose from the reservoir. Remove the pump inlet hose and inlet pipe from the vehicle. *7. On your workbench, replace the inlet pipe, 0-ring, and hose clamp with new parts. NOTE: The pump inlet hose is shown attached to the power steering pump to show the proper position of the clamp. Position the clamp directly in front of the ridge on the inlet pipe before installation. It is easier to set the clamp before installation.* 8. Attach the pump inlet hose to the reservoir. 9. Install the inlet pipe on the power steering pump. ^ Raise the vehicle. * ^ Install a new 0-ring on the inlet pipe. ^ Coat the 0-ring with clean power steering fluid.* Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-020 > Apr > 07 > Engine/Power Steering - Oil/Fluid Leaks > Page 6393 10. Install the 10-mm bolt. Torque the 10-mm bolt to 10 N.m (8 lb-ft). 11. Lower the vehicle, then fill the reservoir. ^ Refer to page 17-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords POWER FLUID, then select Power Steering Fluid Replacement from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6394 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water, 1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the battery base. 6. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B) out of the yoke. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C). 7. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 8. Remove the clutch line bracket (A). 9. Remove the clutch line from the clamp (B). 10. Remove the clutch master cylinder (A) with the clutch line (B) and the reservoir hose (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6395 11. Disconnect the reservoir hose (A), then remove the retaining clip (B), and remove the clutch line (C) from the clutch master cylinder (D). Plug the end of the reservoir hose and the clutch line to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 12. Remove the O-ring (E) and clutch master cylinder seal (F) from the clutch master cylinder. 13. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Apply brake assembly lube to the clutch line, and install a new O-ring. ^ Tighten the master cylinder mounting nuts to 13 Nm (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft. lbs.). ^ Install the battery base. ^ Install the air cleaner housing. ^ Install the battery, Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable. ^ Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. ^ Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 14. Make sure the hose clamps (A) are positioned on the master cylinder (B) and reservoir (C) as shown. 15. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry apart the tip of the retaining clip (B) with a screwdriver. 16. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. NOTE: Reservoir filling is covered in the bleeding procedure. 17. Reinstall the under-cowl panel and cowl cover. 18. Reinstall the driver's dashboard under cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-SO40111 or 07RAK-S040110 ^ P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-SO40122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-001000A Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level. 2. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 3. Remove the pump outlet hose clamp (A) from the intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the pump outlet hose, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump (A). Take care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. 5. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 6. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A > Page 6400 7. Connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 8. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully. 9. Start the engine, and let it idle. 10. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at 158 °F (70°C). 11. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should be no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads higher, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed pump outlet or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. 12. Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads higher, repair or replace the pump. 13. Lower the engine speed, and let it idle. Close the shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. NOTICE; Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by overheating. 14. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,850 - 8,550 kPa (80 - 87 kgf/cm2, 1,140 - 1,240 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. 15. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A > Page 6401 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-0010001 Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-S040111 or 07RAK-S040110 ^ P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001 Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level. 2. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 3. Remove the pump outlet hose clamp (A) from the intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the pump outlet hose, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump (A). Take care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. 5. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 6. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A > Page 6402 7. Connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 8. Fully open the shut-off valve (A). 9. Fully open the pressure control valve (B). 10. Start the engine, and let it idle. 11. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at 158°F (70°C). 12. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should be no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads higher, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed pump outlet or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. 13. Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads higher, repair or replace the pump. 14. Lower the engine speed, and let it idle. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure control valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. NOTICE: Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by overheating. 15. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,850 - 8,550 kPa (80 - 87 kgf/cm2, 1,140 - 1,240 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. 16. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Pump Replacement Pump Replacement 1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir. 3. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 4. Remove the air cleaner. 5. Remove the front splash shield. 6. M/T model: Remove the shift cable bracket (A). 7. A/T model: Disconnect the shift cable from the control lever. 8. Remove the upper torque rod (A) from the body. 9. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley. 10. Cover the parts around the power steering pump with several shop towels to protect them from spilled power steering fluid. 11. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C) from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or any parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed. 12. Remove the pump outlet hose O-ring (E), and discard it. 13. Remove the pump mounting bolts (F). 14. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6405 15. Move the power steering pump toward the driver's side, then raise it. 16. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose onto the new pump with new O-ring. 17. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings securely. 18. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified torque. 19. Install the drive belt (A). Note these items during belt installation: ^ Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on the pulleys (B). ^ Do not get power steering fluid or grease on any parts around the power steering pump, drive belt, or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation. 20. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6406 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Pump Overhaul Pump Overhaul Pump Special Tools Required ^ Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 Disassembly NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure. 1. Drain the fluid from the pump. 2. Remove the power steering pump. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6407 3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws (B), hold the pulley (C) with the special tool (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. 5. Remove the pressure control valve cap, O-ring, valve spring, and pressure control valve. 6. Remove the pump housing cap, O-ring, and pump preload spring. 7. Remove the pump cover, O-ring, and pump cover seals. 8. Pull out the roll pin. 9. Remove the outer case, cam ring, rotor, vanes, and side plate. 10. Remove the rubber seal and slipper seal from the outer case. 11. Remove the O-rings from the bottom of the housing. 12. Remove the 40 mm internal snap ring, then remove the driveshaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer. 13. Remove the seal from the pump housing. Inspection 14. Check the pressure control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve. 15. Inspect the bore of the pressure control valve on the pump housing for scratches and wear. 16. Slip the pressure control valve back in the pump housing, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go to step 17; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not available separately. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6408 17. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the pressure control valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the pressure control valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent (C), and blow in the hose. ^ If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump as an assembly, The pressure control valve is not available separately. ^ If the pressure control valve is OK, set it aside for reassembly later. 18. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and install a new one (B). 19. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the Exploded View; if any of them are worn or damaged, replace the pump as an assembly. Reassembly 20. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side facing in) into the pump housing (B) by hand, then drive it in using the special tools until the seal is fully seated in the pump housing. Do not apply more than 1,370 N (140 kgf, 308 lbs.) of pressure. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6409 21. Position the pump driveshaft (A) in the pump housing, then press it in with the appropriate size socket wrench (B) as shown. 22. Install the 40 mm internal snap ring (C) with its radiused edge facing out. 23. Coat the new 23.8 mm O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, then position it on the bottom (B) of the pump housing. 24. Coat the new cover seals (A) and new 13.0 mm O-ring (B) with power steering fluid, then position them into the grooves on the cover (C). NOTE: Be careful not to install the inlet joint O-ring because they are same size. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6410 25. Install the outer case (A) by aligning the slot (B) inside the outer case with the cover roll pin hole (C). Be sure that the tapered side (D) of outer case is facing up. 26. Apply power steering fluid to the rubber seal (E) (black), and install it in the slot (F) of the outer case. 27. Apply power steering fluid to the slipper seal (G) (white), and install it on top of the rubber seal you just installed. 28. Install the cam ring (A) by aligning the slot (B) with the slot (C) in the outer case. 29. Insert the roll pin (D) into the slots between the cam ring and outer case, then push the roll pin into the set hole (E). 30. Install the rotor (A) in the cam ring (B). 31. Set the 11 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor. Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6411 32. Place the side plate (A) on the cam ring, and align the roll pin set hole (B) with the roll pin (C). 33. Coat the new O-ring (D) with power steering fluid, then position it into the groove on the side plate. 34. Install the pump housing (A) over the cover assembly (B). 35. Align the bolt holes in the cover (A) with the threaded holes in the pump housing. Install the flange bolts loosely first, then torque the flange bolts in a criss-cross pattern in two or more steps. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6412 36. Push in the cam ring (A) from the pump housing cap hole (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver to make sure the cam ring is fully seated against the outer case. 37. Install the pump preload spring (A) in the pump housing. 38. Coat the new 12.7 mm O-ring (B) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing cap (C). 39. Install the pump housing cap on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. 40. Install the pressure control valve spring (A) in the pump housing. 41. Coat the pressure control valve (B) with power steering fluid, and install it in the pump housing. 42. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pressure control valve cap (D). 43. Install the pressure control valve cap on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Replacement > Page 6413 44. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B). 45. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing. 46. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws (C). Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 47. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten the pulley nut to the specified torque. 48. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley. If it turns hard, loosen the four flange bolts on the cover, then retighten them as in step 35, and check the pump again. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6418 4. Right Side of Engine Comp. (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6419 64. PSP Switch (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6420 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6421 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate ON? Yes - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A22) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6422 16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? Yes - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A22. Is there continuity? Yes - Go to step 24. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (A22). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6423 24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G401. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6430 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6431 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6435 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6436 176. Ignition Key Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6437 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Lock Replacement 1. Remove the steering column. 2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill the heads of the bolts off with a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when removing the shear bolts. 3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body. 4. Install the switch body without the key inserted. 5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B) twist off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Gear Mount: Service and Repair Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement 1. Remove the steering gearbox. 2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B), 10 x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and the 10 mm nut (D) as shown. 3. Hold the nut with a wrench, and tighten the flange bolt with another wrench. Remove the gearbox mount cushion (E). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on the gearbox mounting cushion hole. 5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer, flange bolt, and the nut as shown. 6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the nut until the mount cushion edges (B) properly fit on the gearbox flange surface. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Removal Steering Wheel Removal SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio or navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the driver's airbag from the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A). 5. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B). 6. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel from the steering column shaft by turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller. Note these items when removing the steering wheel: Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt. 7. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the steering column power Steering Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Removal > Page 6449 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Removal > Page 6450 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Installation Steering Wheel Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label should point straight up. 2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. Connect the cable reel subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire harness is routed and fastened properly. 4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the system is operating properly. 5. Finish the installation, and note these items: ^ Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Removal > Page 6451 ^ Enter the anti-theft code for the radio or navigation system, then enter the audio presets. ^ Set the clock. ^ Verify cruise control, audio remote, navigation guide and turn signal switch operation. ^ Make sure the steering wheel is centered. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Bushing base 07JAF-SH20330 1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin. 2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh multipurpose grease. 3. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease. Note these items when installing new grease: ^ Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the tapered section (E) of the ball pin. ^ Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The boot must not have a gap at the boot installation sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination, and wipe it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint If the ball joint is worn or damaged, replace the ball joint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Suspension Ball Joint Removal Ball Joint Removal Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 NOTICE: Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 07MAC-SL0A102 or 07MAC-SL0A202 1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball joint pin. 2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6462 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the special tools as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B). NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it to a brake line or wire harness. 4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow the jaw (E) to pivot. 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin. NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the pressure bolt. 6. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged. Lower Ball Joint Replacement Lower Ball Joint Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 1. Remove the front wheel. 2. Remove and discard the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. 3. Disconnect the lower ball joint (D) from the lower arm. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6463 4. Remove the spindle nut, and remove the outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while pulling the hub outward. 5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the castle nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 6. Install the ball joint thread protector. 7. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover, then remove the lower ball joint. 8. Install the lower ball joint in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Ball Joint Boot Replacement Ball Joint Boot Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint boot clip guide 07GAF-SE00200 1. Remove the knuckle. 2. Remove the boot clip and the boot. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6464 3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-lower ball housing mating surfaces (B). 4. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin (C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot. 5. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently to force out any air. 6. Press the boot with the special tool until the bottom seats on the lower ball housing (A) all the way around. 7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the exposed portion of the ball joint pin. 8. Install the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6465 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Ball Joint Removal Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 NOTICE: Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 07MAC-SL0A102 or 07MAC-SL0A202 1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball joint pin. 2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the special tools as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6466 NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it to a brake line or wire harness. 4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow the jaw (E) to pivot. 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin. NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the pressure bolt. 6. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Control Arm: Customer Interest Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6475 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6476 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6477 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6478 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6479 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6480 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Control Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6486 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6487 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6488 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6489 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6490 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6491 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Suspension Lower Arm Removal/installation Special Tools Required ^ Oil seal driver, 64 mm 07GAD-PH70201 ^ Bearing separator 07KAF-PS30200 ^ Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Oil seal driver, 55 x 66.2 mm 07965-KE80100 Removal/Installation 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. 3. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then disconnect the stabilizer links from the lower arm (D). NOTE: Use a new flange nut during reassembly. 4. Turn the stabilizer bar backward to gain easier access to the front side of the lower arm mounting bolt. 5. Remove and discard the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. 6. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6494 7. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A). NOTE: During installation, install a new mounting bolt. 8. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (B), then remove the lower arm (C) from the front suspension subframe (D). NOTE: During installation, install a new mounting bolt. 9. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Bushing Replacement NOTE: Replace the lower arm (A) as an assembly if the lower arm has the paint mark (B) around the hole near the front bushing. The paint mark can also be seen around a hole on the bottom side of the lower arm in the same area. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6495 1. Press out the bushing (A) with the special tools and a hydraulic press, and remove the bushing from the lower arm (B). NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inside of the bushing hole when pressing on the bushing. 2. Clean the mating surface of the new bushing and the inside of the lower arm. 3. Align the angle of the lower arm (A) and the tab portion (B) of the bushing (C) as shown. 4. Using a hydraulic press and special tools, press in the bushing into the control arm. 5. Using a yellow oil-based paint marker, paint a mark (A) around the hole (B) near the front bushing (C). Also paint a mark around the hole on the bottom side of the lower arm in the same area. NOTE: These marks are used to identify a lower that has had the bushing replaced. Do not replace the bushing in a lower arm with these paint marks; you must replace the lower arm. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6496 Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Upper Arm Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the trailing arm (A) and the knuckle (B). 4. Remove the upper arm mounting bolts (A) and the flange bolt (B). NOTE: Use the new upper arm mounting bolts and a new flange bolt during reassembly. 5. Remove the upper arm (C) from the vehicle. 6. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc or brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the rear side trim panel. 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as needed. 3. Remove the insulator (A). 4. Detach the floor wire harness clips (A). 5. Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement > Page 6501 6. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal. When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement > Page 6502 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Rear Floor Upper Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Rear Floor Upper Cross-member Gusset Replacement Rear Floor Upper Cross-member Gusset Torque NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6506 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6507 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6508 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6509 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6510 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6511 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Disc Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6515 Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Drum Brake Type Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6516 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the two washers (A). 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake disc. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6517 8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 9. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks. 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake disc, Clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: ^ Turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose if necessary. ^ If the brake drum has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake drum to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake drum. ^ After installation, press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6518 4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 5. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6519 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D). 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6520 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6521 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D), 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to the wheel cylinder, and retighten it if necessary. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Link Removal/installation 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. 3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E). 4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and lower arm (G) with the joint pins set at the center of their range of the movement. NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing rearward. 5. Install a new self-locking nut and a new flange nut, and lightly tighten them. 6. Tighten the self-locking nut and the flange nut to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint pin with a hex wrench. 7. Reinstall all removed parts, and test-drive the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6527 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E). 4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and trailing arm (G) with the joint pins set at the center of their range of the movement. NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing rearward. 5. Install a new self-locking nut and a flange nut, and lightly tighten them. 6. Tighten the self-locking nut and flange nut to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint pins with a hex wrench. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Removal Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6531 - Remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the upper member separator. - Remove front wheelhouse and front damper extension B as an assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6532 - Check the damper housing position, and check for damage. - If necessary, replace the damper housing, damper housing extension and front damper extension A as an assembly. Installation 1. Clamp the new damper housing, front wheelhouse, front damper extension, front bulkhead, and measure the front compartment diagonally. 2. Check the body dimensions. - Engine compartment - Engine/transmission mount positions - Front damper extension position - Repair chart top view - Repair chart side view 3. Tack weld the new parts and front bulkhead into position. 4. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position. 5. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, then check for differences in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6533 6. Do the main welding. - Weld the damper housing (A), front wheelhouse (B), front damper extension A (C) and front damper extension B (D). - From the passenger's side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower (E) and damper housing extension (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6534 7. Weld the front damper extension B (A) and front end outrigger (B). Passenger's Side 8. Install the new upper member separator (A) to the damper extension bulkhead (B). NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside of the wheelhouse upper member (D), without gaps. 9. Weld the wheelhouse upper member (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6539 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6540 Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque NOTE: - After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Damper/Spring Replacement Damper/Spring Special Tools Required ^ Deep socket 07XAA-0010100 NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a commercially available strut spring compressor (Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) according to the manufacturer's instructions. Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6545 3. Remove the wheel sensor harness clip (A) and the brake hose bracket (B) from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 4. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: Do not allow the knuckle to rotate too far outward. This may allow the inner CV joint bearing to unseat. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the side of the windshield, turn the ignition switch off, leaving the wipers near the A-pillars. 6. Remove the service cap (A) and the lid (B). 7. Remove the three flange nuts (C) from top of the damper. NOTE: ^ Damper springs are different, left and right. Mark the springs L and R before you continue. ^ Be careful not to damage the body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6546 8. Remove the damper assembly (A). Disassembly/Inspection 1. Remove the cap (A) from the top of the damper. 2. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 3. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 4. Reassemble all the parts, except for the upper spring mounting cushion, the bump stop, lower spring rubber, and the damper spring. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6547 5. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking, and the damper should be replaced. 6. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding during these tests. Reassembly 1. Install the spring (A) on the upper spring mounting cushion (B) by aligning the ledge portion (C). 2. Compress the damper spring. 3. Install all the parts except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit (A) by referring to the Exploded View. 4. Align the bottom of the spring (B) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6548 5. Align the damper bracket (A) and the damper mounting base (B) so that the "triangle" stamp (C) points toward the front. 6. Align the angle of the stud bolt (D) on the damper bracket as shown. 7. Install the damper mounting washer (A) and a new self-locking nut (B). 8. Hold the damper shaft using a hex wrench (C), and tighten the new self-locking nut to the specified torque value. 9. Install the cap. Installation 1. Install the damper assembly (A) onto the frame. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6549 2. Loosely install new flange nuts (A). NOTE: Install the service cap (B) and the lid (C) after tightening the flange nuts to the specified torque value. 3. Loosely install new damper pinch bolts (A) and new self-locking nuts (B) to the damper (C). 4. Install the wheel sensor harness clip (A) and the brake hose bracket (B) to the damper (C). 5. Raise the front suspension with a floor jack to load the suspension with the vehicle's weight. 6. Tighten the damper pinch bolts and the self-locking nuts to the specified torque value. 7. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque value. 8. Install the service cap and the lid. 9. Install the front wheel. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6550 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Suspension Spring Replacement Spring Removal 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel, 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A) and the O-ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (D). 5. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the trailing arm and the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6551 6. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the trailing arm (B) and the damper (C). 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the trailing arm. 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the knuckle (B) and the upper arm (C). 9. Remove the trailing arm front mounting bolts (A). 10. Lower the floor jack gradually. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6552 11. Remove the spring mounting rubber (A), the spring (B) and the lower spring seat (C). NOTE: If the clip is installed inside the spring mounting rubber, discard it. Installation 1. Install the spring mounting rubber (A), the spring (B) and the lower spring seat (C). 2. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B) with the trailing arm (C) as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6553 3. Loosely install the new trailing arm front mounting bolts (A). 4. Loosely install a new flange bolt (A) on the knuckle (B) and the upper arm (C). 5. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt hole with the holes in the trailing arm (A) and the damper (B), and install a new flange bolt (C). 6. Install the stabilizer link on the trailing arm with a new self-locking nut, and lightly tighten both nuts. 7. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack to load the vehicle weight. 8. Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. For stabilizer link torque specifications. 9. Install the rear wheel. NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc or brake drum and inside of the wheel. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Strut Housing: Service and Repair Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing Symbols The symbols in the mass production body welding diagrams and in the removal/installation carry the following meanings Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6558 Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing - Mass Production Removal - Remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the upper member separator. - Remove front wheelhouse and front damper extension B as an assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6559 - Check the damper housing position, and check for damage. - If necessary, replace the damper housing, damper housing extension and front damper extension A as an assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6560 Installation 1. Clamp the new damper housing, front wheelhouse, front damper extension, front bulkhead, and measure the front compartment diagonally. 2. Check the body dimensions. - Engine compartment. - Engine/transmission mount positions. - Front damper extension position. - Repair chart top view. - Repair chart side view. 3. Tack weld the new parts and front bulkhead into position. 4. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position. 5. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, then check for differences in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 6. Do the main welding. - Weld the damper housing (A), front wheelhouse (B), front damper extension A (C) and front damper extension B (D). - From the passenger's side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower (E) and damper housing extension (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6561 7. Weld the front damper extension B (A) and front end outrigger (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Strut Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6562 Passenger's side 8. Install the new upper member separator (A) to the damper extension bulkhead (B). NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside of the wheelhouse upper member (D), without gaps. 9. Weld the wheelhouse upper member (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-078 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps Suspension Travel Bumper: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps 07-078 November 17, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-door - ALL 2006-07 Civic Si 2-door - ALL 2007 Civic Si 4-door - ALL Pop or Clunk From the Front Suspension While Driving Over a Bump After Turning SYMPTOM There is a pop or clunk from the front suspension area when driving over bumps. This usually occurs after completing a tight (full lock) turn. PROBABLE CAUSE The front bump stops become dislodged and then pop back into place. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace both front bump stops. PARTS INFORMATION Bump Stop (two required): P/N 51722-SNA-A03, H/C 8453318 Self-locking Nut (two required): P/N 90213-5J6-004, H/C 5411202 Damper Pinch Bolts (four required): P/N 90190-SNA-000, H/C 8178451 Self-locking Nuts (four required): P/N 90213-5R3-013, H/C 3898376 Flange Nut (10mm) (six required): P/N 90304-Si 0-024, H/C 8401135 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51722-SVA-A02 H/C 8156689 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-078 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps > Page 6571 DIAGNOSIS 1. Drive the vehicle in an elongated figure-eight pattern. Hold the steering wheel at full lock in the turns with a short straight section between turns. Drive over a 2-inch dip or bump while going straight at 15mph. ^ If you hear a severe pop or clunk, go to step 2. ^ If you don't hear a pop or clunk after several attempts, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Drive the vehicle in a straight line at 15 mph, alternating between forward and reverse (no turning) over the same bump as in step 1. ^ If you don't hear a pop or clunk, but you did in step 1, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you hear a pop or clunk, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove one front damper assembly: ^ Refer to page 18-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, Volume 2, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER, and select Front Damper/Spring Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Disassemble the front damper assembly: ^ Refer to page 18-29 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER, and select Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly from the list. 3. Clean and dry the bump stop mounting base area. 4. Install the new bump stop. 5. Reassemble the damper using a new self-locking nut. Torque the nut to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall the damper assembly onto the vehicle using new pinch bolts and flange nuts. Torque the nuts to 90 N.m (67 lb-ft). 7. Repeat steps 1 thru 6 for the other front damper assembly. 8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns Suspension Travel Bumper: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns 07-043 November 16, 2007 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L154047 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H528035* Popping Noise While Turning (Supersedes 07-043, dated July 18, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM While turning, there is a popping noise from the front suspension. PROBABLE CAUSE The bump stop was manufactured to an incorrect specification, causing it to bind on the damper shaft. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the bump stop on the affected front damper. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Left Side: P/N 51606-SVB-A03 H/C 8240467 Right Side: P/N 51605-SVB-A03 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns > Page 6576 H/C 8212086 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the affected front damper: ^ Refer to page 18-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, Volume 2, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER REM, and select Front Damper/Spring Removal and, Installation from the list. 2. Disassemble the damper, and replace the bump stop: ^ Refer to page 18-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER DIS, and select Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly from the list. NOTE: Inspect and replace any damaged components. If there is oil on the bump stop, replace the damper. 3. Reassemble the spring and damper with a new self-locking nut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns > Page 6577 4. Reinstall the damper in the reverse order of removal, using new flange nuts, new pinch bolts, and new self-locking nuts. 5. If needed, repeat steps 1 thru 4 for the other front damper. 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-078 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps Suspension Travel Bumper: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps 07-078 November 17, 2007 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-door - ALL 2006-07 Civic Si 2-door - ALL 2007 Civic Si 4-door - ALL Pop or Clunk From the Front Suspension While Driving Over a Bump After Turning SYMPTOM There is a pop or clunk from the front suspension area when driving over bumps. This usually occurs after completing a tight (full lock) turn. PROBABLE CAUSE The front bump stops become dislodged and then pop back into place. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace both front bump stops. PARTS INFORMATION Bump Stop (two required): P/N 51722-SNA-A03, H/C 8453318 Self-locking Nut (two required): P/N 90213-5J6-004, H/C 5411202 Damper Pinch Bolts (four required): P/N 90190-SNA-000, H/C 8178451 Self-locking Nuts (four required): P/N 90213-5R3-013, H/C 3898376 Flange Nut (10mm) (six required): P/N 90304-Si 0-024, H/C 8401135 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51722-SVA-A02 H/C 8156689 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-078 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Pop/Clunk On Bumps > Page 6583 DIAGNOSIS 1. Drive the vehicle in an elongated figure-eight pattern. Hold the steering wheel at full lock in the turns with a short straight section between turns. Drive over a 2-inch dip or bump while going straight at 15mph. ^ If you hear a severe pop or clunk, go to step 2. ^ If you don't hear a pop or clunk after several attempts, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Drive the vehicle in a straight line at 15 mph, alternating between forward and reverse (no turning) over the same bump as in step 1. ^ If you don't hear a pop or clunk, but you did in step 1, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you hear a pop or clunk, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove one front damper assembly: ^ Refer to page 18-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, Volume 2, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER, and select Front Damper/Spring Removal and Installation from the list. 2. Disassemble the front damper assembly: ^ Refer to page 18-29 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER, and select Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly from the list. 3. Clean and dry the bump stop mounting base area. 4. Install the new bump stop. 5. Reassemble the damper using a new self-locking nut. Torque the nut to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall the damper assembly onto the vehicle using new pinch bolts and flange nuts. Torque the nuts to 90 N.m (67 lb-ft). 7. Repeat steps 1 thru 6 for the other front damper assembly. 8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns Suspension Travel Bumper: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns 07-043 November 16, 2007 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L154047 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H528035* Popping Noise While Turning (Supersedes 07-043, dated July 18, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM While turning, there is a popping noise from the front suspension. PROBABLE CAUSE The bump stop was manufactured to an incorrect specification, causing it to bind on the damper shaft. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the bump stop on the affected front damper. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Left Side: P/N 51606-SVB-A03 H/C 8240467 Right Side: P/N 51605-SVB-A03 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns > Page 6588 H/C 8212086 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the affected front damper: ^ Refer to page 18-27 of the 2OO~2OO8 Civic Service Manual, Volume 2, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER REM, and select Front Damper/Spring Removal and, Installation from the list. 2. Disassemble the damper, and replace the bump stop: ^ Refer to page 18-30 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DAMPER DIS, and select Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly from the list. NOTE: Inspect and replace any damaged components. If there is oil on the bump stop, replace the damper. 3. Reassemble the spring and damper with a new self-locking nut. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 07-043 > Nov > 07 > Suspension - Front End Popping Noise On Turns > Page 6589 4. Reinstall the damper in the reverse order of removal, using new flange nuts, new pinch bolts, and new self-locking nuts. 5. If needed, repeat steps 1 thru 4 for the other front damper. 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the rear under cover. 4. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the trailing arm (B). 5. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the trailing arm. 6. Remove the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the trailing arm. 8. Remove the flange bolt, and disconnect the damper from the trailing arm. 9. Remove and discard the trailing arm front mounting bolts (A). NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6593 10. Remove and discard the trailing arm rear mounting bolt (A). NOTE: Use a new mounting bolt during reassembly. 11. Lower the jack, and remove the trailing arm. 12. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Check the brake hose for interference and twisting. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6598 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc inward and outward. 6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6601 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6602 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6603 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6604 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6605 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6606 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6607 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Disc Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6608 Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Drum Brake Type Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6609 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the two washers (A). 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake disc. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6610 8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 9. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks. 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake disc, Clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: ^ Turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose if necessary. ^ If the brake drum has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake drum to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake drum. ^ After installation, press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6611 4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 5. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6612 NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D). 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6613 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D), 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6614 ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to the wheel cylinder, and retighten it if necessary. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Suspension Spindle nut 22 x 1.5 mm .............................................................................................................................................. 181 Nm (18.5 kgf-m, 134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), on safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in the P position for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6628 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6629 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6630 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6631 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6632 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6633 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6634 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6640 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6641 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6642 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6643 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6644 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6645 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 6646 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Tires: Customer Interest Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6655 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6656 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6657 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6658 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6659 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6660 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear 08-001 July 22, 2009 Applies To: 2006-07 Civic 2-Door - ALL Except Si and Honda Accessory HFP Package 2006-07 Civic 4-Door - ALL Except Si 2006-07 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2008 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...8S000001 thru JHMFA3...8S010456 Uneven or Rapid Rear Tire Wear (Supersedes 08-001, dated February 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under WARRANTY CLAIM IN FORMATION, the flat rate time for a four-wheel alignment was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* NOTE: To ensure a proper repair and proper reimbursement, you must read this entire service bulletin before doing any work. SYMPTOM The customer may complain of uneven or rapid rear tire wear, a roaring noise from the rear, or a vibration at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The combination of the tires and the rear suspension geometry may cause rapid and uneven rear tire wear. Tires in an advanced stage of this diagonal or inner edge wear may cause vibration and/or a bad bearing type noise. (For more details, see TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION) CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a rear upper control arm kit, replace the flange bolts and the worn tires (see the Tire Replacement Information chart), and do a four-wheel alignment to the new specification listed in REPAIR PROCEDURE. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Upper Control Arm Kit: P/N 04523-SNA-A01, H/C 9113184 (Contains control arms and six flange bolts.) Tire Warranty Information You must use the same brand and size tire as OEM equipped. Replacement tires must be from The Tire Rack. For replacement tires, call the American Honda Tire Program through The Tire Rack at 877-327-8473. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6666 Tire Application Chart Tire Replacement Information Typical Claim: American Honda will pay a prorated amount, as shown in the chart below, for replacement of tires due to uneven or rapid rear tire wear, based on the tire's mileage. NOTE: You must calculate how much to charge the customer and how much to charge the warranty claim. Customer receipts used for calculation of the mileage must be retained with the repair order. Get the customer's permission before proceeding with this repair. Customer Reimbursements: Customers who had tires previously replaced due to wear, and whose vehicle is eligible for rear upper control arm replacement (see DIAGNOSIS on page 4), may be eligible for reimbursement of a prorated portion of their expense. Use the mileage on the customer's original tire replacement receipt to calculate the prorated amount, and retain a copy of the receipt with the repair order. To submit a warranty claim for customer reimbursement, follow the procedure in section 3.9.2 of the Service Operations Manual, "Emergency Repairs Reimbursement Procedure." To qualify for tire replacement: ^ The tires must have been properly maintained (correct inflation and balancing). ^ Tires must not show signs of abuse (such as from racing or other physical damage). Abused tires are not covered by this service bulletin. ^ Tires must show signs of diagonal or inner edge wear. They must also fall within the abnormal wear range, based on tread depth measured and mileage shown, on the Tire Replacement Information chart. TIRE INSPECTION AND QUALIFICATION Diagonal Wear Lines Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6667 The tire is no longer round. There are high and low spots on the tire, worn in a diagonal pattern across the tread. Inner Edge Tread Wear Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6668 The tread on the inner edge of the tire is worn more than the tread on the outer edge. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 04523-SNA-A00 H/C 8820698 Defect Code: 00504 Symptom Code: 04217 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. To claim the installation of replacement tires, do this: ^ List the prorated amount of the tire (the invoice price multiplied by the covered percentage) in the first sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T3 (sublet tire purchase). ^ You are eligible for a reimbursement of $20 per tire for handling. This $20 handling fee should cover any state-required recycling fees plus an additional profit margin. List this dollar amount in the second sublet field on the warranty claim form. Use sublet code T4 (sublet tire purchase handling reimbursement). NOTE: Claims made for tire replacement require three photographs of the tires, all attached to the repair order. If these photos are not available upon request, or if they fail to meet the guidelines in this service bulletin, the dealer will be debited the full claim amount. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6669 Photo # 1 Arrange the tires together, and take a photo showing the tread wear of all replaced tires and the VIN, as shown in the example below. (If only two tires are replaced, photograph only those two tires.) Photo # 2 Set the camera to macro mode (close-up), and select the tire with the most tread wear. Measure the tread depth of the tire at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, and take a photo of the gauge in the tire clearly showing the remaining tread depth. If the inner edge of the tire is bald or flat-spotted, yet the tread in the center of the tire is good, make sure the photo clearly shows that the tire is past its useable life. Photo # 3 Select the tire with the most tread wear, and take a photo of the tread surface showing the tread wear bars. DIAGNOSIS Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6670 1. Make sure the vehicle's suspension is not modified, and that it has the correct tires and wheels (or genuine Honda accessory wheels, tires, and suspension). (For correct tire sizes, see the Tire Application Chart) Are the tires, wheels, and suspension the correct type? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). 2. Inspect the rear upper control arms. Do the arms have the letter "C" painted or stamped on them? Yes - This vehicle already has the revised rear upper control arms. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). No - Go to step 3. 3. Inspect the tires. Do the tires show diagonal or inner edge wear? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - The wear is not camber related. Disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting (accident damage, driving habits, alignment, tire pressures, etc.). REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install a rear upper control arm kit: ^ All Civic (except Hybrid): Refer to page 18-40 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Civic Hybrid: Refer to page 18-38 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UPPER, then select Rear Upper Arm Removal/Installation from the list. NOTE: This procedure is not complete unless you replace the flange bolts. 2. Measure and record the tread depth of the tires on the repair order using a tread depth gauge. Tread depth is measured at one of the grooves closest to the middle of the tire, from the top of the tread blocks to the bottom of the groove (not to the wear bars). If the inner edge of the tire is heavily flat- spotted or bald, use a value of 2/32" instead of the actual tread depth to determine the prorated amount on the Tire Replacement Information chart on page 2. (See the photos under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION.) ^ If three or four tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install four new tires. ^ If one or two tires have abnormal wear, mount, balance, and install two new tires onto the rear of the vehicle. 3. Set the tire pressures to the specifications on the driver's doorjamb (B-pillar) label. 4. Do a four-wheel alignment using the new rear camber specification listed below: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 08-001 > Jul > 09 > Tires - Rapid/Uneven Rear Tire Wear > Page 6671 Rear camber specification range: - 1.5 ° to 0° (-1°30' to 0°) Front toe: 0 mm (+2mm/-2mm) Rear toe: 2 mm (+2mm/-1mm) Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 6676 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 06-082 > Dec > 06 > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 6682 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn the back side of the wheel slowly by hand. 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial runout by turning the wheel. 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play, and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel are clean. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V399000: Inspect Rear ABS Sensor/Wheel Bearing MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006-2007 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V399000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Wheels POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 182756 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the wheel speed sensor housing uses an o-ring seal to prevent leakage to or from the wheel bearing. If assembled improperly, the o-ring may not seal properly allowing water to enter the wheel bearing and eventually cause damage to the bearing, especially in areas where use of road salt is prevalent. If the driver continues to drive with this condition it is possible for the wheel bearing to become loose, which could cause the bearing to fail. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause a wheel to fall off of the vehicle, possibly resulting in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the rear abs sensors and wheel bearings for damaged parts and replace them free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 17, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q56. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6690 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc inward and outward. 6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 ^ Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6693 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6694 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, then remove the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the flange bolt (A) and flange nuts (B) from the lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt and new flange nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the specified torque beginning with the flange nuts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6695 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the lower arm. 14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self locking nuts (B) from the damper. NOTE: During installation, install the new damper pinch bolts and new self-locking nuts. 15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. 16. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B) then remove the nut (C). NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin after tightening the new castle nut. 17. Install the ball joint thread protector. 18. Disconnect lower ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 19. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6696 Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) from the knuckle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6697 4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tools and a press. 5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6698 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6699 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Disc Brake Type Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6700 Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit - Drum Brake Type Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6701 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose excessively. 5. Remove the two washers (A). 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake disc. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6702 8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 9. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks. 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake disc, Clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Hub Bearing Unit Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel. 3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. NOTE: ^ Turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose if necessary. ^ If the brake drum has clung to the hub bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake drum to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent cocking the brake drum. ^ After installation, press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6703 4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). 5. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new O-ring during reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surface of the hub bearing unit and inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6704 NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D). 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake Type 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6705 3. Remove the wheel sensor (A), the O-ring (B), and the sensor harness (C) from the knuckle (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE: Use a new O-ring during reassembly. 4. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support it. NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage any suspension components. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and disconnect the upper arm (B) from the knuckle. 6. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and the adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 7. Remove the flange bolt (D), 8. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut during reassembly. ^ Use a new flange bolt during reassembly. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6706 ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to the wheel cylinder, and retighten it if necessary. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Suspension Spindle nut 22 x 1.5 mm .............................................................................................................................................. 181 Nm (18.5 kgf-m, 134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6719 80. Under Left Side of Dash 100. Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6720 101. Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6721 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams 187. Air Mix Control Motor 192. Mode Control Motor 193. Recirculation Control Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Heating Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuit. 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the recirculation control motor 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the recirculation control motor. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Test the recirculation control motor. Is the recirculation control motor OK ? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the recirculation control motor, or repair the recirculation control linkage or door. 7. Disconnect the heater control panel 24P connector. 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the heater control panel 24P connector terminals No. 16 and No. 17 individually. Is there continuity? Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating > Page 6724 YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wires between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same terminals for voltage to body ground. Is there any voltage? YES - Repair any short to power in the wires between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the heater control panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the heater control panel. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the terminals of the heater control panel 24P connector and the recirculation control motor 7P connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the heater control panel 24P connector and at the recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original heater control panel. NO - Repair any open in the wires between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Mix Control Motor Test NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs. 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air mix control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air mix control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating > Page 6725 2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2 terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. When the air mix control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed. - If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 KOhms. 5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Using the backprobe set. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 and No. 7 terminals. Max Cool: about 0.5 V Max Hot: about 4.5 V 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor. Mode Control Motor Test Mode Control Motor Test NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs. 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No. 2 terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. - If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 KOhms range. With the mode control motor running as in step 2, check for continuity between the No. 3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals and the No. 7 terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the motor moves past the switch's terminal. 5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor. Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor Test NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs. 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating > Page 6726 2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No. 5 or No. 7 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh (when the No. 5 terminal is disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No. 7 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. - If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating > Page 6727 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Heating/Air Conditioning Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuit. 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the recirculation control motor 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the recirculation control motor. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Test the recirculation control motor. Is the recirculation control motor OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the recirculation control motor, or repair the recirculation control linkage or door. 7. Disconnect the HVAC control unit 24P connector. 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the HVAC control unit 24P connector terminals No. 16 and No. 17 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wires between the HVAC control unit and the recirculation control motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heating > Page 6728 NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same terminals for voltage to body ground. Is there any voltage? YES - Repair any short to power in the wires between the HVAC control unit and the recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the HVAC control unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the HVAC control unit. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the above terminals of the HVAC control unit 24P connector and the recirculation control motor 7P connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the HVAC control unit 24P connector and at the recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good HVAC control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HVAC control unit. NO - Repair any open in the wires between the HVAC control unit and the recirculation control motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor Replacement Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Mix Control Motor Replacement Air Mix Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor Replacement > Page 6731 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Control Motor Replacement Mode Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the glove box. 2. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the self-tapping screws, and the passenger's heater duct (B). 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor from the heater unit. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor Replacement > Page 6732 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Control Motor Replacement Recirculation Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the glove box and the passenger's kick panel. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 177. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6736 63. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (EX, GX, Si; Canada: LX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6737 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the outside air temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6738 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the receiver/dryer desiccant bracket [from the A/C condenser] . [ ] : 2-door 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor: Locations Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6742 104. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6759 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6760 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6761 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6762 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6763 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6764 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6765 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6766 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6767 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6768 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6769 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6770 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6771 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6772 41. Blower Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Unit Blower Unit Removal and Installation 1. Remove the glove box. 2. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the bolts and the glove box frame (A). 4. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the self-tapping screws, and the passenger's heater duct (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6775 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 6. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. Remove the self-tapping screws, the bolt, the mounting nuts, and the blower unit (B). 7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leakage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6776 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Unit Component Blower Unit Component Replacement Note these items when overhauling the blower unit: - The recirculation control motor (A), blower motor (B) and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be replaced without removing the blower unit. - Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation control linkage and door move smoothly without binding. - After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6780 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 6784 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement 1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on each side, then let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A) from the evaporator. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator. 5. If the maintenance minder required to replace the dust and pollen filter, reset the maintenance minder, and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance minder did not require to replace the dust and pollen filter, go to step 6. 6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with the HDS. 8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS. 9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Clearance............................................................................................................................................. ...............................0.35 - 0.65 mm (0.014 - 0.026 in.) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine coolant temperature, or hard acceleration. - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Heating/Air Conditioning - Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuses and recheck. If the fuses blow again, check for a short in the No. 20 (7.5 A) and No. 36 (10 A) fuses circuit. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn on the A/C on the HVAC control unit. 5. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the PGM-FI Data List with the HDS, Is the A/C CLUTCH on? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Check the engine coolant temperature and idle speed (use the HDS PGM-FI data list if possible). Are the coolant temperature and idle speed OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Troubleshoot and repair the cause of the high engine coolant temperature, or low idle. 7. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay. 8. Measure the voltage between the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6794 YES - Go to step 9. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 9. Connect the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. Does the A/C compressor clutch click? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to step 18. 10. Disconnect the jumper wire. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Measure the voltage between the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the A/C compressor clutch relay. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay. 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 16. Connect the ECM/PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 14 to body ground with a jumper wire. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6795 Does the A/C compressor click? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at ECM/PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are good, check the ECM/PCM grounds. If the grounds are good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. 18. Disconnect the jumper wire. 19. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector. 20. Check for continuity between the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector terminal No. 2. Is there continuity? YES - Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance, and the compressor clutch field coil. Repair as needed. NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor clutch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6796 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection A/C Compressor Clutch Check A/C Compressor Clutch Check 1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. 2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. 3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A) and the armature plate (B) all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, remove the armature plate and add or remove shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance. Clearance: 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in.) NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm. 4. Check for continuity between the A/C compressor clutch connector No.1 and No.3. If there is no continuity, replace the thermal protector. NOTE: The thermal protector will have no continuity above about 252 to 262 degrees F (122 to 128 degrees C). When the temperature drops below about 241 to 219 degrees F (116 to 104 degrees C ), the thermal protector will have continuity. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6797 5. Disconnect the field coil connector (A). Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6798 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul Special Tools Required A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, commercially available 1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature plate (A) with a commercially available A/C clutch holder (B). 2. Remove the armature plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the armature plate, and recheck its clearance. NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm. 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley and A/C compressor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6799 4. Remove the bolt and holder (A), then disconnect the field coil connector (B). Remove the snap ring (C) with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (D). Be careful not to damage the field coil and A/C comoressor. 5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: - Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the A/C compressor. - Clean the rotor pulley and A/C compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum solvent. - Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove. - Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. - Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the rotor pulley. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6803 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6804 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6805 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Condenser Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the front bumper. 3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge hose (A) from the A/C condenser. 4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A) from the A/C condenser. 5. Remove the bolts and the A/C condenser upper mount brackets (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6809 6. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the receiver/dryer desiccant bracket. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) then remove the clip (D). 7. Remove the A/C condenser (A). Be careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser fins when removing the A/C condenser. 8. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fining, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Charge the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations 13. Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6814 25. A/C Condenser Fan Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6818 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6819 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6825 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6826 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6827 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6828 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6829 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6830 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6831 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6832 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6833 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6834 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6835 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6836 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6837 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6838 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6839 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6840 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6841 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6842 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6843 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6844 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6845 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6846 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6847 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6848 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6849 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6850 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852 232. Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection Heater Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting Heater Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuit. 2. Disconnect the heater control panel 24P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the heater control panel 24P connector terminal No. 23 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the heater control panel. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the heater control panel 24P connector terminal No. 21 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the heater control panel 24P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good heater control panel, and recheck. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the heater control panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G504. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6855 Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection HVAC Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting HVAC Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuit. 2. Disconnect the HVAC control unit 24P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the HVAC control unit 24P connector terminal No. 23 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the HVAC control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the HVAC control unit 24P connector terminal No. 21 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the HVAC control unit 24P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good HVAC control unit, and recheck. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the HVAC control unit and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G504. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Control Panel Removal and Installation Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel Removal and Installation Heater Control Panel Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), the self-tapping screws, and the heater control panel (B). 3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the various functions to make sure they work properly. 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Control Panel Removal and Installation > Page 6858 Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC Control Unit HVAC Control Unit Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), the self-tapping screws, and the HVAC control unit (B). 3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the various functions to make sure they work properly. 4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Evaporator Core Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the bolt. 3. Remove the nut, then disconnect the A/C lines (A) from the evaporator core. 4. Remove the stud bolt. 5. Remove the blower unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6862 6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor and the power transistor, then remove the connector clip (B). Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C), and the seal (D). 7. Carefully pull out the evaporator core (A) without bending the lines, then remove the plate (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6863 8. Remove the clips (A) and the evaporator temperature sensor (B). 9. Install the core in the reverse order of removal and note these items: - If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations 71. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6868 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6869 103. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6870 50. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6871 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 4. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the evaporator temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Locations Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating Heater Core: Service and Repair Heating Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 5. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hoses. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 7. Remove the dashboard. 8. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6877 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 10. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6878 12. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 13. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 14. Install the heater core in the reverse order of removal. 15. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6879 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heating/Air Conditioning Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Disconnect the A/C line from the evaporator core. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hose. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6880 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clips (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6881 12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). 13. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 14. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 15. Install the heater core and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6882 - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Heating Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 5. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hoses. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 7. Remove the dashboard. 8. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6888 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 10. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6889 12. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 13. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 14. Install the heater core in the reverse order of removal. 15. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6890 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Heating/Air Conditioning Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before repairing or servicing. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Disconnect the A/C line from the evaporator core. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A) back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Note the orientation of the hose. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6891 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation control motor. 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the mode control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clips (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6892 12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor and A/C wire harness. Remove the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire harness (D). 13. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and blower-heater unit (A). 14. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out the heater core (C). 15. Install the heater core and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 16. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating > Page 6893 - Reset the power window control unit. - Set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Compressor Relief Valve Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the relief valve cover (A), the relief valve (B), and the O-ring (C). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the A/C compressor oil from running out. 3. Clean the mating surfaces. 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it. 5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams 145. Blower Power Transistor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6903 Power Transistor HVAC: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power transistor. 3. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the power transistor. It should be about 1.5 KOhms. - If the resistance is within the specifications, go to step 4. - If the resistance is not within the specifications, replace the power transistor. 4. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 1 terminal (YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the terminal and insulate it from body ground. 5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor. 6. Make sure the YEL wire is completely isolated, then supply 12 V to the No. 1 cavity with a jumper wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the blower motor runs. - If the blower motor does not run, replace the power transistor. - If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is OK. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement 4-door NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from the air. 1. Remove the A/C condenser. 2. Remove the bolts from the A/C condenser, then remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B), and the O-rings (C). 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of removal. Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. 2-door NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from the air. 1. Remove the A/C condenser. 2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the A/C condenser. Remove the O-rings (B) and the desiccant (C). 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made of resin a can be easily stripped. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 6911 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 6912 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 6913 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity............................................................................................................................. ......................................... 400-450 g (14.1-15.9 oz) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6916 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type .................................................................................................................................. .................................................. HFC-134a (R-134a) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY A/C Condenser .................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 50 mL (1 2/3 fl oz) Evaporator ........................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 40 mL (1 1/3 fl oz) Line or hose ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 10 mL (1/3 fl oz) Compressor ......................................................................................................................................... ................................. 75-85 mL (2 1/2 - 2 5/6 fl oz) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6921 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications COMPRESSOR LUBRICANT TYPE SP-10 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6922 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: SANDEN SP-10 - P/N38897-P13-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl-oz) - P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6931 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6935 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6936 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6937 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6941 Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6942 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 177. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6947 63. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (EX, GX, Si; Canada: LX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6948 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the outside air temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6949 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the receiver/dryer desiccant bracket [from the A/C condenser] . [ ] : 2-door 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations 71. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6954 Heating/Air Conditioning - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6955 103. Under Right Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6956 50. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6957 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator temperature sensor. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 4. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the evaporator temperature sensor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermal Limiting Fuse: Service and Repair A/C Compressor Thermal Protector Replacement 1. Remove the bolt and the holder (A). Disconnect the field coil connector (B), then remove the thermal protector (C). 2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, and apply silicone sealant (B) to the bottom of the thermal protector. 3. Install the thermal protector in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair SRS Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment NOTE: Before doing any SRS repairs, use the HDS SRS menu method to check for DTCs; refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index for the less obvious deployed parts (seat belt tensioners, front impact sensors, side airbag sensors, etc.) After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Seat belt tensioners - Seat belt buckle tensioners - Front impact sensors After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed airbag(s) - Seat belt tensioners - Seat belt buckle tensioners - Front impact sensors After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed side airbag(s) - Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that deployed - Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that deployed - B-pillar lower trim - Seat frame complete After a collision where the side curtain airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed side curtain airbag(s) - Seat belt tensioner(s) for the side(s) that deployed - Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that deployed - Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that deployed - Rear safing sensor - Roof trim - A-pillar trim - B-pillar lower trim - C-pillar trim - Front grab handle - Rear grab handle - Any related trim clips - Sunvisor After a moderate to severe side or rear collision, inspect for any damage on the side curtain airbag or other related components. According to the degree of damage, replace components as needed. After a collision, where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace all trim clips on that side, even if they appear to be undamaged. Replace the clips on these parts: - A-pillar trim - B-pillar trim - C-pillar trim - Front grab handle - Rear grab handle - Sunvisor During the repair process, inspect these areas: - Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, do not repair, any damaged harnesses. - Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel. After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the HDS SRS Menu Method to read the DTC. If you cannot retrieve a code, go to SRS Symptom Troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6975 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6976 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored 10-001 August 13, 2010 Applies To: 2006-09 Civic 2-Door - ALL SRS Indicator Is On With DTC 32-10 (Supersedes 10-001, dated February 12, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY Under PARTS INFORMATION, new P/Ns for the floor wire harness were added. SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and DTC 32-10 (open in the front passengers side airbag inflator) is stored. This problem may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE Under the front passengers seat, the SRS portion of the floor wire harness has a poor crimp in it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the SRS DTC(s) and, only if needed, replace the floor wire harness. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6986 NOTE: To make sure you order the correct floor wire harness, enter the VIN in your parts catalog search. REQUIRED MATERIALS Hondalock 2: P/N 08713-0002 (One bottle repairs about 25 vehicles.) TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Diagnose the SHS DTC: Operation Number: 723507 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6987 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician Replace the Floor Wire Harness: Operation Number: 7371B9 Flat Rate Time: 4.6 hours Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Defect Code: 06801 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and check for DTCs. If any DTCs other than 32-10 are indicated, troubleshoot them as needed. 2. Clear any DTCs. 3. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SRS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to step 4. No - This service bulletin does not apply. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). On the bottom of the front passenger's seat, disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (yellow) from the passenger's side airbag wire harness. 5. Reconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector, then connect the HDS, and clear the SRS DTC(s). 6. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SHS indicator stay on? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply. Troubleshoot the SRS DTC(s) as needed. No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. NOTE: If the customer reported that the SRS indicator was previously on, use the HDS to check the DTC history. If you find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you do not find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6988 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you begin, make sure you know the SRS component locations, and that you read and understand the SRS precautions and procedures explained in the service manual. ^ This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the topics listed below, bookmark them in the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or view them online: - Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection - Front Seat Removal/Installation - Driver's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Kick Panel Removal/Installation - Steering Joint Cover Removal/Installation - Center Console Removal/Installation - Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation - Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Carpet Replacement 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the front seats. 3. Remove the driver's and the passenger's dashboard undercovers. 4. Remove the driver's and the passenger's kick panels. 5. Remove the center console. 6. Remove the rear side trim panels. 7. Remove the rear seat-back and the rear seat cushion. 8. Remove the carpet. 9. Remove the floor wire harness, then install a new floor wire harness: ^ Refer to pages 22-50 thru 22-55 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FLOOR WIRE, then select Floor Wire Harness and USB Harness (Left/Right branch) Connector and Harness Locations (2-Door) from the list for the model you're working on. NOTE: ^ Do not bend or twist the new wire harness excessively, and make sure it is not pinched or too loose in any areas. ^ Make sure all the connectors on the new wire harness are secured. ^ Replace any damaged interior trim clips. 10. Reinstall the carpet: ^ Do not wrinkle or twist the carpet. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6989 ^ Make sure the seat harness connectors and the parking brake cables are routed correctly. ^ Push the Velcro fasteners and the clips securely into place. ^ Push the accelerator hooks securely into place, and make sure the accelerator pedal is correctly attached to the floor. 11. Reinstall the rear seat cushion: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the seat belts, then slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion as you install the seat cushion. ^ Torque the seat cushion mounting bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the rear seat-back: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the center seat belt, then guide the center seat belt over the front of the seat-back as you install the seat-back. ^ Torque the pivot bracket bolt and the seat-back mounting bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the pivot bracket hooks are secured. 13. Reinstall the rear side trim panels. Make sure the clips, the hooks, and the tabs are secured. 14. Reinstall the center console. Torque the center console mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the steering joint cover. 16. Reinstall the driver's and the passengers kick panels. Make sure the clips are secured. 17. Reinstall the driver's and the passenger 5 dashboard undercovers. Make sure the clips are secured. 18. Reinstall the front seats: ^ Apply Hondalock 2 Thread lock to the seat bolts, then reinstall the bolts, and torque them to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the floor harness connectors are securely connected to the connectors under the seats. 19. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure. 20. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that all vehicle systems and controls are working properly. 21. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and clear any DTCs that you find. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored 10-001 August 13, 2010 Applies To: 2006-09 Civic 2-Door - ALL SRS Indicator Is On With DTC 32-10 (Supersedes 10-001, dated February 12, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY Under PARTS INFORMATION, new P/Ns for the floor wire harness were added. SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and DTC 32-10 (open in the front passengers side airbag inflator) is stored. This problem may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE Under the front passengers seat, the SRS portion of the floor wire harness has a poor crimp in it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the SRS DTC(s) and, only if needed, replace the floor wire harness. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6995 NOTE: To make sure you order the correct floor wire harness, enter the VIN in your parts catalog search. REQUIRED MATERIALS Hondalock 2: P/N 08713-0002 (One bottle repairs about 25 vehicles.) TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Diagnose the SHS DTC: Operation Number: 723507 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6996 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician Replace the Floor Wire Harness: Operation Number: 7371B9 Flat Rate Time: 4.6 hours Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Defect Code: 06801 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and check for DTCs. If any DTCs other than 32-10 are indicated, troubleshoot them as needed. 2. Clear any DTCs. 3. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SRS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to step 4. No - This service bulletin does not apply. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). On the bottom of the front passenger's seat, disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (yellow) from the passenger's side airbag wire harness. 5. Reconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector, then connect the HDS, and clear the SRS DTC(s). 6. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SHS indicator stay on? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply. Troubleshoot the SRS DTC(s) as needed. No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. NOTE: If the customer reported that the SRS indicator was previously on, use the HDS to check the DTC history. If you find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you do not find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6997 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you begin, make sure you know the SRS component locations, and that you read and understand the SRS precautions and procedures explained in the service manual. ^ This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the topics listed below, bookmark them in the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or view them online: - Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection - Front Seat Removal/Installation - Driver's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Kick Panel Removal/Installation - Steering Joint Cover Removal/Installation - Center Console Removal/Installation - Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation - Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Carpet Replacement 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the front seats. 3. Remove the driver's and the passenger's dashboard undercovers. 4. Remove the driver's and the passenger's kick panels. 5. Remove the center console. 6. Remove the rear side trim panels. 7. Remove the rear seat-back and the rear seat cushion. 8. Remove the carpet. 9. Remove the floor wire harness, then install a new floor wire harness: ^ Refer to pages 22-50 thru 22-55 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FLOOR WIRE, then select Floor Wire Harness and USB Harness (Left/Right branch) Connector and Harness Locations (2-Door) from the list for the model you're working on. NOTE: ^ Do not bend or twist the new wire harness excessively, and make sure it is not pinched or too loose in any areas. ^ Make sure all the connectors on the new wire harness are secured. ^ Replace any damaged interior trim clips. 10. Reinstall the carpet: ^ Do not wrinkle or twist the carpet. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 6998 ^ Make sure the seat harness connectors and the parking brake cables are routed correctly. ^ Push the Velcro fasteners and the clips securely into place. ^ Push the accelerator hooks securely into place, and make sure the accelerator pedal is correctly attached to the floor. 11. Reinstall the rear seat cushion: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the seat belts, then slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion as you install the seat cushion. ^ Torque the seat cushion mounting bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the rear seat-back: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the center seat belt, then guide the center seat belt over the front of the seat-back as you install the seat-back. ^ Torque the pivot bracket bolt and the seat-back mounting bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the pivot bracket hooks are secured. 13. Reinstall the rear side trim panels. Make sure the clips, the hooks, and the tabs are secured. 14. Reinstall the center console. Torque the center console mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the steering joint cover. 16. Reinstall the driver's and the passengers kick panels. Make sure the clips are secured. 17. Reinstall the driver's and the passenger 5 dashboard undercovers. Make sure the clips are secured. 18. Reinstall the front seats: ^ Apply Hondalock 2 Thread lock to the seat bolts, then reinstall the bolts, and torque them to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the floor harness connectors are securely connected to the connectors under the seats. 19. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure. 20. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that all vehicle systems and controls are working properly. 21. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and clear any DTCs that you find. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7007 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7013 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7014 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7015 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7016 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7017 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7018 92. Under Middle of Dash 112. In Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat Back Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7019 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 246. ODS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7020 250. SRS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7021 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the ODS Unit Check the ODS operation after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except ODS unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 5. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit". 5. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 10. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7022 sensors (if they were not replaced). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 11. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move it from these positions. 12. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 13. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 14. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 15. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 through 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (TO) is still more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 15. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) on a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 16. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 17. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 18. From the HDS Inspection Menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 19. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 20. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS unit is replaced, initialize the ODS by following the procedure. NOTE: A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a faulty ODS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select ODS INIT. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the ODS. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the ODS system fails to initialize after several attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and retry. If the ODS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the ODS unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 7025 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console. 4. Disconnect the connectors and remove the Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against it's bracket before torquing the Torx bolt. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and seat belt buckle tensioner connector. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 7026 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair ODS Unit Replacement ODS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector (A) and sensor connectors (B) from the ODS unit (C). 5. Remove the two nuts (D) and the ODS unit. Installation 1. Place the new ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two nuts (B), and connect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the ODS unit. 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the ODS unit. 7. After installing the ODS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 141. Airbag Cur-off Indicator, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7030 Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test 1. Remove the center panel: - With navigation - Without navigation 2. Remove the screws (A) and the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B) from center panel. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity, replace the bulb. 4. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams 240. Cable Reel Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7034 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Cable Reel Replacement Removal 1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the driver's airbag. 4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cable reel, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B). 5. Confirm that the front wheels point straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. 6. Remove the driver's under cover. 7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7035 8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector (C) from the cable reel (D). 9. Release the lock tab (A) under the cable reel connector with a 90 degrees hook shaped tool (B). Slide the tool below the cable reel connector just above the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the cable reel off the column. Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. 2. If not already done, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Set the turn signal canceling sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically. 4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect 20P connector (B) to the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D). 5. Install the steering column covers. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7036 6. If necessary, center the cable reel (New replacement cable reels come centered.). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about three turns) until the arrow mark (A) on the cable reel label points straight up. 7. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling sleeve (B) as shown, and install the steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. 8. Install a new steering wheel bolt (A), then reconnect the connectors. 9. Install the driver's airbag. 10. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 11. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. - After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the SRS indicator does not come on. - Make sure the horn works. - Make sure the cruise control buttons work. - Make sure the steering wheel audio controls work. - Make sure the voice control buttons work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7040 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7041 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7042 SRS - Component Location Index 119. Left Side of Floor (Right Similar) (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7043 122. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (2-door) 123. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7044 147. Left C-pillar (4-door) 178. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7045 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 57. Impact Sensor, Left Front 58. Impact Sensor, Right Front 78. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Left Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7046 79. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Right 157. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Left 158. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the front seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill inner trim: - 2-door - 4-door 5. Remove the lower B-pillar lower trim panel. 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the side impact sensor (first). 7. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the side impact sensor (first) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (first) with the Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (first). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor (first) confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 7049 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the rear seat and seat side holster. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor second). 5. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor second) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor second) with the Torx bolt (A) then connect floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor second). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor second), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 7050 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Replacement Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors, and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Remove the front inner fender: - 2-door - 4-door 4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A). Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the front impact sensor (C). Discard the bolt. Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index 120. Middle of Floor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7054 152. Rear Safing Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7055 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Safing Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors. 3. Remove the rear seat. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the rear safing sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the rear safing sensor (B). Installation 1. Install the new rear safing sensor (A) with a Torx bolt (B) then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (C) to the rear safing sensor. 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. Reinstall all removed parts. 4. After installing the rear sating sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7064 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7065 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7066 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7067 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7068 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7069 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7070 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7075 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7076 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7077 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7087 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7093 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7094 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7095 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7096 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7097 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7098 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7099 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7104 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7109 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7110 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7111 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7121 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7127 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7128 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7129 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7130 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7131 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7132 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7133 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7138 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7139 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7140 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Component Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7147 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7148 113. Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) 114. Right Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7149 111. Under Front Passenger's Seat (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7150 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams 94. Weight Sensor, Inner Side Front Passenger's (2-door) 133. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Inner Side) (4-door) 134. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Outer Side) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7151 135. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Inner Side) (4-door) 136. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Outer Side) (4-door) 137. Weight Sensor, Outer Side Front Passenger's (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7152 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Check the driver's seat position after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 5. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR." NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does network as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the ODS Unit Calibrating the ODS Unit When you replace the passenger's weight sensors or ODS unit, calibrate the ODS. While calibrating the ODS unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except, test driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move the seat from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 5. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select "SWS INIT," and follow the prompts until the initialization operation has been completed. 6. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 7. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the HDS connected and in the Misc Menu. 8. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 9. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 10. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale M) and the HDS (T) with the formula shown. Variance = (T)-(M)<±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured on the scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then go to step 11. 11. Remove the weight from the front passenger's seat. 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7155 - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. 14. Measure and note the prepared weight (M1) again with a scale. 15. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = (T1) - (M1 )< ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this procedure), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7156 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement 4-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly section. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx E18 socket, remove the Torx nuts (A) attaching the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the seat weight sensor, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors under the seat track. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7157 2. Apply multipurpose grease to the spring washer and bushing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7158 3. Insert a 3.5 mm center punch into the hole in the cushion frame to position the spring washers, when tightening the Torx nuts (A). Begin with the ■and tighten them in crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 4. Using the pin driver to position the spring washers, torque the Torx nuts in the sequence shown in two or more steps. 5. Make sure the gap between the spring washer (A) and the seat track (B) is more than 4 mm, as shown. 6. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 7. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 9. Calibrate the ODS unit. 10. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come for about 6 seconds and then go off, 2-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7159 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx T27 bit, remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts (A) that attach the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the ODS unit harness, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Make sure both of the hooks (A) on the seat track are properly secured to the front bracket (B). If the hooks are not properly secured, the seat weight sensors will not perform properly. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors with tamper-resistant Torx bolts (C) under the seat track. 2. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 3. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Calibrate the ODS unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come ON for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7160 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of SRS section. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness so it does not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7170 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Air Bag Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7176 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7177 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7178 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7179 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7180 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7181 92. Under Middle of Dash 112. In Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat Back Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7182 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 246. ODS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7183 250. SRS Unit Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7184 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the ODS Unit Check the ODS operation after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except ODS unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 3. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 5. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit". 5. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 10. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7185 sensors (if they were not replaced). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 11. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move it from these positions. 12. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 13. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 14. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 15. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 through 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (TO) is still more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 15. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight, then measure and note its actual weight M) on a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 16. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 17. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 18. From the HDS Inspection Menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 19. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = ((T1)-(TO)-(M1))<±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat TO: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 20. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the ODS Unit." 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS unit is replaced, initialize the ODS by following the procedure. NOTE: A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a faulty ODS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select ODS INIT. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the ODS. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the ODS system fails to initialize after several attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and retry. If the ODS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the ODS unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 7188 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console. 4. Disconnect the connectors and remove the Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against it's bracket before torquing the Torx bolt. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and seat belt buckle tensioner connector. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Initializing the ODS (Occupant Detection System) Unit > Page 7189 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair ODS Unit Replacement ODS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector (A) and sensor connectors (B) from the ODS unit (C). 5. Remove the two nuts (D) and the ODS unit. Installation 1. Place the new ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two nuts (B), and connect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the ODS unit. 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the ODS unit. 7. After installing the ODS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7196 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7197 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic New Seat Belt Reminder Logic for '06 Models NOTE: This article applies to '06 Accords, '06 Civics, 06 Pilots, and 06 S2000s. Some '06 model Hondas come with new seat belt reminder logic that turns on the seat belt reminder light in the instrument panel if the front passenger isn't buckled up. While driving, if the OPDS detects there's someone in the front passenger's seat and the seat belt isn't buckled, the seat belt reminder light comes on and intermittently blinks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7202 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection Inspection Out of Vehicle For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. Retractor 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely. 2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 degrees from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 degrees. Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7203 3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. In-vehicle 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For front passenger's seat belt and all rear seat belts, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic locking retractor). This function is for securing child seats. 1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt should retract with a ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is normal. 2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend normally. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt Replacement Front Seat Belt Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Front Seat Belt - 2 - door 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Slide the front seat forward fully. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 4. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. - Driver's seat belt: Remove the lower anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). - Passenger's seat belt: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (C) through the hole in the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (D) and into the hole in the front seat belt lower anchor (E). Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver. Remove the screwdriver, and then detach the front seat belt anchor plate (F) and anchor cover from the lower anchor. 5. Remove these items: - Door sill trim - Rear side trim panel Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7206 6. Remove the bolts (A) and the seat belt guide (B). 7. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). 8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B) and the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7207 10. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collars, and bushings on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly. - Passenger's seat belt: Before attaching the front seat belt lower anchor, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts. - Passenger's seat belt: Triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and on the lower anchor (C) must face the same side. - Passenger's seat belt: Insert the hook on the anchor plate into the lower anchor, and be sure that the lower anchor is locked securely. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Set the clock. - Check for any DTCs that may have been set during repairs, and clear them. SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Front Seat Belt - 4 - door 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7208 3. Slide the front seat forward fully, and remove the anchor cover (A). 4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A). 5. Remove the B-pillar lower trim. 6. Remove the B-pillar upper trim and slider. 7. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7209 8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B) and the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). 10. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A). 11. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to the specified torque. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Assemble the washer and bushing on the upper anchor bolt as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner is properly plugged in. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio or navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Set the clock. - Check for any DTCs that may have been set during repairs, and clear them. Front Seat Belt Buckle 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system, and then write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the front seat. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7210 4. Lift up the front seat, then detach the seat belt switch connector (A) and seat belt buckle tensioner connector (B), and on the driver's seat, detach the harness clip (C). 5. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), then remove the seat belt buckle (B) from the elastic band (C). 6. 2-door Passenger's seat: Release the hook strips (D) and pull back the seat cushion cover. 7. Pull the seat belt switch harness (E) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat track (driver's seat), or through the hole in the seat track (passenger's seat). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7211 8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to specification with a torque wrench. - Make sure the seat belt switch connector and seat belt buckle tensioner connector are plugged in properly. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio or the navigation system, and then enter the customer's audio presets. - Set the clock. - Check for any DTCs that may have been set during repairs, and clear them. Passenger's Seat Belt Lower Anchor 1. Remove the door sill trim. 2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A), then remove the lower anchor (B). 3. Install the lower anchor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the lower anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on the lower anchor bolt as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7212 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt Replacement Rear Seat Belt Replacement NOTE: Check the second row seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Rear Seat Belt 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A). 3. Remove these items: - 2-door: Rear seat-back, fold down, split fold down - Rear shelf - Rear shelf extension - Rear side trim panel - 4-door: Rear seat side bolsters, both sides - C-pillar trim, both sides - Rear shelf 4. Remove the retractor bolt (A), then remove the rear seat belt (B) and retractor (C). 5. Install the rear seat belt and retractor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Center Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckles 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7213 2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), then remove the right seat belt buckle (B), center seat belt buckle (C), and left seat belt buckle (D). 3. Fold both rear seat-backs forward. 4. Remove these items: - 2-door: Rear shelf - 4-door: Rear seat side bolsters, both sides - C-pillar trim - Rear shelf 5. Remove the retractor mounting ET screw (A) (4-door) and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the rear seat belt (C) and retractor (D). 6. Remove the rear center seat belt protector (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Replacement > Page 7214 7. Install the seat belt and buckles in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to the specified torque. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. - Make sure the rear center ELR (emergency locking retractor) is pointing straightforward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 108. Under Driver's Seat 110. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7218 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 125. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 126. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic New Seat Belt Reminder Logic for '06 Models NOTE: This article applies to '06 Accords, '06 Civics, 06 Pilots, and 06 S2000s. Some '06 model Hondas come with new seat belt reminder logic that turns on the seat belt reminder light in the instrument panel if the front passenger isn't buckled up. While driving, if the OPDS detects there's someone in the front passenger's seat and the seat belt isn't buckled, the seat belt reminder light comes on and intermittently blinks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams 153. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner, Driver's 154. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7226 155. Seat Belt Tensioner, Driver's 156. Seat Belt Tensioner, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7231 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7232 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7233 SRS - Component Location Index 119. Left Side of Floor (Right Similar) (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7234 122. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (2-door) 123. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7235 147. Left C-pillar (4-door) 178. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7236 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 57. Impact Sensor, Left Front 58. Impact Sensor, Right Front 78. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Left Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7237 79. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Right 157. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Left 158. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the front seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill inner trim: - 2-door - 4-door 5. Remove the lower B-pillar lower trim panel. 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the side impact sensor (first). 7. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the side impact sensor (first) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (first) with the Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (first). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor (first) confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 7240 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the rear seat and seat side holster. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor second). 5. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor second) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor second) with the Torx bolt (A) then connect floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor second). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the side impact sensor second), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement > Page 7241 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Replacement Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors, and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Remove the front inner fender: - 2-door - 4-door 4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A). Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the front impact sensor (C). Discard the bolt. Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Reinstall all removed parts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index 120. Middle of Floor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7245 152. Rear Safing Sensor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7246 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Safing Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors. 3. Remove the rear seat. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector from the rear safing sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (A), then remove the rear safing sensor (B). Installation 1. Install the new rear safing sensor (A) with a Torx bolt (B) then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (C) to the rear safing sensor. 2. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 3. Reinstall all removed parts. 4. After installing the rear sating sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 108. Under Driver's Seat 110. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7250 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 125. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 126. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7259 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7260 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7261 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7262 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7263 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7264 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7265 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7270 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7271 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7272 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: Recalls Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: Customer Interest Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7282 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7288 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7289 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7290 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7291 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7292 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7293 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7294 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7299 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7304 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7305 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7306 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored 06-007 February 17, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2 - Door From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 2006 Civic 4-Door From VIN 1HGFA1...6L000001 thru 1HGFA1...6L011020 - From VIN 2HGFA1...6H500001 thru 2HGFA1...6H500031 - From VIN JHMFA1...6S000001 thru JHMFA1...6S005042 - From VIN JHMFA3...6S000001 thru JHMFA3...6S000024 SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-16 Is Stored SYMPTOM During cold weather, when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position with a passenger in the front seat, the SRS indicator stays on, and DTC 86-16 (faulty OPDS seat-back sensor) is stored. NOTE: All Civic 2-door models affected by this service bulletin are also affected by service bulletin 06-002 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Do a VIN status inquiry to see if this recall has been completed. If not, go to service bulletin 06-002. PROBABLE CAUSE The ODS unit is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION 4-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SNR-C01, H/C 8237174 2-Door Models ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: The warranty claim information below is for 4-door models. For 2-door models, refer to service bulletin 06-002, Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored. Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SNA-A01 H/C 8070815 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 03205 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-007 > Feb > 06 > Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 86-16 Stored > Page 7316 Template ID: 06-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 77 lbs. (At 58 lbs, a full case of Honda Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 will serve this purpose.) ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 06-070 Date: 060916 Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair 06-070 September 16, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500009 thru 2HGFG1...6H547747 2006 Civic Si - From VIN 2HGFG2...6H700004 thru 2HGFG2...6H706283 Product Update: SRS Indicator Stays On, and DTC 86-25 Is Stored BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, a wire for the OPDS sensor may rub against the seat frame. This can damage the wire's insulation and cause the SRS to store DTC 86-25 (faulty OPDS seat support sensor). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. To verify vehicle eligibility, check for at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this product update has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this product update are still in dealer inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. CORRECTIVE ACTION If DTC 86-25 is not stored, use wool felt to insulate the OPDS sensor wire harness. If DTC 86-25 is stored, replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor, and use wool felt to insulate the sensor's wire harness. REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.005.008 or later PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7322 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 81127-SVA-A02 H/C 8194383 Defect Code: 5HN00 Symptom Code: Q2100 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and check for DTC 86-25. ^ If DTC 86-25 is stored, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 86-25 is not stored, go to step 3 2. Replace the front passenger's seat-back pad/OPDS sensor: ^ Refer to page 20-169 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT-BACK, and select Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (2-door) from the list. NOTE: ^ Leave the seat-back rear panel off. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is not already insulated with wool felt, go to step 4. ^ If the OPDS wire harness on the new OPDS sensor is already insulated, you do not need to do step 7. Cut a 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt, and do steps 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. 3. Remove the rear panel from the front passengers seat-back: NOTE: To avoid breaking the rear panel, do not pull the top of it more than needed to release the Chooks, and never pull it by its sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7323 ^ Carefully pull back the top of the rear panel, just enough to release the C-hooks from the seat. To free the C-hooks from the seat fabric, push the fabric up and forward. ^ To release the rear panel's side clips, hold the top of the panel, and lift it up while wiggling it side-to-side no more than an inch each side. ^ Lift the rear panel up and off its two lower clips. The lower clips remain in the seat frame, and the rear panel remains attached to the straps on the bottom of the seat. 4. Cut a 70 X 100 mm piece and a 50 X 100 mm piece of wool felt from the wool felt roll. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7324 5. Using an alcohol pad, clean the side airbag bracket, and let it dry. The bracket is near the right side of the seat frame, under the OPDS sensor wire harness. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7325 6. Center the 50 x 100 mm piece of wool felt over the side airbag bracket, then stick the felt to the bracket, and pinch its ends together. 7. Attach the 70 x 100 mm piece of wool felt to the OPDS wire harness: ^ Remove any existing wool felt from the end of the harness. ^ Stick the top of the new felt to the seat back foam, where the harness emerges from the foam. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7326 ^ Wrap the remaining length of the felt around the wire harness. Make sure the bottom of the felt is secured to the corrugated tubing on the harness. 8. Remove the two lower clips from the seat-back frame, and install two new lower clips on the seat- back rear panel. 9. Carefully reinstall the seat-back rear panel, making sure all the clips and hooks are engaged. 10. Center-punch a completion mark below the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7327 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-070 > Sep > 06 > Campaign - OPDS Sensor/Wiring Replacement/Repair > Page 7328 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - ODS Unit Replacement 06-002 January 27, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-Door From VIN 2HGFG1.. .6H500089 thru 2HGFG1...6H512863 Safety Recall: ODS Unit Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, and DTC 82-12 or 83-22 Is Stored (Supersedes 06-002, Safety Recalk ODS Does Not Suppress Airbag Deployment, dated January 6, 2006, to update the information indicated by asterisks) BACKGROUND On affected vehicles, the occupant detection system (ODS) unit may malfunction, allowing the passenger's front airbag to deploy in a frontal collision, even if an infant or small child is on the front passenger's seat. *The ODS malfunction may also cause the SRS indicator to stay on with DTC 82-12 (no signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor) or DTC 83-22 (no signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor).* CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7333 All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. The customer notification may also contain information on accelerator pedal inspection (S/B 05-061). An example of the customer notification for the ODS unit recall is at the end of this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. A few of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your new car inventory. These vehicles must be updated before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ODS unit. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7334 ODS Unit: P/N 81169-SVA-A03, H/C 8261737 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS HDS with software version 2.002.006 or later WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7521B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81169-SVA-A01 H/C 8070823 Defect Code: 58800 Symptom Code: Q0100 Template ID: 06-002A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before you continue. 4. Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel: ^ Push down at the top to release the top three hooks. ^ Tilt the panel out at the top to release the sides. ^ Lift the panel up and off the two lower clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the ODS unit. 6. Unplug the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the ODS unit, then gently remove the unit. 8. Install the replacement ODS unit. 9. Slip the seat-back cover over the ODS unit. 10. Reinstall the seat-back panel. 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 12. Initialize the ODS unit. Refer to the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and follow the SRS on-screen procedures: * NOTE: When calibrating the ODS, make sure you use a prepared weight of 55 to 75 lbs.* ^ Select SRS. ^ Select Calibration. ^ Select ODS Unit Initialization. ^ Follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > 06-002 > Jan > 06 > Recall - ODS Unit Replacement > Page 7335 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and the navigation unit (if equipped), then set the clock (if needed). 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the third character of the engine compartment VIN. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Sensor: > NHTSA05V572000 > Dec > 05 > Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect Seat Occupant Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V572000: Occupant Detection System Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V572000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: December 22, 2005 COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12756 SUMMARY: On certain 2-door passenger vehicles, the front passenger Occupant Detection System (ODS) contains a faulty electronic component. As a result, the ODS will not function properly and will not suppress front passenger air bag deployment when the weight of an infant or small child is detected in the front passenger seat. CONSEQUENCE: In certain circumstances, a deploying front passenger air bag can increase the risk of injury to an infant or small child. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ODS unit, free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q01. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Component Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7342 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7343 113. Left Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) 114. Right Side of Front Passenger's Seat (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7344 111. Under Front Passenger's Seat (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7345 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams 94. Weight Sensor, Inner Side Front Passenger's (2-door) 133. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Inner Side) (4-door) 134. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Front Outer Side) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7346 135. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Inner Side) (4-door) 136. Weight Sensor, Front Passenger's (Rear Outer Side) (4-door) 137. Weight Sensor, Outer Side Front Passenger's (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7347 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Check the driver's seat position after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 5. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR." NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does network as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the ODS Unit Calibrating the ODS Unit When you replace the passenger's weight sensors or ODS unit, calibrate the ODS. While calibrating the ODS unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except, test driving, in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move the seat from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 5. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu, select "SWS INIT," and follow the prompts until the initialization operation has been completed. 6. Prepare a 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) weight then measure and note its actual weight M) with a scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 7. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the HDS connected and in the Misc Menu. 8. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 9. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 10. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale M) and the HDS (T) with the formula shown. Variance = (T)-(M)<±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured on the scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the front passenger's weight sensors, 4-door, 2-door, and reinstall them, then go to step 11. 11. Remove the weight from the front passenger's seat. 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select Seat Weight Sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (TO) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7350 - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (TO) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. 14. Measure and note the prepared weight (M1) again with a scale. 15. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured on the scale and the HDS with the formula shown. Variance = (T1) - (M1 )< ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured on the scale - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this procedure), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7351 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement 4-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly section. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx E18 socket, remove the Torx nuts (A) attaching the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the seat weight sensor, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors under the seat track. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7352 2. Apply multipurpose grease to the spring washer and bushing. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7353 3. Insert a 3.5 mm center punch into the hole in the cushion frame to position the spring washers, when tightening the Torx nuts (A). Begin with the ■and tighten them in crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 4. Using the pin driver to position the spring washers, torque the Torx nuts in the sequence shown in two or more steps. 5. Make sure the gap between the spring washer (A) and the seat track (B) is more than 4 mm, as shown. 6. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 7. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 9. Calibrate the ODS unit. 10. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come for about 6 seconds and then go off, 2-door Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS section. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7354 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly. 3. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame. 4. Using a Torx T27 bit, remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts (A) that attach the seat track (B) to the weight sensors (C). 5. Disconnect the sensor connectors (D) from the ODS unit harness, then remove the front passenger's weight sensors. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Make sure both of the hooks (A) on the seat track are properly secured to the front bracket (B). If the hooks are not properly secured, the seat weight sensors will not perform properly. 1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors with tamper-resistant Torx bolts (C) under the seat track. 2. Reassemble the front passenger's seat cushion cover/pad. 3. Reinstall the front passenger's seat. 4. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 5. Calibrate the ODS unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come ON for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Calibrating the ODS Unit > Page 7355 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of SRS section. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness so it does not pinched or interfere with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations Antenna Control Module: Locations 104. Right C-pillar Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7361 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7362 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7363 Antenna Control Module: Service and Repair Antenna Module Replacement 1. Remove the right side C-pillar trim. 2. 2-door model: Remove the terminal cover (A). 2-door model 3. Disconnect the connectors (B) from the antenna module (C). 4. Remove the bolt and antenna module. 5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS Antenna Removal/Installation 1. Remove the navigation unit. 2. Remove the meter upper visor. 3. Remove the wire harness clip (A), screws and GPS antenna (B). 4. Install the antenna in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair Antenna Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair 08-088 October 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL 2004-10 Models Service Manual Update: Poor AM or FM Reception (Supersedes 08-088, dated November 20, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, 2010 models were added. ^ Under TOOL IN FORMATION, a new antenna adapter was added, and photos of all the adapters were added.* SYMPTOM The AM or FM radio reception is poor or filled with static. NOTE: If the vehicle is 2006-07 Ridgeline, refer to Service Bulletin 07-079, Poor AM Reception or Static While Driving Over Bumps, before using the following REPAIR PROCEDURE. CORRECTIVE ACTION Test the antenna circuit using the test antenna, and repair or replace any damaged AM/FM antenna leads or parts. *TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair > Page 7372 NOTE: Adapter TIN 07AAJ-000A700 has a small barrel adapter on one end with a standard barrel adapter on the other end. All other adapters have a standard barrel adapter on the end that is not shown.* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This bulletin is for information only. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Vehicles may have the following parts that you need to check. Refer to the applicable service manual for more information on these parts: - AM/FM antenna sublead - AM/FM antenna lead - AM/FM antenna amplifier (may be built into the AM/FM antenna) - AM/FM antenna ^ There are several different antenna styles and locations. Refer to the applicable service manual for specific part information and locations. ^ Aftermarket metallic window tinting can affect AM/ FM window antennas. If the vehicle is equipped with a window antenna, check all the other parts first. If the reception is still poor and the vehicle has aftermarket tinting, remove the tinting, then retest. If the reception is still poor, replace the AM/FM antenna. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair > Page 7373 ^ To prevent rattles, slapping, or other noises, make sure to attach the sublead and the lead to the vehicle harness or the vehicle using clips, wire ties, or electrical tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair > Page 7374 ^ Refer to the following illustrations for the names and general locations of the AM/FM antenna and its parts. These images are examples only. Refer to the applicable service manual for model-specific information. 1. Do the Seek Stop Test: ^ Refer to the Audio section of the applicable service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEEK, then select Seek Stop Test from the list. - If the number of AM and FM stations is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle no repair is needed at this time. - If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, go to step 2. 1. Do the Seek Stop Test: ^ Refer to the Audio section of the applicable service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEEK, then select Seek Stop Test from the list. - If the number of AM and FM stations is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle no repair is needed at this time. - If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair > Page 7375 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped). NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load mechanism. 3. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna lead from the AMI FM antenna amplifier lead. NOTE: Refer to the applicable service manual, because you may need to remove trim, the headliner, or other parts. 4. Connect the test antenna to the AM/FM antenna lead using the appropriate adapter. 5. Do the Seek Stop Test: ^ If the number of AM and FM stations the vehicle receives is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle, go to step 15. ^ If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna sublead from the AM/FM antenna lead. 7. Connect the test antenna to the AM/FM antenna sublead (the harness connected to the audio unit) using the appropriate adapter. 8. Do the Seek Stop Test: ^ If the number of AM and FM stations the vehicle receives is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle, go to step 13. ^ If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, go to step 9. 9. Disconnect the antenna cable connector from the audio unit. 10. Connect the test antenna to the audio unit using the appropriate adapter. 11. Repeat the Seek Stop Test: ^ If the number of AM and FM stations the vehicle receives increases and is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle, go to step 12. ^ If the number of AM and FM stations doesn't improve, or is not within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle, replace the audio unit, then retest. 12. Reconnect the antenna cable connector to the audio unit. 13. At the AM/FM antenna sublead, do the troubleshooting to check the voltage and the continuity: ^ Refer to Poor AM or FM Radio Reception or Interference Troubleshooting in the applicable service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FM, then select Symptom Troubleshooting: Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference from the list. - If the voltage and continuity tests are OK, go to step 14. - If the Poor AM or FM radio reception troubleshooting results are NG, replace the AM/FM antenna sub lead. 14. Reconnect the AM/FM antenna sublead to the AM/ FM antenna lead. 15. At the AM/FM antenna lead, do the troubleshooting to check the voltage and the continuity: ^ Refer to Poor AM or FM Radio Reception or Interference Troubleshooting in the applicable service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FM, then select Symptom Troubleshooting: Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference from the list. - If the voltage and continuity tests are OK, go to step 16. - If the Poor AM or FM radio reception troubleshooting results are NG, replace the AM/FM antenna lead. 16. Substitute a known-good AM/FM antenna amplifier. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Poor Reception Repair > Page 7376 NOTE: ^ Some vehicles do not have an AM/FM antenna amplifier, or have one that is built into the AM/FM antenna. In these cases, substitute a known- good AM/FM antenna. ^ Refer to the applicable service manual, because you may need to remove the headliner, the carpet, or other parts to access the AM/FM antenna amplifier. 17. Repeat the Seek Stop Test: ^ If the number of AM and FM stations the vehicle receives is within 10 percent of those on a known-good vehicle, replace the original AM/FM antenna amplifier, then recheck. ^ If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, and it has a separate antenna amplifier, repair or replace the AM/FM antenna. ^ If the vehicle receives at least 10 percent fewer stations than a known-good vehicle, and it doesn't have an antenna amplifier, or has one built into the AM/FM antenna, replace the original AM/FM antenna. 18. Repeat the Seek Stop Test to confirm the repair. 19. Reinstall all remaining parts. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7381 Immobilizer System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7382 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7383 Alarm Module: Diagrams 191. Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit 219. Security Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7384 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is opened (latch released). - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed (latch pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Alarm System Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Test NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. With HDS 1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If any of the transmitter buttons does network, replace the transmitter, then do the transmitter programming register. - If the locks don't work, go to step 2. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 3. Select the KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then enter the KEYLESS CHECK. 4. Press lock, unlock, trunk, or panic button and check the response on the screen of the HDS. NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle when receiving input from the transmitter. - If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK. - If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is not registered to the vehicle, if necessary, reprogram and register the transmitter. - If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5. 5. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter, then reprogram and register the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 6. 6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and press lock or unlock button and check the receive condition on the screen of the HDS. - If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK. - If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7. 7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter assembly and repeat steps 3 and 4. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7388 NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be programmed to the vehicle for this test. - If (DIFFERENT) KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the keyless transmitter and do the immobilizer system registration. - If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT RECEIVED is indicated, the immobilizer-keyless control unit is faulty, replace it and do the immobilizer system registration. NOTE: As the keyless transmitter is combined with the immobilizer transponder, so when the transponder is registered by the HDS, the keyless transmitter programming is completed automatically. Without HDS 1. Start the engine. - If the engine does not start, go to the immobilizer system troubleshooting. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Immobilizer/Symptom Troubleshooting - If the engine starts, go to step 2. 2. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If the locks don't work, go to step 3. 3. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 4. 4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 5. 5. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, substitute a known-good transmitter and recheck. If still not operating, replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7393 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7394 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 218. Remote Starting Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations 173. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7403 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the trunk key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the UNLOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 07-012 Date: 070216 Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics 07-012 February 16, 2007 Applies To: ALL - with accessory Music Link installed Music Link (For iPod) General Information and Symptom Troubleshooting BACKGROUND Honda Music Link is a Honda accessory designed to let the customer play music from an Apple(R) ipod(R) through the vehicle's audio system. The basic Music Link kit includes the Music Link interface unit, an audio unit bus cable, the Music Link harness, a CD-ROM, and the Quick Reference Guide. The CD-ROM includes a detailed User's Guide and some optional ITS (text-to-speech) software that lets the customer play music by playlist, artist, album, or genre. ^ The CD-ROM is for home computer use only. Do not insert it into a vehicle CD player. ^ Quick Reference Guides, User's Guides, and the latest TTS software versions can be downloaded from http://musiclink.honda.com. ^ For customer assistance and questions regarding TTS software loading, have the customer contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department. The GENERAL INFORMATION section of this service bulletin covers these subjects: ^ Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Resources for Installation Instructions ^ Music Link First-Use Information ^ iPod Reset Procedure Information The TROUBLESHOOTING section includes troubleshooting for these symptoms: ^ Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. ^ Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on the iPod display screen. ^ Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. ^ Check mark is shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). ^ Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. ^ Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. ^ Song/artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. PARTS INFORMATION Bus Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10030, H/C 8387060 Music Link Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10031, H/C 8387052 2-Port Bus Harness: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7409 P/N 08A31-0F1-000, H/C 7512999 Music Link Interface Unit: P/N 08-8-1H1-10101, H/C 8582603 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. FLAT RATE TIMES Failed Part: P/N 08~8-1H1-10031 H/C 8387052 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer General Information Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Online at http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html ^ Music Link Information Sheet (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Music Link Frequently Asked Questions (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Quick Reference Guide (supplied in Music Link kit) ^ User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide are available online: http://musiclink.honda.com/Down_Ref.html ^ General information: www.apple.com, then select support. ^ iPod firmware (unit software) version information: www.apple.com, then select Support. ^ To find out what (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7410 - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ iPod reset procedure: http://docs.info.apple.com/ article.html?artnum=61705 Resources for Installation Instructions Online, enter the model and year, enter the keyword MUSIC LINK, and select the appropriate installation instructions. Music Link First-Use Information After installing the Music Link kit, switch the audio unit to AUX (auxiliary) mode and verify the audio unit displays CDC EJECT or CD4 EJECT. Connect the iPod to the Music Link connector. Make sure the check mark is displayed on the iPod display screen and that you hear music. ^ The Music Link disc supplied in the kit contains the TTS software and the User's Guide. It is for home computer use only. ^ The customer needs to load the TTS software/User's Guide on his/her home computer in order for all of the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate. ^ Only the shuffle functions (Disc 5-6) will operate without the TTS software installed (see the Quick Reference Guide). ^ For the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate properly, TTS software must be run after any songs are changed (added or removed) on the iPod. ^ You can change the Disc position on most audio units by using the Disc - (preset number 5) and Disc + (preset number 6). Always refer to the User's Guide for proper operation. iPod Reset Procedure Information The iPod reset procedure applies to these Apple iPod models: ^ Fifth-generation or later iPod (also known as iPod with video) ^ iPod nano(R) ^ iPod with color display (iPod photo) ^ iPod mini(R) NOTE: To view this information online, log on to http//docs.info.apple.com/article.html?artnum=6 1705 To reset the customer's iPod: 1. Cycle the Hold switch on and off (slide it to Hold, then turn it off again). 2. Press and hold the Menu and Select buttons for 6-10 seconds until the Apple logo appears. NOTE: If you are having difficulty resetting the iPod, set it on a flat surface. As you press the Select button, make sure your finger does not touch any part of the click wheel. Also make sure that you press the Menu button toward the outside of the click wheel and not near the center. 3. If the above steps do not work, try connecting the iPod to a power adapter and plug the power adapter into an electrical outlet, or connect the iPod to your computer. Make sure the computer is on and isn't set to sleep mode. BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ^ Before troubleshooting, ask the customer these questions: - What is the main issue? - What model and generation iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. - What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? ^ Go to the Main Menu. ^ Select Settings. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7411 ^ Select About. - What iTunes version are you using? - What TTS software version is installed? ^ Make sure you have the customer's iPod for troubleshooting. ^ Turn on the iPod, and verify its battery is fully charged before testing. If the battery is low, the iPod will not "make up" when connected. ^ Some iPod protective cases cause the Music Link iPod connector to be installed crookedly or not fully engaged. Be sure to remove the protective case before troubleshooting. ^ Go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html to view technical FAQs and troubleshooting. TROUBLESHOOTING Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. NOTE: Remove the iPod protective case, if installed. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Replace the Music Link interface unit and the cable. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. NOTE: Remove iPod protective case, if installed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7412 1. At the iPod, make sure the iPod connector is fully engaged. Is the iPod connector fully engaged? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Properly connect the iPod connector and retest. Replace the cable if the connector is loose or damaged. 2. Disconnect the customer's iPod. 3. Connect headphones to the iPod, and listen to the sound quality. Is the sound quality normal in the headphones? Yes - Go to step 4. No - There is static from the customer's uploaded music. If the volume is weak or low, verify the iTunes sound level setting. 4. Connect a known-good iPod and retest. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes - The vehicle is functioning normally. Do an iPod reset on the customer's iPod and retest. If the problem does not go away, have the service advisor explain to the customer that the vehicle is operating properly and advise the customer to: ^ Install the latest iPod firmware. ^ Consult the general information at www.apple.com. This is not a comprehensive list, only a suggested starting point for the customer to troubleshoot the iPod. No - Go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the known-good iPod. 6. Do a vehicle battery cable reset: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 7. Reconnect the customer's iPod and retest. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes It is an intermittent audio unit/Music Link failure, and the system is OK at this time. No - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD4 mode" troubleshooting. Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on iPod display screen. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Substitute a known-good iPod and retest. If the sound is normal, do an iPod reset, and retest. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7413 NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. Disconnect and reconnect the iPod, then retest. Does Music Link operate normally? Yes - The iPod connector pins are loose. Replace the cable if the connector is damaged. No - There is a firmware error. Advise the customer to install the latest iPod firmware (unit software). Check mark is shown on iPod display screen, radio does not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. 1. Make sure the audio unit works in all other modes. Does the audio unit work in all other modes? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Do a vehicle battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. Remove the Music Link interface unit, and verify the software version on the unit label is SW 1.06 or higher. Is the software version SW 1.06 or higher? Yes - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. No - Replace the Music Link interface unit and iPod cable. iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). There is a software compatibility issue in the XM receiver unit. Refer to S/B 06-061, XM(R) Satellite Radio and Audio Accessories Play at the Same Time for repair information. Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. NOTE: TTS software must be loaded on the customer's home computer before Disc 1-4 search functions work. 1. Use a known-good iPod to verify that the search functions (Disc 1-4) work. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Does the known-good iPod do search functions (Disc 1-4)? Yes - Verify with the customer if the TTS software is loaded. If the customer needs assistance, refer the customer to American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department for assistance with TTS software loading problems (see page 6 of this bulletin). No - Do the battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. If the problem does not go away, do "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7414 Make sure the "Compilations" setting is switched off in the settings menu on the customer's iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - See Compilation. Is the "Compilations" setting switched off? Yes - There is a TTS software program error. Tell the customer to rerun the TTS software. No - Change the "Compilations" setting on the customer's iPod to off. Song/Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. Remind the customer that the TTS software must be run after any songs are changed on the iPod, and advise them to run the TTS software and retest the iPod search functions. Explain to the customer that once the TTS software has run: ^ If the iPod functions properly, there was an intermittent TTS software program error. ^ If the iPod does not function properly, direct the customer to contact Customer Service for assistance with TTS software loading problems. CUSTOMER INFORMATION NEEDED BEFORE CALLING HONDA'S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT Print this page, and give it to the customer if they are experiencing a ITS software-related issue. Direct them to answer the questions, then contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department at (800) 999-1009. Customer Information Before calling customer service, go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech_Faq.html and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Also, go to www.apple.com, select support, and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Please have the following information ready when contacting customer service: ^ What is the main issue? ^ What type of iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. ^ What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? To find out what firmware (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ What version iTunes are you using on your home computer? ^ When you connect your iPod to the vehicle's Music Link connector, is the check mark displayed on your iPod display screen? ^ What type of computer do you have (Mac or PC)? ^ What operating system are you using? ^ Have you loaded the ITS software on your home computer? ^ Do you run the ITS software every time you connect your iPod to your home computer? Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7415 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams 163. Auxiliary Jack Assembly ('06 USA 4-door: EX; '06 2-door: DX-G, LX, EX, Si; '07 4-door: EX, Si, DX-G, USA LX) 164. Auxiliary Jack Assembly (DX, 4-door DX-G, LX, Canada EX; GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7416 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Auxiliary Jack Assembly Replacement 1. Carefully pull out the auxiliary jack assembly (A), then disconnect the 5P connector (B). 2. Install the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7421 DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair 06-001 February 26, 2010 Applies To: 1998 and Later Models - ALL Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange and Out-of-Warranty Repair (Supersedes 06-601, dated March 4, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR, the address for Pioneer Electronics Service was changed.* COVERAGE This bulletin applies to all Honda audio units, CD players/changers, cassette tape players, navigation units, and rear entertainment system (RES) units, both in warranty and out of warranty. COMPONENT REPLACEMENT POLICY Use only remanufactured components for warranty repairs on customer vehicles. Follow the warranty information and procedures given in this service bulletin. ^ Remanufactured audio, navigation, and RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. ^ Use new components to repair new, unsold vehicles. ^ A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. ^ You must receive authorization from your District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM) before ordering a new component. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: From the Flat Rate Manual Flat Rate Time: From the Flat Rate Manual Failed Part: Use the RM part number from the repair order without the RM (example: 08A06-341-110) Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Symptom Code: From Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual Part used for repair: Use the RM part number from the repair order (example: 08A06-341-110RM) IN-WARRANTY DIAGNOSIS Service Advisor: Interview the customer to get as much information as possible. Information like where and when the problem occurs is vital to your diagnosis. This information also helps you to determine if the audio, navigation, or RES system is operating normally, or if a problem exists. Write the complaint on the repair order. NOTE: For CD/DVD related problems, you must verify if the customer used discs with adhesive labels. Service Technician: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7422 1. Print out the appropriate system worksheet from an Interactive Network (iN) workstation. ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on (ISIS) Service Publications. ^ Click on SEARCH BY PUBLICATION. ^ Click on Job Aids. ^ Click on Audio System Worksheet, Navigation System Worksheet, or Rear Entertainment System Worksheet. 2. Duplicate and confirm the problem using the customer information written on the repair order or have the customer demonstrate the problem, then write down the results on the worksheet. Using the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX or the DTC INDEX (if applicable) in the applicable service manual, find the symptom that matches the customers complaint, and follow the diagnostic procedure: ^ Refer to the appropriate section in the service manual, or ^ From the iN main menu: - Click on SERVICE. - Click on ISIS (Service Publications). - Click on SEARCH BY VEHICLE. - Enter the model and the model year. - Enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES, and the DTC (if applicable) - Select the appropriate Service Bulletin, ServiceNews article, or Symptom Troubleshooting from the list. 3. Repair the vehicle according to your diagnosis, then confirm the repair by trying to duplicate the customer's original complaint, or check to see if the DTC returns: ^ If the problem is gone, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the problem is still there, go to step 4. 4. Replace the audio/navigation/RES unit with a remanufactured unit: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7423 ^ For warranty repairs, go to the IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE procedure. ^ For vehicle service contract (VSC) and certified used car (CUC) repairs, call. ^ For goodwill repairs, contact your dealership's District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM). IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE Service Technician: NOTE: ^ Use the iN to order a remanufactured audio, navigation, or RES unit. Do not call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. ^ A Tech Line reference number is not required to submit the order. Check Yes, and enter the Reference Number only when there is a preexisting Tech Line contact. 1. With your completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet, go to an iN workstation. 2. From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE, then click on AUDIO, then select Warranty Audio Order. 3. Select the model, year, and keyword (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES) for the vehicle you are working on, then click on Search. 4. Review all displayed publications for additional repair information. If you cannot repair the problem, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7424 5. Click Warranty Audio Order to view the Warranty Audio Order form. 6. Enter the VIN and the mileage, then click the Submit button to view the Warranty Audio Order form. Use the completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet to help you answer the questions on the Warranty Audio Order form. Questions with a red asterisk (*) are required fields that you must answer to submit the form. Make sure the information is complete (17-digit VIN, etc.). This information is critical to the remanufacturing process. Screen # 2 of the form contains the problem description, condition information, and shared functions. Fill this section out with as much information as possible. Select one part number from the list provided, then click Submit. It is your responsibility to ensure the correct part number is selected based on color and application information. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7425 NOTE: Once you submit your order, you can track it using the Warranty Audio VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. For details, go to WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS in this service bulletin. 7. You will receive a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit packed in a reusable shipping box. Save this box and the packing materials. You must return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this box. Otherwise your dealership risks being billed a core loss charge, ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 8. Remove the failed audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. 9. Install the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate installation procedure from the list. 10. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Also be sure to transfer all of the mounting brackets to the replacement unit. Failure to do this may result in dash squeaks and rattles. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs it for diagnosis and testing. ^ Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core. Customer media (CDs, CD magazines, DVDs, DVD-As, cassette tapes, etc.) will be properly removed by the supplier at the point of tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealer. Make sure the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not disassembled! If the core is disassembled, your dealership will be debited a core loss charge ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 11. Put the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in the same box that the remanufactured unit came in. NOTE: If you do not return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this same box, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. Parts Manager: 12. The Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form you submitted is kept on the iN for 60 days. Print out a copy to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on Transactions. ^ Click on Advanced Search, and enter a date range. ^ Click on Filtered by Service. ^ Under Transaction Description, click on Warranty Audio Order, then go back to the top of the page and click on Search. ^ Scroll down to the appropriate VIN, then select it to view the form. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 13. Print out a copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7426 ^ Click on Returns and Surplus. ^ Click on Audio Core Return. ^ Select the appropriate VIN to view the Update Core Return information screen. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 14. Place the printed copies of the Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form and the Core Return Update Acknowledgement into the core return box with the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core. NOTE: If you return a failed audio/navigation/RES core without the proper forms, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. 15. Ship the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core to the appropriate location by using the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit. NOTE: If the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not received at the specified address within 30 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, your warranty claim will be debited, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. If you know that you cannot return the core within 30 days, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group, and ask for an extension. ^ If you call for an extension and the core is not received within 60 days from the order date, you will be debited the full amount of the warranty claim. ^ If you do not call for an extension, and the core is received between 31 and 60 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, a $250 late core charge will be assessed. WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Here is a list of answers to the most frequently asked questions about the warranty audio order program: Question: When do I use the warranty audio order program? Answer: Use the program when you are replacing an audio/navigation/RES unit under warranty (including goodwill) that has an internal failure. NOTE: The customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is removed by the supplier at tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealership. Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. Remanufactured audio/navigation/RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. New components should be used to repair new, unsold vehicles. A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. Your DPSM must authorize ordering a new component. Question: How do I order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: For a warranty replacement, use the ordering information IN WARRANTY EXCHANGE. For goodwill repair, contact your DPSM. For a non-warranty repair, see OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR. Question: Who do I call for questions on the Warranty Audio Order Program? Answer: For administrative questions, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7427 Question: Who do I call if I need help diagnosing the problem or if I have technical questions about the unit? Answer: If you cannot find the answers in the appropriate service manual, service bulletins, or ServiceNews articles on iN, create a Tech Line access code, then call Tech Line: 1. From the iN main menu, select SERVICE. 2. Select Tech Line. A dropdown menu appears, then select Tech Line. The ISIS main screen appears. 3. Select SEARCH BY VEHICLE, and enter any vehicle with any keyword like NAVI, AUDIO, or RES. 4. At the top of the screen you will see this statement: If you cannot resolve the problem with the information below, then click Tech Line. Select Tech Line. 5. The Tech Line access code screen appears. Fill in all the required fields, then select SUBMIT. 6. Have the access number ready when you call Tech Line. Question: Do I need a Tech Line reference number to order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: No. Question: What year and model audio/navigation/RES unit can I order through the warranty audio order program? Answer: Most current models are available through the vehicle's standard warranty period. If your application is not available, you will receive a message instructing you to call the Re manufactured Parts Dealer Service Group at 888-997-7278. Question: How can I track my order once I submit it? Answer: To track your order, go the Warranty Audio Order VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. 1. From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. 2. Click on Parts Ordering. 3. Click on Audio VIN Inquiry. 4. Enter a date in the All Orders Accepted Since box, then click on Submit. The AUDIO VIN INQUIRY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT screen appears, listing orders by VIN, ORD REF (Order Reference), STAT (Status), SHIP DATE, SHIPPER, and PART NUMBER. The status of your order is displayed by one of these codes: Codes generated by RPO Tech Line: ^ PEND - Your order is waiting to be processed by RPO Tech Line. ^ HOLD - Your order is waiting for additional dealer diagnosis. ^ ERR - Your order caused an error; call. ^ DENY - RPO Tech Line denied your order; call. ^ APPR - RPO Tech Line approved your order and forwarded it to AHM Parts. Codes generated by AHM Parts Division: ^ BO/TOS - Your order is on back order or is temporarily out of stock. ^ CAN/BOC - Your order has been cancelled contact your assigned parts center. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7428 ^ ALO/BOA - Your order has been allocated, but not released for shipment. ^ REL/BOR - Your order has been picked, packed, and shipped. ^ INV - Your order has been invoiced to your dealer parts account. CORE RETURN INFORMATION Service Technician: 1. If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, or cassette tape) is stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and attach it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the media, and mail it back to your dealership. 2. Use the pre paid shipping label. Each audio supplier provides a prepaid shipping label with the remanufactured audio unit. Return the core using this label to ensure it is received at the appropriate location for credit. Use the pre paid shipping labels to return audio cores to authorized locations only; do not use them for any other purpose. If you need additional prepaid shipping labels, contact Remanufactured Parts Operations. ^ Complete the shipping label with your dealership information. ^ Pack one audio unit per box, and use a separate shipping label for each one. ^ On the line requesting Your Internal Reference Information, enter YOUR DEALER NUMBER and the WARRANTY CLAIM NUMBER. 3. On the repair order, write down the warranty claim number, the original part number, the serial numbers from both the faulty and remanufactured units, and the return tracking number. 4. Ship the faulty unit in the same box the remanufactured unit came in. Make sure you include this required paperwork: ^ A copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement from the iN. ^ A copy of the warranty audio order. NOTE: When the Remanufacturing Center gets the faulty unit, your warranty audio order will be updated to indicate that the core was received. If the core is received 31-60 days from the order date, and you have been debited a core loss charge, your dealership will be credited back, less a $250 late fee. OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, AND RES UNITS PRODUCED IN 1998 OR LATER) NOTE: If you are making a repair or exchange because of a service bulletin or service campaign, do not use OUT-OF-WARRANTY procedures. Refer to IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE for more information. Service Advisor: 1. Give your customer an estimate for repairing the unit (see step 6), plus the labor cost to replace it. For an Alpine unit, your customer has the option of contacting Alpine Electronics directly. Alpine's customer service number is 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304. Service Technician: 2. Remove the failed unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7429 ^ Online, enter keyword AUDIO, NAVI, or RES, and select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, navigation DVD, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there. The manufacturer will remove and return it. 3. Obtain an Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form, and complete the Technician section.To obtain the form, do this: ^ On ISIS, click on Technical Library, then click on Job Aids. ^ Select the applicable form from the list, and print it out: - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Audio System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Navigation System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Rear Entertainment System Component Repair Form Parts Manager: 4. Complete the parts manager's section of the Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Make sure you include your name, department, and dealership phone number on the form. 5. Identify the manufacturer. Units sent to the wrong manufacturer may not be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Look for the number code on the face of the unit. ^ If the unit has no number code on its face, check the label on the unit housing, and compare the first two or three letters of the radio reference number (or the audio unit model number) to this list: Alpine - CM, CD, MR, or MF Clarion - PH Fujitsu Ten - CE or SD Panasonic - CQ or CR Pioneer KEH or DEH 6. Contact the manufacturer (see step 9) to request an estimate for the cost of the repair plus shipping. 7. Complete the required paperwork: ^ Paying by check - Make a dealership check out to the manufacturer for the cost of repair and return shipping. Make sure to include the check number on the form. NOTE: For all Panasonic products, make your check out to Komtec Electronics. ^ Paying by credit card (Visa or Mastercard only) - When you use a credit card, fill in all of these fields on the component repair form: - Credit card number - Credit card expiration date Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7430 - The name as it appears on the credit card - Signature (authorized card holder) - Phone number - Authorized charge amount NOTE: If you send in a faulty unit without a check or complete credit card information, the manufacturer may send it back to you unrepaired, or they may repair it and send it back to you C.O.D. ^ Print two copies of the completed Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Keep one copy with the repair order, and include the other copy with the faulty unit when you send it to the manufacturer. 8. Carefully pack the faulty unit and the paperwork in a suitable box, and label the box clearly. You are responsible for lost or damaged units; keep all shipping documents and insurance receipts. 9. Ship the faulty unit to the appropriate manufacturer via UPS. Alpine Electronics of America c/o Standard Radio Engineering Corp. 2012 Abalone Ave., Unit D Torrance, CA 90501 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304 Bose Corporation Automotive Systems Division-Service Framingham, MA 01701-9168 800-231-2673 S3 Clarion Factory Service Center 241 Beaver Rd. Walton, KY 41094 800-347-8667 (You must get authorization from Clarion before shipping units) Fujitsu Ten 19600 5. Vermont Ave. Torrance, CA 90502 800-237-5413 FTH Group Inc. (Kenwood Accessory Parts) 16685 E. Johnson Dr. City of Industry, CA 91745 626-333-2435 (You must get an RMA authorization number from www.fthgroupinc.com; from the home page, select Consumer Products) Komtec Electronics (Panasonic) 6590 Darin Way Cypress, CA 90630 714-903-3300 (Make sure your check is made out to Komtec) * Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc. 1925 E. Dominguez St. Long Beach, CA 90801 800-553-3756* Visteon c/o Model Electronics 615 E. Crescent Ave. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7431 Ramsey, NJ 07446 800-433-9657 (Visteon offers an open line of credit. Call their 800 number to establish an account.) NOTE: ^ The manufacturer will repair the unit and ship it back within 5-7 working days, via UPS ground prepaid or 2nd Day Air (whichever you requested). Do not forget to include the shipping cost in your dealership payment. Units damaged by misuse or mishandling cannot be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Each manufacturer's guarantee for the repair differs. To confirm the repair guarantee, contact the manufacturer using the phone number listed above. 10. To check on the status of your repair order, call the manufacturer. If your customer has any further questions or concerns, have them call Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009. NOTE: A damaged unit may need extra repair. If so, the manufacturer will call you with an estimate of any added charges. ^ If you accept the estimate, mail a dealership check for the additional amount to the manufacturer, authorize the increased amount to be applied to the credit card payment, or have the manufacturer ship the unit back to you, and you pay the difference upon arrival (C.O.D.). ^ If you reject the estimate, the faulty unit will be returned to you along with a refund. However, you will be charged $30.00 (C.O.D.) for diagnosis, shipping, and handling. The unit will be shipped back to you, via UPS Ground. COMPLETING THE OUT-OF-WARRANTY/NEW REPLACEMENT AUDIO SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR FORM Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7432 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7433 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7434 NOTE: It is very important that you fill out this form fully and accurately. An accurate explanation of the problem and conditions helps the manufacturer to duplicate the problem, speeding the repair, and reducing the number of No Trouble Found" (NTF) units. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS Antenna Removal/Installation 1. Remove the navigation unit. 2. Remove the meter upper visor. 3. Remove the wire harness clip (A), screws and GPS antenna (B). 4. Install the antenna in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations 99. Behind Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7446 Navigation Module: Diagrams 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7447 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7448 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component location, 4-door, 2-door. Also review the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before doing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. - Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. - Do network in a dusty or dirty place. - Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work. - Do not touch the circuit board(s) with your bare hands. - Do not work with dirty hands. - Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable. - Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.) - Before replacing the navigation unit, make sure to remove the customer's navigation DVD, and their Audio CD, or PC Card. Remanufactured navigation units do not come with a navigation DVD. Re-install the customer's navigation DVD, audio CD, and audio PC Card into the new Remanufactured unit. If the navigation display won't open, manually remove the navigation DVD, Audio CD, and PC Card. 1. Make sure you have the 4-digit anti-theft code for the navigation system, then write down the radio station presets and XM radio channel presets. 2. Remove the meter inner visor. 3. Remove the center pocket hole lid and bolts, then pull out the center panel (A). 4. Disconnect the connectors (B), then remove the center panel. 5. Remove the screws, brackets (A), and the navigation unit (B) from the center panel (C). 6. Install the navigation unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure all connectors and the antenna lead are secure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the navigation unit, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams Amplifier: Diagrams 213. Bass Unit (DX, DX-G, LX; 4-door: EX, '07 Si) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7453 251. Stereo Amplifier (2-door: EX, Si; '07 4-door Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7454 Amplifier: Service and Repair Stereo Amplifier Removal/Installation 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the stereo amplifier connectors (A) from the stereo amplifier (B). 3. Loosen the mounting bolt, and remove the mounting bolt, then remove the stereo amplifier. 4. Install the stereo amplifier in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7463 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7464 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7465 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection Radio Remote Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly. 2. Remove the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Measure the resistance between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the radio remote switch. 5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the diode test is bad, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7466 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Radio Remote Switch Replacement 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the radio remote switch. 3. Install the radio remote switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON Speaker: Customer Interest Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON 06-006 July 15, 2006 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-door EX - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H567233* Rear Shelf Rattles When Playing the Audio System (Supersedes 06-006, dated April 5, 2006) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The rear shelf rattles when playing the audio system at normal bass levels. PROBABLE CAUSE Subwoofer vibrations cause the subwoofer ring to rattle against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 011012 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84504-SVA-A11 H/C 8252041 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 04205 Template ID: 06-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf: ^ Refer to page 20-112 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SHELF, and select Interior Trim Removal/Installation-Rear Shelf (2-door) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7475 2. Remove the six screws that secure the subwoofer ring to the rear shelf. 3. Cut two 25 mm x 50 mm pieces of EPT sealer 5T. Apply them to each side of the base of the high-mount brake light as shown. 4. *Cut one 205 mm x 10 mm piece of wool felt. Apply it to the brake light so it fills the gap between the light and the shelf.* 5. Cut two 10 mm x 210 mm pieces of wool felt. Apply them to the side of the ring that contacts the shelf, as shown. 6. Reinstall the ring (do not overtighten the screws). 7. Install the rear shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7476 ^ Replace any damaged or stress-whitened clips. ^ When installing, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. ^ Install two clips in the body as shown, then install the remaining clips in the rear shelf. ^ Slide the ends of the rear shelf onto the two clips in the body. Once these clips are attached, continue sliding the rear shelf back until the remaining clips are in place. Press down on the rear shelf to set the remaining clips. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON 06-006 July 15, 2006 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-door EX - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H567233* Rear Shelf Rattles When Playing the Audio System (Supersedes 06-006, dated April 5, 2006) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The rear shelf rattles when playing the audio system at normal bass levels. PROBABLE CAUSE Subwoofer vibrations cause the subwoofer ring to rattle against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 011012 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84504-SVA-A11 H/C 8252041 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 04205 Template ID: 06-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf: ^ Refer to page 20-112 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SHELF, and select Interior Trim Removal/Installation-Rear Shelf (2-door) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7482 2. Remove the six screws that secure the subwoofer ring to the rear shelf. 3. Cut two 25 mm x 50 mm pieces of EPT sealer 5T. Apply them to each side of the base of the high-mount brake light as shown. 4. *Cut one 205 mm x 10 mm piece of wool felt. Apply it to the brake light so it fills the gap between the light and the shelf.* 5. Cut two 10 mm x 210 mm pieces of wool felt. Apply them to the side of the ring that contacts the shelf, as shown. 6. Reinstall the ring (do not overtighten the screws). 7. Install the rear shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7483 ^ Replace any damaged or stress-whitened clips. ^ When installing, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. ^ Install two clips in the body as shown, then install the remaining clips in the rear shelf. ^ Slide the ends of the rear shelf onto the two clips in the body. Once these clips are attached, continue sliding the rear shelf back until the remaining clips are in place. Press down on the rear shelf to set the remaining clips. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7484 Speaker: Diagrams 82. Speaker, Driver's Door 83. Speaker, Front Passenger's Door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7485 84. Speaker, Left Rear (DX, DX_G, LX, EX, Si) 85. Speaker, Right Rear (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7486 90. Tweeter, Left (EX; 2-door: Si; USA LX; '07 USA 4-door: Si) 91. Tweeter, Right (EX; 2-door: Si; USA LX; '07 USA 4-door: Si) 100. Woofer (2-door: EX, Si; '07 USA 4-door: Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7487 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Replacement Front Door Speaker 1. Remove the front door panel. 2. Remove the screw. Then lift the speaker (A) straight up to release the lower clips (B). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), and remove the speaker. 4. Install the speaker in the reverse order of removal. Tweeter 1. Carefully pry the tweeter grille (A) out of the dashboard. Be careful not to damage the tweeter grille and the dashboard. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the tweeter. 3. Remove the tweeter speaker from the speaker grille. 4. Install the speaker in the reverse order of removal. Rear Speaker (4-door model) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7488 1. Remove the rear speaker grille (A). 2. Remove the screw. Then lift the speaker (A) straight up to release the clips (B). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), and remove the speaker. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear Speaker (2-door model) 1. Remove the rear tray. 2. Remove the screw. Then lift the speaker (A) straight up to release the clips (B). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), and remove the speaker. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Subwoofer 1. Remove the rear tray. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7489 2. Remove the four mounting bolts from the subwoofer (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the subwoofer. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7494 Immobilizer System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7495 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7496 Alarm Module: Diagrams 191. Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit 219. Security Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7497 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is opened (latch released). - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed (latch pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations Antenna Control Module: Locations 104. Right C-pillar Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7501 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7502 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7503 Antenna Control Module: Service and Repair Antenna Module Replacement 1. Remove the right side C-pillar trim. 2. 2-door model: Remove the terminal cover (A). 2-door model 3. Disconnect the connectors (B) from the antenna module (C). 4. Remove the bolt and antenna module. 5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations 99. Behind Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7507 Navigation Module: Diagrams 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7508 245. Navigation Unit (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7509 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component location, 4-door, 2-door. Also review the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before doing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. - Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. - Do network in a dusty or dirty place. - Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work. - Do not touch the circuit board(s) with your bare hands. - Do not work with dirty hands. - Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable. - Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.) - Before replacing the navigation unit, make sure to remove the customer's navigation DVD, and their Audio CD, or PC Card. Remanufactured navigation units do not come with a navigation DVD. Re-install the customer's navigation DVD, audio CD, and audio PC Card into the new Remanufactured unit. If the navigation display won't open, manually remove the navigation DVD, Audio CD, and PC Card. 1. Make sure you have the 4-digit anti-theft code for the navigation system, then write down the radio station presets and XM radio channel presets. 2. Remove the meter inner visor. 3. Remove the center pocket hole lid and bolts, then pull out the center panel (A). 4. Disconnect the connectors (B), then remove the center panel. 5. Remove the screws, brackets (A), and the navigation unit (B) from the center panel (C). 6. Install the navigation unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure all connectors and the antenna lead are secure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the navigation unit, then enter the customer's audio presets. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7515 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7516 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations 173. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7520 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the trunk key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the UNLOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7524 Audio Systems - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7525 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7526 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection Radio Remote Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly. 2. Remove the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Measure the resistance between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the radio remote switch. 5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the diode test is bad, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7527 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Radio Remote Switch Replacement 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the radio remote switch. 3. Install the radio remote switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Flat Towing Information Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Information Flat-Towing Behind a Motorhome Need to flat-tow a 05 or 06 model year vehicle behind a motorhome? Here's some important info to keep in mind when you do. Not all Honda models are approved for flat towing. Models are approved only afier going through extensive testing by our R & D folks. Here are the models currently approved. Additional models might be added. '05 Models ^ Accord (except Accord Hybrid) ^ Civic (except Civic Hybrid) ^ CR-V ^ Element ^ Pilot '06 Models ^ CR-V For info on flat-towing '05 and earlier model year vehicles, refer to the appropriate O/M. If you can't find any instructions in the O/M, then call Honda Automobile Customer Service. They'll provide a letter with towing instructions only for '05 and earlier model year vehicles. For info on flat-towing '06 model year vehicles, refer to the appropriate O/M. Towing instructions for unapproved vehicles aren't available from Honda Automobile Customer Service. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7533 Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7534 To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with front towing hooks (A), front tie down hook slots (B), rear towing hook (C), and rear tie down hook slots (D). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the truck. Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the vehicle. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission to neutral. Automatic Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to the D position, then to the N position. - Turn off the engine. It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE: - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Locations Voice Activation System: Locations 61. Steering Wheel (2-door: Navigation) 62. Steering Wheel (4-door: Navigation) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Locations > Page 7538 172. Voice Control Switch (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation Front Bumper: Description and Operation Door and Bumper Reinforcement Beams Door reinforcement beams used on Civic vehicles are made from a metal equivalent to high strength steel. If high strength steel is heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If high strength steel is damaged, as in a vehicle accident, where the door reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack attempting to straighten them. Front and rear bumper reinforcement beams are made with aluminum alloy. For this reason, door and bumper reinforcement beams should NEVER be repaired; they should be replaced if they are damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Air Spoiler Front Bumper: Service and Repair Front Air Spoiler Front Air Spoiler Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the front bumper. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the bolts (A) and clips (B, C) securing the air spoiler (D). NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (E) on its head. 2. Pull the front air spoiler back to detach the hooks (F) and remove the spoiler. 3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Air Spoiler > Page 7546 Front Bumper: Service and Repair Front Bumper Front Bumper Removal/Installation NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Front fender trim - Front grille cover 2. Remove the bolts (A, B), screws (C), and clips (D E) securing the front bumper (F). NOTE: To remove the clips D and E, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (G) on its head. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Air Spoiler > Page 7547 3. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C). 4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A), pull the front bumper to release the bumper from the hooks (B) on the center upper beam (C). 5. Remove the front bumper (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Air Spoiler > Page 7548 6. Release the hooks (A) (4-door), then remove the front bumper absorber (B) from the front bumper beam (C). 7. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks (of both center upper beams and side spacers) on each side securely. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Bumper: Description and Operation Door and Bumper Reinforcement Beams Door reinforcement beams used on Civic vehicles are made from a metal equivalent to high strength steel. If high strength steel is heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If high strength steel is damaged, as in a vehicle accident, where the door reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack attempting to straighten them. Front and rear bumper reinforcement beams are made with aluminum alloy. For this reason, door and bumper reinforcement beams should NEVER be repaired; they should be replaced if they are damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7552 Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Removal/Installation NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the clips (A), screws (B, C), and bolts (D) securing the rear bumper (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7553 2. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7554 3. With the help of assistant, while pulling the wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A), pull the rear bumper to release the bumper from the hooks (B) on the side bracket (C). 4. With the help of an assistant, pull the rear bumper to release the bumper (A) from the hooks (B) on the upper bracket (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7555 5. Remove the hooks (A) (4-door), then remove the rear bumper absorber (B) from the rear bumper beam (C). 6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks (of both the side bracket and side spacers) on each side securely. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Turn on the wiper switch, and move the windshield wiper arms 90°. 2. Remove the center cowl cover (A). 1. Remove the hood rear seal (B) by pulling it out. 2. Remove the clips (C). 3. Release three front hooks (D) from the edge of the under-cowl panel (E). 4. Detach the clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (H). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (I). 4. If necessary, remove the bolts (A, B), then remove the under-cowl panel (C). 5. Remove these items: - Windshield wiper arms - Front fender trim, both sides Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7563 6. Detach the clips by carefully pulling the side cowl cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (B) from the front fender. Take care not to scratch the body. Repeat this step for the other side cowl cover, and disconnect the windshield washer tube. 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Outer Handle Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel: - 2-door - 4-door 3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (A). 4. Remove the plug caps (B), then remove the plastic cover (C), as needed. 5. Detach the rod fastener (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7571 6. Remove the hole seal (A) (2-door) or maintenance cap (B) (4-door). With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle rod (C). 7. Driver's and some passenger's: Pull both side flanges (A) of the retainer (B) outward, and pull the middle flange portion (C) of the outer casing cover (D) out, then disconnect the cylinder cable (E) from the latch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7572 8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 9. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle protector (A), then remove the protector by releasing the hook (B). 10. If necessary, remove the special screws, then separate the door cylinder (A) and outer handle protector (B). If the retainer (C) is damaged, release the hooks (D), and replace it. NOTE: If removed, the special screws must be replaced. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7573 11. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not to scratch the door. 12. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle (B), then replace it with a new one. 13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder cable and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks operate properly. - Make sure the door handle works properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry Won't Unlock Passenger Door Front Door Latch: Customer Interest Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry Won't Unlock Passenger Door > Page 7582 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door Front Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door > Page 7588 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7589 Front Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-034 Date: 060721 Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7590 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 06-034 Date: 060721 Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7591 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7592 Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7593 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel and inner handle: - 2-door - 4-door 3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed. 4. Detach the rod fastener. 5. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 6. Disconnect the cylinder cable from the latch. 7. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B) by pulling it downward. 8. Detach the latch cable (A) and inner handle cable (B) from the holder (C), then remove the screws (D, E) securing the latch (F), then remove the latch through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (G), latch cable, and inner handle cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7594 9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector (A) by releasing the hook (B). 10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle cable (B) from the latch (C). 11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in properly and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Coupe Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 2-door NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the door and related parts. 1. Raiser the glass fully. 2. Remove the mirror mount cover. 3. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the rear portion of the inner handle cap (A) to release the hooks(B, C). 4. Remove the screw (A) and clip (B) securing the inner handle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7599 5. Pry out the bottom edge of the grip cover (A) at the notch (B) with the trim tool to release the hooks (C). Then remove the cover and the screw. 6. Remove the screws. 7. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips with a commercially available trim pad remover. 2. Detach the upper clips. 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward. 4. Disconnect the power window switch connector (B). NOTE: The inner handle cable (C) and latch cable (D) are connected to the inner handle (E). Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7600 cables will be damaged. 8. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door panel by releasing the hooks (C). 9. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the inner handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel. 10. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch cable (B) from the inner handle (C), then remove the handle. 1. Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D), then disconnect the inner handle cable from the cable fastener (E). 2. Detach the latch cable fastener (F) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then disconnect the latch cable from the cable fastener (G). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened cable fasteners. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7601 11. Remove the power window switch panel (A). 1. Remove the screws (B, C), then remove the grip base (D). 2. Remove the screws (E), and release the hooks (F) from the pull pocket (G), then remove the power window switch panel. 12. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new ones. - The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable fastener (B) with the latch in lock position as shown. - Make sure the power window switch connector is plugged in properly, and the cable is connected securely. - Do the power window control unit reset procedure. - Make sure the window and power door lock operate properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7602 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 4-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the rear portion of the inner handle cap (A) to release the hooks (B, C). 3. Remove the screw (A) and clip (B) securing the inner handle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7603 4. Remove the power window switch panel (A). 1. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel to release the rear clip. 2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release all of the hooks (B). 3. Pull the switch panel rearward to release the front hook (C). 4. Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (D) (driver's) and the power window switch connector (E). 5. Remove the screw. 6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips that are just above the marks (B) on the edge of the panel with a commercially Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7604 available trim pad remover. 2. Detach the upper clips. 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward. NOTE: The inner handle cable (C) and latch cable (D) are connected to the inner handle (E). Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these cables will be damaged. 7. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door panel by releasing the hooks (C). 8. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the inner handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel. 9. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch cable (B) from the inner handle (C), then remove the handle. 1. Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D), then disconnect the inner handle cable from the cable fastener (E). 2. Detach the latch cable fastener (F) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then disconnect the latch cable from the cable fastener (G). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened cable fasteners. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7605 10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new ones. - The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable fastener (B) with the latch in lock position as shown. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly,and the cables are connected securely. - Do the power window control unit reset procedures - Make sure the window and power door lock operate properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7609 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door weatherstrip (F). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (G) securely. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7615 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7616 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7617 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7618 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Remove the door sash outer trim. 3. Starting at the rear, slowly pull up the door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Release the front portion of the glass outer molding (A) from the power mirror (B). 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 7621 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Slide the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) forward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 7622 5. Twist the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) to pull the rear hook (B) out from the inside of the door, then remove the weatherstrip. 6. Push the clip portions of new front door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations 75. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7626 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7627 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams 178. Power Window Motor, Driver's 179. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Front Door Window Regulator: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 7636 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 7637 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Front Door Window Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 7643 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 7644 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7645 Front Door Window Regulator: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7646 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7647 ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7648 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7649 ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7650 The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 7651 Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7652 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel: - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (A), and remove the plug caps (B). 3. Pass the cables (C) and the harnesses (D) through the slits (E) in the plastic cover (F), then remove them. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7653 4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7654 5. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B) from the regulator (C). 6. Remove the bolts (D), and loosen the bolts (E), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7655 7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Do the power window control unit reset procedure. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. - Make sure the power door locks, windows, and power mirror operate properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel. 3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (B). 4. Remove the rear portion of the plug cap (C), then remove the plastic cover (D), as needed. 5. Remove the latch mounting screws, then lower the latch. 6. Detach the rod fastener (A). 7. With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle rod (A) from the outer handle (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7661 8. Remove the maintenance seal (A). Remove the bolts securing the outer handle protector (B), then remove the protector by releasing the hook (C). 9. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not to scratch the door. 10. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle (B), then replace it with new one. 11. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry Won't Unlock Passenger Door Rear Door Latch: Customer Interest Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry Won't Unlock Passenger Door > Page 7670 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 06-034 > Jul > 06 > Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door > Page 7676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7677 Rear Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-034 Date: 060721 Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7678 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 06-034 Date: 060721 Keyless Entry - Won't Unlock Passenger Door 06-034 July 21, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Keyless Remote Intermittently Does Not Unlock the Passengers' Doors (Supersedes 06-034, dated June 10, 2006) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The keyless remote intermittently does not unlock the passengers' doors. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture gets into the driver's door lock position switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7679 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the driver's door latch. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7680 Put on gloves to protect your hands. Replace the door latch. ^ Refer to section 20 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LATCH, and select Front Door Latch Replacement from the list. NOTE: Be sure to replace the rod fastener for the outer handle. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7681 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel. 3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed. 4. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), then lower it. 5. Detach the rod fastener. 6. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 7. Detach the latch cable (A) and inner handle cable (B) from the holder (C), then remove the latch (D) out from between the rear lower channel (E) and the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (F), latch cable, and inner handle cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7682 8. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector (A) by releasing the hook (B). 9. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle cable (B) from the latch (C). 10. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTCtrimtoolsetSOJATP2014* - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 4-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the rear portion of the inner handle cap (A) to release the hooks (B, C). 3. Remove the screw (A) and clip (B) securing the inner handle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7686 4. Remove the power window switch panel (A). 1. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel to release the rear clip. 2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hooks (B). 3. Pull the switch panel rearward to release the front hook(C). 4. Disconnect the power window switch connector (D). 5. Remove the screw. 6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7687 1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips that are just above the marks (B) on the edge of the panel with a commercially available trim pad remover. 2. Detach the upper clips. 3. Stating at the rear, pull the door panel upward. NOTE: The inner handle cable (0 and latch cable (D) are connected to the inner handle (E). Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these cables will be damaged. 7. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door panel by releasing the hooks (C), if necessary. 8. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the inner handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel. 9. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch cable (B) from the inner handle (C). 1. Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D), then disconnect the inner handle cable from the cable fastener (E), 2. Detach the latch cable fastener (F) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then disconnect latch cable from the cable fastener (G). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened cable fasteners. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7688 10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new one. - The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable fastener (B) with the latch in lock position as shown. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, and the cables are connected securely. - Make sure the window and power door lock operate properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on glove to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7697 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7698 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7699 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7700 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7701 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Rear door glass - Quarter glass 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front portion of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7702 4. Push the rear hook (A) out from inside of the door, then remove the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Push the clip portions of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 79. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7706 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams 180. Power Window Motor, Left Rear (4-door) 181. Power Window Motor, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove the plug caps (C). 3. Pass the cable (D) and the harnesses (E) through the holes (F) and slit (G) in the plastic cover (H), then remove it. 4. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Release the glass from the holder (B), then remove it from the regulator (C), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7710 5. Remove the bolt (A) from the rear lower channel (B). Pull the glass run channel (C) away as needed, and remove the screw (D). 6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull the rear lower channel (B) forward from the quarter glass seal (C) then release the upper hook (D) from the door. Remove the rear lower channel from the rear door glass (E), then pull the channel up to remove it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7711 7. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass run channel (B). 8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 9. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7712 10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 11. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 13. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door Release Cable: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolster - Front door sill trim, driver's: 2-door - 4-door - Kick panels, driver's sides: 2-door - 4-door - Rear door sill trim, both sides - B-pillar lower trim - Side trim panel - Trunk side trim panel, left side: 2-door - 4-door - Trunk lid trim (for some models) - Trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener 2. Pull the carpet back as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7717 3. Release the opener cable (A) from the clips (B). Remove the cushion tape (C). 4. Remove the fuel pipe cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7718 5. From the wheel well area, insert a small screwdriver into the tab (A). 6. Pull back the left side trim panel, then pull out the fuel fill door opener cable from inside the body. Remove the screwdriver. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7719 7. Detach the opener cable junction box (A) from the body. 8. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (B) from the trunk lid latch (C). 9. Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the clips (D, E). 10. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7720 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7721 11. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) with the cable clips (C) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips, and replace the cushion tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door Release Lever: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Using a trim tool, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the front door sill trim, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the bolt (B, C), then remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7725 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to kink the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and lock securely. - Fix at the original position in the outer end of cable on the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener securely. And check the trunk lid latch operation: Make sure trunk lid latch, and fuel fill door latch unlock when pulling, and pushing the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener. If necessary, adjust the position of the cable end. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement For Some Models 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (B). Take care not to scratch the hood. 2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement 1. Remove the front grille cover. 2. With hood latch switch: Remove the clip (A), then disconnect and detach the hood latch switch connector (B). 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (C) from the body, and disconnect the hood opener cable (D) from the hood latch. 4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply multipurpose grease to each location of the hood latch indicated by the arrows. - Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly and hood latch switch connector is plugged in properly (for some models). - Adjust the hood latch alignment. - Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Opener Cable Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items: - Front grille cover - Front inner fender - Kick panel: - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), and remove the bolts (C), then remove the hood release handle (D). Take care not to kink the cable. 3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (E), release the hood opener cable from the clip (F), and remove the grommet (G) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged or stress-whitened clips with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7741 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7742 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Trunk Release Actuator Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the trunk lid latch switch/trunk release actuator, 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power to the No. 1 terminal and ground to the No. 2 terminal momentarily. The actuator should work. 4. If the actuator does not work, replace the trunk lid latch switch/release actuator assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the clips from both trunk lid hinge covers (A), then remove the covers. 2. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the trunk lid trim (C). 3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7751 Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trunk Area Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Fold both rear seat-backs forward. 2. Pull back the front portion of the spare tire lid (A), and detach the clips. 3. Remove the spare tire lid (A). 4. Remove the trunk lip weatherstrip near the trunk rear trim panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7752 5. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it. 6. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the trunk side trim panel (C) from the trunk. Release the rear seatback release cable (D) out through the slit (E) in the trim panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7753 7. If necessary, remove the trunk tool box (A). 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Fold the rear seat-back forward. 2. Pull back the front portion of the spare tire lid (A), and detach the clips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7754 3. Remove the spare tire lid (A). 4. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip near the trunk rear trim panel. 5. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7755 6. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the trunk side trim panel (C). Release the wire harness (D) from the slit (E) in the trim panel. 7. If necessary, remove the trunk tool box (A). 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7756 Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the trunk lid cushions (A). 1. Pull back the outside of the trunk lid cushion to release the outside hook (B). 2. Slide the trunk lid cushion to the outside, then release the hooks (C) to remove it. 2. Install the cushion in the reverse order of removal. 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. If equipped, remove the trunk lid trim. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid > Page 7757 2. Detach the clips (A) by pushing it from the hole in the trunk lid (B), then remove the trunk lid cushion (C). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 3. Install the cushion in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Latch Replacement 1. 4-door: If equipped, remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder: - 2-door - 4-door 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A), and on power trunk lid latch model and security switch model, disconnect trunk lid latch switch connector (B). Take care not to bend the opener cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7761 4. Remove the bolts from the trunk lid latch (A). 5. Pull the trunk lid latch (A) out, and disconnect the cylinder rod (B) from the trunk lid latch, and on no security switch model, disconnect the latch switch connector (C). Take care not to bend the cylinder rod. NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened rod fastener (D). 6. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. - Fix the original position of the outer end of cable (A) on the trunk lid latch securely. And check the trunk lid latch operation: Make sure the trunk lid latch unlock when pulling the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener. If necessary, adjust the position of the cable end. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolster - Front door sill trim, driver's: 2-door - 4-door - Kick panels, driver's sides: 2-door - 4-door - Rear door sill trim, both sides - B-pillar lower trim - Side trim panel - Trunk side trim panel, left side: 2-door - 4-door - Trunk lid trim (for some models) - Trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener 2. Pull the carpet back as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7765 3. Release the opener cable (A) from the clips (B). Remove the cushion tape (C). 4. Remove the fuel pipe cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7766 5. From the wheel well area, insert a small screwdriver into the tab (A). 6. Pull back the left side trim panel, then pull out the fuel fill door opener cable from inside the body. Remove the screwdriver. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7767 7. Detach the opener cable junction box (A) from the body. 8. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (B) from the trunk lid latch (C). 9. Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the clips (D, E). 10. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7768 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7769 11. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) with the cable clips (C) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips, and replace the cushion tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Locations 172. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA 2-door: LX) 173. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7773 127. Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7774 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 2-door 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened rod fastener (C). 2. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder clockwise, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged. - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. 4-door 1. If equipped, remove the trunk lid trim. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7775 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened, rod fastener (C). 3. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). 4. Remove the rear license trim. 5. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). 6. Turn the lock cylinder (A) to release the hook (B) from the trunk lid (C), then remove the lock cylinder. 7. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged. - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Release Lever: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Using a trim tool, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the front door sill trim, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the bolt (B, C), then remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7779 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to kink the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and lock securely. - Fix at the original position in the outer end of cable on the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener securely. And check the trunk lid latch operation: Make sure trunk lid latch, and fuel fill door latch unlock when pulling, and pushing the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener. If necessary, adjust the position of the cable end. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 169. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7783 128. Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid/Latch Switch (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Spring: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement Special Tools Required Torsion bar assembly tool 07AAF-SNAA100 2-door 1. Remove the clips, then remove the torsion bar cover (A). 2. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar clips (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7787 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the torsion bars with the torsion bar assembly tool from both trunk lid hinges. First remove the left torsion bar (A), then remove the right torsion bar (B). 4. Remove the torsion bar clips (A) from the body. 5. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. - Positions where each torsion bar was installed in the factory are following: Left torsion bar: Normal position - Right torsion bar: Normal position - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Special Tools Required Torsion bar assembly tool 07AAF-SNAA100 4-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7788 1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar center clip (B). 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the torsion bars with the torsion bar assembly tool from both trunk lid hinges. First remove the left torsion bar (A), then remove the right torsion bar (B). 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip (A) from the body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7789 4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and left torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars properly. - Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. - Positions where each torsion bar was installed in the factory are following: Left torsion bar: Normal position - Right torsion bar: Normal position - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7793 167. Middle of Trunk Lid (Canada; USA: DX) 168. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: LX; GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7794 169. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7795 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams 88. Trunk Latch Switch (USA: DX, LX; Canada; GX) 128. Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid/Latch Switch (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7796 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the trunk lid latch assembly (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 [No. 3] and No. 2 terminals. [ ] : With trunk release - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Apply clear weatherstrip sealant (B) into the channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around. 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the center of the trunk lid opening, and install the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 4. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem Replacement 2-door NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. To remove the front "H" emblem, remove the front grille. 2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 3. Apply the emblem/sticker where shown. When installing the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the left quarter glass, align the sticker with the edge of the black ceramic as shown, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. 4. After installing the front "H" emblem, reinstall the front grille. 4-door NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. To remove the front "H" emblem, remove the front emblem base. 2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 3. Apply the emblem/sticker where shown. When installing the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the left rear door quarter glas6, align the sticker with the edge of the glass mark as shown, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7804 4. After installing the front "H" emblem, reinstall the front grille Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Turn on the wiper switch, and move the windshield wiper arms 90°. 2. Remove the center cowl cover (A). 1. Remove the hood rear seal (B) by pulling it out. 2. Remove the clips (C). 3. Release three front hooks (D) from the edge of the under-cowl panel (E). 4. Detach the clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (H). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (I). 4. If necessary, remove the bolts (A, B), then remove the under-cowl panel (C). 5. Remove these items: - Windshield wiper arms - Front fender trim, both sides Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7808 6. Detach the clips by carefully pulling the side cowl cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (B) from the front fender. Take care not to scratch the body. Repeat this step for the other side cowl cover, and disconnect the windshield washer tube. 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Frame: Service and Repair Rear License Trim Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. From inside the trunk lid, remove the nuts (A) securing the rear license trim (B), and push out the clips (C). 2. Gently close the trunk lid, release the clip, and pull the rear license trim (A) out to detach the clips, then remove the trim. Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. 4-door 1. If equipped, remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Remove the bolt securing the trunk lid lock cylinder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7812 3. Detach the clips by pushing it from the hole in the trunk lid (A), then remove the rear license trim (B). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Inner Fender Replacement Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Inner Fender Replacement Front Inner Fender Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the front inner fender (A). 1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), and remove the front splash guard (C) (Canadian model). 2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the clip (E), securing the splash shield (F), and front inner fender, and remove the bolt (G) and clip (H) securing the front bumper and front inner fender. 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (I, J, K) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) to the body. 4. Release the hook (L) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender. NOTE: To remove the clips E, H and I, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (M) on its head. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. 4-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the front inner fender (A). 1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), and remove the front splash guard (C) (Canadian model). 2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E) securing the front bumper, splash shield (F), and front inner fender. 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (G, H, I) securing the front inner fender ( and splash shield) to the body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Inner Fender Replacement > Page 7818 4. Release the hook (J) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender. NOTE: To remove the clips E and G, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (K) on its head. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Inner Fender Replacement > Page 7819 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Fender Fairing Replacement Front Fender Fairing Replacement 1. Remove the front inner fender as needed: 2. From the wheel arch, remove the clips. 3. Open the front door. Detach the hooks (A) securing the front fender fairing (B). 4. Remove the front fender fairing (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Inner Fender Replacement > Page 7820 5. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the rear side trim panel. 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as needed. 3. Remove the insulator (A). 4. Detach the floor wire harness clips (A). 5. Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement > Page 7826 6. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal. When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Middle Cross-Member Gusset Replacement > Page 7827 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Rear Floor Upper Cross-Member Gusset Replacement Rear Floor Upper Cross-member Gusset Replacement Rear Floor Upper Cross-member Gusset Torque NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Skid Plate: Service and Repair Middle Floor Undercover Replacement For Some Models NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the bolts (A), and detach the clips (B), then remove the left middle floor under cover (C) and right middle under cover (D). NOTE: To remove the clips B, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (E) on its head. 2. Install the under cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 7835 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7836 Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque NOTE: - After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Grille Grille: Service and Repair Front Grille Front Grille Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the bumper and grille. 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the screws, and remove the front grille (A) from the front bumper (B). 3. If emblem (C) replacement is necessary, refer to emblem/sticker replacement. 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal. 4-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the bumper and grille. 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the nuts, and release the hooks (A), then remove the front grille (B) from the front bumper (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Grille > Page 7841 3. If necessary, remove the screw, and release the hooks, then remove the front emblem base (A) from the front grille (B). 4. If emblem (C) replacement is necessary, refer to emblem/sticker replacement. 5. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Grille > Page 7842 Grille: Service and Repair Front Grille Cover Front Grille Cover Replacement NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. 1. Remove the front fender trim from both sides. 2. Remove the clips by carefully pulling the front grille cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing the front edge of the cover from the grille (B). Take care not to scratch the body. NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (C) on its head. 3. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clip portions into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement Arm Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 For Some Models - 4-door NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Using a trim tool, push on the bottom ribs (A) of the rear hooks 2. Release the front hooks (A) from the wire (B), then remove the beverage holder (C). 3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the front hooks are installed securely to the wire, then push down on the beverage holder and install the rear hooks into the wire securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7848 Arm Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Armrest Replacement Rear Seat Armrest Replacement For Some Models - 4-door NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the armrest pivot (B). 2. Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of the vehicle, and remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (C) on the right side of the vehicle by pulling back on the armrest. 3. Remove the pivot shaft (A) from the collar (B) on the left, then remove the armrest (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7849 4. Remove the collars (A) from the seat-back (B). 5. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7850 Arm Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Armrest Cover Replacement Rear Seat Armrest Cover Replacement For Some Models - 4-door NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Remove the armrest from the seat-back. 2. Remove the armrest beverage holder from the armrest. 3. Release the clips (A) and hook strip (B), and pull back the armrest cover (C) all the way around. 4. Release the armrest cover from the armrest pivot portions (A), then remove it from the pad (B). 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal. To prevent wrinkles when installing an armrest cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks and hook strips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7851 Arm Rest: Service and Repair Center Console Armrest Replacement Center Console Armrest Replacement For Some Models NOTE: Take care not to scratch the armrest, center console, and related parts. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Gently pull out the center console rear cover (A) to detach the clips. 3. Open the armrest (A), pull the pin (B) off the armrest, then separate the armrest and center console (C). 4. Install the center console armrest in the reverse order of removal and check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7852 Arm Rest: Service and Repair Armrest Lock Replacement Armrest Lock Replacement For Some Models NOTE: Take care not to scratch the armrest and related parts. 1. Remove the center console armrest. 2. Using a T15 Torx bit, remove the screws. Slide the armrest liner (A) downward to release the hooks (B), then remove the armrest liner and armrest spring (C). 3. Using a T15 Torx bit, remove the screws. 4. Slide the armrest (A) all the way forward, using a T15 Torx bit, remove the screws, then remove the armrest backbone (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement > Page 7853 5. From the back of the armrest backbone (A), push the edge of the armrest lock pin (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then slide the armrest lock pin fully. 6. Remove the armrest lock (A) with the armrest lock pin (B) from the armrest backbone (C). 7. Remove the armrest lock pin (A), then separate the armrest lock (B) and armrest lock spring (C). 8. Install the armrest lock in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides - Rear seat cushion - Door sill trim, both sides - Kick panels, both sides - Driver's dashboard under cover - Passenger's dashboard under cover - Center console - Steering joint cover 2. Push the knob (A) back to release the hooks (B) then pull up the accelerator pedal (C). 3. Remove the footrest (A). 1. Using a 6 mm hexagon socket wrench, remove the lower clip (B) from the stud bolt (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7857 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, remove the upper clip (D) from the stud bolt. 4. Disconnect the parking brake cables from the equalizer. 5. Remove the floor mat holders (A) from the driver's side. 6. Release the clip from the rear portion of the carpet (A). Pull out the edge of the carpet from under both rear side trim panels (B). 7. Release the clips. Release the fasteners (A), then pull the carpet out from under the dashboard. 8. Pull the seat harnesses (B) out through the hole in the carpet, then remove the carpet. 9. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses and parking brake cables are routed correctly. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the fasteners and dips into place securely. - Slip the carpet under both rear side trim panel properly. - Push the accelerator pedal hooks into place securely, and after installing, make sure the accelerator pedal does not come off the floor by pulling it up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7858 Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides - Rear seat cushion - Front door sill trim, both sides - Rear door sill trim, both sides - Kick panels, both sides - B-pillar lower trim - Driver's dashboard under cover - Passenger's dashboard under cover - Center console - Steering joint cover 2. Push the knob (A) back to release the hooks (B) then pull up the accelerator pedal (C). 3. Remove the footrest (A). 1. Using a 6 mm hexagon socket wrench, remove the lower clip (B) from the stud bolt (C). 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, remove the upper clip (D) from the stud bolt. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7859 4. Remove the bolts (A, B), and detach the connector clip (C), then remove the center pipe extension (D). 5. Remove the rear heater joint duct (A). 6. Disconnect the parking brake cables from the equalizer. 7. Remove the floor mat holders (A) from the driver's side. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7860 8. Remove the clips. 9. Release the fasteners (A), then pull the carpet (B) out from under the dashboard. 10. Pull the seat harnesses (C) out through the hole in the carpet, then remove the carpet. 11. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses and parking brake cables are routed correctly. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the fasteners and clips into place securely. - Push the accelerator pedal hooks into place securely, and after installing, make sure the accelerator pedal does not come off the floor by pulling it up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Console: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7865 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7866 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7867 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7868 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7869 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7870 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7871 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7872 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7873 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7874 Console: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7875 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7876 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7877 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7878 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7879 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7880 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7881 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7882 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7883 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7884 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7885 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7886 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7887 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7888 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7889 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7890 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7891 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7892 Console: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7893 Diagram 114-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7894 Diagram 114-2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7895 Diagram 114-3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7896 Diagram 114-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation Console: Service and Repair Center Console Removal/Installation Center Console Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard, and related parts. 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover. 2. M/T model: Lower the shift lever boot (A) to release the hooks (B) from the boot, then remove the shift knob(C). 3. Detach the clips by pulling the front inner panel (A) up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7899 4. Gently pull out along the rear of the center console panel (A) to release the clips (B, C). 5. Pull the center console panel (A) up and rearward to release the tabs (B). 6. Open the armrest (A), then remove the console box mat (B) and bolts. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7900 7. From the front portion of the center console, remove the bolts (A) and clips (B), and disconnect the console subharness connector (C), then detach the connector clip (D). 8. Slide both front seats all the way back, and recline the seat-back fully. 9. Slide the center console (A) rearward to release the pins (B) from the bracket (C). 10. Lift up the rear of the console (A), and remove it from the dashboard. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7901 11. Install the console in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure each connector is plugged in properly. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - When installing the center console panel, install the tabs (A) into the notch (B) of the parking brake base frame (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7902 Console: Service and Repair Center Pocket Center Pocket Removal/Installation NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. 1. Disassemble the dashboard/steering hanger beam. 2. Remove the screws, then remove the center pocket (A). 3. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7903 Console: Service and Repair Center Console Disassembly/Reassembly Center Console Disassembly/Reassembly Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the center console, dashboard, and related parts. 1. Remove the center console. 2. If equipped, remove the center console armrest. 3. Using a T20 Torx bit, remove the screws, and disconnect the accessory socket connector (A). 4. Release the hooks (A) and pins (B), then separate the left console side panel (C), right console side panel (D), console beverage holder (E) and console box (F). If equipped, detach the harness clips (G), then remove the console subharness (H) from the hooks (I). 4-door is shown; 2-door is similar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 7904 5. Release the hooks (A, B), then separate the console upper box (C) and console lower box (D). 6. Assemble the console in the reverse order of removal, and make sure the console subharness connector is plugged in properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7911 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7912 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Glove Box Glove Box Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. 1. Remove the bolts. 2. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove box stop (B) on each side from the dashboard by pushing them in, then remove the glove box. 3. Install the glove box in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box > Page 7917 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Glove Box Striker Glove Box Striker Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. 1. While holding the glove box, release the glove box stop on each side from the dashboard by pushing them inside. 2. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box striker (A). 3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio or the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove these items: - 2-door: A-pillar trim, both sides - Ceiling light - Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides - Rear side trim panel - Quarter pillar trim - Grab handles, two places - 4-door: A-pillar trim, both sides - Ceiling light - Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides - B-pillar lower trim - B-pillar upper trim, both sides - C-pillar upper trim, both sides - Grab handles, four places 4. From both sides, using a trim tool, release the tabs (A) from the bracket (B). If equipped, disconnect the moonroof switch connector (F) and the navigation microphone connector (G). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7921 5. Remove the sunvisor cap (A) from the bracket (B). Turn the cap, and remove it. 6. From both sides, remove the sunvisor (A). 1. Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder(B). 2. Using a T25 Torx bit, remove the screws. 3. Remove the sunvisor from the body. 7. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (A), and turn the holder (B) 90 °, then pull it out. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7922 8. Remove the map light assembly (A). 1. Remove the lenses (B). 2. Remove the bolts. 3. If equipped, release the four tabs (C), then pull out the moon roof switch (D) or the navigation microphone. 4. Disconnect the front individual map light connector (E). If equipped, disconnect the moonroof switch connector (F) and the navigation microphone connector (G). 9. Without moonroof: Detach the harness clips (A) from the A-pillar (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7923 10. Without moonroof: Remove the driver's dashboard under cover. 11. Without moonroof: From under the dash, disconnect the interior wire harness connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B). 12. Remove the center console. 13. Slide the front seat all the way back, and recline the seat-back fully. 14. 4-door: Remove the bolts securing the parking brake base frame (A) and lay it down as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7924 15. Lower the headliner (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7925 1. Remove the front door opening seals (B). and rear door opening seals (C) from each roof portion. 2. 2-door: Release the clips (D). 3. With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips (E) by pulling the rear portion of the headliner down. 4. With moonroof: Release the fasteners (F) by lowering the headliner. 5. With moon roof: Release the hooks (G) of the moon roof by moving the headliner rearward. 16. Lower the front of the headliner below the steering wheel. Rotate the liner, and pull it along with the interior wire harness (I) out through the passenger's front door. Do not bend the liner. Bending the liner will crease and damage it. 17. If necessary, remove the cushion tape (A, B) fastening the interior wire harness (C) to the headliner (D), then remove them from the headliner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7926 18. If necessary, remove the side curtain airbag mounting bolt (A) and grab handle bracket mounting bolts (B), then remove the grab handle bracket (C) from each side by releasing the hooks(D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7927 19. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the headliner and removed trim pieces with new ones. - To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them if they have any of these types of damage. Any crease or tears in the headliner (A) - Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (B) - Any damages around the grab handle holes (C) or sunvisor holes in the headliner - Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (D) - Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft(E) - Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F) - Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror base (G) - Any fasteners (H) and clip bases (I) which have come off the headliner - When installing the grab handle, push on the handle against the bracket (J) until the clips (K) snap into place securely. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Replace the removed cushion tape with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7928 - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. - Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces correctly. - When reinstalling the headliner through the front passenger's door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Set the clock. - Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. - Check for any DTCs that may have been set during repairs, and clear them. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Grab Handle Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2O14 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the stoppers (B). 2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (B), then remove the grab handle (C). 3. Using a pair of pliers, remove all of the clips (A) by pinching its hooks. 4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the grab handle with a new one. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7932 5. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, to prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them if they have any of these types of damage: Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (A). - Any cracks or stress-whitened in the stoppers (B). 6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (B), then install the stoppers (C) fully into the clips. 7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (B), and push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON Rear Shelf: Customer Interest Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON 06-006 July 15, 2006 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-door EX - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H567233* Rear Shelf Rattles When Playing the Audio System (Supersedes 06-006, dated April 5, 2006) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The rear shelf rattles when playing the audio system at normal bass levels. PROBABLE CAUSE Subwoofer vibrations cause the subwoofer ring to rattle against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 011012 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84504-SVA-A11 H/C 8252041 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 04205 Template ID: 06-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf: ^ Refer to page 20-112 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SHELF, and select Interior Trim Removal/Installation-Rear Shelf (2-door) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7941 2. Remove the six screws that secure the subwoofer ring to the rear shelf. 3. Cut two 25 mm x 50 mm pieces of EPT sealer 5T. Apply them to each side of the base of the high-mount brake light as shown. 4. *Cut one 205 mm x 10 mm piece of wool felt. Apply it to the brake light so it fills the gap between the light and the shelf.* 5. Cut two 10 mm x 210 mm pieces of wool felt. Apply them to the side of the ring that contacts the shelf, as shown. 6. Reinstall the ring (do not overtighten the screws). 7. Install the rear shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7942 ^ Replace any damaged or stress-whitened clips. ^ When installing, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. ^ Install two clips in the body as shown, then install the remaining clips in the rear shelf. ^ Slide the ends of the rear shelf onto the two clips in the body. Once these clips are attached, continue sliding the rear shelf back until the remaining clips are in place. Press down on the rear shelf to set the remaining clips. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON Rear Shelf: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON 06-006 July 15, 2006 *Applies To: 2006 Civic 2-door EX - From VIN 2HGFG1...6H500001 thru 2HGFG1...6H567233* Rear Shelf Rattles When Playing the Audio System (Supersedes 06-006, dated April 5, 2006) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The rear shelf rattles when playing the audio system at normal bass levels. PROBABLE CAUSE Subwoofer vibrations cause the subwoofer ring to rattle against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 011012 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84504-SVA-A11 H/C 8252041 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 04205 Template ID: 06-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf: ^ Refer to page 20-112 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SHELF, and select Interior Trim Removal/Installation-Rear Shelf (2-door) from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7948 2. Remove the six screws that secure the subwoofer ring to the rear shelf. 3. Cut two 25 mm x 50 mm pieces of EPT sealer 5T. Apply them to each side of the base of the high-mount brake light as shown. 4. *Cut one 205 mm x 10 mm piece of wool felt. Apply it to the brake light so it fills the gap between the light and the shelf.* 5. Cut two 10 mm x 210 mm pieces of wool felt. Apply them to the side of the ring that contacts the shelf, as shown. 6. Reinstall the ring (do not overtighten the screws). 7. Install the rear shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Shelf: > 06-006 > Jul > 06 > Audio System - Rear Shelf Rattles With Audio System ON > Page 7949 ^ Replace any damaged or stress-whitened clips. ^ When installing, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. ^ Install two clips in the body as shown, then install the remaining clips in the rear shelf. ^ Slide the ends of the rear shelf onto the two clips in the body. Once these clips are attached, continue sliding the rear shelf back until the remaining clips are in place. Press down on the rear shelf to set the remaining clips. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7950 Rear Shelf: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Rear Shelf - 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the rear shelf and trim. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Fold both seat-backs forward. 2. From the trunk compartment, disconnect and detach the high-mount brake light connector (A). 3. Carefully lift up on the front edge of the rear shelf (A) by hand to release the front hooks (B) from the body, to detach the clips, and to disengage the side hooks (C) from the rear shelf extension (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7951 4. While lifting the front of the rear shelf (A) up to release each portion away from three child seat tether anchor strikers (B), pull the shelf back to release it from the clips remain on the rear parcel shelf, and to release the hooks (C) near the high mount brake light. 5. Pull the high mount brake light connector (D) in from the trunk compartment. 6. Pull the rear center seat belt (E) out through the slit (F) in the rear shelf, then remove the rear shelf. 7. Install the rear shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. - With the rear clips (A) installed in the rear parcel shelf (body), set the rear shelf (B) on the parcel shelf. Push down on the rear edge of the shelf, then slide it back to set the rear clips and hooks (C) into place. Center the rear shelf using the center tether anchor (D) for reference. Push down on the rear shelf to set the remaining clips. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is plugged in properly. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Rear Shelf Extension - 2-door NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7952 - Take care not to bend or scratch the extension and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Rear shelf - Rear side trim panel 2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) from the C-pillar trim (B). 3. Pull the rear seat belt (C) out through the slit (D) in the rear shelf extension (E), then remove it. 4. Install the extension in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - When installing the rear shelf extension, slip the rear seat belt through the slit in the extension. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2O14 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Rear Shelf - 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the rear shelf and trim. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat-back: Fold down - Split fold down - Rear seat side bolster, both sides - Rear door opening seal, as needed - C-pillar trim, both sides Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7953 2. From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high-mount brake light connector (A). 3. From the trunk compartment, release the six white clips (A) by tapping on them. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7954 4. Release the hooks (A) by pushing in on the detents (B) on the rear shelf (C), then lift up on the front edge of the shelf at each detent. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7955 5. Lift the rear shelf (A) upward to detach the remaining four clips, and release the hooks (B) of the high mount brake light from the rear shelf. Release the pin (C) from the holes on the body. 6. Release each anchor rod (D) out through the hole in the rear shelf, and pull both rear seat belts (E) and rear center seat belt (F) out through the slits (G) in the rear shelf. 7. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belt through the slit and the rear center seat belt into the lid opening in the rear shelf. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is connected securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Door Sill Area - 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Driver's side: Remove the front seat belt lower anchor. 2. Driver's side: Remove the footrest. 3. Driver's side: Remove the front side cap from the door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and screw. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7959 4. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and rear side trim panel (D), and pull the door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 5. Pull out the door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the door opening flange, then remove the seal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7960 6. Pull the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 7. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Front Door Sill Area - 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Driver's side: Remove the footrest. 2. Driver's side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and screw Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7961 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F, G), then remove it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7962 4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then remove the seal. 5. Pull the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7963 - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Rear Door Sill Area - 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 2. Pull the rear seat cushion (A) up to release the hook (B). While pulling the cushion up, detach the clips and remove the rear door sill trim (C) from the rear door opening seal (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7964 3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening flange, then remove the seal. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Visor: > 08-023 > Oct > 10 > Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved Sun Visor: Customer Interest Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved 08-023 October 22, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Sunvisor Comes Apart or Splits When Moved (Supersedes 08-023, dated August 8, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under VEHICLES AFFECTED, models were added and VIN ranges were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, different colored sunvisors were added. PROBLEM The sunvisor comes apart or splits when moved up or down. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Visor: > 08-023 > Oct > 10 > Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved > Page 7973 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 840100 (left sunvisor) 840130 (right sunvisor) 8401B1 (both visors) Flat Rate Time: 0.1 hour (per sunvisor) Failed Part: P/N 83280-SNA-A01ZB Defect Code: 02101 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the sunvisor: ^ Refer to steps 3 thru 5 on page 20-133 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLINER, select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list, and do only steps 3 thru 5 of that procedure. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Visor: > 08-023 > Oct > 10 > Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved Sun Visor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved 08-023 October 22, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Sunvisor Comes Apart or Splits When Moved (Supersedes 08-023, dated August 8, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under VEHICLES AFFECTED, models were added and VIN ranges were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, different colored sunvisors were added. PROBLEM The sunvisor comes apart or splits when moved up or down. VEHICLES AFFECTED Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Visor: > 08-023 > Oct > 10 > Interior - Sun Visor Comes Apart/Splits When Moved > Page 7979 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 840100 (left sunvisor) 840130 (right sunvisor) 8401B1 (both visors) Flat Rate Time: 0.1 hour (per sunvisor) Failed Part: P/N 83280-SNA-A01ZB Defect Code: 02101 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the sunvisor: ^ Refer to steps 3 thru 5 on page 20-133 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLINER, select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list, and do only steps 3 thru 5 of that procedure. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program A-Pillar Trim SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2-door, 4-door and the precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Follow the A-pillar trim installation procedure carefully; improper installation could cause the side curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly cause injury. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the trim and panels. - The upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) consists of a grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the trim is reinstalled. 1. Pull the door opening seal away from the A-pillar as needed: 2. Hit the upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) with your hand. The clip is under the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark (B). Hitting the clip breaks the projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the grommet (E) and against the body (F). The grommet becomes narrow. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7984 NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one when the A-pillar trim is reinstalled. 3. Pull the front of the A-pillar trim (A) back by hand to remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7985 4. Pull the A-pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the clips. Pull the trim up from the dashboard (B), then remove it. 5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the A-pillar trim and all clips on the trim with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7986 6. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove the upper clip (A) from the removed A-pillar trim (B) and discard it. Then check the trim: - To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the A-pillar trim and replace it if it has any of these types of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened in the A-pillar trim - Any cracks or stress-whitened in the clip seating surfaces (C, D) - Replace the lower clips (E) if it is damaged. - Replace the upper clip with a new one. - 4-door A-pillar trim is shown; 2-door A-pillar trim is similar. 7. Before installing the A-pillar trim (A), whether replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove new upper clip (B). 8. Check the overlap between the headliner and A-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7987 9. Carefully install a new upper clip (A) to the A-pillar trim (B). Be sure that the grommet (C) is nearest to the top of the pin (D) as shown. 10. Reinstall the A-pillar trim (A). 1. Insert the bottom of the trim into the dashboard (B). 2. Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its upper clip (D), and lower clips (E), and pins (F) into the holes (G) in the A-pillar, then lightly push the trim into place. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7988 NOTE: Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked down under the clips and ribs. - Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not hold the trim properly. 11. Reinstall the front door opening seal. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim - 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Front door sill trim - Rear door sill trim - Front door opening seal, as needed - Rear door opening seal, as needed 2. Slide the front seat forward fully. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7989 3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A). 1. Pull the upper portion of the trim back to release the upper hooks (B). 2. Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of the trim back by hand. 4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor. 5. Pull the bottom of the B-pillar upper trim (A) back by hand to detach the lower hooks (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7990 6. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the B-pillar upper trim (A). Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B) from the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket (C). 7. Pass the front seat belt (A) lower anchor out through a hole in the slider (B), then remove the B-pillar upper trim (C). 8. Remove the slider (A) from the B-pillar upper trim(B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7991 9. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips (A) with new ones. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the B-pillar upper and lower trim and all clips on the trim with new ones. - To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the trim and replace it if it has any of these types of damage: Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper trim (B) and the upper hooks (C), and any stress-whitened in the upper part of the trim - Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar lower trim (D), and any breakages in the part (E) fitted with the B-pillar upper trim - Any cracks or stress-whitened in the clips seating surface (F) - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly. - Make sure the pin (G) on the front seat belt shoulder anchor adjuster (H) and the hole (I) on the back of the slider are engaged when installing the B-pillar upper trim. - Make sure the trim hook is installed into the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely. - Push the clip and hooks into place securely. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. Slider engagement with shoulder anchor adjuster Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Quarter Pillar Trim - 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7992 NOTE: - Follow the quarter pillar trim installation procedure carefully; improper installation could cause the side curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly cause injury. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the trim and panels. - The B-pillar upper clip (A) in the quarter pillar trim (B) consists of a grommet (C) and a pin (D). The grommet expanded with the pin secures it to the body panel (E). The projections (F) on the pin is broken during removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the trim is reinstalled. - The C-pillar upper clip (G) under the airbag lid (H) consists of a resin grommet (I) and a metal pin (J). The groove (K) in the grommet secures it to the body panel. The shoulder (L) on the grommet is broken during removal, so the grommet must be replaced with a new one when the trim is reinstalled. 1. Remove these items: - Rear side trim panel - Rear shelf extension 2. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor. 3. Lower the coat hanger (A), pry off the lid (B) with a trim tool, then remove the screw. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7993 4. Release the hooks (A) then remove the rear window harness cap (B) from the quarter pillar trim(C). 5. Pull the door opening seal away from the B-pillar as needed. 6. Hit the surface of the quarter pillar trim (A) just upon the upper clip with your hand. Hitting the trim surface breaks the projections (B) on the pin (C) and pushes it into the grommet (D) and against the body (E). The grommet becomes narrow. NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled. 7. Hit the surface of the airbag lid (A) just upon the upper clip with your hand. The clip is halfway between the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark (B) and the rear window. Hitting the lid surface breaks the shoulder (C) on the grommet (D) and pushes the pin (E) and grommet against the body (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7994 NOTE: - The clip must be replaced with a new one when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled. - Do not hit the lower side of the airbag lid, or it will be folded and stress-whitened at the middle of its own. It is very delicate part. 8. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A). 1. Detach and release the clips (B, C, D) from the body (E) and remove the pin (F) from the grommet (G) remaining in the body by pulling the trim back. 2. Lower the trim to release the upper edge of it from the headliner (H). 9. Remove the grommet from the body. NOTE: The grommet must be replaced with a new one because the it is damaged during removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7995 10. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the quarter pillar trim and all clips on the trim with new ones. 11. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove the clip (A) from the removed quarter pillar trim (B) and discard it. Then check the trim: - To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the quarter pillar trim and replace it if it has any of these types of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened in the quarter pillar trim - Any cracks or stress-whitened in the clip seating surfaces (C, D, E) - Damaged top of the C-pillar upper clip pin (F) - If any of the lower clips (G, H) are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them. - Replace the clip (A) with a new one. 12. Before installing the quarter pillar trim (A), whether replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove new clip (B), and the grommet (C) from the pin (D). 13. Check the overlap between the headliner and quarter pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7996 14. Carefully reinstall the clip (A) to the quarter pillar trim (B), and the grommet (C) on the pin (D): - Be sure that the grommet (E) is nearest to the top of the pin (F) as shown. - Seat the pin with the grommet on the quarter pillar trim as shown. 15. Reinstall the quarter pillar trim (A). 1. Fit the upper edge of the trim to the headliner(B). 2. Place the trim over the center/C-pillar (C), and fit its B-pillar upper clip (D), C-pillar upper clip (E), and all of the other clips (F, G) into holes (H) in the body, then lightly push the trim into place. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7997 NOTE: Make sure the side Curtain airbag isn't tucked down under the clips and ribs. - Apply pressure to the areas of the trim just upon the quarter/C-pillar upper clips until these clip fittings are felt. If you push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not hold the trim properly. - Make sure the upper clip portions of the trim don't come off the body by tugging on the trim back. 16. Reinstall the rear window harness cap (A) to the quarter pillar trim (B) until its hooks (C) snap into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7998 17. Reinstall the screw and the lid (A). 18. Reinstall the door opening seal. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program C-Pillar Trim - 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Follow the C-pillar trim installation procedure carefully; improper installation could cause the side curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly cause injury. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the trim and panels. - The front clip in the C-pillar trim (A) consists of a grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the trim is reinstalled. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolster - Rear door opening seal, as needed 2. Fold the seat-back forward. 3. Hit the front clip in the C-pillar trim (A) with your hand. The clip is near the triangle mark (B). Hitting the clip breaks the projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the grommet (El and against the body (F). The grommet becomes narrow. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 7999 NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new when the C-pillar trim is reinstalled. 4. Pull the front of the C-pillar trim (A) back by hand to remove the front clip (B) from the body (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8000 5. Pull the C-pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the clip, then pull the trim up from the rear shelf (B). 6. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the C-pillar trim and all clips on the trim with new ones. 7. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove the front clip (A) from the removed C-pillar trim (B) and discard it. Then check the trim: - To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the C-pillar trim and replace it if it has any of these types of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened in the C-pillar trim - Any cracks or stress-whitened in the clip seating surfaces (C, D) - Replace the rear clips (E) if it is damaged. - Replace the front clip with a new one. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8001 8. Before installing the C-pillar trim (A), whether replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove new front clip (B). 9. Check the overlap between the headliner and C-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it. 10. Carefully reinstall a new front clip (A) to the C-pillar trim (B). Be sure that the grommet (C) is nearest to the top of the pin (D) as shown. 11. Reinstall the C-pillar trim (A). 1. Insert the bottom of the trim into the rear shelf (B). 2. Place the trim over the C-pillar (C), and fit its front clip (D) and rear clips (E) into holes (F) in the C-pillar, then lightly push the trim into place. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8002 NOTE: Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked down under the clips and ribs. - Push lightly on the front clip. If you push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not hold the trim properly. 12. Reinstall the rear door opening seal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8003 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Door sill trim - Rear seat-back: Fold down - Split fold down - Rear seat cushion 2. Lower the rear seat pivot bracket (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8004 3. Release the clip (A). Detach the clips (B) by pulling the rear side trim panel (C) back, release the upper hooks (D) and tabs (E) from the quarter pillar trim (F) and the rear shelf extension (G), then remove the trim panel. 4. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8005 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2O14 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program Door Sill Area - 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Driver's side: Remove the front seat belt lower anchor. 2. Driver's side: Remove the footrest. 3. Driver's side: Remove the front side cap from the door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and screw. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8006 4. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and rear side trim panel (D), and pull the door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 5. Pull out the door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the door opening flange, then remove the seal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8007 6. Pull the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 7. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2O14 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Front Door Sill Area - 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Driver's side: Remove the footrest. 2. Driver's side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and screw Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8008 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F, G), then remove it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8009 4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then remove the seal. 5. Pull the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8010 - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2O14 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Rear Door Sill Area - 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 2. Pull the rear seat cushion (A) up to release the hook (B). While pulling the cushion up, detach the clips and remove the rear door sill trim (C) from the rear door opening seal (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas > Page 8011 3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening flange, then remove the seal. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8017 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 218. Remote Starting Control Unit (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8031 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8035 130. Driver's Dr. (Frt. Pass. Sim) DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si 137. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8036 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams 199. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Driver's (DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si) 200. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (DX-G, LX, GX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8037 201. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) 202. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8038 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's Door and Left Rear Door 1. Remove the door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). NOTE: The illustration shows the driver's door. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Front Passenger's Door and Right Rear Door 1. Remove the door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8039 NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's door. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8043 130. Driver's Dr. (Frt. Pass. Sim) DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si 137. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8044 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 199. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Driver's (DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si) 200. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (DX-G, LX, GX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8045 201. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) 202. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 7 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Passenger's Door 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8048 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door lock knob switch in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. [ ] : Left rear door 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8049 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Driver's door (4-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 22P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Driver's door (2-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 16P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Front passenger's door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8050 1. 4-door: Remove the front passenger's window switch. 2-door: Remove the passenger's window switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. 2. Check for continuity between the front passenger's power window switch 8P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the front passenger's window switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Locations 172. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA 2-door: LX) 173. Right Side of Trunk Lid (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 8054 127. Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (USA: LX, 4-door EX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 8055 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 2-door 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened rod fastener (C). 2. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder clockwise, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged. - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. 4-door 1. If equipped, remove the trunk lid trim. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 8056 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened, rod fastener (C). 3. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). 4. Remove the rear license trim. 5. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). 6. Turn the lock cylinder (A) to release the hook (B) from the trunk lid (C), then remove the lock cylinder. 7. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged. - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Element: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8068 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8069 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8070 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8071 Heated Element: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8072 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8073 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8074 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8075 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8076 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8077 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8078 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8079 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8080 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8081 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8082 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8083 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8084 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8085 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 Heated Element: Electrical Diagrams Power Mirrors - Circuit Diagram Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 Power Mirrors - Circuit Diagram Part 2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five-terminal type B Heated Element: Testing and Inspection Five-terminal type B Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five-terminal type B > Page 8093 Heated Element: Testing and Inspection Function Test Function Test 1. 4-door: Remove the power window master switch (A). 2-door: Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (B) from the power mirror switch. 3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom: - Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4. - Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6. - Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7. Both mirrors 4. Check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: Blown No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - An open in the BRN (or PUR) wire. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. -: 2-door 5. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is no continuity, check for: An open in the BLK wire. - Poor ground (G 503, G501). - If there is continuity, check both mirrors individually as described in the next steps. *: 2-door Left mirror Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Five-terminal type B > Page 8094 6. Connect the No. 2 and No. 10 terminals, and the No. 5 (or No. 12) and No. 6 terminals with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II). If the left mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the PUR (or PNK) wire between the left mirror and the 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator. - If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair the GRN wire. - If the mirror works properly, check the mirror switch. Right mirror 7. Connect the No. 2 and No. 11 terminals, and the No. 5 (or No. 13) and No. 6 terminals with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II). If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the PUR (or BLU) wire between the right mirror and the 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator. - If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair the WHT wire. - If the mirror works properly, check the mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8098 Heated Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8099 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8100 Heated Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8101 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Actuator Test 4-door 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P (or 6P) connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B). 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator. Defogger Test 5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals of the 6P connector. These should be continuity. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check for: - An open in the wire. - A faulty mirror holder. 2-door 1. Remove the mirror mount cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8105 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B). 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator. Defogger Test 5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the 6P connector. These should be continuity. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check for: - An open in the wire. - A faulty mirror holder. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8106 Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair Power Mirror Actuator Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the mirror holder. 2. Remove the power mirror. 3. Disconnect the 3P (without power mirror defogger) or 6P (with power mirror defogger) connector from the mirror. 4. With power mirror defogger: Disassemble the power mirror 6P connector (A), and remove the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals from it. 5. Remove the screw from the gasket (A). 6. Record the terminal locations and wire colors. 7. Cut the wire harness with wire cutters, and remove the gasket. 8. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror housing (A) from the bracket (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8107 9. Remove the six screws, and the actuator (A). 10. Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator through the hole in the bracket (B) and gasket (C). 11. Install the actuator, bracket, harness clip, and gasket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8108 12. Insert the new actuator terminals into the connector in the original arrangement. 13. Apply tape to seal the intersection of the wire harness and the gasket. 14. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break the mirror when reinstalling it to the actuator. 15. Reinstall the mirror assembly on the door. 16. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth operation. 2-door 1. Remove the mirror holder. 2. Remove the power mirror. 3. Disconnect the 8P connector from the power mirror. 4. Remove the gasket (A). 5. Remove the T-10 Torx screws (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8109 6. Remove the T-10 Torx screws (A) and the mirror actuator (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8113 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8114 57. Left Side of Dash 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8115 212. Power Mirror Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si; Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8116 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8117 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8118 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8119 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information 10-002 January 20, 2010 Applies To: ALL Photos For Warranty Paint Repair Claims BACKGROUND American Honda, its factories, and its suppliers are constantly striving to increase the quality, durability, and reliability of Honda vehicles. In the interest of making such improvements, as of March 2009, American Honda requires that digital photographs be taken of paint defects submitted for warranty repair. Examples of paint defects include mismatched colors, dirt in the paint, gloss issues, paint runs, "hiding" (thin paint), etc. Photos of these defects help provide valuable product information to the factory for quicker analysis and development of countermeasures. As a result, each Honda dealer is required to: ^ Take digital photos of paint defects submitted for warranty consideration. ^ Obtain DPSM authorization prior to starting any warranty paint repair. ^ Store warranty paint claim photos for 12 months, in accordance with the document retention policy outlined in the current Service Operations Manual. NOTE: A warranty claim may be subject to debit if the photos submitted do not adequately show the customer's paint complaint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. PAINT DEFECT PHOTO GUIDELINES ^ Before photographing the paint defect, wash and completely dry the vehicle. Dirt, dust, and water spots visible in the photos may cover the paint defects and make them difficult to diagnose. ^ To properly document each warranty paint repair claim, four to five photos are required. These photos must be taken using a digital camera with "macro" focusing capabilities to provide detailed, in-focus close-ups. ^ For maximum clarity, the file size for each photo must be between 500 kb and 2,000 kb (2 mb). ZIP-compressed files are not acceptable. ^ Cell phone photos are not acceptable because of the phone's lack of focusing capability. ^ Before committing to paint repair, ensure that the photos you've taken are clear and in focus, and meet the standards and required number and type of photos for warranty claim submittal. ^ It's best to shoot multiples of each required shot; this gives you the widest choice of photos to choose from. To free up hard drive space after you've chosen your four or five best shots, delete the extra photos. PAINT DEFECT PREPARATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8125 ^ Before taking photos, outline the paint defect with a wide-tip Sharpie marker pen, a crayon, a grease pencil, masking tape, or stick-on paper notes. The marking material must contrast with the color of the paint, and should clearly identify the paint defect area. ^ If the paint defect extends across body panels, run the marking material across the panels to show the location and full extent of the paint defect. ^ Alternatively, if you have a computer program that allows you to draw on digital photographs, you can use that to outline the defect area(s) on your photos. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8126 TIPS FOR TAKING HIGH-QUALITY PAINT DEFECT PHOTOS Automotive paint has evolved into an elaborate combination of color pigments, solid metallic flakes, pearl (coated mica), and transparent toners in the clear coat that give the paint its depth, color, and gloss. As a result, some paint defects photograph better outdoors, while others do so indoors. To help decide where to photograph the defect, first determine whether the customer complaint is for a surface paint defect, or if the defect is below the paint's surface. As a general rule: ^ Surface paint defects photograph better inside a shop with artificial light, such as that produced by overhead fluorescent tubes. While viewing the vehicle through the camera's viewfinder or LCD screen, move the camera to position the fluorescent light's reflections over and around the defect, carefully watching for distortions in the light that best reveal the surface defect. ^ Most paint defects photograph better with the flash off, the exception being dirt or fingerprints embedded in the paint, which may be highlighted by the flash's reflection. To determine which method will provide the best shots, take one shot with the flash on, and another with it off, then compare the two. NOTE: Photographing with the flash off might extend the shutter time, and may require the camera to be stabilized by mounting it on a tripod, or by holding it against something rigid. ^ Paint defects under the clear coat surface photograph better outside in natural light, with the sun low in the sky, behind the photographer, and facing the defect. The hours between 8-11 a.m. and 2-6 p.m. usually provide the best light to photograph defects within the paint, as the sunlight at these times allows you to see through the clear coat into the paint. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8127 ^ When shooting a defect under the surface, first look at it straight-on, then move to look at the defect from multiple angles, carefully watching for the best light that reveals the defect, then snap that view of the defect with your camera. If needed, you may have to reposition the vehicle in relation to its light source to clearly reveal and photograph the paint defect. REQUIRED PHOTOS TO MEET HONDA WARRANTY PAINT CLAIM STANDARDS To properly document each warranty paint repair claim, four to five photos must be taken, as described below: Photo One: Take a readable, in-focus shot of the vehicle's barcoded VIN sticker on the driver's side doorjamb. Note: If you shoot this using your camera's flash, make sure the flash's reflection does not reduce the VIN sticker's readability. Photo Two: Take an orientation shot of the entire paint defect area, with the lens zoomed out wide enough to show the defect's location in relation to other body parts, such as door handles, windshield, headlights, bumper, side windows, wheel, etc. Photos Three and Four: Take the third shot closer to the defect and from a different angle, to add more detail to the warranty repair claim. Then, if needed to further support the claim, take a fourth shot from another angle to make sure that the defect and/or its full extent are completely documented. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8128 Photo Five: Take the last required shot as a sharply focused macro close-up, about 4 inches (100 mm) from the defect, showing exactly what the paint defect is. For example, if the defect is a mismatch in color, take a macro close-up of the mismatched panel and the correct color body panel together in the same shot. Note: To achieve a clear, close-up photo at this distance, you may have to manually focus the camera. UNACCEPTABLE PAINT DEFECT PHOTOGRAPH EXAMPLES This photo is unacceptable because: ^ it is out-of-focus and unreadable, and ^ the file size is too small (351 kb). This photo is unacceptable because: ^ it is too dark, and ^ it lacks focus, detail, and marking materials that identify the area and extent of the paint defect, as specified in this service bulletin and per warranty claim submittal standards. CORRECTING PAINT DEFECT PHOTO PROBLEMS USING PICTURE MANAGER Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8129 Microsoft Office Picture Manager is a very useful tool to help improve the quality of paint defect photos submitted for warranty consideration. While the Picture Manager program cannot correct blurry, out-of-focus pictures, it can adjust pictures for brightness, contrast, and color, helping to reveal details. It can also crop, resize, or compress digital photo files so that they can be e-mailed for warranty claim consideration. ^ To use this program on your PC, select Start > Programs > Microsoft Office > Microsoft Office Tools > Microsoft Office Picture Manager. ^ If the above instruction does not lead you to the Picture Manager program, select Start > Search. Under Search for Folders or Files, type "Picture Manager" in the Search window, then click on Search Now. ^ Once Microsoft Picture Manager is open, you can create a shortcut to it on your computer's desktop by clicking on Add Picture Shortcut, which is located in the upper-left screen corner below the menu bar. Correction Example # 1: Photo is too dark In Picture Manager, select Edit/Edit Pictures > Edit Using These Tools/Brightness and Contrast. Use the sliding scales to adjust the photo to the brightness and contrast that best reveal the fault. Before Picture Manager correction: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8130 After Picture Manager correction: Correction Example # 2: Photo is too large to e-mail If the photo file size exceeds 2,000 kb (2 mb), it cannot be accepted by the American Honda Warranty department. To reduce a picture's file size in Picture Manager, select Edit/Edit Pictures > Change Picture Size/Resize Settings > Predefined Width x Height. Start with Document - Small (800x600 px), and see if this reduces the picture file size to below 2,000 kb (2 mb). NOTE: Batches of paint defect photos can be resized in a single operation by doing this: ^ Select all shots you want converted from the thumbnail photos stored in your paint defect warranty claim folder. ^ Click on Edit Pictures. ^ Click on Resize. ^ Choose a resolution size, such as 800x600 px, from Predefined Width x Height. ^ Click on OK. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8131 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8132 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8133 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Defect Warranty Claim Information > Page 8134 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8135 Paint: Locations Coating Diagram (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8136 Coating Diagram (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8137 Paint: Service Precautions Paint Information Paint Safety Precautions WARNING: Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. The following precautions are important items in order to maintain a safe painting work area. - Wear an approved respirator and eye protection when painting. - Wear approved gloves and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse and wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - After the painting work is finished, wash your face and gargle with water. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames, or cigarettes. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications Paint: Application and ID Color Chart Paint Specifications Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8140 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8141 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Paint Code, U.S. 4-door Model Paint Code, U.S. 2-door Model Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8142 Paint Code, Canada 4-door Model Paint Code, Canada 4-door Model Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Paint Information Paint: Description and Operation Paint Information General Safety Precautions The 3-coat.3-bake (3C.3B) paint finish gives the Civic a deep gloss and stunning finish. This information provides information on paint defect, repair, and refinishing. Throughout, the objective is to explain in a simple yet comprehensive manner the basic items you should know about paint repairs. Select the correct material for the defect and repaint or refinish in the correct manner as described in this information. Basic Rules for Repairing a Paint Finish To repair paint damage, always use the 2-part acrylic urethane paints designated; polish and bake each of the three coats, as in production, to maintain the original film thickness, and to assure the same quality as the original finish. Outline of factory painting process Features In Each Work Process Pretreatment and electrodeposition In the pretreatment process, the entire body is degreased, cleaned, and coated with zinc phosphate by dipping. After the body has been cleaned with pure water, it is placed in an electrolytic bath of soluble primer (Cationic Electrodeposition). This produces a thorough corrosion inhibiting coating on the inner surface and corners of the body, pillars, sills, and panel joints. Chipping primer is then applied to the most susceptible areas. Intermediate coat The intermediate coat is applied to the prepared surface to further protect against damage. Top coat Enamel paint and either polyester or acrylic resin paint are used in the top coat for higher solidity, smoothness, brightness, and weather resistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Paint Information > Page 8145 Paint: Description and Operation Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat General Safety Precautions The removal of paint and undercoating by stone chips immediately exposes metal to the atmosphere, causing it to oxidize. The thickness of this oxidation increases if the process continues unchecked. The soft chipping guard primer protects against damage due to the impact of such objects. - The soft chipping guard primer coat is applied over the E. D. (Electrostatically Deposited) primer. It is followed by guide coating and top coating. - The soft chipping guard primer produces a smooth surface when dry. It should be sprayed so the thickness of the protective film is 20 microns. - A soft chipping guard primer coat is then applied to the most susceptible area. - Spray the primer surface (2-part urethane primer surfacer) on the soft chipping guard primer coating areas when you replace parts using soft chipping guard primer coat. Coating Procedures WARNING: - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Ventilate when spraying undercoat. 1. Sanding the replacement part. Use a double action sander and P400 disc sandpaper. NOTE: Do not oversand the edges or corners of the part. - Do not expose base metal. 2. Air blowing/degreasing. Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. 3. Protect from overspray. Use masking tape and paper to protect the related areas from overspray. 4. Spraying primer surfacer. - Spray about 4 to 5 coats to get 20 microns of thickness. One coat deposits about 5 to 7 microns. - Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Applying several thin coats is recommended. - Use a 2-part urethane primer surfacer and a spray gun. - Mix the primer surfacer with the correct ratio of additive and solvent. - Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer's instructions. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Paint Information > Page 8146 5. Drying. After spraying primer surfacer, allow 7 to 10 minutes of drying time, then force dry it with infrared lamps or an industrial dryer. 6. Polishing. - Check that the primer surfacer has dried thoroughly, then sand the primer surfacer. - Use a double action sander and P400 P600 disc sandpaper. 7. Intermediate coating and top coating. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8154 142. Rear of Roof (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8155 203. Moonroof Control Unit (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the moonroof is required when any of the following have occurred: - The moonroof was moved manually while the battery was dead or disconnected. - The moonroof motor was replaced with a new one. - Any of components related to the moonroof were replaced. Wind deflector - Moonroof glass - Moonroof seal - Moonroof glass bracket - Moonroof cables, etc. To reset the moonroof control unit, do these steps: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Press and hold the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Release the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times. 5. Press and hold the moonroof open switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully opened. 6. Press and hold the moonroof close switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully closed (tilted). 7. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the moonroof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 8158 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit Input Test Moonroof Control Unit Input Test NOTE: If the moonroof works OK manually, but will not work in AUTO, or reverses frequently (obstacle detection), do the moonroof calibration before proceeding with the input test. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 8159 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Check the ECM/PCM DTCs. If there is no DTC, jump the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (44P), and the moonroof control unit/motor 10P connector. 7. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the moonroof control unit/motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair Sunshade Replacement 1. Remove the drain channel. 2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade slider spacers (B). 3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers. 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the sunshade and hooks. 5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8165 6. Remove the sunshade (A). 7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and both rear sunshade base sliders (B). 8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment. 9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 1. Remove the frame: - 2-door - 4-door 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade - Moonroof motor 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting screws (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the frame. 5. Pivot the glass brackets (C) down by sliding the link lifters (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifters. 6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8169 7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel sliders (B) from both sides. 8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from both glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D). 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged pans should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8170 - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. - After reinstalling the motor, reset the moonroof control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Moonroof - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8174 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Motor Replacement 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove the motor (B). 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly. - Reset the moonroof control unit. - Check the motor operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Moonroof - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8181 138. Front of Roof Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8182 204. Moonroof Switch (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8183 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8184 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Wind Deflector Replacement 1. Open the glass fully. 2. Remove the links (A) from both sides. 3. Remove the wind deflector (A). 4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) and release the hooks (B), then remove the bases with springs (C) from both sides. 5. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal. 6. Reset the moonroof control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Replacement Drain Channel Replacement 1. Remove the glass. 2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof normally tilts up and disconnect the drain channel rods (B) on both sides. 3. Slide the drain channel (A) forward. 4. Pull the rear edge of the drain channel (A) up while pushing both clips (B), and release the channel from both hooks (C) of the drain channel slider by pulling it rearward. 5. Remove the drain channel. 6. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Push the clip portions into place securely. - Check the glass height adjustment. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8192 7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8193 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement Frame and Drain Tube Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 2-door 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A). 4. Remove the interior harness (B) by detaching the harness clips (C). 5. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the bolts (B, C), starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (D) by moving the frame forward. 6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8194 tear the seat covers. 7. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Kick panel, left or right - Driver's dashboard undercover or passenger's dashboard under cover Tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the A-pillar. Leave the string in the pillar to use when reinstalling the drain tube. 8. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Trunk side trim panel Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8195 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - When installing, tie a string to the top end of the new drain tube and pull it up into the roof. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 4-door 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A). 4. Remove the interior harness (B) by detaching the harness clips (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8196 5. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the bolts, starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (B) by moving the frame forward. 6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 7. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, and the driver's dashboard under cover or passenger's dashboard under cover. Detach the clips (B), then remove the front drain tube (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8197 8. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Trunk side trim panel Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - When installing, tie a string to the top end of the new drain tube and pull it up into the roof. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8198 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 1. Remove the frame: - 2-door - 4-door 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade - Moonroof motor 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting screws (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the frame. 5. Pivot the glass brackets (C) down by sliding the link lifters (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifters. 6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8199 7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel sliders (B) from both sides. 8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from both glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D). 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged pans should be replaced. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8200 - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. - After reinstalling the motor, reset the moonroof control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 2-door 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A). 4. Remove the interior harness (B) by detaching the harness clips (C). 5. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the bolts (B, C), starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (D) by moving the frame forward. 6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8204 7. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Kick panel, left or right - Driver's dashboard undercover or passenger's dashboard under cover Tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the A-pillar. Leave the string in the pillar to use when reinstalling the drain tube. 8. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Trunk side trim panel Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8205 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - When installing, tie a string to the top end of the new drain tube and pull it up into the roof. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 4-door 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A). 4. Remove the interior harness (B) by detaching the harness clips (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8206 5. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the bolts, starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (B) by moving the frame forward. 6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 7. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, and the driver's dashboard under cover or passenger's dashboard under cover. Detach the clips (B), then remove the front drain tube (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8207 8. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Trunk side trim panel Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - When installing, tie a string to the top end of the new drain tube and pull it up into the roof. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8211 142. Rear of Roof (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8212 203. Moonroof Control Unit (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit Resetting the moonroof is required when any of the following have occurred: - The moonroof was moved manually while the battery was dead or disconnected. - The moonroof motor was replaced with a new one. - Any of components related to the moonroof were replaced. Wind deflector - Moonroof glass - Moonroof seal - Moonroof glass bracket - Moonroof cables, etc. To reset the moonroof control unit, do these steps: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Press and hold the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Release the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times. 5. Press and hold the moonroof open switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully opened. 6. Press and hold the moonroof close switch for 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully closed (tilted). 7. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the moonroof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 8215 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit Input Test Moonroof Control Unit Input Test NOTE: If the moonroof works OK manually, but will not work in AUTO, or reverses frequently (obstacle detection), do the moonroof calibration before proceeding with the input test. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit > Page 8216 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Check the ECM/PCM DTCs. If there is no DTC, jump the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (44P), and the moonroof control unit/motor 10P connector. 7. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the moonroof control unit/motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Head Rest: Testing and Inspection Front Seat Active Headrest Inspection NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always inspect the active headrests, even if they appear reusable, by doing the following procedure. Resetting Headrest Position 1. Push the headrest (A) forward fully from the locked position to return the inside inertia lock (B). 2. Slowly raise the headrest into the normal position. Inspection 3. Fold the seat-back forward, then recline the seat-back to the first lock position, and adjust the headrest to the highest position. 4. Apply masking tape on the top of the headrest. 5. Make marks (A) on both sides at 250 mm (9.84 in.) upward from the roots of the headrest frame (B) along the back of the headrest (C) surface. Make a center of these points as a datum point (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8221 6. Push the headrest (A) forward, and check: With a scale, measure the level amount of the headrest movement. The headrest should move more than 50 mm (2.0 in.) without resistance. If it is less than 50 mm (2.0 in.), or the headrest doesn't move smoothly, replace the seat-back frame assembly: 2-door passenger's seat - 4-door passenger's seat - Driver's seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8225 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8226 106. Under Driver's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8227 70. Seat Position Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose Seat Back Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose 07-004 January 25, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Cushion Cover Is Loose PROBLEM The seat cushion cover is loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Imperfections in the seat frame reduce the clamping force of the seat cushion cover clips. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt on the seat frame in the clip attachment areas. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (11): P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 (One roll repairs about 55 seats.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: Driver's seat: 8510A1 Front passenger's seat: 8520A3 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour per seat Failed Part: Driver's seat: P/N 81531-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8071649 Front passenger's seat: P/N 81131-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8070534 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8237 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 07-004A Driver's seat 07-004B Front passenger's seat 07-004C Both seats Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear cut-resistant gloves when working with the seat frame. 1. Remove the seat: ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Set the seat on a workbench, then remove the seat cushion with the cover still attached: ^ Refer to page 20-177 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement from the list. 3. Cut six 15 mm x 20 mm pieces of felt. 4. Apply the felt to the six locations shown. 5. Reinstall the seat cushion with the cover onto the seat frame. 6. Attach the clips to the seat frame, and make sure they are securely attached. 7. Reinstall all parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other seat. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8238 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose Seat Back Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose 07-004 January 25, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Cushion Cover Is Loose PROBLEM The seat cushion cover is loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Imperfections in the seat frame reduce the clamping force of the seat cushion cover clips. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt on the seat frame in the clip attachment areas. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (11): P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 (One roll repairs about 55 seats.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: Driver's seat: 8510A1 Front passenger's seat: 8520A3 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour per seat Failed Part: Driver's seat: P/N 81531-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8071649 Front passenger's seat: P/N 81131-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8070534 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8244 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 07-004A Driver's seat 07-004B Front passenger's seat 07-004C Both seats Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear cut-resistant gloves when working with the seat frame. 1. Remove the seat: ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Set the seat on a workbench, then remove the seat cushion with the cover still attached: ^ Refer to page 20-177 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement from the list. 3. Cut six 15 mm x 20 mm pieces of felt. 4. Apply the felt to the six locations shown. 5. Reinstall the seat cushion with the cover onto the seat frame. 6. Attach the clips to the seat frame, and make sure they are securely attached. 7. Reinstall all parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other seat. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back Frame: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8245 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose 07-004 January 25, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Cushion Cover Is Loose PROBLEM The seat cushion cover is loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Imperfections in the seat frame reduce the clamping force of the seat cushion cover clips. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt on the seat frame in the clip attachment areas. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (11): P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 (One roll repairs about 55 seats.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: Driver's seat: 8510A1 Front passenger's seat: 8520A3 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour per seat Failed Part: Driver's seat: P/N 81531-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8071649 Front passenger's seat: P/N 81131-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8070534 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8254 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 07-004A Driver's seat 07-004B Front passenger's seat 07-004C Both seats Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear cut-resistant gloves when working with the seat frame. 1. Remove the seat: ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Set the seat on a workbench, then remove the seat cushion with the cover still attached: ^ Refer to page 20-177 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement from the list. 3. Cut six 15 mm x 20 mm pieces of felt. 4. Apply the felt to the six locations shown. 5. Reinstall the seat cushion with the cover onto the seat frame. 6. Attach the clips to the seat frame, and make sure they are securely attached. 7. Reinstall all parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other seat. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8255 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose 07-004 January 25, 2007 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Cushion Cover Is Loose PROBLEM The seat cushion cover is loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Imperfections in the seat frame reduce the clamping force of the seat cushion cover clips. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt on the seat frame in the clip attachment areas. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (11): P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 (One roll repairs about 55 seats.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: Driver's seat: 8510A1 Front passenger's seat: 8520A3 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour per seat Failed Part: Driver's seat: P/N 81531-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8071649 Front passenger's seat: P/N 81131-SVA-A11ZB H/C 8070534 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8261 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 07-004A Driver's seat 07-004B Front passenger's seat 07-004C Both seats Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear cut-resistant gloves when working with the seat frame. 1. Remove the seat: ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006-2007 Civic Service Manual or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Set the seat on a workbench, then remove the seat cushion with the cover still attached: ^ Refer to page 20-177 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT, and select Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement from the list. 3. Cut six 15 mm x 20 mm pieces of felt. 4. Apply the felt to the six locations shown. 5. Reinstall the seat cushion with the cover onto the seat frame. 6. Attach the clips to the seat frame, and make sure they are securely attached. 7. Reinstall all parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other seat. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 07-004 > Jan > 07 > Interior - Front Seat Cushion Cover is Loose > Page 8262 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > SN051100-07 > Nov > 05 > Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > SN051100-07 > Nov > 05 > Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seat Back-Cover Front Seat-back Cover Replacement 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. - Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement - Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions: Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components) - Replacement of the seat weight sensors - After a vehicle collision NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat covers. - On the passenger's seat, do not touch the ODS sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the headrest. 3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect and detach the side airbag connector (A). 4. Release the hook (B) and seat cushion cover (C) from the seat cushion frame spring (D), then pull the cover back and release the hooks (E). Remove the wire ties (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8274 5. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the bottom of the back cover (B) back, then gently pull down the cover to release the hooks (C) from the seat frame, and remove the panel. 6. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back cover (B). Pull the side airbag harness (C) with harness guides (D) out through holes in the seat cushion cover (E). Passenger's seat is shown; driver's seat is symmetrical. 7. Detach the harness clip (A), and pull the side airbag harness (B) out through the harness hole (C) in the seat-back cover and seat frame. Passenger's seat is shown; driver's seat is symmetrical. 8. Remove the side airbag. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8275 9. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back cover (B). Driver's seat is shown; passenger's seat is symmetrical. 10. Turn over the reinforcing cloth (A), then release the hooks (B) from the side airbag module holder (C). Passenger's seat is shown; driver's seat is symmetrical. 11. Passenger's seat: Disconnect the ODS sensor connectors (A) and ODS subharness connector (B) from the ODS unit (C), and pull them out through the hole in the seat frame. Pull the ODS subharness (D) out through the harness hole (E) in the seat-back cover (F). Detach the harness clips (G) and remove the wire tie (H). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8276 12. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the headrest guides (A), and remove them from the seat-back. 13. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat (B). 14. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat-back cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8277 15. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Reinitialize the ODS unit. - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips, hooks, and hook strips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). - Before installing the side airbag (C), make sure the reinforcing cloth (D) is fixed on the seat-back frame (E) securely. - Make sure the side airbag harness and ODS subharness (passenger's seat) are routed properly. 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. - Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions: Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement - Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions: Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components) - Replacement of the seat weight sensors - After a vehicle collision NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - On the passenger's seat, do not touch the ODS sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Oil can corrode the sensor caution it to fail. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the headrest. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8278 3. From under the seat cushion, detach the side airbag connector clip (A). 4. Release the slit in the seat cushion cover (B) from the seat cushion frame spring (C), then pull the cover back. Release the hooks (D) and remove the wire ties (E). 5. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the bottom of the back cover (B) back, then gently pull down the cover to release the hooks (C) from the seat frame, and remove the panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8279 6. Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the loop (B), and release the hook (C), then pull the seat-back cover (D) back. 7. Detach the harness clip (A), and pull the side airbag harness (B) out through the harness hole (C) in the seat-back cover and seat frame. Passenger's seat is shown; driver's seat is similar. 8. Remove the side airbag. 9. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back cover (B). Driver's seat is shown; passenger's seat is symmetrical. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8280 10. Turn over the reinforcing cloth (A), then release the hooks (B) from the module holder (C). 11. Passenger's seat: Disconnect the ODS sensor connectors (A) and ODS subharness connector (B) from the ODS unit (C), and pull them in through the hole in the seat frame. Pull the ODS subharness (D) out through the harness hole (E) in the seat-back cover (F). Detach the harness clips (G), and remove the wire tie (H). 12. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the headrest guides (A), and remove them from the seat-back. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8281 13. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat (B). 14. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat-back cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8282 15. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Reinitialize the ODS unit. - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips, hooks, and hook strips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). - Before installing the side airbag (B), make sure the reinforcing cloth (C) is fixed on the seat-back frame (D) securely. - Make sure the side airbag harness and ODS subharness (passenger's seat) are routed properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8283 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Remove the seat side bolster. 2. Release all the hook strips (A), and fold back the seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover from the hooks (C). 3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and to prevent wrinkles when installing a side bolster cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hook strips and staples. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8284 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seat Cushion Cover Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. - Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions: Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement - Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions: Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components) - Replacement of the seat weight sensors - After a vehicle collision NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat belt buckle. 3. Passenger's seat: Remove the screws, then remove the rear seat access knob (A). 4. Pull back the cap (A) to release the hooks (B), and remove the screws, then remove the height handle (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8285 5. Remove the recline outer cover (A). 1. Remove the recline knob (B) and screw (C). 2. Gently pull out the cover, then detach the clips (D), and release the hooks (E). 3. Release the rear seat access lever (F). 6. Gently pull out the center cover (A), then detach the clip, and release the hooks (B). Driver's seat is shown; passenger's seat is similar. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8286 7. From under the seat cushion, disconnect and detach the connectors: - Passenger's seat: Seat weight sensor connectors (A) - Side airbag connector (B) - ODS subharness connector (C) - Driver's seat: Side airbag connector (B) 8. Release the hook (D) and seat cushion cover (E) from the seat cushion frame spring (F), then pull the cover back and release the hooks (G). Detach the harness clip (H), and remove the wire ties (I). 9. Pull the side airbag harness (A), ODS subharness (B) (passenger's seat), and harness guides (C) out through the holes (D) in the seat cushion cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8287 10. Release the hook strips (A, B) from the seat frame (C). 11. Release the hook (A) from under the seat cushion. 12. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the seat frame (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8288 13. Release the clips (A) from under the seat cushion (B). 14. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat cushion cover. 15. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hook strips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. - Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions: Driver's seat position sensor replacement Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8289 - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement - Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions: Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components) - Replacement of the seat weight sensors - After a vehicle collision NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat belt buckle. 3. Pull back the cap (A) to release the hooks (B), and remove the screws, then remove the height adjuster handle (C). 4. Remove the recline cover (A). 1. Remove the recline knob (B) and screw (C). 2. Gently pull out the cover, then detach the clip (D), and release the hooks (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8290 5. Gently pull out the center cover (A), then detach the clip, and release the hooks (B). Driver's seat is shown; passenger's seat is similar. 6. From under the seat cushion, detach the side airbag connector clip (A). 7. Release slits in the seat cushion cover (B) from the seat cushion frame spring (C), then pull the cover back. Release the hooks (D) and remove the wire ties (E). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8291 8. Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the loop (B). 9. Release the hook strips (A, B) from the seat frame (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8292 10. Release the hook (A) from under the seat cushion. 11. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the seat frame (B). 12. Release the hooks (A) from under the seat cushion (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8293 13. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover a II the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat-back cover. 14. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips, hooks, and hook strips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8294 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Cover Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement Seat-back - Fold Down - 2-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back. 2. Remove these headrest. 3. Remove the screw, then remove the center belt guide (A). 4. Release the lower hook (A), and clips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8295 5. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), then release the hook strips (B). 6. Pull out the seat-back frame (A) from the pad (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. 8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the hooks (B) of the horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on the pad, and remove the clips (E), then remove the seat-back cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8296 9. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hook strips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Seat-back - Fold Down - 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back. 2. Remove the headrest. 3. Remove the screw, then remove the center belt guide (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8297 4. Release the lower hook (A), and clips. 5. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), then release the hook strips(B). 6. Pull out the seat-back frame (A) from the pad (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8298 8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the clips (B), then remove the seat-back cover. 9. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hook strips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Seat-back - Split Fold Down - 2-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back. 2. Remove these headrest. 3. Left seat-back: Remove the screw, then remove the center belt guide (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8299 4. Release the fastener (A), the lower hook (B), and clips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8300 5. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), then release the hook strips (B). 6. Pull out the seat-back frame (A) from the pad (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. The left seat-back is shown; the right seat-back is similar. 7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8301 8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the hooks (B) of the horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on the pad, and remove the clips (E), then remove the seat-back cover. 9. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hook strips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Seat-back - Split Fold Down - 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back. 2. Remove these items: - Armrest - Headrest Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8302 3. Left seat-back: Remove the screws, then remove the center belt guide (A). 4. Left seat-back: Pull out the center portion of the armrest back panel (A) to release upper edge of the armrest back panel. 5. Left seat-back: Pull out the armrest back panel (A) to release the hook (B) from the seat-back frame and hook (C) from the seat-back cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8303 6. Release the lower hook (A), and clips (B,C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8304 7. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), then release the hook strips (B). 8. Pull out the seat-back frame (A) from the pad (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. The left seat-back is shown; the right seat-back is similar. 9. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8305 10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the clips (B), then remove the seat-back cover. 11. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8306 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Cover Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat cushion. 2. From the back of the seat-back, release the clips (A), then remove the insulator (B). 3. Release all the clips (A), in the seat cushion cover (B) through the holes in the seat cushion pad, and fold back the seat cushion cover. 4. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat cushion cover (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8307 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat cushion. 2. From the back of the seat-back, pass both lower retainers (A) through the slots in the seat cushion pad, and release all the clips (B), and fold back the seat cushion cover. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), from the seat cushion cover (B) through the hole in the seat cushion pad, then remove the seat cushion cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Back-Cover > Page 8308 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch: Service and Repair Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement Fold Down Rear Seat/Split Fold Down Rear Seat NOTE: Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf: - 2-door - 4-door 2. From the trunk, disconnect the seat-back release cable (A) from the seat-back latch (B). 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch (A). 4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the release cable is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch Cable: Service and Repair Rear Seat-back Release Lever/Cable Removal/Installation Fold Down Rear Seat/Split Fold Down Rear Seat NOTE: Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim. 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. From the trunk room, detach the cable clip. 3. 2-door: Remove the rear seat-back release cable (A) out through the slit (B) in the trim panel. 4. Disconnect the seat-back release cable (A) from the seat-back latch (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8315 5. Push the tab (A) to release the hook (B), and rotate the seat-back release lever (C) clockwise to release the hook (D). 6. Install the release lever/cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the release cable is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide Seat Track: Customer Interest Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide 06-031 June 9, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Clicks When Sliding or Does Not Slide SYMPTOM A seat clicks when you slide it forward or backward, or it won't slide. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The slide bar is bent or disconnected. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the slide bar. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81526-SNA-A12 H/C 8240111 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8324 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Sit in the front seat, pull up on the slide bar, and slide the seat all the way forward and backward. Do this with both front seats. If either seat makes a ratchet-type clicking noise or doesn't move, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear gloves to protect your hands from possible sharp edges. 1. Remove the seat. ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FRONT SEAT, then select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Lay the seat on a table. NOTE: Lay a towel or blanket under the seat to protect it from scratches or damage. 3. Pull up on the slide bar, then try to slide the seat frame forward and backward: ^ If the frame makes a clicking noise while moving, go to step 6. ^ If the seat sticks, or does not slide, go to step 4. 4. Passenger's seat (2-door models equipped with walk-in lever): Press the walk-in lever at the back of the seat, and slide the seat frame fully back (seat is fully forward). All driver's seats and remaining passenger's seats: Determine which seat rail is locking up by pulling back on the slide bar, then sliding each rail independently. 5. Slide the seat fully forward: ^ Place the seat upright. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8325 ^ If the outboard (next to the door) rail is locked up, remove the recline cover. ^ On the driver's seat, adjust the seat height to its highest position. ^ Release the locking mechanism: - Locate the hole on top of the jammed rail above the locking mechanism. - Release the spring-activated lock by inserting the short end of a 6-mm Allen wrench in the hole. - While pressing down on the locking mechanism, use your other hand to pull back on the slide bar, and slide the seat fully forward. 6. Lay the seat down on its back cover. Remove the slide bar by gently tapping up on each side of it with a dead blow hammer or rubber mallet. NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8326 Do not use a regular hammer. 7. Install the new slide bar: ^ Make sure the mounting ends are aligned with the rail locks. ^ Use your thumb to hold the release bar to the rail lock. ^ Gently tap the release bar to set it in place. ^ Repeat on the opposite side of the slide bar. 8. Press the slide bar, and make sure both rails move freely and quietly. 9. Reinstall the seat. Test the seat movement. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8327 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide 06-031 June 9, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Seat Clicks When Sliding or Does Not Slide SYMPTOM A seat clicks when you slide it forward or backward, or it won't slide. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The slide bar is bent or disconnected. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the slide bar. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81526-SNA-A12 H/C 8240111 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8333 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Sit in the front seat, pull up on the slide bar, and slide the seat all the way forward and backward. Do this with both front seats. If either seat makes a ratchet-type clicking noise or doesn't move, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Wear gloves to protect your hands from possible sharp edges. 1. Remove the seat. ^ Refer to page 20-162 of the 2006 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword FRONT SEAT, then select Front Seat Removal/Installation from the list. 2. Lay the seat on a table. NOTE: Lay a towel or blanket under the seat to protect it from scratches or damage. 3. Pull up on the slide bar, then try to slide the seat frame forward and backward: ^ If the frame makes a clicking noise while moving, go to step 6. ^ If the seat sticks, or does not slide, go to step 4. 4. Passenger's seat (2-door models equipped with walk-in lever): Press the walk-in lever at the back of the seat, and slide the seat frame fully back (seat is fully forward). All driver's seats and remaining passenger's seats: Determine which seat rail is locking up by pulling back on the slide bar, then sliding each rail independently. 5. Slide the seat fully forward: ^ Place the seat upright. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8334 ^ If the outboard (next to the door) rail is locked up, remove the recline cover. ^ On the driver's seat, adjust the seat height to its highest position. ^ Release the locking mechanism: - Locate the hole on top of the jammed rail above the locking mechanism. - Release the spring-activated lock by inserting the short end of a 6-mm Allen wrench in the hole. - While pressing down on the locking mechanism, use your other hand to pull back on the slide bar, and slide the seat fully forward. 6. Lay the seat down on its back cover. Remove the slide bar by gently tapping up on each side of it with a dead blow hammer or rubber mallet. NOTE: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8335 Do not use a regular hammer. 7. Install the new slide bar: ^ Make sure the mounting ends are aligned with the rail locks. ^ Use your thumb to hold the release bar to the rail lock. ^ Gently tap the release bar to set it in place. ^ Repeat on the opposite side of the slide bar. 8. Press the slide bar, and make sure both rails move freely and quietly. 9. Reinstall the seat. Test the seat movement. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-031 > Jun > 06 > Interior - Front Seat Clicks When Sliding/Won't Slide > Page 8336 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set 07-006 April 3, 2009 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Is On With DTC P1172 or P2A00 (Supersedes 07-006, dated August 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The MIL is on with PGM-FI DTC P1172 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit out of range, high) and/or P2A00 (air fuel sensor [sensor 1] circuit range/performance problem). PROBABLE CAUSE The air/fuel sensor is damaged by moisture in the exhaust system during engine warm-up. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8342 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8343 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8344 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8350 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8351 SOFTWARE INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 07-006 > Apr > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1172 Or P2A00 Set > Page 8352 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8357 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key cylinder switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 9 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 8 and No. 5 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8361 Heated Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8362 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8363 Heated Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8364 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8370 15. Front of Engine Compt. ('06 USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8371 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 71. Security Hood Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si) 72. Security Hood Switch (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8375 130. Driver's Dr. (Frt. Pass. Sim) DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si 137. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8376 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 199. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Driver's (DX-G, LX, EX, GX, Si) 200. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (DX-G, LX, GX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8377 201. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) 202. Door Lock Actuator/Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: DX-G, LX, GX, EX; '07 USA Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 7 and No. 5 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Passenger's Door 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. - 2-door. - 4-door. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8380 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No. 8 [No. 7] and No. 10 [No. 5] terminals when the door lock knob switch in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. [ ] : Left rear door 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8381 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Driver's door (4-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 22P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 17 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 11 and No. 19 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Driver's door (2-door) 1. Remove the power window master switch and disconnect its connector. 2. Check for continuity between the power window master switch 16P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. (With security) - There should be no continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. (With security) - There should be continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power window master switch. Front passenger's door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8382 1. 4-door: Remove the front passenger's window switch. 2-door: Remove the passenger's window switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. 2. Check for continuity between the front passenger's power window switch 8P connector terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 6 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCK position. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the front passenger's window switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8386 Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8387 57. Left Side of Dash 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8388 212. Power Mirror Switch (USA: LX, EX, GX, Si; Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8389 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8390 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8391 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8392 2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Locations SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8396 SRS - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8397 106. Under Driver's Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8398 70. Seat Position Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Moonroof - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8402 138. Front of Roof Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8403 204. Moonroof Switch (EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8404 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8405 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light switch 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8409 167. Middle of Trunk Lid (Canada; USA: DX) 168. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: LX; GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8410 169. Middle of Trunk Lid (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8411 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams 88. Trunk Latch Switch (USA: DX, LX; Canada; GX) 128. Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid/Latch Switch (USA: EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8412 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the trunk lid latch assembly (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 [No. 3] and No. 2 terminals. [ ] : With trunk release - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations Sound Proofing / Insulation: Locations Insulator Locations Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 8416 Insulator Sizes (Part 1) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 8417 Insulator Sizes (Part 2) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 8418 Insulator Sizes (Part 3) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Splash Shield Splash Guard: Service and Repair Front Splash Shield Front Splash Shield Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the splash shield (A). 1. Remove the clips (B, C) that secure the front inner fender (D) and splash shield to the body. 2. From under the front bumper (E), remove the clips (F). 3. From under the body, remove the clips (G). 4. Release the hooks (H) of the splash shield, then pull the splash shield out. NOTE: To remove the clips B, C, F and G, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (I) on its head. 2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. 4-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the splash shield (A). 1. Remove the clips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and front splash shield to the body. 2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E, F). 3. From under the body, remove the clips (G). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Splash Shield > Page 8423 4. Release the hooks (H) of the front splash shield, then pull the splash shield out. NOTE: To remove the clips B, E, F and G, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (I) on its head. 2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Splash Shield > Page 8424 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Protector Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the left rear wheel 2. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). 3. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Splash Shield > Page 8425 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Rear Strake Replacement Rear Strake Replacement For Some Models Remove the bolts, then remove the rear strake (A) from the body. 1. Remove the clips (A) and bolts (B), then remove the rear floor under cover (C). Take care not to scratch the rear bumper (D). 2. Install the strike in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Splash Shield > Page 8426 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Rear Floor Undercover Replacement Rear Floor Undercover Replacement For Some Models 1. Remove the clips (A) and bolts (B), then remove the rear floor under cover (C). Take care not to scratch the rear bumper (D). 2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair Spoiler: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Spoiler Replacement 2-door - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 1. Open the trunk lid, and remove the nuts (A) from inside the trunk lid, and push out the clips (B). 2. Close the trunk lid. Pull the trunk lid spoiler (A) up to release the clips from the grommets (B) on the trunk lid while removing the adhesive tape (C), then remove the spoiler. 3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal. Replace the clips with new ones. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Removal Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8434 - Remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the upper member separator. - Remove front wheelhouse and front damper extension B as an assembly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8435 - Check the damper housing position, and check for damage. - If necessary, replace the damper housing, damper housing extension and front damper extension A as an assembly. Installation 1. Clamp the new damper housing, front wheelhouse, front damper extension, front bulkhead, and measure the front compartment diagonally. 2. Check the body dimensions. - Engine compartment - Engine/transmission mount positions - Front damper extension position - Repair chart top view - Repair chart side view 3. Tack weld the new parts and front bulkhead into position. 4. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position. 5. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, then check for differences in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8436 6. Do the main welding. - Weld the damper housing (A), front wheelhouse (B), front damper extension A (C) and front damper extension B (D). - From the passenger's side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower (E) and damper housing extension (F). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8437 7. Weld the front damper extension B (A) and front end outrigger (B). Passenger's Side 8. Install the new upper member separator (A) to the damper extension bulkhead (B). NOTE: Apply the sealer (C) all the way around the separator and inside of the wheelhouse upper member (D), without gaps. 9. Weld the wheelhouse upper member (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Turn on the wiper switch, and move the windshield wiper arms 90°. 2. Remove the center cowl cover (A). 1. Remove the hood rear seal (B) by pulling it out. 2. Remove the clips (C). 3. Release three front hooks (D) from the edge of the under-cowl panel (E). 4. Detach the clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the cover up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (H). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (I). 4. If necessary, remove the bolts (A, B), then remove the under-cowl panel (C). 5. Remove these items: - Windshield wiper arms - Front fender trim, both sides Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8443 6. Detach the clips by carefully pulling the side cowl cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing the hooks (B) from the front fender. Take care not to scratch the body. Repeat this step for the other side cowl cover, and disconnect the windshield washer tube. 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8448 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door weatherstrip (F). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (G) securely. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8453 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8454 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8455 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8456 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Remove the door sash outer trim. 3. Starting at the rear, slowly pull up the door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Release the front portion of the glass outer molding (A) from the power mirror (B). 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 8459 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Slide the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) forward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 8460 5. Twist the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) to pull the rear hook (B) out from the inside of the door, then remove the weatherstrip. 6. Push the clip portions of new front door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on glove to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8468 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8469 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8470 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8471 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8472 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Rear door glass - Quarter glass 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front portion of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8473 4. Push the rear hook (A) out from inside of the door, then remove the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Push the clip portions of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Apply clear weatherstrip sealant (B) into the channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around. 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the center of the trunk lid opening, and install the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 4. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8481 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8482 112. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8483 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8487 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8488 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8489 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8494 73. Under Left Side of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8495 112. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8496 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch, and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8500 60. Steering Wheel (LX, EX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8501 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8502 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS before doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the steering wheel trim (B). 3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or more positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 141. Airbag Cur-off Indicator, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8507 Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test 1. Remove the center panel: - With navigation - Without navigation 2. Remove the screws (A) and the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B) from center panel. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity, replace the bulb. 4. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Locations Conventional Brake Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8513 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8514 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8515 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8516 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8517 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8518 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8519 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8520 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8521 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8522 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8523 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8524 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8525 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8526 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8527 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8528 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8529 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8530 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8531 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8532 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8533 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8534 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8535 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8536 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8537 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8538 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8539 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8540 Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8545 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8546 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8547 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8548 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8549 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8550 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8551 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8552 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8553 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8554 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8555 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8556 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8557 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8558 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8559 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8560 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8561 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8562 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8563 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8564 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8565 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8566 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8567 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8568 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8569 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8570 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8571 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8572 43. Cigarette Lighter (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8573 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8574 Diagram 155-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes Clock: Customer Interest Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes 08-084 November 4, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Time on Display Changes Randomly SYMPTOM The customer notices that the clock shown on the subdisplay, the audio unit, or the navigation screen randomly changes time, but never by exactly 1 hour. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a problem with the real-time clock circuit in the navigation unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the navigation unit with a remanufactured unit. PARTS INFORMATION For information on navigation unit ordering, see Service Bulletin 06-001, Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange, and Audio and DVD Player Out-of-Warranty Repair. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes > Page 8583 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the customer complains the clock jumps by an hour, this bulletin does not apply. It is likely one of the following: - A time zone issue. If the customer lives or works close to a time zone boundary, the clock may jump forward or back by one hour. Select Setup, then Clock Adjustment, and make sure Auto Time Zone is set to OFF. - Daylight saving time issue. Refer to Service Bulletin 07-026, Navigation Software Updates for Daylight Saving Time (DST), DVD Read Error Message, and Other Listed Symptoms. After applying the bulletin, select Setup, then Clock Adjustment, and make sure Daylight Savings is set to ON. When the symptom is occuring, typically when the ignition switch is first turned to ON (II), press the SETUP button, then select Time Adjustment. Is the clock time displayed the same incorrect time as the clock adjustment screen, and do they jump together? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - If the symptom cannot be duplicated, it is an intermittent failure and the vehicle is OK at this time. If the vehicle returns with the same complaint, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. - If the times are different between the navigation time adjustment screen and the sub-display or audio unit display, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the navigation unit: - Refer to section 23 of the applicable service manual, or - Online, enter keywords NAVI REMOVAL, and select Navigation Unit Removal/Installation from the list. 2. To avoid comebacks, check online, and apply any navigation patches or software updates for the navigation unit. Online, enter keyword SOFTWARE and select any applicable service bulletins from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes > Page 8584 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes Clock: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes 08-084 November 4, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Time on Display Changes Randomly SYMPTOM The customer notices that the clock shown on the subdisplay, the audio unit, or the navigation screen randomly changes time, but never by exactly 1 hour. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a problem with the real-time clock circuit in the navigation unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the navigation unit with a remanufactured unit. PARTS INFORMATION For information on navigation unit ordering, see Service Bulletin 06-001, Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange, and Audio and DVD Player Out-of-Warranty Repair. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes > Page 8590 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the customer complains the clock jumps by an hour, this bulletin does not apply. It is likely one of the following: - A time zone issue. If the customer lives or works close to a time zone boundary, the clock may jump forward or back by one hour. Select Setup, then Clock Adjustment, and make sure Auto Time Zone is set to OFF. - Daylight saving time issue. Refer to Service Bulletin 07-026, Navigation Software Updates for Daylight Saving Time (DST), DVD Read Error Message, and Other Listed Symptoms. After applying the bulletin, select Setup, then Clock Adjustment, and make sure Daylight Savings is set to ON. When the symptom is occuring, typically when the ignition switch is first turned to ON (II), press the SETUP button, then select Time Adjustment. Is the clock time displayed the same incorrect time as the clock adjustment screen, and do they jump together? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - If the symptom cannot be duplicated, it is an intermittent failure and the vehicle is OK at this time. If the vehicle returns with the same complaint, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. - If the times are different between the navigation time adjustment screen and the sub-display or audio unit display, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the navigation unit: - Refer to section 23 of the applicable service manual, or - Online, enter keywords NAVI REMOVAL, and select Navigation Unit Removal/Installation from the list. 2. To avoid comebacks, check online, and apply any navigation patches or software updates for the navigation unit. Online, enter keyword SOFTWARE and select any applicable service bulletins from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-084 > Nov > 08 > Instruments - Time On Display Randomly Changes > Page 8591 Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8598 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8599 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 189. Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8603 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8604 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8608 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8609 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Cap Message Information CHECK FUEL CAP, TIGHTEN FUEL CAP Messages NOTE: This article applies to '05-06 Accords, 06 Civics, 05-06 CR-Vs, 05-06 Elements, '05-06 Odysseys, '05-06 Pilots, '06 Ridgelines, and '06 S2000s. If a vehicle's fuel fill cap is loose or missing, and the ECM/PCM detects an EVAP system leak when it runs the EVAP monitor, the CHECK FUEL CAP message appears on the information display when the engine is started. (On '06 Odyssey Touring models and future Honda models, it's the TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message.) A temporary DTC is also stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If this happens, there's really no need for the owner to bring the vehicle in for service. All he or she has to do is shut off the engine and make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and it's properly tightened (it's one or three clicks, depending on what's written on the cap). Although the owner can cycle the message from the display with the reset button (the actual button name varies by model), the temporary DTC that's setting the message is still there. This means the message never really goes away. It can be cycled back with the reset button, and it comes on again if the ignition switch is cycled or the engine is restarted. This message keeps coming back until the EVAP monitor runs again and it finds no EVAP system leak. This could take several days, even weeks, depending on how often the vehicle is driven. If when the next EVAP monitor runs, the cap wasn't tightened or there's another EVAP system leak detected, the MIL comes on and the message goes off. A permanent DTC is now stored in the ECM/PCM's memory. If the owner now tightens the cap, the MIL should go off afier the next EVAP monitor run, yet, this could still take days or weeks. If the MIL is still on after that monitor run, then it's time to bring the vehicle in for service. If the vehicle comes into your shop with the fuel cap message or the MIL on, make sure the fuel fill cap is in place and properly tightened. Record the DTC, then clear it with the HDS, and run the EVAP system function test. If there's still a problem, press on with normal troubleshooting Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8618 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8619 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8620 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8621 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8622 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8623 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8624 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8625 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8626 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8627 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8628 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8629 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8630 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8631 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8632 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8633 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8634 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8635 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8636 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8637 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8638 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8639 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8640 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8641 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8642 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8643 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8644 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8648 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8649 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. - If no problem is found, go to step 3. - If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear cushion. 5. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member (A). 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B). 8. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 9. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8650 - a short in the ORN (2-door: PUR) wire to ground. - an open in the ORN (2-door: PUR) or LT GRN (2-door: ORN) wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. 12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 13. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F" with the float at F. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate "F", replace the gauge assembly. - If the gauge is OK, the test is complete. NOTE: - The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. - Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8651 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original audio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the anti-theft codes and write down the audio presets before disconnecting the negative cable from the battery. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the audio, or the navigation code, then enter the audio presets; set the clock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8658 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8659 Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8668 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8669 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8670 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8671 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8677 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8678 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8679 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8680 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8681 Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8682 66. Left Side of Dash 67. Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8683 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagrams 209. Gauge Control Module (Speedo) 236. Gauge Control Module (Tach) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8687 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8688 176. Ignition Key Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8689 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Indicator Test 1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test. - If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2. - If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module (tachometer). 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. - If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. - If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3. 3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information The Maintenance Minder System: Another Look NOTE: This article applies to '06 Accords, '06 Civics, '05-06 Odysseys (all models except Touring), '06 Pilots, '06 Ridgelines, and '06 S2000s. In the September '05 issue of ServiceNews, we told you all about the maintenance minder system (see the article "Taking the Mystery Out of the Maintenance Minder System"). There are a couple of more things we need to mention about this system. Maintenance Minder Indicator - Unlike the MAINT REQ'D indicator found in models without the maintenance minder system, this indicator is an icon (it's an amber-colored wrench) instead of text. And, because it uses a different logic from the MAINT REQ'D indicator, you'll never see it blink. Here's how the logic works for the maintenance minder indicator: Negative Mileage Display - If the oil life drops to 0% and you just ignore it, the engine oil life display starts clicking off the number of miles past the point the oil life reached 0%. How negative mileage is displayed and when it's displayed depends on what model and trim level you're looking at, so check the appropriate O/M for details. Regardless of the model, though, when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the 0% and negative mileage shown starts blinking as a reminder to get that oil changed ASAP. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 8697 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Maintenance Minder System Information Taking the Mystery Out of the Maintenance Minder System To help vehicle owners know when scheduled maintenance is due, Honda has introduced the maintenance minder system in these models. ^ '06 Accord ^ '06 Civic ^ '05-06 Odyssey ^ '06 Pilot ^ '06 Ridgeline ^ '06 S2000 The maintenance minder system shows engine oil life in the information display to let you know when it's time to have the engine oil replaced and regular maintenance done. There's no longer a maintenance schedule in the O/M. The system shows engine oil life as a percentage, which drops over time as the vehicle racks up miles. It starts out at 1000/0 with fresh engine oil, and winds down to 0%, signaling the oil life is over. The system counts down oil life based on engine operating conditions (both normal and severe). If the engine runs at higher temperatures and rpm, or at low temperatures during short trips, the oil life will deplete faster than an engine running under more normal conditions. Depending on the oil life percentage, the system shows three different messages when you turn the the ignition switch to ON (II). Here's what you could see: When the oil life reaches 15%, you'll also see a two-part maintenance item code. '06 RIDGELINE SHOWN Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 8698 This code tells you what items need servicing when you have the engine oil replaced. The first part of the code is the main code. It's either A or B, never both. Here's what they mean: The second part of the code is the subcode. It's numbered I thru 5 in vehicles without 4WD, and I thru 6 in vehicles with 4WD. These subcodes can show up in any combination. Here's what they mean: The system automatically moves up maintenance items or delays them so they get done along with engine oil replacement. For example, if tire rotation is normally done at 7,500 miles, but the oil life ends around 6,000 miles, the system will move up tire rotation. Or, if the oil life appears to be ending around 9,000 miles, the system will delay tire rotation. In either case, you would see the maintenance item code Al in the information display. Some scheduled maintenance items are independent of the maintenance minder system. The brake fluid should be replaced every 3 years, the idle speed should be inspected every 160,000 miles, and the valves adjusted if they're noisy. And there are driving situations where a few maintenance items deviate from the maintenance minder system. These items are affected: ^ Air filters - the air cleaner element and dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 15,000 miles if you drive the vehicle often in areas that are regularly dusty or dirty (high concentration of soot from industry or diesel-powered vehicles). ^ ATF - the ATF should be replaced every 30,000 miles if you use the vehicle mostly for towing or you drive in mountainous areas. This doesn't apply if the vehicle has ATF life monitoring. The '06 Civic is the only vehicle that monitors ATF life at this time. ^ Timing belt (if equipped) - the timing belt should be replaced every 60,000 miles if you drive the vehicle often in areas that commonly have temperatures above 110°F or below -20°F. Keep in mind, only a small percentage of vehicle owners are actually involved in these driving situations. All other vehicle owners should follow the maintenance minder system. For owners who only drive their vehicles occasionally, and the oil life never reaches 15% at the end a 12-month period since the engine oil was last replaced, the engine oil should be replaced and the oil life indicator reset to 1000/0. When resetting the oil life indicator, the system will flash the maintenance item code that would have come up when the oil life reached 15%. Make sure all maintenance is done according to that maintenance item code. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Additional Maintenance Minder Information > Page 8699 The maintenance minder info is stored in the FCM/PCM and in the gauge control module. The FCM/PCM keeps track of the oil life, while the gauge control module handles the service items. If you replace the FCM/PCM, make sure you transfer the maintenance minder info from the old FCM/PCM to the new one. And if you replace the gauge control module, remember to transfer the odometer reading from the old gauge control module to the new one. When replacing the FCM/PCM, if you run into any problems transferring the maintenance minder info, replace the engine oil. The system will start the oil life at 100%. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8700 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Maintenance Minder References: - For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to Indicator Based Service. See: Maintenance/Service Intervals/Condition/Indicator Based Maintenance Services/Indicator Based Service - For information on how to reset the display, refer to the article under Resetting the Maintenance Minder. See: Service and Repair The vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the information display to show when to perform an engine oil replacement and other indicated maintenance service. Based on the engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage. Engine Oil Life Display To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the engine oil life indicator appears. The remaining engine oil life is displayed on the information display according to the following table: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8701 *1: DX and Canadian DX-G *2: LX, EX, EX-I and Si If the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the engine oil life indicator will display every time the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator will also come on, and the maintenance item code(s) for other scheduled maintenance items needing service will be displayed next to the engine oil life indicator. The 15 and 10 percent oil life indicator reminds you that the time is coming soon to perform the required maintenance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8702 When the remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a "SERVICE" message along with the same maintenance item code(s), every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance item code or codes indicate the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to "Maintenance Minder Code Definitions" You can switch the display to the odometer, the trip meter, and the outside temperature indicator (if equipped) by pushing the SEL/RESET button on the dashboard repeatedly. When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 percent, the maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then it goes out if you switch the information display. When you see this message, the indicated maintenance should be performed as soon as possible. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8703 When the remaining engine oil life is 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator will blink. The display comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) also comes on and remains on in the instrument panel. When you see this message, the indicated maintenance should be immediately performed. If you do not perform the indicated maintenance, negative mileage is displayed and begins to blink after the vehicle has been driven 10 miles (10 km) or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8704 more. Negative mileage means your vehicle has passed the maintenance required point. Have the indicated maintenance done immediately. You can change the information display from the engine oil life display to the odometer, the trip meter, or the outside temperature (if equipped) every time you press and release the SEL/RESET button. When the engine oil life is 0 percent or negative mileage, the maintenance minder indicator (Wrench icon) remains on even if you change the information display. Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display. Refer to "Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display". Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items All maintenance items displayed in the information display are in code. For an explanation of Maintenance Minder Codes and what service should be performed, refer to Indicator Based Service. See: Maintenance/Service Intervals/Condition/Indicator Based Maintenance Services/Indicator Based Service Important Maintenance Precautions If you complete the required service but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because there will no longer be an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8705 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display Reference: - For information regarding interpreting the maintenance minder display refer to Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator / Description and Operation / "Reading the Maintenance Minder". Reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see "OIL LIFE 100%" on the information display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Reset the Maintenance Minder as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Press the SEL/RESET knob (or button if equipped) repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed. 3. Press the SEL/RESET button for about 10 seconds. The engine oil life and the maintenance item code(s) will blink. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8706 4. Press the SEL/RESET button for more than 5 seconds. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to "100." Important Maintenance Precautions If you complete the required service but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because there will no longer be an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8710 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function. Does the MIL indicator flash? Yes - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module (tachometer), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control module (tachometer). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? Yes - Go to step 5. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect the HDS. 7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A31 and body ground. Is there continuity? Yes - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A31) and the SRS unit, the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension Odometer: Recalls Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension 06-085 May 9, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage (Supersedes 06-085, dated January 22, 2008, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND On December 29, 2007, a federal court provided final approval of the settlement of a class action lawsuit alleging that the odometers on certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models, and some 2007 Fit models, were overstating mileage. As part of the settlement, American Honda is extending the mileage-based coverage period of all warranties, Honda Care Service Contracts, and Honda Certified Used Vehicles by 5 percent on the above referenced vehicles. The time limits for all warranties are unchanged. VEHICLES AFFECTED The vehicles affected by this settlement include certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models and some 2007 Fit models purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006. The affected region is the United States (including the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands). Affected vehicles registered to customers with a military or a NATO address are also included in this settlement. The most effective way to check a vehicle's warranty coverage is by a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION American Honda notified affected customers by mail or publication. The notices were sent to original registered purchasers, informing them of the terms of the settlement. Notice was also published in a national newspaper. To view the content of the mailed notice, as well as other documents regarding the settlement, or for additional information, please refer to these sources: Website: www.odosettlementinfo.com Information Center: (888) 888-3082 CORRECTIVE ACTION *On affected vehicles, the settlement requires you to honor a 5 percent increase in the mileage coverage period for all warranties, all Honda Certified Used Vehicles, and those Honda Care Service Contracts purchased only by the original owners.* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Use the chart as a reference for converting most standard warranty mileage limits to the extended mileage coverage. Use the chart as a reference to all service bulletins affected by the extended mileage coverage. In addition to the 5 percent mileage increase in warranty coverage, any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension > Page 8719 consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. WARRANTY MILEAGE CONVERSION NOTE: Follow normal warranty claim coding when submitting a claim. SERVICE BULLETINS AFFECTED BY EXTENDED MILEAGE COVERAGE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension 06-085 May 9, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage (Supersedes 06-085, dated January 22, 2008, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND On December 29, 2007, a federal court provided final approval of the settlement of a class action lawsuit alleging that the odometers on certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models, and some 2007 Fit models, were overstating mileage. As part of the settlement, American Honda is extending the mileage-based coverage period of all warranties, Honda Care Service Contracts, and Honda Certified Used Vehicles by 5 percent on the above referenced vehicles. The time limits for all warranties are unchanged. VEHICLES AFFECTED The vehicles affected by this settlement include certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models and some 2007 Fit models purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006. The affected region is the United States (including the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands). Affected vehicles registered to customers with a military or a NATO address are also included in this settlement. The most effective way to check a vehicle's warranty coverage is by a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION American Honda notified affected customers by mail or publication. The notices were sent to original registered purchasers, informing them of the terms of the settlement. Notice was also published in a national newspaper. To view the content of the mailed notice, as well as other documents regarding the settlement, or for additional information, please refer to these sources: Website: www.odosettlementinfo.com Information Center: (888) 888-3082 CORRECTIVE ACTION *On affected vehicles, the settlement requires you to honor a 5 percent increase in the mileage coverage period for all warranties, all Honda Certified Used Vehicles, and those Honda Care Service Contracts purchased only by the original owners.* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Use the chart as a reference for converting most standard warranty mileage limits to the extended mileage coverage. Use the chart as a reference to all service bulletins affected by the extended mileage coverage. In addition to the 5 percent mileage increase in warranty coverage, any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension > Page 8725 consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. WARRANTY MILEAGE CONVERSION NOTE: Follow normal warranty claim coding when submitting a claim. SERVICE BULLETINS AFFECTED BY EXTENDED MILEAGE COVERAGE Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8726 Odometer: Testing and Inspection Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8727 Odometer: Service and Repair Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Maintenance Minder Codes Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Maintenance Minder Codes Maintenance Minder All the maintenance items displayed in the odometer/trip meter or the multi-information display are in code. For explanation of codes and maintenance to be performed see the image above. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Maintenance Minder Codes > Page 8732 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Reset Procedure Resetting the Engine Oil Life Indicator Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see "OIL LIFE 100 % - on the odometer/ trip meter display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer - reset the maintenance minder as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Press the Sel/Reset button repeatedly the engine oil life indicator is displayed. 3. Press the Sel/Reset button for about 10 seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item code(s) will blink. 4. Press the Sel/Reset button for more than 5 seconds. The maintenance items code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to 1OO. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8736 VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8737 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8738 9. Right Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) 24. Left Side of Engine (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8739 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams 12. Oil Pressure Switch 116. EOP Sensor (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8740 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair EOP Sensor Removal/Installation EOP Sensor Removal/Installation 1. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel. 2. Disconnect the EOP sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the bracket (B), and the EOP sensor (C). 4. Install the EOP sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > EOP Sensor Removal/Installation > Page 8743 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8748 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8749 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8750 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8751 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8752 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8753 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8754 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8755 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8756 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8757 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8758 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8759 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8760 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8761 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8762 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8763 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8764 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8765 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8766 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8767 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8768 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8769 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8770 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8771 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8772 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8773 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8774 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8775 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "ON" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and oil pressure switch connector. 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the Original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) > Page 8778 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit. 4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Replace the gauge control module (tach). NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector. 8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is "OFF" indicated? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to step 10. 9. Check the oil pressure switch. Is the oil pressure switch OK? YES - Do the oil pressure test. NO - Replace the oil pressure switch. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and the oil pressure switch connector. 12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Adjustments Outside Temperature Display: Adjustments Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration Description The outside temperature sensor is located behind the center of the front bumper. The gauge control module (tach) uses measurements from this sensor to display the outside air temperature. Because of the location of the sensor, it may be affected by heat reflection from the road, engine and radiator heat or hot exhaust from surrounding traffic. These conditions can heat soak the outside air temperature sensor and cause inaccurate readings. Logic has been written into the gauge control module (tach) to help prevent abnormal or fluctuating outside air temperature indicator readings. Outside Air Temperature Indicator Logic Initial outside air temperature indication after the ignition switch is turned ON (II). - If the engine coolant temperature is 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or higher when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the outside air temperature indicated the last time the key was turned off will be displayed regardless of the current temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor. - If the engine coolant temperature is 139 degrees F (59 degrees C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the current temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor will be indicated. Update to the outside air temperature indicator while driving If the temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor is greater than the temperature on the outside air temperature indicator, the outside temperature indicator will increase by 1.8 degrees F (1 degree C) per minute after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds. It will continue to increase until the current outside air temperature is indicated. So, the first change to the outside air temperature indicator is 1 minute and 30 seconds after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). If the vehicle speed drops below 19 mph ( 30 km/h), the indicator will not update again until the vehicle speed is increased to 19 mph (30 km/h) or more for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds again. If the outside air temperature is less than the indicated temperature, the temperature will decrease 1 degree F every 1.1 seconds (1 degree C every 2 seconds) until the current outside air temperature is indicated regardless of vehicle speed. Troubleshooting If the indicator displays "-" for more than 2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature display mode, check the outside air temperature sensor, or gauge control module self-diagnosis). Calibration The outside air temperature indicator's displayed temperature can be recalibrated ± 5 degrees F (or ±3 degrees C) to meet the customer's expectations. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Select the outside air temperature display. 3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET switch until the trip meter resets, then release it. Press, and continue to hold, the switch again, and the display will scroll through temperature settings from +5 degrees F to -5 degree C (or +3 degrees C to -3 degree C) as shown. 4. When the desired correction value appears on the display, release the button, and the recalibrated outside air temperature will be displayed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 8782 Example: Incorrect value = 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Desired correction value = +2 degrees F (+1 degree C) Correct valve = 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) Desired correction value = -2 degree F (-1 degree C) Correct valve = 66 degrees F (19 degrees C) NOTE: The recalibration temperature is not the value the sensor sees. Therefore the temperature can only be adjusted ±5 degrees from the sensor. NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true temperature, remove the outside air temperature sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the sensor and a thermometer (B) in a container of ice water (C). Select the calibration mode as described above, then recalibrate the display to the true temperature. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8786 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8787 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8797 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8798 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8799 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8800 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer 06-008 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 2006 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit or ECM/PCM Cannot Be Rewritten (Supersedes 06-008, dated March 2, 2006, to update the information marked by asterisks) SYMPTOM The immobilizer system can't be rewritten after replacing the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED PROBABLE CAUSE The gauge control module (tachometer) does not contain the supporting data for immobilizer reprogramming that allows you to rewrite it. CORRECTIVE ACTION *Replace the gauge control module (tachometer) if you replace the ECM/PCM or the immobilizer-keyless control unit.* NOTE: You must transfer the odometer mileage from the old gauge control module to the new gauge control module. PARTS INFORMATION *NOTE: Because ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit replacements are rare, it is not necessary to stock the gauge control module (tach).* Gauge Control Module: TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set, T/N SOJATP2014. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damaging the vehicle when prying components. To order additional sets, call the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8806 Operation Number: 732100 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 78200-SVA-A21 H/C 8158230 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When replacing the ECM/PCM, immobilizer programming is a portion of the ECM/PCM replacement. For the complete replacement procedure, go online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select the appropriate ECM/PCM Replacement procedure. ^ When replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, you need all the customer's keys. You also need the PCM code to complete the procedure. ^ Once the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the LCD displays "----", making the ODO function unusable. The HDS holds only one ODO value at any time in its memory. ^ Get the new gauge control module before doing the rewriting procedure. 1. Install the ECM/PCM or immobilizer-keyless control unit. ^ ECM/PCM replacement: online, enter keyword ECM REPLACE, and select ECM Replacement. ^ Immobilizer-keyless control unit replacement: online, enter keyword IMMOBI, and select Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement. 2. You need the PCM code to complete the procedure. Online: ^ Click Service. ^ Click Vehicle Information. ^ Click Immobilizer Code Inquiry. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 4. Select Gauges from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu display. 5. Select Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to retrieve the ODO value. 6. Adjust the steering column upward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8807 7. Gently pull out the lower edge of the dashboard lower cover to detach the lower clips. 8. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook and pin by pulling back on the dashboard lower cover. 9. Tilt the steering column down, and extend the telescoping column to its limit. 10. Remove the screw from the bottom of the subdisplay visor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8808 11. Place your hand at the back of the switch panel, then gently pull from the driver's lower cover opening to release the clips and hook. 12. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor with a trim tool to detach the clip and release the pin. 13. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the subdisplay visor, then gently pull out the visor to release the hooks. 14. Disconnect the illumination control switch connector and the power mirror switch connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-008 > May > 06 > Computers/Controls - Cannot Rewrite PCM/ECM/Immobilizer > Page 8809 15. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module. 16. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module. 17. Install the new gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. 18. Follow the instructions on the HDS display to write the ODO value to the new gauge control module. 19. Complete the applicable HDS immobilizer programming by selecting Replace ECM/PCM, or Replace Immobilizer Receiver/Control Unit in the IMMOBI section of the HDS. NOTE: Use HDS software 2.002.006 or later. 20. Clear any stored DTCs in the body electrical section with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored 10-001 August 13, 2010 Applies To: 2006-09 Civic 2-Door - ALL SRS Indicator Is On With DTC 32-10 (Supersedes 10-001, dated February 12, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY Under PARTS INFORMATION, new P/Ns for the floor wire harness were added. SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and DTC 32-10 (open in the front passengers side airbag inflator) is stored. This problem may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE Under the front passengers seat, the SRS portion of the floor wire harness has a poor crimp in it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the SRS DTC(s) and, only if needed, replace the floor wire harness. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8815 NOTE: To make sure you order the correct floor wire harness, enter the VIN in your parts catalog search. REQUIRED MATERIALS Hondalock 2: P/N 08713-0002 (One bottle repairs about 25 vehicles.) TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Diagnose the SHS DTC: Operation Number: 723507 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8816 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician Replace the Floor Wire Harness: Operation Number: 7371B9 Flat Rate Time: 4.6 hours Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Defect Code: 06801 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and check for DTCs. If any DTCs other than 32-10 are indicated, troubleshoot them as needed. 2. Clear any DTCs. 3. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SRS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to step 4. No - This service bulletin does not apply. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). On the bottom of the front passenger's seat, disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (yellow) from the passenger's side airbag wire harness. 5. Reconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector, then connect the HDS, and clear the SRS DTC(s). 6. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SHS indicator stay on? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply. Troubleshoot the SRS DTC(s) as needed. No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. NOTE: If the customer reported that the SRS indicator was previously on, use the HDS to check the DTC history. If you find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you do not find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8817 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you begin, make sure you know the SRS component locations, and that you read and understand the SRS precautions and procedures explained in the service manual. ^ This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the topics listed below, bookmark them in the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or view them online: - Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection - Front Seat Removal/Installation - Driver's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Kick Panel Removal/Installation - Steering Joint Cover Removal/Installation - Center Console Removal/Installation - Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation - Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Carpet Replacement 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the front seats. 3. Remove the driver's and the passenger's dashboard undercovers. 4. Remove the driver's and the passenger's kick panels. 5. Remove the center console. 6. Remove the rear side trim panels. 7. Remove the rear seat-back and the rear seat cushion. 8. Remove the carpet. 9. Remove the floor wire harness, then install a new floor wire harness: ^ Refer to pages 22-50 thru 22-55 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FLOOR WIRE, then select Floor Wire Harness and USB Harness (Left/Right branch) Connector and Harness Locations (2-Door) from the list for the model you're working on. NOTE: ^ Do not bend or twist the new wire harness excessively, and make sure it is not pinched or too loose in any areas. ^ Make sure all the connectors on the new wire harness are secured. ^ Replace any damaged interior trim clips. 10. Reinstall the carpet: ^ Do not wrinkle or twist the carpet. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8818 ^ Make sure the seat harness connectors and the parking brake cables are routed correctly. ^ Push the Velcro fasteners and the clips securely into place. ^ Push the accelerator hooks securely into place, and make sure the accelerator pedal is correctly attached to the floor. 11. Reinstall the rear seat cushion: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the seat belts, then slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion as you install the seat cushion. ^ Torque the seat cushion mounting bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the rear seat-back: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the center seat belt, then guide the center seat belt over the front of the seat-back as you install the seat-back. ^ Torque the pivot bracket bolt and the seat-back mounting bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the pivot bracket hooks are secured. 13. Reinstall the rear side trim panels. Make sure the clips, the hooks, and the tabs are secured. 14. Reinstall the center console. Torque the center console mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the steering joint cover. 16. Reinstall the driver's and the passengers kick panels. Make sure the clips are secured. 17. Reinstall the driver's and the passenger 5 dashboard undercovers. Make sure the clips are secured. 18. Reinstall the front seats: ^ Apply Hondalock 2 Thread lock to the seat bolts, then reinstall the bolts, and torque them to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the floor harness connectors are securely connected to the connectors under the seats. 19. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure. 20. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that all vehicle systems and controls are working properly. 21. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and clear any DTCs that you find. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8824 NOTE: To make sure you order the correct floor wire harness, enter the VIN in your parts catalog search. REQUIRED MATERIALS Hondalock 2: P/N 08713-0002 (One bottle repairs about 25 vehicles.) TOOL INFORMATION KTC Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Diagnose the SHS DTC: Operation Number: 723507 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8825 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician Replace the Floor Wire Harness: Operation Number: 7371B9 Flat Rate Time: 4.6 hours Failed Part: P/N 32107-SVA-A32 Defect Code: 06801 Symptom Code: 03214 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and check for DTCs. If any DTCs other than 32-10 are indicated, troubleshoot them as needed. 2. Clear any DTCs. 3. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SRS indicator stay on? Yes - Go to step 4. No - This service bulletin does not apply. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). On the bottom of the front passenger's seat, disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (yellow) from the passenger's side airbag wire harness. 5. Reconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector, then connect the HDS, and clear the SRS DTC(s). 6. Disconnect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and back to ON (II). Does the SHS indicator stay on? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply. Troubleshoot the SRS DTC(s) as needed. No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. NOTE: If the customer reported that the SRS indicator was previously on, use the HDS to check the DTC history. If you find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you do not find DTC 32-10 in the DTC history, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8826 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you begin, make sure you know the SRS component locations, and that you read and understand the SRS precautions and procedures explained in the service manual. ^ This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the topics listed below, bookmark them in the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or view them online: - Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection - Front Seat Removal/Installation - Driver's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Removal / Installation - Kick Panel Removal/Installation - Steering Joint Cover Removal/Installation - Center Console Removal/Installation - Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation - Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Carpet Replacement 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the front seats. 3. Remove the driver's and the passenger's dashboard undercovers. 4. Remove the driver's and the passenger's kick panels. 5. Remove the center console. 6. Remove the rear side trim panels. 7. Remove the rear seat-back and the rear seat cushion. 8. Remove the carpet. 9. Remove the floor wire harness, then install a new floor wire harness: ^ Refer to pages 22-50 thru 22-55 of the 2006-2010 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FLOOR WIRE, then select Floor Wire Harness and USB Harness (Left/Right branch) Connector and Harness Locations (2-Door) from the list for the model you're working on. NOTE: ^ Do not bend or twist the new wire harness excessively, and make sure it is not pinched or too loose in any areas. ^ Make sure all the connectors on the new wire harness are secured. ^ Replace any damaged interior trim clips. 10. Reinstall the carpet: ^ Do not wrinkle or twist the carpet. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-001 > Aug > 10 > Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC 32-10 Stored > Page 8827 ^ Make sure the seat harness connectors and the parking brake cables are routed correctly. ^ Push the Velcro fasteners and the clips securely into place. ^ Push the accelerator hooks securely into place, and make sure the accelerator pedal is correctly attached to the floor. 11. Reinstall the rear seat cushion: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the seat belts, then slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion as you install the seat cushion. ^ Torque the seat cushion mounting bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the rear seat-back: ^ Make sure there are no kinks or twists in the center seat belt, then guide the center seat belt over the front of the seat-back as you install the seat-back. ^ Torque the pivot bracket bolt and the seat-back mounting bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the pivot bracket hooks are secured. 13. Reinstall the rear side trim panels. Make sure the clips, the hooks, and the tabs are secured. 14. Reinstall the center console. Torque the center console mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the steering joint cover. 16. Reinstall the driver's and the passengers kick panels. Make sure the clips are secured. 17. Reinstall the driver's and the passenger 5 dashboard undercovers. Make sure the clips are secured. 18. Reinstall the front seats: ^ Apply Hondalock 2 Thread lock to the seat bolts, then reinstall the bolts, and torque them to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). ^ Make sure the floor harness connectors are securely connected to the connectors under the seats. 19. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure. 20. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that all vehicle systems and controls are working properly. 21. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC, and clear any DTCs that you find. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8828 Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8829 66. Left Side of Dash 67. Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8830 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagrams 209. Gauge Control Module (Speedo) 236. Gauge Control Module (Tach) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Reminder Logic New Seat Belt Reminder Logic for '06 Models NOTE: This article applies to '06 Accords, '06 Civics, 06 Pilots, and 06 S2000s. Some '06 model Hondas come with new seat belt reminder logic that turns on the seat belt reminder light in the instrument panel if the front passenger isn't buckled up. While driving, if the OPDS detects there's someone in the front passenger's seat and the seat belt isn't buckled, the seat belt reminder light comes on and intermittently blinks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 189. Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8839 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8840 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8844 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8845 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8849 Gauges - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8850 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. - If no problem is found, go to step 3. - If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear cushion. 5. Remove the rear floor upper cross-member (A). 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B). 8. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 9. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8851 - a short in the ORN (2-door: PUR) wire to ground. - an open in the ORN (2-door: PUR) or LT GRN (2-door: ORN) wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. 12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 13. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F" with the float at F. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate "F", replace the gauge assembly. - If the gauge is OK, the test is complete. NOTE: - The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. - Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8852 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (C) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of removal. When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8856 65. In Streeing Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8857 176. Ignition Key Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8858 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 115. Under Center Console Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8862 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8863 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be continuity. ^ With the parking brake lever released, there should be no continuity. NOTE: ^ If both the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on at the same time, check the ABS first. ^ If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, check the ABS. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams 160. A/T Gear Position Indicator Light/Park Pin Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Service and Repair Speedometer Head: Service and Repair Replacement Speedometer 1. Remove the meter lower visor assembly. 2. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module (speedo) (A). 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (B) from the gauge control module (speedo). 4. Install the gauge in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Tachometer: Service and Repair Replacement Tachometer 1. Remove the subdisplay visor assembly. 2. Remove the three screws from the gauge control module (tach) (A). 3. Disconnect the 36P connector (B) from the gauge control module (tach). 4. Install the gauge in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information 09-070 October 30, 2009 Applies To: ALL Vehicles with TPMS ATEQ VT55 TPMS Update Information INTRODUCTION The software for the VT55 TPMS tool is updated periodically to add new vehicles, fix software bugs, and enhance the tool's function. You can use the ATEQ update wizard to download software and firmware to your VT55 using a PC and the Internet. It is extremely important to use the latest VT55 software to ensure that the current TPMS initialization and diagnostic procedures are used. American Honda is also introducing a new policy to ensure that VT55 tools are updated promptly. The VT55 software must now be updated within 3 days of receiving notification of an available update from an iN message or other Honda communication. If an out-of-date version is used, any TPMS replacements may not be covered under warranty. VT55 UPDATE REQUIREMENTS ^ VT55 Tool Kit (includes VT55, AC adapter, USB cable and CD): P/N AEQVT55 ^ USB Cable (this cable came with the VT55): P/N AEQVT555 ^ Internet access ^ An IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95 operating system or higher (Windows 2000 or XP is preferred). To order the VT55, or the USB connector, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN (select Service > Service Bay > Tool and Equipment > Online Catalog), or call. SOFTWARE VERSION The new software version is CH1-09. To check the VT55 version software, turn on the unit and the version number appears for about 2 seconds during the startup process. If you miss it, turn the VT55 off by pressing and holding the power switch for about 2 seconds, then turn it back on. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. INSTALLING THE VT55 UPDATE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER 1. Go online to update.ateq.com/software/webvt/update_webvt.zip Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8878 2. Depending on your Internet connection, the Connect to update screen may appear. If so, enter the login and password. Login: webvt Password: update 3. The File Download screen appears. Select Save. The Zip file will be saved to your computer. 4. After the Zip file finishes downloading, open the update - webvt.zip file by double-clicking on it. 5. The WinZip - update - webvt.zip screen appears. Double-click the WebVT55_V4_2.exe file. NOTE: If you see a Compressed (Zipped) Folders Error, contact your IT person because there is a permissions issue with your firewall. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8879 6. The WinZip Caution screen appears. Select Yes. 7. If you have a previous version of the WebVT software installed on your computer, the InstallShield Wizard gives you the option to modify, repair, or remove the software. If you do not have a previous version, go to step 8. If you have a previous software version, select Modify, then Next. After the software is modified select Finish. 8. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8880 9. The InstallShield Wizard asks you to select a destination for the VT55 files. Select Next. 10. The InstallShield Wizard asks if you want to automatically start the WebVT application when you start your computer. Select Yes. 11. The InstallShield Wizard will prompt you when WebVT is installed on your computer. Select Finish. 12. The serial emulation port driver installer screen appears. Connect your VT55, and turn it on. Select Next. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8881 13. After a few seconds, the serial emulation port driver installer prompts you when it is finished. Select Finish. 14. If you have any problems installing the VT55 update software, call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. VT55 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: ^ Some screens may list the tool as VT5O or VT55. This is OK; it will not affect updating the tool. ^ If at any time during the update an error message appears, or the VT55 is not detected, see the Standard User Guide that is on the ATEQ CD that came with the tool, or call ATEQ at 734-838-3100, and select option 2 for service. 1. Go to your desktop, and double-click the WebVT icon to launch the VT55 update software. 2. Connect the VT55 to your PC with the USB cable, then turn it on. The serial number and current software version automatically display. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8882 3. The Found New Hardware Wizard may appear. If it does, select Yes, now and every time I connect a device, then select Next. 4. The Found New Hardware Wizard prompts you to install the ATEQ R5232 Emulation software. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), then select Next. 5. The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you when the software is installed. Select Finish. 6. Select UPDATE DEVICE. Depending on your Internet connection, you may be prompted for a login and password. If you know your login and password, enter them, otherwise, contact your administrator or internet service provider for the login and password. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8883 7. If a new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to update the VT55. Select Yes. NOTE: Do not disconnect the VT55 during the update procedure, as you may permanently damage the tool. If no new software version is available, you'll see a message asking if you want to overwrite the existing software. Select No. 8. The Dealer Identification screen appears. Enter your 6-digit dealer number, then select Apply. 9. If the dealer number is valid, your dealership's name and address appears in the dealer information box. Select NEXT. If the dealership number is not valid, call the American Honda Special Tools Hotline for assistance. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - VT55 TPMS Update Information > Page 8884 10. The VT55 begins updating. When the VT55 is finished updating, you'll see a message stating the update is done. Disconnect the VT55, then select OK. 11. Let the VT55 turn off (for about 1 minute). Turn it on, and confirm that the software is updated to the software version listed under SOFTWARE VERSION. 12. If you have more than one VT55, repeat the update procedure for each unit. 13. Once all VT55s are updated, select EXIT, and store the USB cable in a safe location for future updates. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 41. Transmission Housing (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8890 39. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8895 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8896 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8897 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8898 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8899 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8901 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8902 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8903 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8904 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8905 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8906 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8907 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 Brake Lamp: Connector Views 238. Brake Light/Taillight, Left 239. Brake Light/Taillight, Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Diagram 110-7 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Exterior Lights - Circuit Diagram - Back Lights Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8933 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8934 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8935 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8936 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8937 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8938 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8939 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8940 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: Recalls Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8950 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8951 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8952 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8953 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8954 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8955 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8956 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 8957 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8962 Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8963 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8964 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8969 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8990 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8991 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8992 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8993 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8994 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8995 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8996 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Connector Views 7. High Mount Brake Light (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) (Honda Accessory) 55. High Mount Brake Light (DX, DX-G, LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8997 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-16 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8998 Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8999 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair High Mount Brake Light Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the high mount brake light. 3. For bulb type: Turn the bulb socket (B) counterclockwise to remove the bulb (C). 4. Remove the rear shelf. - 2-door - 4-door 5. Remove the high mount brake light (A). 6. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Cigarette Lighter Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams 44. Cigarette Lighter Light Connector (Option) (2-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Lights - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9007 Interior Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9008 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9013 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9014 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9015 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9016 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9017 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022 Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9027 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9028 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9029 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9036 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9037 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9038 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9039 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 189. Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9043 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9044 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Dash Lights Brightness Controller and Odometer Select/Reset Button Test/Replacement 1. Remove the subdisplay visor and disconnect the connectors. 2. Remove the two screws and the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs (B) or the dash lights brightness controller-odometer select/reset button. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9049 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9050 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9051 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9052 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9053 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9054 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9055 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9056 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9057 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9058 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9059 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9060 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9061 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9062 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9063 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9064 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9065 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9066 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9067 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9068 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9069 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9070 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9071 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9072 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9073 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9074 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9075 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9076 110. Ceiling Light Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9077 Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-5 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9078 Diagram 114-6 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9079 Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 1. Turn the ceiling light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the ceiling light (B). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the ceiling light. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals with the switch in the MIDDLE position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 (Body ground) terminals with the switch in the ON position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals, and between the No. 2 and body ground with the switch in the OFF position. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the light. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9080 Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 1. Turn the ceiling light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the ceiling light (B). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the ceiling light. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals with the switch in the MIDDLE position. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 (Body ground) terminals with the switch in the ON position. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals, and between the No. 2 and body ground with the switch in the OFF position. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the light. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9084 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9085 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 165. Fog Light Relay (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 166. Fog Light Switch (2-door) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9097 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9098 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Q, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9099 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9106 85. Middle of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9107 167. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9108 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9109 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Headlight 1. For low beam: Remove the inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 "counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9121 58. Steering Wheel (Lower Access Panel Removed) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9122 10. Horn Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9123 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. 10 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 20P connector to body ground. The horn should sound. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - MICU. - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal (B) from the cable reel (C). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the 1P connector to body ground. - If the horn sounds, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: Cable reel. - An open in the wire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9127 Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9130 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9131 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9132 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9133 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9134 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9135 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9136 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9137 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9138 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9139 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9140 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9141 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9142 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9143 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9144 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9145 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9146 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9147 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9148 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9149 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9150 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9151 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Lights Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158 Diagram 115-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159 Diagram 115-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160 Diagram 115-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9161 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the entry lights control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, Q, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9162 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations 50. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9170 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9175 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9176 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9177 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9178 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9179 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9180 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9181 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9182 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9183 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9184 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9194 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9195 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9196 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9197 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views 60. License Plate Light, Left 61. License Plate Light, Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-4 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 Diagram 110-5 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 Diagram 110-6 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9201 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair License Plate Light Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid, and remove the rear license trim. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the license plate light. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door, the 2-door is similar. 3. Release the bulb socket (B) from the lens (C) by pressing on the tabs. 4. Remove the lens from the trunk lid by pressing on the tabs. 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Map Light: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9206 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9207 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9208 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9209 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9210 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9211 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9212 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9213 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9214 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9215 Map Light: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9216 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9217 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9218 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9224 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 117. Front Individual Map Lights (4-door: DX, DX-G; LX, EX, GX, Si) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 Map Light: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-5 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 Diagram 114-6 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9236 Map Light: Testing and Inspection Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement With moonroof 1. Turn the map light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the map lights (B) and moonroof switch or navigation microphone (C). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector from the map lights and the 10P connector from the moonroof switch or navigation microphone. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light assembly. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Without moonroof 1. Turn the map light switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9237 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the map lights (B). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the map lights. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light assembly. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9238 Map Light: Service and Repair Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement With moonroof 1. Turn the map light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the map lights (B) and moonroof switch or navigation microphone (C). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector from the map lights and the 10P connector from the moonroof switch or navigation microphone. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light assembly. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Without moonroof 1. Turn the map light switch OFF. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9239 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the map lights (B). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the map lights. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light assembly. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Lights 1. Remove the inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front side marker/parking/turn signal tight. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 degrees counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Lights 1. Remove the inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front side marker/parking/turn signal tight. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 degrees counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams 165. Fog Light Relay (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9255 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9256 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Q, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9257 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9264 Entry Lights Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9267 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9268 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9269 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9270 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9271 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9272 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9273 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9274 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9275 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9276 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9277 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9278 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9279 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9280 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9281 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9282 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9283 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9284 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9285 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9286 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9287 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9288 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9289 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9290 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9291 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9292 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9293 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9294 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Lights Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9295 Diagram 115-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9296 Diagram 115-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9297 Diagram 115-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9298 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the entry lights control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, Q, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9299 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9303 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9304 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Ohm, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9305 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 41. Transmission Housing (DX, DX-G, LX, EX) (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9310 39. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9319 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9320 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9321 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9322 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9323 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9324 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9325 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9326 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: Recalls Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure Technical Service Bulletin # 07-061 Date: 080319 Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure 07-061 March 19, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Brake Pedal Position Switch May Fail (Supersedes 07-061, dated October 9, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) BACKGROUND During vehicle assembly, the steering column telescopic mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this grease could form into oil droplets that drip onto the brake pedal position switch connector. If this happens, the brake pedal position switch may fail, resulting in no brake lights, and an increased risk of a rear-end collision. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent the shift lever from moving out of Park (vehicles with A/T) or disable the auto-stop feature (Civic Hybrids). VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this campaign. Before working on a vehicle, you must verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition to these verification items, check for a punch mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some of the vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used car inventory. These vehicles must be repaired before they are sold or leased. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry. CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9336 Install a brake pedal position switch kit. PARTS INFORMATION Brake Pedal Position Switch Kit: P/N 06360-SNA-305, H/C 8827008 (Contains switch, switch attaching ring, switch connector, and switch boot.) REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Terminal Pin Tool: P/N 07JAZ-002010A, H/C 3087731 (From Terminal Pin Kit A, T/N 07JAZ-003000B, H/C 4733200) REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: P/N 4100-0002, H/C 4452165 (One roll repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 7261A2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 06360-SNA-305 H/C 8827008 Defect Code: 5EY00 Symptom Code: Q5800 Template ID: 07-061A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system or the navigation system (if equipped), then disconnect the negative cable from the 12 V battery. 2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover. 3. Remove the brake pedal position switch and its attaching ring: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9337 ^ Disconnect the switch connector. ^ Twist the switch counterclockwise 1/8 turn, then remove it. The switch will not be reused. ^ Pry the attaching ring out of the brake pedal bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver. The attaching ring will not be reused. 4. Note the terminal locations and wire colors in the switch connector. You'll need to install the terminals in the same locations in the new connector. Depending on the model, the connector will have two or four terminals. The terminal locations are shown below. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9338 5. Using the pin tool, remove the connector lock from the side of the switch connector. 6. Using the pin tool, carefully remove the terminals from the back of the connector. The connector will *not be reused. For more information about terminal replacement: ^ Refer to page 204 of the 2006-07 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TERMINAL, and select Terminal Replacement Procedures from the list.* 7. Hold the terminals with a clean shop towel while cleaning them with compressed air. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9339 8. Insert the terminals into the small end of the switch boot and out through the large end. 9. Remove the connector lock from the side of the new switch connector, then insert the terminals into their correct locations in the connector. Reinstall the connector lock. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9340 10. Pull the switch wires until the connector is in the small end of the switch boot. Using about 10 inches of electrical tape, tape the wires to the boot as shown. 11. Install the new brake pedal position switch: ^ Press a new switch attaching ring into the hole on the brake pedal bracket. * ^ Use your hand to lift up on the brake pedal, then insert the switch into the attaching ring until the* end of the switch touches the top of the brake pedal. Twist the switch clockwise 1/8 turn to lock it into position. NOTE: When you lock the switch into position, the clearance for the pedal stop bracket automatically adjusts to 0.7 mm (0.028 in.). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9341 12. Slide the switch boot over the switch, and connect the switch connector. 13. Reinstall the drivers dashboard undercover. 14. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 V battery, then enter the audio anti-theft code or the navigation system code (if equipped). 15. Make sure the brake lights work, the transmission shifts out of P (A/T models), and the auto-stop feature works (Hybrid models). 16. Center-punch a completion mark below the first character of the engine compartment VIN: ^ Slide open the FRAME NUMBER door on the center cowl cover. ^ Use a long punch to reach the VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9342 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-061 > Mar > 08 > Recall - Potential Brake Pedal Position Switch Failure > Page 9343 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > NHTSA07V402000 > Aug > 07 > Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V402000: Brake Light Switch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Civic 2006 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V402000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Exterior Lighting: Brake Lights: Switch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTE : 19904 SUMMARY: On certain sedan and hybrid vehicles, during assembly, the telescopic steering column mechanism may have been over-lubricated with silicone grease. Over time, some of this extra grease may drip on the brake light switch causing the switch to fail. CONSEQUENCE: Failure may result in a loss of brake lights and an increased risk that the vehicle could be struck in the rear. In addition, a failed brake light switch could prevent shifting the transmission from the "PARK" position (vehicles with an automatic transmission). REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light switch and install a protective cover over the switch free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about September 27, 2007. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q58. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9348 Idle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9349 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9350 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Exterior Lights - Component Location Index 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9354 208. Combination Light Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9355 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9356 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9360 124. Left B-pillar (Right Similar) 125. Left C-pillar (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9361 Door Switch: Diagrams 3. Door Switch, Driver's 4. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 5. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 6. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams 166. Fog Light Switch (2-door) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9368 85. Middle of Dash Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9369 167. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9370 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9371 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center panel. - With Audio - With Navigation 2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9375 58. Steering Wheel (Lower Access Panel Removed) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9376 10. Horn Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9377 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. 10 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 20P connector to body ground. The horn should sound. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - MICU. - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal (B) from the cable reel (C). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the 1P connector to body ground. - If the horn sounds, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: Cable reel. - An open in the wire. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Lights - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9381 Interior Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9382 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement With moonroof NOTE: The interior light switch is built into the moonroof switch, and it switches the front individual map lights between the OFF and DOOR positions. 1. Remove the front individual map lights. 2. Disconnect the moonroof switch 10P connector (A) and map light 3P connector (B). 3. Remove the moonroof switch (C). 4. At the moonroof switch 10P connector, check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals. - There should be continuity when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position. - There should be no continuity when the interior light switch is in the OFF position. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. 6. Install the switch and light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9390 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9391 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9392 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9393 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9394 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9395 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9396 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9397 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9398 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9399 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9400 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9401 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9402 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9403 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9404 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9405 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9406 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9407 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9408 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9409 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 Tail Lamp: Connector Views 86. Taillight, Left Inner (4-door) 87. Taillight, Right Inner (4-door) 238. Brake Light/Taillight, Left Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 239. Brake Light/Taillight, Right Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-4 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9420 Diagram 110-5 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9421 Diagram 110-6 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Taillight Replacement Tail Lamp: Service and Repair Taillight Replacement Taillight Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B). 3. Turn the bulb sockets 45 degrees counterclockwise to remove the bulbs. 4. Remove the nuts and screws, then remove the taillight. 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. 2-door 1. Remove the rear bumper. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Taillight Replacement > Page 9424 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B). 3. Turn the bulb sockets 45 degrees counterclockwise to re move the bulbs. 4. Remove the nuts and screws, then remove the taillight. 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Taillight Replacement > Page 9425 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair Inner Taillight Replacement Inner Taillight Replacement 4-door 1. Open the trunk lid, and remove the rear license trim. 2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the inner taillight(B). 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 degrees counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Remove the nuts, then remove the taillight. 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trunk Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9430 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9431 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9432 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9433 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9434 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9435 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9436 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9437 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9438 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9439 Trunk Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9440 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9444 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9445 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9446 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9447 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9448 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9449 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9451 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9452 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9453 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9454 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 89. Trunk Light Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 Trunk Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-7 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9460 Trunk Lamp: Testing and Inspection Trunk Light Test/Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Carefully pry out the trunk light (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 (+) and No. 2 (-) terminals. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the trunk light assembly. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9461 Trunk Lamp: Service and Repair Trunk Light Test/Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Carefully pry out the trunk light (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 (+) and No. 2 (-) terminals. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the trunk light assembly. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Exterior Lights - Component Location Index 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9466 208. Combination Light Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9467 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9468 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Lights 1. Remove the inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front side marker/parking/turn signal tight. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 degrees counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9479 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection MICU Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9480 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, P, Ohm, R, S, and T. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9481 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9489 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9490 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9491 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9492 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9493 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9494 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9495 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9496 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9497 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9498 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9499 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9500 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9501 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9502 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9503 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9504 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9505 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9506 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9507 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9508 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9509 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9510 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9511 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9512 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9513 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9514 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9515 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9516 Vanity Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-0 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9517 Diagram 114-1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9518 Diagram 114-2 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9519 Diagram 114-3 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9520 Diagram 114-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9526 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9527 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9531 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9536 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9537 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9542 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9543 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9544 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9545 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Power Window Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Resetting the Power Window Control Unit With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN Function Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit - Window run channel replacement or repair - while the power window timer is ON. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat step 4 - 7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Does AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN work? YES - Go back to step 1 (the Auto function has not been cleared, try again). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window control unit is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions. If the window still does network in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: See: Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Testing and Inspection/Master Switch Input Test 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9548 Power Window Control Module: Programming and Relearning Power Window Control Unit Reset Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Window run channel replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit while the power window timer is ON. - Power window master switch replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O). 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. If they do not, go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9552 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9553 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Power Mirrors - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9558 Rear Window Defogger - Componnent Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9562 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9563 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9564 126. Driver's Door (2-door) 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9565 134. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) (2-door Similar) 135. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9566 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 194. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's 195. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9567 196. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9568 249. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9571 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9572 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9573 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the master switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9574 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9575 5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. 2-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9576 2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9577 5. Reconnect the 16P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9578 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9579 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9582 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9583 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9584 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9585 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9591 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9592 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9593 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9594 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Power Window Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Resetting the Power Window Control Unit With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN Function Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit - Window run channel replacement or repair - while the power window timer is ON. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat step 4 - 7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Does AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN work? YES - Go back to step 1 (the Auto function has not been cleared, try again). NO - Go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window control unit is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions. If the window still does network in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: See: Power Window Switch/Testing and Inspection/Master Switch Input Test 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9597 Power Window Control Module: Programming and Relearning Power Window Control Unit Reset Resetting the driver's power window is required when any of the following have occurred: - Power window regulator replacement or repair - Window run channel replacement or repair - Power window motor replacement or repair - Driver's door glass replacement or repair - Power is removed from the power window control unit while the power window timer is ON. - Power window master switch replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O). 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. If they do not, go to step 11. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, refer to the master switch input test: - 4-door - 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations 75. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9602 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9603 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams 178. Power Window Motor, Driver's 179. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 79. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9607 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams 180. Power Window Motor, Left Rear (4-door) 181. Power Window Motor, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Part 1 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9611 170. Moonroof Cut Relay And Power Window Cut Relay (Canada: A/T) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9612 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof, And Seat Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9616 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9617 Power Windows - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9618 126. Driver's Door (2-door) 127. Driver's Door (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9619 134. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) (2-door Similar) 135. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9620 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 194. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's 195. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9621 196. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9622 249. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9625 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9626 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9627 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the master switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9628 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9629 5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. 2-door with AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN function NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door panel. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9630 2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the above input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. 4. With the master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9631 5. Reconnect the 16P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. 6. Reset the power window control unit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9632 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9633 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Carefully pry out the master switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B) from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9636 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 2-door Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9637 1. Remove the power window master switch, and disconnect the 16P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch (With AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN) The driver's switch is combined with the control unit, so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9638 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. 4-door: Remove the passenger's switch (A). 2-door: Remove the passenger's switch. NOTE: The illustration shows the 4-door front passenger's door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 9639 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 7 (or No. 8) terminal. The switch light should come on. 4. If the continuity or switch light tests is not as specified, remove the screws and replace the switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door Back Window Glass: Service and Repair 2-Door Rear Window Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with a piano wire. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - Rear shelf - Rear shelf extension - Quarter pillar trim 2. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A) from the window antenna terminal cover base (B), and disconnect the window antenna connector (C). 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors (D). 4. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. 5. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 6. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9645 7. Remove the lower rubber dam (A) from the lower edge of the rear window (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a utility knife. 8. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window. 9. Carefully remove the rear window. 10. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.O8 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fasteners from the body. 11. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 12. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9646 13. Attach the window antenna terminal cover base (A) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (B) as shown. Apply primer to the inside face of the rear window as shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 14. Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the lower rubber dam adhesive tape will be attached as shown. Attach the lower rubber dam (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the rear window: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9647 - After installing the rubber dam, cut the ends (D) of the rubber dam as shown. - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 15. Attach the upper rubber dams (A), side rubber dam (B), clips (C), and fasteners (D) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (E) as shown: First attach the upper rubber dam, then attach the side rubber dams around the edge of the rear window. Be sure the top of the side rubber dam contacts with the bottom of the upper rubber dam. If necessary, cut the rubber dam. - Be sure the clips, and fasteners line up with the alignment marks (F). - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 16. Attach the fasteners (A) with adhesive tape to the rear window opening flange of the body on both sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9648 17. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Make sure both upper clips (B) are in the body holes. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 18. Remove the rear window. 19. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) between the dams (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from primed surfaces. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9649 20. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 21. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9650 22. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) between the dams (C) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 23. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 17, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 24. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 25. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 26. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9651 Back Window Glass: Service and Repair 4-Door Rear Window Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with a piano wire. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - C-pillar trim - Rear shelf 2. Disconnect the window antenna connectors (A) and rear window defogger connectors (B). 3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. 4. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9652 6. Remove the lower rubber dam (A) from the lower edge of the rear window (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a utility knife. 7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window. 8. Carefully remove the rear window. 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fasteners from the body. 10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 11. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9653 12. Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the lower rubber dam adhesive tape will be attached as shown. Attach the lower rubber dam (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the rear window: After installing the rubber dam, cut the ends (D) of the rubber dam as shown. - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9654 13. Attach the upper rubber dams (A), side rubber dams (B), clips (C) (except U.S.A. produced model), upper fasteners (D) (U.S.A. produced model), and side fasteners (E) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (F) as shown: First attach the upper rubber dam, then attach the side rubber dams around the edge of the rear window. Be sure the top of the side rubber dam contacts with the bottom of the upper rubber dam. If necessary, cut the rubber dam. - Be sure the clips, and fasteners line up with the alignment marks (G). - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 14. Attach the fasteners (A) with adhesive tape to the rear window opening flange of the body on both sides. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9655 15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Make sure both clips (B) are in the body holes (except U.S.A. produced model). Make sure both pins (C) from the upper fasteners (D) contact with the edge of the body holes (U.S.A. produced model). Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 16. Remove the rear window. 17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) between the dams (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a guide, apply the glass primer to both lower corner portions of the rear window. - Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from primed surfaces. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9656 18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 19. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 9657 20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) between the dams (C) as shown: With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions of the rear window. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 21. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days. Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Corner Window Glass: Service and Repair Front Corner Glass Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface. 1. Remove the A-pillar trim. 2. From inside the vehicle, use a knife (A) to cut through the front corner glass adhesive (B) all the way around. Apply protective tape along the edge of the entire front corner glass opening flange. 3. From outside the vehicle, pry the front corner glass clips (A) and the front corner trim clips (8), then carefully remove the glass (C) and trim (D) together. The trim has not be attached to the glass. 4. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire front corner glass opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - If any of the clips are broken, remove them from the body. 5. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 6. If the old front corner glass will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive from the front corner glass. Clean the inside face of the front corner glass and the edge of the glass with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9661 water, oil, and grease. 7. Attach the rubber dam (A) and clips (B) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the front corner glass (C) as shown. Be careful not to touch the front corner glass where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9662 8. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the front corner glass (A) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: With the printed dots (B) on the front corner glass as a guide, apply the glass primer to both lower corner portions of the front corner glass. - Do not apply body primer to the front corner glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do the adhesive may not bond to the front corner glass properly, causing a leak after the front corner glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from primed surface. 9. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the front corner glass opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. - Mask off the dashboard before painting the flange. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9663 10. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) as shown. 11. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the front comer glass (B) as shown: With the printed dots (C) on the front corner glass as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions of the front corner glass. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9664 12. Set the front corner glass (A) to the front corner trim (B) quickly. Be careful not to touch the front corner glass where adhesive will be spread. 13. Use a suction cup to hold the front corner glass (A) over the opening while holding the front corner trim (B) by the other hand, align the clips, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the front corner glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 14. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the front corner glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 15. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the front corner glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas and let the front corner glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after front corner glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 16. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9670 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9671 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9672 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9673 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Remove the door sash outer trim. 3. Starting at the rear, slowly pull up the door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Release the front portion of the glass outer molding (A) from the power mirror (B). 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 9676 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A). 4. Slide the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) forward. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 9677 5. Twist the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) to pull the rear hook (B) out from the inside of the door, then remove the weatherstrip. 6. Push the clip portions of new front door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Glass Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear shelf - Rear shelf extension - Rear side trim panel, as needed - Front seat belt upper anchor - Quarter pillar trim 2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body, and along the edge of the headliner. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the front seal with a utility knife. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9681 4. Carefully cut through the adhesive (A) at the rear corner portion of the quarter glass (B) with a utility knife. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (C) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the quarter glass as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive around the entire quarter glass: If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding (D). - If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter glass, molding, and clips (E) as an assembly. - If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step 11). 5. Carefully remove the quarter glass. 6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the clips and fastener from the body. 7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 8. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, any broken clips, and the fastener from the glass. Clean the inside face and the edge of the glass with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease. 9. Set the quarter glass in the opening. Make an alignment mark (A) to the quarter glass with a grease pencil as shown where the clip will be installed. 10. Remove the quarter glass. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9682 11. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light coat of primer, then apply butyl tape (A) to the molding (B) as shown. Attach the clip (C) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the quarter glass(D): Be sure the clip line up with alignment mark (E) you made in step 9. - Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. - Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9683 12. Attach the front seal (A) with adhesive tape (B) onto the molding (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9684 13. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the quarter glass upright in the opening, and make alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and body with a grease pencil at the three points shown. Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. 14. Remove the quarter glass. 15. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D) as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front portion of the quarter glass. - Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9685 quarter glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from primed surfaces. 16. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 17. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9686 18. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the front seal (B) and molding (C) as shown. With the glass primer (D) you applied in step 15 on the quarter glass (E) as a guide, apply the adhesive to the upper and lower corner portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 19. Using suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (B) over the opening, align the clips or the alignment marks (C) made in step 13, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 20. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 21. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 22. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9692 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9693 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9694 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9695 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9696 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Rear door glass - Quarter glass 2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door, then pull up the front portion of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (A). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9697 4. Push the rear hook (A) out from inside of the door, then remove the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Push the clip portions of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip into place securely. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Front Door Window Regulator: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9707 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9708 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Front Door Window Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9714 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9715 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9716 Front Door Window Regulator: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9717 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9718 ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9719 PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9720 ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-014 Date: 090707 Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9721 The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Regulator: > Page 9722 Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9723 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel: - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (A), and remove the plug caps (B). 3. Pass the cables (C) and the harnesses (D) through the slits (E) in the plastic cover (F), then remove them. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9724 4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9725 5. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B) from the regulator (C). 6. Remove the bolts (D), and loosen the bolts (E), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9726 7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Do the power window control unit reset procedure. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. - Make sure the power door locks, windows, and power mirror operate properly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove the plug caps (C). 3. Pass the cable (D) and the harnesses (E) through the holes (F) and slit (G) in the plastic cover (H), then remove it. 4. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Release the glass from the holder (B), then remove it from the regulator (C), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9730 5. Remove the bolt (A) from the rear lower channel (B). Pull the glass run channel (C) away as needed, and remove the screw (D). 6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull the rear lower channel (B) forward from the quarter glass seal (C) then release the upper hook (D) from the door. Remove the rear lower channel from the rear door glass (E), then pull the channel up to remove it. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9731 7. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass run channel (B). 8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 9. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9732 10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 11. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 13. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Window Track: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9741 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9742 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Window Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9748 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9749 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9750 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9751 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel Window Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel 06-014 July 7, 2009 *Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 4-Door - ALL Japan-Produced (VIN begins with JHM) 2007-08 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2009 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMFA3...98000001 thru JHMFA3...98019119* Front Door Glass Comes Out of the Channel (Supersedes 06-014, dated September 7, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ In Applies To, the VIN ranges for the 2006-08 Civic 4-Door and the 2007-09 Civic Hybrid models were changed. ^ Under PARTS INFORMATION, the part number and Honda code for the Front Window Regulator were changed.* SYMPTOM The glass in the driver's or front passenger's door comes out of the run channel, or it binds and then stalls when you try to close the window. PROBABLE CAUSE The manufacturing tolerances are not within specification for the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the glass run channel, the door glass, and the window regulator. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin Etsu Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One tube repairs about 20 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9756 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-SNA-A11 H/C 8303257 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 08202 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the appropriate front inner door panel: ^ Refer to page 20-12 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-7 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords PANEL REM, then select Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (4-door) from the list. 2. Remove the door glass: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 3. Replace the glass run channel. Lightly coat the inside of the glass run channel with Shin Etsu silicone grease. 4. Replace the window regulator and the door glass with new parts: ^ Refer to page 20-19 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-14 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DOOR GLASS, then select Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement from the list. 5. Adjust the window to make sure the glass is pushed to the back of the door, then tighten the glass mounting bolts: ^ Refer to page 20-35 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 20-28 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 06-014 > Jul > 09 > Body - Front Door Glass Comes Out Of Run Channel > Page 9757 ^ Online, enter keywords GLASS ADJUST, then select Glass Adjustment from the list. 6. Reassemble the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. 7. Do the power window control unit reset procedure: ^ Refer to page 22-255 of the 2006-2009 Civic Service Manual or page 22-193 of the 2006-2009 Civic Hybrid Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword RESET, then select Power Window Control Unit Reset from the list. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Window Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9763 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9764 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9765 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Window Track: > 10-011 > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9766 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9767 Window Track: Testing and Inspection Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information presented here addresses three power window problems that were not originally covered in OE. SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver s or front passenger s window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn t work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you re resetting the front passenger s power window control unit, do it from the front passenger s power window switch, not the driver s power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver s or front passenger s door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit s memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the power window switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer s warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9768 ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9769 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9770 REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window s noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9771 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with a piano wire. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat. 1. Remove these items: - Windshield wiper arms: 2-door - 4-door - Cowl covers - Rearview mirror - A-pillar trim, both sides - Roof moldings 2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge of the windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a utility knife. 3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. 4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner . Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the windshield. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9775 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body and dashboard. Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive (C) around the entire windshield. 7. Carefully remove the windshield. 8. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire windshield opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the body. - Replace the dashboard seal with a new one. 9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the clean surface. 10. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the fasteners and the rubber dam from the windshield. Clean the inside face and the edge of the windshield with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9776 11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), side rubber dam (B), and clips (C) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the windshield (D) as shown: - Be sure the rubber dam and clips line up with the alignment marks (E). - Be sure the convex portion (F) of the left and right clips toward left. - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 12. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9777 13. Apply primer to the molding (A), then attach the molding upper seal (B) with adhesive tape to the inside surface of the molding as shown. 14. Attach the lower rubber dam (A) with body side adhesive tape to the body as shown. Do not peel the glass side adhesive backing. 15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 16. Remove the windshield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9778 17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer around the edge of the windshield (A) between the dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Apply glass primer to the molding. - Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the windshield properly, causing a leak after the windshield is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from primed surfaces. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9779 18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 19. Cut a "V", in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9780 20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the windshield (B) between the dams (C) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 21. Pull out the glass side adhesive backing away from the lower rubber dam. 22. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the opening, align it with the alignment marks made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the windshield until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 23. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 24. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant: Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. - Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after installation. 25. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9786 93. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9787 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the washer reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals in each float position. - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9791 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9792 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9796 197. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9797 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9798 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9802 93. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9803 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the washer reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals in each float position. - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Tube Replacement 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tubes. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer operation. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index 175. Behind Right Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9810 99. Windshield Washer Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9811 Windshield Washer Motor: Testing and Inspection Washer Motor Test 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer motor (B). 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 terminal and ground the No. 2 terminal of the washer motor. The motor should run. - If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, replace it. - If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor outlet. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Reservoir Replacement 1. Remove the right inner fender. - 2-door - 4-door 2. Disconnect the 2P connector(s) (A) from the windshield washer motor (B) and the washer fluid level switch. 3. Disconnect the windshield washer tube (C). 4. Remove the bolts (A) and the clip (B), then remove the washer reservoir. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9815 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers - Component Location Index Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9819 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9820 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment Wiper arms stop position 1. When the wiper arms stop at the automatic stop position, confirm that they are at the standard position. 2-door a: Position at about 1.1 in. (29 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A) b: Position at about 4.1 in. (106 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A) 4-door a: Position at about 0.9 in. (23 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A) b: Position at about 3.8 in. (96 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A) Washer nozzle position 2. When you turn on the washers, confirm 50% or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles. 2-door c: Position at about 11.8 in. (302 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield d: Position at about 11.8 in. (302 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield e: Position at about 9.8 in. (250 mm) from the windshield center line (C) 4-door c: Position at about 7.6 in. (192 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield d: Position at about 7.6 in. (192 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield e: Position at about 9.8 in. (250 mm) from the windshield center line (C) Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade Replacement 4-door 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windshield, raising the driver's side first, then the passenger's side. 2. Remove the cover (A), by squeezing the two tabs and pulling it straight out. 3. Press and hold the tab (B) and slide the wiper blade (C) toward the tabs until it releases from the wiper arm(D). 4. Find the side of the blade labeled "LOCK" (A), then pull back the end of the blade and slide out the old rubber(B). 5. Install a new rubber in the reverse order of removal. 6. Install the wiper blades onto the windshield wiper arms in the reverse order of removal. 7. Test by turning on the wipers. If the blades slip, turn off the wipers and seat the attachments more firmly. 2-door 1. Pull up the wiper arms from the windshield. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9827 2. Push the tab (A) and remove the wiper blade (B) from the wiper arm (C). 3. Remove the stopper (A), then pull and remove the old rubber (B). 4. Install a new rubber in the reverse order of removal. 5. Install the wiper blades onto the windshield wiper arms in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test by turning on the wipers. If the blades slip, turn off the wipers and seat the attachments more firmly. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off 07-071 September 24, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Windshield Wipers Intermittently Do Not Park or Turn Off (Supersedes 07-071, dated June 5, 2009; see REVISION SUMMARY) REVISION SUMMARY Most sections were revised extensively. American Honda recommends that you review the entire service bulletin. SYMPTOM When the windshield wipers are turned off, they intermittently do not park at the correct location at the bottom of the windshield, or they continue to run. The symptom is usually more noticeable in colder weather; however, it is difficult to reproduce. If you have a vehicle that reportedly has this symptom, replace the windshield wiper motor cover plate. PROBABLE CAUSE The windshield wiper motor cover plate is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the windshield wiper motor cover plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9836 PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Cover Plate: Civic, Civic GX, Civic Hybrid P/N 76505-SNA-305 CR-V P/N 76505-SWA-305 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 7401C9 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the item listed below, bookmark it in the appropriate service manual, or view it online. ^ Wiper Motor Replacement. 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, and remove the wiper linkage assembly (Civic; six bolts, CR-V; four bolts). Then remove the wiper motor. 5. Remove the four screws from the cover plate. 6. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, partially pry up the cover, using the connector for leverage. Then partially pry up the opposite side using the screw boss for leverage. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the motor gear case. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9837 7. Pull the cover straight off the motor case. NOTE: Be careful not to contaminate the internal coupler and gears butyl sealer, grease, or other debris. 8. Using some grease from the original cover plate or the motor gear case, grease the new cover plate at the three locations shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9838 9. Install the cover plate onto the motor with the internal coupler terminals aligned. Make sure the new cover plate boss is about 180 degrees out of phase from the spur gear boss. 10. Install the four screws, and tighten them in a cross pattern until all are tight. 11. Before installing the wiper motor, connect the wiper motor 5P connector to the motor connector, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Turn the wiper switch ON then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Disconnect the wiper motor 5P connector from the wiper motor. 15. Reinstall the wiper linkage assembly into the vehicle, and reconnect the wiper motor 5P connector. 16. Verify the wiper motor operation and park position before reinstalling the wiper blades. 17. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, the cowl covers, and the windshield wiper arms. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off 09-015 October 9, 2009 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 2-door - ALL Wipers Do Not Return to the Park Position When Turned Off (Supersedes 09-015, dated March 20, 2009, to revise the information marked by asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for replacing the wiper motor kit was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* SYMPTOM The windshield wipers do not return to the park position when turned off. PROBABLE CAUSE The wiper motor nut became loose allowing the linkage to slip. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new wiper motor with a new link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut; torque the new nut to a higher value than the original nut. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N 76505-SVA-A21, H/C 9186446 (Contains wiper motor, link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740100 *Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour* Failed Part: P/N 76505-SVA-A01 H/C 8067050 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Template ID: 09-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9843 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the nine bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, then remove the six bolts and the wiper linkage assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor nut, then remove the link with the joint ball seal, the dust seal, and the wiper motor. None of these removed parts will be reused. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9844 6. Before you install the new wiper motor, set it to its park position: ^ Connect the 5P connector to the motor. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Turn the wiper switch on and then off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Disconnect the 5P connector from the motor. 7. Install the new wiper motor to the linkage with the new dust seal. Install the new joint ball seal on the link. 8. Position the new link on the wiper motor shaft as shown, then install the new nut, and torque it to 25 N.m (18.4 lb-ft). 9. Install the linkage parallel to the link, with the holes in the link and the rod aligned. 10. Reinstall the wiper linkage, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9845 11. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the cowl covers, and replace any damaged clips. 13. Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn the wiper switch on and then off to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 14. Reinstall the wiper arms, and torque the wiper arm nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 15. Make sure the wiper arms are correctly adjusted. If needed, reposition the arms on their posts. 16. Reinstall the wiper arm caps. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off 07-071 September 24, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Windshield Wipers Intermittently Do Not Park or Turn Off (Supersedes 07-071, dated June 5, 2009; see REVISION SUMMARY) REVISION SUMMARY Most sections were revised extensively. American Honda recommends that you review the entire service bulletin. SYMPTOM When the windshield wipers are turned off, they intermittently do not park at the correct location at the bottom of the windshield, or they continue to run. The symptom is usually more noticeable in colder weather; however, it is difficult to reproduce. If you have a vehicle that reportedly has this symptom, replace the windshield wiper motor cover plate. PROBABLE CAUSE The windshield wiper motor cover plate is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the windshield wiper motor cover plate. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9851 PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Cover Plate: Civic, Civic GX, Civic Hybrid P/N 76505-SNA-305 CR-V P/N 76505-SWA-305 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 7401C9 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: This procedure is in an outline form that you can also use as a checklist for the repair. If you need more details on the item listed below, bookmark it in the appropriate service manual, or view it online. ^ Wiper Motor Replacement. 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, and remove the wiper linkage assembly (Civic; six bolts, CR-V; four bolts). Then remove the wiper motor. 5. Remove the four screws from the cover plate. 6. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, partially pry up the cover, using the connector for leverage. Then partially pry up the opposite side using the screw boss for leverage. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the motor gear case. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9852 7. Pull the cover straight off the motor case. NOTE: Be careful not to contaminate the internal coupler and gears butyl sealer, grease, or other debris. 8. Using some grease from the original cover plate or the motor gear case, grease the new cover plate at the three locations shown. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 07-071 > Sep > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park or Turn Off > Page 9853 9. Install the cover plate onto the motor with the internal coupler terminals aligned. Make sure the new cover plate boss is about 180 degrees out of phase from the spur gear boss. 10. Install the four screws, and tighten them in a cross pattern until all are tight. 11. Before installing the wiper motor, connect the wiper motor 5P connector to the motor connector, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Turn the wiper switch ON then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Disconnect the wiper motor 5P connector from the wiper motor. 15. Reinstall the wiper linkage assembly into the vehicle, and reconnect the wiper motor 5P connector. 16. Verify the wiper motor operation and park position before reinstalling the wiper blades. 17. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, the cowl covers, and the windshield wiper arms. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off 09-015 October 9, 2009 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 2-door - ALL Wipers Do Not Return to the Park Position When Turned Off (Supersedes 09-015, dated March 20, 2009, to revise the information marked by asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for replacing the wiper motor kit was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* SYMPTOM The windshield wipers do not return to the park position when turned off. PROBABLE CAUSE The wiper motor nut became loose allowing the linkage to slip. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new wiper motor with a new link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut; torque the new nut to a higher value than the original nut. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N 76505-SVA-A21, H/C 9186446 (Contains wiper motor, link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740100 *Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour* Failed Part: P/N 76505-SVA-A01 H/C 8067050 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Template ID: 09-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9858 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the nine bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, then remove the six bolts and the wiper linkage assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor nut, then remove the link with the joint ball seal, the dust seal, and the wiper motor. None of these removed parts will be reused. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9859 6. Before you install the new wiper motor, set it to its park position: ^ Connect the 5P connector to the motor. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Turn the wiper switch on and then off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Disconnect the 5P connector from the motor. 7. Install the new wiper motor to the linkage with the new dust seal. Install the new joint ball seal on the link. 8. Position the new link on the wiper motor shaft as shown, then install the new nut, and torque it to 25 N.m (18.4 lb-ft). 9. Install the linkage parallel to the link, with the holes in the link and the rod aligned. 10. Reinstall the wiper linkage, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9860 11. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the cowl covers, and replace any damaged clips. 13. Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn the wiper switch on and then off to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 14. Reinstall the wiper arms, and torque the wiper arm nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 15. Make sure the wiper arms are correctly adjusted. If needed, reposition the arms on their posts. 16. Reinstall the wiper arm caps. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9861 55. Under Right Side of Windshield Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9864 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9865 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9866 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9867 Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9868 How to Identify Connector Terminals How to Identify Connector Terminals Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9869 The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown is #6. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9870 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the diagram, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9871 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector, or by a capital letter (A, B, C, etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints. Except for the DLC (data link connector), disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9872 Distribution Diagram Set to get a more detailed understanding of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9873 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground (certain circuits contain a "How the Circuit Works" Diagram set). Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9874 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. To order any test equipment shown, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9875 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9876 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9877 On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9878 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9879 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9880 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9881 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9882 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9883 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9884 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9885 the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9886 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9887 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting lump of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9888 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9889 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9890 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9891 173. Windshield Wiper Motor Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9892 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Wiper Motor Test 1. Remove the wiper arms. - 4-door - 2-door NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms so that they do not touch the hood. 2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover. 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor (B). 4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 terminal and ground to the No. 2 terminal of the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low speed. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 5. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground to the No. 2 terminal of the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at high speed. If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 6. Connect an analog ohmmeter to the No. 5 and No. 2 terminals, and run the motor at low or high speed. The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse. If it dose not, replace the motor. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9893 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the windshield wiper arms (B). 2. Remove the cowl covers (C). 3. Remove the bolts and the under-cowl panel (A). 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor (B), then remove the six bolts and wiper linkage assembly (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9894 5. Make sure the mark (A) on the link (B) is aligned with the mark (C) on the windshield wiper linkage (D). 6. Remove the nut (E), and separate the link and windshield wiper linkage. 7. Remove the three bolts, and separate the windshield wiper linkage from the wiper motor (F). 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the marks of the link and the linkage to install the linkage with the original adjustment, - Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts. - Before installing the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. 9. After installation, adjust the wiper arms. 2-door 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the windshield wiper arms (B). 2. Remove the cowl covers (C). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9895 3. Remove the bolts and the under-cowl panel (A). 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor (B), then remove the six bolts and wiper linkage assembly (C). 5. Make sure the mark (A) on the link (B) is aligned with the mark (C) on the windshield wiper linkage (D). 6. Remove the nut (E), and separate the link and windshield wiper linkage. 7. Remove the three bolts, and separate the windshield wiper linkage from the wiper motor (F). 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the marks of the link and the linkage to install the linkage with the original adjustment. - Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts. - Before installing the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. 9. After installation, adjust the wiper arms. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off Wiper Motor Linkage: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off 09-015 October 9, 2009 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 2-door - ALL Wipers Do Not Return to the Park Position When Turned Off (Supersedes 09-015, dated March 20, 2009, to revise the information marked by asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for replacing the wiper motor kit was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* SYMPTOM The windshield wipers do not return to the park position when turned off. PROBABLE CAUSE The wiper motor nut became loose allowing the linkage to slip. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new wiper motor with a new link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut; torque the new nut to a higher value than the original nut. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N 76505-SVA-A21, H/C 9186446 (Contains wiper motor, link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740100 *Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour* Failed Part: P/N 76505-SVA-A01 H/C 8067050 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Template ID: 09-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9904 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the nine bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, then remove the six bolts and the wiper linkage assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor nut, then remove the link with the joint ball seal, the dust seal, and the wiper motor. None of these removed parts will be reused. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9905 6. Before you install the new wiper motor, set it to its park position: ^ Connect the 5P connector to the motor. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Turn the wiper switch on and then off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Disconnect the 5P connector from the motor. 7. Install the new wiper motor to the linkage with the new dust seal. Install the new joint ball seal on the link. 8. Position the new link on the wiper motor shaft as shown, then install the new nut, and torque it to 25 N.m (18.4 lb-ft). 9. Install the linkage parallel to the link, with the holes in the link and the rod aligned. 10. Reinstall the wiper linkage, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9906 11. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the cowl covers, and replace any damaged clips. 13. Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn the wiper switch on and then off to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 14. Reinstall the wiper arms, and torque the wiper arm nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 15. Make sure the wiper arms are correctly adjusted. If needed, reposition the arms on their posts. 16. Reinstall the wiper arm caps. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off Wiper Motor Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off 09-015 October 9, 2009 Applies To: 2006-08 Civic 2-door - ALL Wipers Do Not Return to the Park Position When Turned Off (Supersedes 09-015, dated March 20, 2009, to revise the information marked by asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for replacing the wiper motor kit was updated after the operation was reviewed and validated.* SYMPTOM The windshield wipers do not return to the park position when turned off. PROBABLE CAUSE The wiper motor nut became loose allowing the linkage to slip. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new wiper motor with a new link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut; torque the new nut to a higher value than the original nut. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N 76505-SVA-A21, H/C 9186446 (Contains wiper motor, link, dust seal, joint ball seal, and shoulder nut.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740100 *Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour* Failed Part: P/N 76505-SVA-A01 H/C 8067050 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220 Template ID: 09-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9912 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the cowl covers. 3. Remove the nine bolts and the under-cowl panel. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the wiper motor, then remove the six bolts and the wiper linkage assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor nut, then remove the link with the joint ball seal, the dust seal, and the wiper motor. None of these removed parts will be reused. Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9913 6. Before you install the new wiper motor, set it to its park position: ^ Connect the 5P connector to the motor. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Turn the wiper switch on and then off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Disconnect the 5P connector from the motor. 7. Install the new wiper motor to the linkage with the new dust seal. Install the new joint ball seal on the link. 8. Position the new link on the wiper motor shaft as shown, then install the new nut, and torque it to 25 N.m (18.4 lb-ft). 9. Install the linkage parallel to the link, with the holes in the link and the rod aligned. 10. Reinstall the wiper linkage, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 09-015 > Oct > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Won't Park When Turned Off > Page 9914 11. Reinstall the under-cowl panel, and torque its bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 12. Reinstall the cowl covers, and replace any damaged clips. 13. Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn the wiper switch on and then off to return the wiper shafts to the park position. 14. Reinstall the wiper arms, and torque the wiper arm nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 15. Make sure the wiper arms are correctly adjusted. If needed, reposition the arms on their posts. 16. Reinstall the wiper arm caps. Disclaimer Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations 63. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9918 197. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Workshop Manual (L4-1.8L (2006)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9919 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test 1. Remove the wiper/washer switch. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch